HUGO'S FRENCH SIMPLIFIED 
 
 The book comprises the following : 
 
 I. A Simple bat Complete Grammar, containing all the mlef ne- 
 cessary for speaking and writing French correctly. 
 II. French Pronunciation; a series of Easy Anecdotes, with the 
 Translation and Pronunciation of every word, and complete 
 rules on Pronunciation. 
 
 III. French Idioms; Practical Sentences, introducing all the Im- 
 
 portant Idioms and peculiarities of French construction. 
 
 IV. A Key to the Conversational Exercises in the Grammar. 
 
 296 Pages. 12mo, Cloth, $1.00 
 
 HUGO'S FRENCH VERBS SIMPLIFIED 
 
 Rules for the formation of tenses ; and complete tables for refer- 
 ence, showing at a glance the conjugation of every verb, regular 
 
 Limp Cloth, 50 cents 
 
 HUGO'S SPANISH SIMPLIFIED 
 
 This book comprises the following : 
 I. A Grammar, containing all the rules necessary for speaking 
 
 and writing Spanish correctly. 
 
 II. Spanish Reading: Made Easy, a collection of Short Stories with 
 foot-notes to each page. 
 
 III. Spanish Conversation, being practical and colloquial sentences 
 
 introducing all the important idioms. 
 
 IV. A Key to the Exercises in Grammar. 
 
 220 Pages. 12mo, Cloth, $1.00 
 
 HUGO'S SPANISH VERBS SIMPLIFIED 
 
 An exhaustive treatise, with original rules on the formation of 
 tenses, showing the easiest and quickest way of learning all Spanish 
 verbs, Regular and Irregular. With tables for reference, which show 
 at a glance the complete conjugation of every Spanish Verb. 
 Complete Lists and Tables for Reference 
 
 96 Pages. Limp Cloth, 50 cents 
 
 HUGO'S RUSSIAN GRAMMAR SIMPLIFIED 
 
 The Only Real Self Instructor 
 
 Exercises, Key and Vocabularies with the Pronunciation of 
 Every Word Exactly Imitated 
 
 The Russian is guaranteed correct, such as is used by the educa- 
 ted classes in Moscow and Petrograd. Every word has been written 
 by a Russian University man, and carefully revised by other edu- 
 cated Russians. 
 
 12mo, Cloth, $1.00 
 
 f>H 
 
HUGO'S 
 
 SPANISH 
 
 SIMPLIFIED 
 
 COMPLETE CONSISTING OF 
 I A SIMPLE BUT COMPLETE GRAMMAR 
 
 Containing all the Rules necessary for 
 Speaking and Writing Spanish correctly 
 
 The Pronunciation of Every Word Exactly Imitated 
 
 II. SPANISH READING MADE EASY 
 
 Consisting of Anecdotes and Short Stories, with about Sixty 
 
 foot-notes on each page, so that reading becomes a pleasant 
 
 recreation, even to beginners 
 
 III SPANISH CONVERSATION 
 
 Practical and Colloquial Sentences, in- 
 troducing all the important Idioms 
 
 IV A KEY to the EXERCISES in the GRAMMAR 
 
 PHILADELPHIA 
 
 DAVID McKAY, Publisher 
 
 604-8 S. Washington Square 
 

CONTENTS. 
 
 SECTION I. Grammar (with Exercises and Pronunciation). 
 II. Anecdotes (with Notes) for Reading Practice. 
 III. Idiomatic Conversation. 
 IV. Key to Exercises in Grammar. 
 
 INSTRUCTIONS TO STUDENTS. 
 
 After acquiring a general idea of the Pronunciation, learn 
 five or six lessons in the Grammar. This can best be done by 
 reading carefully several times through each rule, pronouncing the 
 new words aloud, and writing out the translation to the Exercise 
 oil that rule. Then compare your work carefully with the Key, 
 marking all errors, and afterwards reading again through the Ex- 
 amples to the rule forgotten. If necessary, translate the Exercise 
 a second or third time, and on no account attempt the Collective 
 Exercise until you can do the short Exercises correctly. 
 
 (Students who experience a difficulty in translating the Col- 
 lective Exercises may first translate them from the Key into 
 English.) 
 
 After having mastered five or six lessons in this way, a page 
 or two of the Reading matter may be advantageously translated 
 with each lesscta. This will relieve the -monotony of learning so 
 many rules, and greatly enlarge the number of words at the 
 student's command, if each page is gone through two or three 
 times. No attempt need be made to learn the words iu the 
 reading pages by heart ; they will be acquired gradually and 
 without effort. 
 
 Advanced Students will derive great benefit from writing out the 
 literal translation of these pages in English, afterwards re-trads- 
 lating without reference to the original. 
 
 The conversation pages will well repay the trouble of careful 
 study ; but 12 or 14 lessons should be learned before this section 
 * uttered. JVJ120311 
 
'RESERVATION 
 OPY ADDED 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 All Hugo's Grammars are contained in about a fourth of the usual 
 compass, because rules which are the same in English are omitted ; but 
 everything necessary for practical purposes is fully given, and clearly 
 explained. It is not assumed that the student is an expert in English 
 grammar, a mistake which most grammarians make, with the result that 
 their rules are quite incomprehensible to the average man. 
 
 Our rules are given in the order best tending to rapid progress, and 
 in such a way that the student can at' once make practical use of what he 
 has learnt. This -departure from custom will be found of special ad- 
 vantage with the Verbs, which are given in the way that shows how each 
 Tense can be most naturally formed from another previously learnt. 
 
 After the Regular Verbs have been fuliy treated, the Irregular ones 
 follow, in order of importance. 
 
 As no one should attempt a systematic study of the Irregular Verbs 
 until he has thoroughly mastered the Regular ones, we have saved space, 
 and^iraplified the students work, by only giving the Tenses that need 
 be learnt. All other Tenses are regular, or formed according to our 
 rules on the Irregular Verbs.. 
 
 The Familiar Form, which is quite useless to foreigners, is dealt 
 with in a manner which still further simplifies the Verb. In the 
 conjugation of each Tense, this form merely appears as a note, so that 
 the student has only three or four endings to learn instead of six. 
 
 The Subjunctive Mood, a grammatical nicety which few natives 
 understand properly, was dealt with in the original edition for reference 
 purposes only. We have now added a simple explanation of all the im- 
 portant rules on the use of this Mood, together with practical exercises. 
 
 The Pronunciation is given in the first twelve lessons ; but as every 
 Spanish word is pronounced according to the few simple rules on pages 
 5 to 9, the student cannot fail to pronounce any new word correctly, long 
 before he has reached Lesson 12. 
 
 Special attention is called to the remarks on varying pronunciations 
 on page 9. The Spanish Academy says that B, D, and V should be pro- 
 nounced in Spanish as in French and English, and there is no reason 
 whatever for foreigners to depart from this rule, although they will often 
 hear educated natives do so. 
 
I 
 
 Tfae Augmentative and Diminutive terminations were needlessly 
 introduced in his grammar by a pedant more than a century ago ; and 
 his idea was copied by all succeeding grammarians, until we bad the 
 courage to ignore precedent, and relegate this utterly trivial matter to 
 the Appendix. These terminations have in the past made many a student 
 discontinue the study of Spanish in despair. Yet a knowledge of them is 
 absolutely useless, because io foreigner can possibly know to which words 
 they may be added. A dictionary will always tell him this^j it is the 
 grammarian's province to teach what CANNOT be found in dictionaries. 
 
 Hugo's Spanish Grammar, originally published in 1888, was the first 
 attempt ever made to simplify that language. All previous grammars 
 dealt with the ten parts of speech in the old-fashioned stereotyped order, 
 without any attempt at simplification, condensation, or what is most 
 important of all separation of trivial detail from matters of fundamental 
 importance. An enormous number of the original edition have been 
 sold, and the numerous highly flattering testimonials received from all 
 parts of the world testify to its clearness, conciseness, and simplicity. 
 
 The principle on which the work is written was copied almost imme- 
 diately in various quarters, often without acknowledgment. In one case, 
 a well-known firm of London publishers brought out a Spanish Grammar 
 which calmly appropriated, not only the wording and order of our original 
 rules, but even our exercises and vocabulary, with hardly a word altered.* 
 
 As our original edition applied for the first time the principles of 
 Hugo's * French Simplified* to Spanish, it speedily became the standard 
 text-book on the subject ; but it bore many traces of the haste with which 
 it was written, to meet the sudden demand occasioned by the Argentine 
 Republic boom of some twenty years ago. Since then, we have used the 
 book for teaching thousands of students, and consequently learnt its weak 
 points. Guided by this extended experience, We have re-writlen the work 
 with the utmost care, correcting errors, improving the rules, and adding 
 many additional explanations ; while every word /of the Spanish has been 
 revised and re-revised by competent educated natives. 
 
 Th3 work therefore now takes a permanent stereotyped form ; and we 
 hall watch that this present improved and revised edition is not copied. 
 
 Teachers and students are hereby warned that any other book 
 purporting to be Hugo's Spanish System is nothing of the so?*/, but 
 merely an imitation of the first edition, with just enough alterations 
 to spoil the arrangement, and make the exercises laughable.* 
 
 *We may mention a very amusing instance of this. Not to copy our 
 exercises exactly, the plagiarist altered one of our sentences, ' Is your bro- 
 ther smoking ? ' to * la your sister smoking ? ' thus avoiding the charge of 
 copying Word for word, but making himself ridiculous in the process* 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 Accents, Signs of Punctua- 
 tion, etc. ... PAGE 9 
 
 Adjectives, Qualifying ... 20 
 
 Adjectives, Feminine and 
 Plural of ... 20, 21 
 
 Adjectives, Contractions 
 of 57 
 
 Adverbs ... ... ... 49 
 
 Adverbs and Adjectives, 
 Comparison of 36, 49, 72, 79 
 
 Alphabet ... ... 5 
 
 Articles, Definite, Indefi- 
 nite, and Partitive 
 
 11,12,56,58,71 
 
 Demonstrative Adjectives 
 and Pronouns ... ... 27 
 
 Familiar Form ... ... 83 
 
 Hour of the Day ... ... 53 
 
 Indefinite Adjectives and 
 Pronouns ... 56, 58 
 
 Interjections 
 
 85 
 
 Interrogative Adjectives 
 and Pronouns ... ... 30 
 
 Negations 10,14, 25, 50, 58 
 Nouns, Gender of ... 11 
 
 Nouns, Plural of 1 1, 90 
 
 Numbers, Cardinal ... 52 
 Numbers, Ordinal ... 55 
 
 Personal Pronouns 
 
 10, 13, 44, 46 to 48 
 
 Polite form of address 10,13 
 Possessive Adjectives ... 16 
 Possessive Pronouns 33, 34 
 
 Prepositions and Conjunc- 
 tions ... ... 13, 65 
 
 Pronunciation ... 6 to 9, 22, 26 
 Relative Pronouns 39, 40 
 
 Syllables, Division Of 
 words into ... ... 8 
 
 Terminations, Augmenta- 
 tative and Diminutive ... 90 
 
 "to "before an Infinitive 74,75 
 
 Use of "a" before Object 
 when a person ... 31 
 
 REGULAR VERBS 23 to 51 
 
 Participles, Present and 
 Past... ... 28,78,79 
 
 Present Tense ... 23, 24 
 
 Perfect Tense ... ... 31 
 
 Imperfect Tense ... 43 
 
 Past Definite Tense 38, 39 
 
 Future Tense ... 34, 35 
 
 Conditional Mood ... 44 
 
 Imperative Mood ... 41 
 
 Subjunctive Mood 50, 51 
 
 Subjunctive Mood, use 
 of ... ... 86 to 91 
 
 IRREGULAR VERBS 67 to 85 
 
 Verbs changing stressed 
 Vowel of Stem 63, 64, 81, 82 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs 
 
 10, 14, 17, 28, 35, 39, 41, 43, 
 50,51,73,75, 76 
 
 Reflective Verbs 59, 60, 61 
 Impersonal Verbs 70, 71 
 
 Negative and Interroga- 
 tive Forms ... 10,25,28 
 
 Passive Voice ... ... 61 
 
 Changes in Stem of 
 Regular Verbs 62, 84 
 
 Conjugation of ' tener * 
 (see Auxiliary Verbs) 
 
 * Ser ' and 4 estar,' differ- 
 ence between ... 18 
 
SPECIAL NOTE. These five preliminary pages need not be 
 learnt at first. They merely contain the Rules of Pronunciation ; 
 and as the pronunciation of each new word is given as it occurs in 
 the Rules or Exercises, THE STUDENT SHOULD AT ONCE COMMENCE 
 AT THE FIRST LESSON (page 10). Pages 5 to 9 can best be mas- 
 tered gradually, by occasional perusal. 
 
 In studying the Lessons, first read each Rule carefully, com- 
 paring with the Examples underneath. Then translate and 
 re-translate (preferably in writing) the Exercise which follows, 
 until you can translate every sentence correctly and readily. 
 
 THE SPANISH ALPHABET (for reference only); 
 
 with the names of the 29 letters. 
 (K and w only occur in words taken from other languages) 
 
 ABCCHDJEFGHI 
 
 Pron. : ah* bay thay* chay day ay eff-ay* //ay* ah-chay ee 
 
 JKLLL M N NOPQ 
 
 /fo-tah* kah ell-ay ^11-yay exnm-ay enn-ay enn-yay o* pay koo 
 
 RSTUV W X Y Z 
 
 airr-ay es-ay* tay oo vay do-blay-vay ay-kis* ee gre'ay-gah thay-tah 
 
 *If our Imitated Pronunciation is pronounced as if each syllable were 
 part of an English word, it will always be understood ; but the exact 
 Hound will be still more nearly obtained if the following instructions are 
 borne in mind : 
 
 th must be pronounced like TH in * thin,' never like TH in * they.* 
 
 H is to be pronounced gutturally. 
 
 3 is always to be pronounced like the S3 in ' missing/ never like the 
 Sin 'easy.' 
 
 a Thu Spanish a is pronounced like 'ah/ but shorter ^than in 'harm* 
 ' part/ 'cast.' We imitate it by 'ah/ because the sound is never 
 like a in * hat ' ; but the ' ah * must be pronounced short and sharp 
 
 O The Spanish o resembles the sound of o in ' not/ and even slightly 
 a** > roaches the aw in * law.' It is not so long as in the o in go." 
 t 
 
PRONUNCIATION OF THE VOWELS. 
 
 The VOWELS in Spanish are a, e, i, 0, U, y. The remaining 
 letters are CONSONANTS. 
 
 A is pronounced like all 
 E ay 
 
 I or Y ee 
 
 O o 
 
 U oo 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 AL, LA, AMAN 
 MEj DE, LE 
 MI, PEIMA, Y 
 LO, NO, SIDO 
 TU, SU, UNO 
 
 PRONOUNCED : 
 
 ahl, lah, ,ah.-mahn* 
 may, day, lay 
 mee, pree-mah, ee 
 lo, no, see-do 
 too, soo, OO-no 
 
 *The syllable that takes the stress is printed throughout in thick type." 
 
 REMARKS. Each vowel has only one sound in Spanish, which sound 
 is not quite so long and broad as the English equivalent given above. The 
 pronunciation of the vowels is also shortened, as in other languages, when 
 they occur in an unstressed word or syllable, or precede a consonant. 
 
 EMPHASIS OR STRESS IN PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 Words ending in a Consonant stress the last syllable ; words 
 ending in a Vowel stress the last syllable but one, thus : 
 
 papel baston tomar edad pluma rico golpe 
 paper stick to take age pen rich blow 
 
 pah-pel bah-ston to-mar ay-dahdf ploo-mah rree-ko goll-pay 
 
 But the Consonants (always n or s) which are merely added to 
 form the Plural do not then affect the stress, which is always the 
 same in the Plural as in the Singular, thus : 
 
 la otra pluma, las otras plumas 
 
 the other pen 
 lahf o-trah ploo-mah 
 
 the 
 lahsf 
 
 other pens 
 0-trahs ploo-mahs 
 
 mi 
 
 my 
 me 
 
 primo 
 
 cousin 
 pree-mo 
 
 lee 
 
 reads 
 lay-ay 
 
 una 
 a 
 OO-nah 
 
 hermosa 
 nice 
 air-mo-sah 
 
 novela 
 novel 
 no-vay-lah 
 
 mis 
 my 
 
 mis 
 
 primos 
 cousins 
 pree-mos 
 
 leen 
 read 
 lay-en 
 
 unas 
 some 
 OO-nahs 
 
 hermosas 
 nice 
 air-mo-sahg 
 
 novelas 
 novels 
 no-vay-lahs 
 
 t'ah ' always to be pronounced short, see previous page. 
 
PRONUNCIATION OF THE CONSONANTS. 
 
 Z is pronounced like th in MONTH or THICK, thus : 
 
 voz luz paz zapato capaz vez 
 voice light peace shoe capacious -time 
 
 voth looth pahth thah-pah-to kah-pahth veth (or vayth) 
 
 J is pronounced like the German guttural ch' (as in AUCH), or as 
 
 in the Scotch word LOCH, thus : 
 
 ojo jugar juzgar jefe bajo caja 
 eye to play to judge chief under box. 
 
 o-Ho #oo-gar #ooth-gar ^ay-fay bah-#o kah-jEfah 
 
 This sound is merely the English h, pronounced in the throat ; an<jl 
 students who experience any difficulty with the Spanish guttural are 
 advised to pronounce it like an aspirated h. 
 
 Z and J are the only two consonants pronounced quite unlike the 
 English way ; but the following points should be noted. 
 
 C before e or i is pronounced like the Spanish z ; and 
 G j,thus: 
 
 cena cinco once general giganie Coger 
 
 supper five eleven general giant to seize 
 
 thay-nah thin-ko on-thay ^ay-nay-rahl ZTe-galm-tay ko-5air 
 
 O before any other letter is like g in GO ; 
 
 QU before e or i is pronounced like the g in GO ; before any 
 
 other vowel like gw or goo ; 
 H is not pronounced at all, thus :. 
 
 gato guerra guia bablar ha hijo herir htuno 
 
 cat war guide to speak -has son to wound smoke 
 
 gab-to gairr-rah ghee-ah ah-blar ah ee-#o ay-reer oo-mo 
 (gh as in GHOST) 
 
 LL is pronounced nearly like 11 in MILLION ; 
 
 S" ni in COMPANION, thus : 
 
 calle silla liamar nino senor cuna 
 street chair to call child sir wedge 
 
 kah-1'yay see-ryah 1'yah-mar nee-n*yo say-a'yor koo-n'yah 
 
QU is pronounced like k ; 
 
 CH as iii the English CHEAP or MUCH ; 
 
 R is rolled (on the tip of the tongue) more than in English, 
 especially at the beginning of a word or syllable ; 
 
 S is always pronounced sharp, as in SEE or LAST ; never like 
 Z, as in EASY, MISER, thus : 
 
 quo quince muchacha raro casa mesa 
 that fifteen girl rare house table 
 
 kay kin-thay moo-chah-chah rrali-ro kah-sah may-sah 
 
 DIVISION OF WORDS INTO SYLLABLES. 
 
 A^already shown, words ending in a consonant stress the last syllable, 
 while words ending in a vowel stress the last syllable but one. The 
 following rules are therefore important. 
 
 RULE. 
 
 When two vowels come together, they are pronounced separately, 
 and form DISTINCT SYLLABLES ; as, 
 
 deseo, desire ; teatro, theatre (PBON. day-say-o, tay-ah-tro). 
 
 EXCEPTION. 
 
 If, however, one of the vowels is i or u, the other vowel 
 takes the stress, and the i or u is lightly pronounced in the SAME 
 SYLLABLE (i.e., with the same emission of the voice) ; as, 
 
 cuando, when ? jaula, cage ; aire, air ; viaje, voyage. 
 (PBON. koo'alin-do, /7ah'oo-lab, ah'e-ray, ve'ah-#ay) 
 
 Wheri i and u occur together, the stress is on the vowel which 
 comes last ; as, viuda, widow ; cuita, grief (ve'oo-dah, koo'ee-tah) 
 
 When the stress is not in accordance ^ith rule, an acute accent 
 is always placed in Spanish* over the emp. asized vowel ; as, 
 alii, there ; h&bil, clever (?RON. ah-fyee, ah-bil). 
 
 *Until the latter half of the nineteenth century, the stress was not marked 
 in words ending in n or s, thus nacion, jamas. But ,as n and s are the 
 two consonants added when forming the* plural in Spanish, it is now cus- 
 tomary to add the. accent (naci6n, jamas, baston, despues, etc.), to 
 show that the n or s is not merely a plural termination. 
 
 Similarly, it is no longer customary to mark the accent in words ending 
 in n or s when the stress is not on the last syllable, thus : antes, joven 
 (pronounced ahn-tace, 176- ven), and formerly writ! en antes, jdven. 
 
9 
 
 VARYING PRONUNCIATIONS. 
 
 The lisping pronunciation of z, and of c before e or i (ce=ze, Ci=zi), 
 is usual in Castile ; and as Castilian is considered the best Spanish, we 
 advise Englishmen to adopt this pronunciation in preference, thus : luz 
 (LIGHT), ' looth ' ; cinco (FIVE), thin-ko ' ; once (ELEVEN), on-tbay, 
 and so on. But in South and Central America, and in some parts of 
 Spain, it is usual to pronounce z, and c before e or i, like the English s. 
 
 Many Spaniards pronounce the final d like th in the English THIN, 
 MYTH ; and some pronounce d in the middle of a word something like th 
 in the English 4 THEN/ Thus, edad (AGE)=ay-dahth ; madre (MOTHER) 
 =mah-thray. 
 
 It is also not unusual for Spaniards to confuse the soumd of b with 
 that of v. But foreigners should pronounce the Spanish d, to, V, exactly as 
 they are pronounced in English, not making the final d too sharp and distinct 
 
 ACCENTS, SIGNS OF PUNCTUATION, ETC. 
 
 The ACUTE ACCENT ( ') is the only accent used in Spanish. It 
 indicates that the STRESS or EMPHASIS is to be laid on the vowel over 
 which it is placed ; as, medico, physician (PRON. may-de-ko). It is also 
 used to distinguish between words similarly spelt, but of different meaning: 
 te, thee ; te, tea (PRON. of both, tay) It never alters the pro- 
 nunciation of a letter. 
 
 The accent is. also used in such words as cuando (WHEN), donde 
 (WHERE), when they actually ask a question, thus : When does the boat 
 arrive ? i Cuando llega el buque ? but : Does he know when the boat 
 arrives 1 Sabe el cuando llega el buque 1 
 
 (Literally, when arrives the boat ? knows he when arrives the boat 7 
 pronounced : sab-bay el kwahn-do 1'yay-gah el boo-kay). 
 
 The NOTES or INTERROGATION and EXCLAMATION are placed at both 
 ends of the phrase, the first one being inverted : as, 
 
 I qu6 tiene el 7 what has he 7 j gracias a Dios ! thank God I 
 
 The DIARESIS () is placed over u (ii) preceded by g, to indicate 
 that the u must be pronounced ; as, agiiero, omen (PRON.; ah-goo'ay-ro). 
 
 The TILDE (~ ) is placed over n, when that letter is to be pronounced 
 like ni in union ; as, nifio, child (PRON.: nee-n'y) 
 
10 
 FIRST LESSON- 
 
 1. SINGULAR. 
 
 1st Pa-son I yo 
 
 2nd thou tli 
 
 3rd he, 61 ; she, ella 
 
 PLUEAL. 
 
 1st Person we nOSOtrOS* 
 2nd you vo&Otros* 
 3rd they ellOS* 
 
 *~ ], 7 
 
 * When these words are FEMININE, the ending OS is changed to as 
 
 FRON. yo, too, ell, ell-yah, nos-o-tros, vos-o-tros, ell-yos, etc. 
 The SECOND PERSON is only used in addressing near relations, very 
 intimate friends, children, and animals. The ordinary polite form of address 
 is usted (SINGULAR), commonly written V. or Vd., and nstedes (PLU- 
 RAL), written Vs. VV. or Vds. PRON. oos-ted, oos-tay-dace. 
 
 Usted is a contraction of vuestra merced (your honor), and the 
 Verb of which it is the subject must therefore be in the THIRD PERSON : 
 you have (siNG.)=your honor has Vd. tiene 
 (pLTJB,)=your honors have Vds. tienen 
 have you (STNG.)=has your honor ? i tiene Vd. ? etc. 
 The Second Person (i.e., the familiar form) is given throughout this book 
 for Reference only, as foreigners must always use the polite form when ad- 
 dressing any adult. The employment of the Familiar Form will be 
 explained later on. 
 
 2. PRESENT TENSE 0/to have, tener. 
 
 we (M.) have nosotros I tenemos 
 
 we (F.) nosotras f tenemos 
 
 you Vds. f 
 
 they (M.) ellos < tienen 
 
 I have yo tengo 
 you; Vd. ( 
 he has 61 \ tiene 
 she ella ( 
 
 they (F.) ellas ( 
 
 PRON. ten-go, te-ay-nay, tay-nay-mos, te-ay-nen. 
 Familiar Form : thou hast, tu tienes ; you have, vosotros teneis. 
 
 3. NOT is translated by no, which is placed BEFORE THE VERB ; as, 
 I have not, yo no tengo ; has he not ? i no tiene 61 ? 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. ellos tienen ; 2. i tengo yo ? 3. ,; no tengo yo ? 4. ella 
 no tiene ; 5. i tenemos nosotros ? 6. Vd.no tiene ; 7. i no 
 tienen ellas ? 8. i tienen Vds.? 9. nosotros no tenemos. 
 
 10. she has ; 11. have they not ? 12. have you (SING.) ? 
 13. I have not ; 14. you (PLUR.) have not ; 15. have I not ? 
 16. we have ; 17. have 'you (PLUR.) not ? 18. she has not. 
 
11 
 
 THE PLURAL OF NOUNS. 
 
 4. The PLURAL is formed by adding 
 
 S to Nouns ending in a VOWEL ; 
 
 es to Nouns ending in a CONSONAOT or y. 
 boy, muchacho ; boys, muchachoS ; train; trea ; trains, trenES ; 
 pen, pluma ; pens, plumaS ; king, rey ; kings, reyES. 
 
 If the SINGULAR ends in z, the PLURAL is formed by changing the z 
 into ces , as voice, voz , voices, voces. 
 
 PRONUNCIATION: moo-chah-cho, moo-chah-chos ; trane, tray-nace ; 
 ploo-mah, ploo-mahs ; ray'e, ray-yace ; votb, vo-thace. 
 
 THE GENDER OF NOUNS. 
 
 (Names of living beings have the same Gender as in English.) 
 
 5. Nouns ending in a, ion, d, Z, are FEMININE. All others 
 are MASCULINE. 
 
 The Gender of Nouns will only be given in the Vocabularies when not 
 In accordance with the foregoing rule. 
 
 EXERCISE II, 
 
 Form the Plural of : 1. padre, father ; 2. libro, book ; 
 t 3. nuez, nut ; 4. seJaor, gentleman ; 5. Idpiz (MASC.), 
 pencil ; 6* pluma, pen ; 7. ciudad, town ; 8. hombre, 
 
 man; 9. luz, light; 10. tia, aunt; 11. iglesia, church; 
 12. ley (FEM.), law ; 13. sombrero, hat. 
 
 PRON.: Tpah-dray ; 2lee-bro ; 3 noo'aith ; 4say-n'yor ; 6 lah-pith ; 
 6 ploo-mah ; 7 the'oo-dahd ; 8om-bray ; 9 looth : 10 tee-ah ; 11 e-glay- 
 se-ah , 12 lay-e r 3 3 som-bray-ro. 
 
 6 THE ARTICLES. 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 a, an un (M.), una (F.) [ some, any unos (M.), Unas (F.) 
 the el (M.), la (F.) I the los (M.), las (F.) 
 
 PRON.: oonn s 00-nah; el; lah(*ah' always pronounced short); 
 OO-nos ; oo-nahs ; los ; lahs. 
 
 Articles take the GENDER and NUMBER of the following NOUN , as, 
 a man, un hoxnbre ; an aunt, una tia 
 
 the man, el hombre ; the aunt, la tia ; 
 
 some men, unos hombres : some aunts, unas tias ; 
 the men, los hombres ; the aunts* las tias. 
 
12 
 
 V. The MASCULINE ARTICLE is used before a FRMTNTNE SIN- 
 GULAR NOUN commencing with a or ha, if the a or ha takes the 
 stress ; as, 
 
 the wing, el ala (fern.) r a beech, un haya (fern.) ; 
 
 but . the flour, la harina , a spider, una arafia. 
 REMARK. The Neuter Article lo, which has no plural, is only used 
 before other Parts of Speech used as JNouns, thus lo dificil, the difficult. 
 PRON,: ah-lah , ah-yah , ah-ree-nah ; ah-rah-n'yah; de-fee-thill. 
 
 EXERCISE* III. 
 
 1. a brother 1 ; 2. a sister 2 ; 3. some brothers 1 ; 4. some 
 sisters 2 ; 5. the brother ; 6. the brothers ; 7. the sister ; 
 8. the sisters ; 9. the houses 3 ; 10. the water 4 ; 11. a wing 5 ; 
 12. the beautiful 6 ; 13. a father , 14. the books ; 15. a pen ; 
 16. the pencil ; 17 the ink 7 ; 18. some pencils ; 19. a village 8 . 
 
 1 hermano ; 2 hermana , 3 casa ; 4 agua , 5 ala ; 6 hcrmoso ; 7 tinta; 
 8 aldea. PRON. 1 air-mah-no , 2 air-mah-nah 3 kah-sah ; 4 ah- 
 gwah or ah-goo'ah ; 5 ah-lah ; 6 air-mo-so ; 7 .tin-tab ; 8 ahl-day-ah^ 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 TRANSLATE : 1. Yo no tengo un libro. 2. Tiene el 
 las plumas ? 3. Nosotros tenemos una casa. 4. Yds. tienen 
 unas plumas ; nosotros tenemos unos libros. 
 
 5. You have a brother. 6. The bird 1 has two 2 wings. 
 7. You (PLURAL) have not the books. 8. Has he not the 
 ink ? 9. The mother 3 has two 2 houses. 10. I have not a 
 pen, but 4 my 5 friend 6 has some pens. 11. Has he the letter 7 ? 
 
 1 pajaro ; 2 dos ; 3 inadre , 4 pero , 5 mi ; 6 amigo ; 7 carta. 
 PRON. 1 pah-/7ah-ro ; 2 clos ; 3 mall -dray ; 4 pay-ro ; 5 me ; 
 6 ah-tnee-go ; 7 kar-tah. 
 
 READING AND PRONUNCIATION EXERCISE. 
 
 Vd. los niimeros esparioles ? Si; son los 
 Know you the numbers Spanish ? Yes ; (they) are the 
 
 sah-bay oos-ted los noo-may-ros es-pah-n'yo-lace see son los 
 
 siguientes : uno, dos, tres, cuatro, cinco, seis, siete, ocho, 
 following : one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, 
 se-ghe-en-tace oo-no dos trace koo'ah-tro thin-ko say-is se-ay-tay o-cho 
 
 nueve, diez, once, doce, trece, catorce, quince, 
 nine, ten, eleven, twelve, thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, 
 
 noo'ay-vay de-eth on-thay do-tbay tray-thay kah-tor-tbay kln-thay 
 
SECOND LESSON. 
 
 8. OF or FROM is translated by de (PRON. day) ; 
 TO or AT is translated by a (PRON. ah). 
 
 de el is contracted to del, and d el to al ; as, 
 
 of the man, del hombre , to the father, al padre 
 de and & are NOT contracted with any word but el, thus ; 
 of the houses, de las caaas ; to the men, a 16s hombres ; 
 of a pen, de una pluma , to a father, a un padre. 
 
 9. Thfcre is NO POSSESSIVE CASE in Spanish. The construction 
 
 must therefore be changed as in the following examples, 
 my friend's houses=the houses of my friend, las casas de mi amigo ; 
 the man's hat =the hat of the man, el sombrero del hombre ; 
 the boys' books =the books of the boys, los libros de los muchachos. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. of the man 1 ; 2. to a man 1 ; 3. from the church 8 ; 4. of 
 the water of the pond 3 ; 5. to a book ; 6. of the mothers ; 
 7. to the stones 4 ; 8. of some letters ; 9. from the wings of a 
 bird ; 10. to some books ; 11. of some birds ; 12. to a house; 
 13. to the book ; 14. of the ink ; 15. of the brothers ; 16. of 
 the wings of the birds ; 17. the boy's 5 book ; 18. a soldier's 6 
 horse 7 \ 19. the soldier's horses. 
 
 1 hombre ; 2 iglesia ; 3 pantano ; 4 piedra ; 5 muchacho ; 6 sold ado ; 
 7caballo. PRON. 1 om-bray ; 2 e-glay-se-ah ; 3 pahn-tah-no ; 4pe-ay- 
 drah ; 5 moo-chah-cho ; 6 sol-dah-do , 7 kah-bah-1'yo. 
 
 10. The "Pronoun which is the SUBJECT of a Spanish Verb is 
 generally omitted, if the meaning is clear without it ; as, 
 I have a pen, tengo una pluma or yo tengo una pluma , 
 have I a pen ? j tengo una pluma 1 or i tengo yo una pluma ? 
 
 It is, however, never wrong to insert the Pronoun ; and it 
 cannot be omitted when emphasized, thus : 
 
 SHE has two books, and WE have three, ella tiene dos libros, y 
 nosotros tenemos tres. 
 
 Usted cannot be omitted, as ifc stands for vuestra merced (your 
 tartt), and is therefore really a Noun. 
 
u 
 
 11. PRESENT TENSE <?/to hare, haber. 
 
 I have yo he 
 
 ou Vd. ) 
 e has 61 > ha 
 she ella ) 
 
 y 
 h 
 
 we (M.) have nosotros ) t, A%v ^, 
 
 we (P.) nosotras f nemos 
 
 you Yds. i 
 
 they (M.) ellos > han 
 
 they(r.) ellas ) 
 
 PRON.: ay, ab, ay-mos, ahn. 
 Familiar Form : them hast, tii has , you have, vosotros habeis. 
 
 12. There are two Spanish Yerbs meaning ' to have.' Tener is 
 used as a principal Verb, meaning to hold, to possess. 
 
 Haber is only used as an AUXILIAKY ; i.e., to form the 
 COMPOUND TENSES of other Verbs. It must therefore 
 precede a Past Participle. 
 
 ].i * possess ' can be substituted for l have,' tener must be employed. 
 Thus, in the Collective Exercise below, sentences 3 and 4 might be worded : 
 4 Do we not possess the hats ? ' ' Does the church possess an altar I ' 
 Therefore, tener is the verb to employ. 
 
 But in sentences 1 and 2, * we possess written,' 4 you possess not 
 seen,' makes no sense whatever. Haber must therefore be used. 
 
 The Student should carefully compare the following examples : 
 
 I have a house 
 
 (Yo) tengo una casa 
 
 They have the letter 
 
 (Ellos) tienen la carta 
 
 You have a book 
 
 Vd. tiene un libro 
 
 I have seen a house 
 (Yo) he visto una casa 
 They have written the letter 
 (Ellos) han escrito la carta 
 You have taken a book 
 Vd. ha tornado un libro 
 
 13. (A) In Compound Tensfcs, no precedes the AUXILIARY ; as, 
 He has not written the letter, (el) no ha escrito la carta. 
 (B) In Compound Tenses formed with the Present Tense of 
 haber, the Subject in questions is usually placed AFTER the Past 
 Participle, this construction being considered more elegant ; as, 
 Have you seen the house ? j Ha visto Vd. la casa ? 
 Has he not taken the nuts ? j No ha tornado el las nueces ? 
 Have the men written 1 i Han escrito los hombres ? 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. We have written 1 some letters. 2. You have not seen 2 
 the houses. 3. Have \ve not the hats 3 ? 4. Has the church 
 an altar 4 ? 5. I have seen 2 the altar 4 of the church. 6. The 
 kings have the horses. 7. Who 5 has taken 6 the in<<c ? 
 
15 
 
 8. The man lias an axe 7 9. The vessel 8 has an anchor. 
 
 10. Has the servant 11 given 10 a chair 12 to the gentleman 13 ? 
 
 11. I have not an envelope, 14 but my 15 brother has some 
 envelopes. 12. What 16 have you (PLUR.) done 17 ? 13. Have 
 you seen the king's gardens 18 ? 14. The men have some 
 horses. 15. Why 19 have you not written 1 the letters ? 
 16. A man has spoken 20 with 21 the servant. 11 17. Have we 
 not a book for 22 the woman 23 ? 18. Yes, 24 we have a book 
 and two pens. 19. We have not seen the man's house. 
 
 '20. The girls 25 have not taken 6 the pens. 21. You have 
 some letters. 22. You have not the books. 23. The girl's 25 
 brother has not written a letter to the gentleman. 13 
 
 1 escrito , 2 visto ; 3 sombrero ; 4 altar ; 5 qui&i ? 6 tornado ; 
 7 hacha ; 8 buque ; 9 ancla ; 10 dado ; 11 criado : 12 silla ; 13 caba- 
 llero ; 14 sobre ; 15 mi ; 16 qud ? 17 becho ; 18 jardin ; 19 por qu 1 
 20 hablado ; 21 con ; 22 para ; 23 mujer ; 24 si ; 25 muchacha. 
 
 PBON.: 1 es-kree-to ; 2 vis-to , 3 som-bray-ro ; 4 ahl-tar ; 
 5 ke-en ; 6 to-mah-do ; 7 ah-chah ; 8 boo-kay ; 9 ahn-klah ; 
 10 dah-do ; 11 kre-ah-do; 12 see-l'yah ; 13 kah-bah-l'yay-ro ; 
 14 so-bray ; 15 me ; 16 kay ; 17 ay-cho ; 18 JiTar-deen ; 19 por kay ; 
 20 ah-blah-do; 21 kon ; 22 pah -rah ; 23 moo-J2air ; 24 see; 
 25 moo-chah-chab. 
 
 READING AND PRONUNCIATION EXERCISE. 
 
 Los otros numeros son : dieciseis or diez y seis, dieeisiete, 
 The other numbers are . sixteen, seventeen, 
 
 los o-tros noo-may-ros son de-eth-e-say-is, de-eth-e-se-ay-tay 
 
 dieciocho, diecinueve> veinte, etc. 
 
 eighteen, nineteen, twenty, etc. 
 
 de-eth-e-o-cho de-eth-e-noo'ay-vay vay-in-tay et-thay-tay-rah 
 
 <; C6mo esta Vd. ? Muy bien, gracias. La Have 
 How are you ? Very well, thanks. key 
 
 ko-mo es-tah oos-ted moo'e be-en grah-the-ahs lab Tyah-yay 
 
 de la puerta no esta aqui. <; Quien esta hablando 
 
 door is here. Who is speaking 
 
 day lah poo'air-tah no es-tah ah-kee ke-en ee-tah ah-blahn-do 
 
 en la calle ? La cerveza no es buena. 
 in street? beer is good, 
 
 en lah kah-1'yay lah thair-yay-thah no ess boo'ay-nah 
 
16 
 THIRD LESSON, 
 
 14. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 
 
 SINGULAR. 
 
 1st Person my mi 
 
 2nd thy tu 
 
 3rd his, her, its su 
 
 PLURAL. 
 our nuestro* 
 
 your vuestro* 
 their SU 
 
 * When the following Noun is FEMININE, the final o is changed to a ; 
 
 thus : nuestrA, vuestrA. 
 
 mi, tu, su, are ALIKE in Masculine and Feminine. 
 
 PBON. me, too, soo, noo'es-tro, noo'es-trah, etc. 
 
 15. The PLURAL of these words is formed by adding s to the 
 Singular, thus : miS, nuestroS, nuestraS, suS. 
 
 Possessive Adjectives always take the GENDER and NUMBEB of the 
 following NOUN, thus : 
 
 my house, mi casa ; my houses, mis casas ; 
 
 his, her or their pencil, su lapiz ;* his, her or their pencils, SUS lapices ; 
 our book, nuestro libro , our books, nuestros libros ; 
 
 our church, nuestra iglesia : our churches, nuestras iglesias ; 
 my brother, mi hermano ; my sisters, mis hermanas ; 
 
 his, her or their aunt, su tia ; his, her or their aunta, sus tiaa, 
 
 16. YOUR (polite form), su (singular), SUS (plural). 
 
 Foreigners cannot employ tu (thy) or vuestro (your), any more than 
 tu (thou) or vosotros (you). As all adults must be addressed as Usted 
 (=your honor), phrases like ' have you lost your hat ? ' become * has your 
 honor lost HIS hat ? ' Q Ha perdido Vd. su sombrero ?) and so on. 
 Consequently, su is used, not only for HIS, HER, THEIR, but also for YOUB, 
 the context usually showing which is meant. In conversation, su usuaUy 
 means YOUR, unless another person has just been mentioned. When it is 
 desired to make a distinction, the hat of you,' ' the books of her,' * the 
 mother of them/ etc., must be employed, thus : el sombrero de Vd., los 
 libros de ella, la madre de ellos (or ellas). 
 
 [After a Preposition, HIM is el, HER ella, and THEM ellos, ellas, 
 see paragraph 65.] 
 
 The construction u sombrero de Vd., sus libroa dt ella, u 
 madre de ellos, is also occasionally used 
 
if 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. my garden ; 2. his ink ; ' 8. her ink ; 4. their ink ; 
 5. our glass 1 ; 6. our village ; 7. my aunt 2 ; 8. my aunts 2 ; 
 9. their cat 3 ; 10. their cats 3 ; 11. our gloves 4 ; 12. his shoes 5 ; 
 13. his sisters ; 14. her sisters ; 15. their money 6 ; 16. my 
 servant ; 17. our hands 7 ; 18. his eyes 8 ; 19. her wish 9 ; 
 20. his wish 9 ; 21. their namos 10 ; 22. your pen ; 23. your 
 book ; 24. your (PLUR.) house ; 25. your (SING.) hands 7 ; 
 26. your (PLUR.) hands ; 27. lie has not broken 11 his pipe 12 ; 
 28. Have the children 13 taken your gloves 4 ? 29. Have you 
 taken your money 6 ? 
 
 1 vaso ; 2 tla ; 3 gato ; 4 guante ; 5 zapato ; 6 dinero ; 7 mano (PEM.); 
 8 ojo ; 9 deseo ; 10 nombre ; 11 roto ; 12 pipa ; 13 nino. 
 
 PEON. 1 vah-so ; 2 tee-ah ; 3 gali-to ; 4 goo'ahn-tay ; 5 tbah- 
 pah-to ; 6 de-nay-ro ; 7 mah-no ; 8 o--fo ; 9 day-say-o ; 10 nom-bray ; 
 11 rro-to ; 12 pee-pah ; 13 nee-n'yo. 
 
 17. PEESBNT TENSES of to be, estar and ser. 
 
 estar ser estar ser 
 
 I am estoy soy 
 
 we are estamos somos 
 
 PBON. es-to'e, es-tah, es-tah-mos, es-tahn ; so'e, ess, so-mos, son. 
 Familiar Form of estar : estas (sing.), estais (plur.) ; 
 ,, of ser : eres (sing.), sois (plur.). 
 
 The full conjugation is as follows : 
 
 estar ser estar ser 
 
 f art yo estoy yo soy 
 
 tbou art tu estas tu erea 
 
 he is 41 esta 61 es 
 
 be is ella esta ella es 
 
 we are nosotros estamos nosotroa somos 
 
 you are vosotros estais vosotros sois 
 
 tbey are ellos estau ellos SOQ 
 
 (F.) ellas estan ellas son 
 
 EXERCISE II. (on ser). 
 
 1. somos ; 2. no son ; 3. & soy yo ? 4. ella no es ; 5. <{ no 
 somos nosotros ? 6. no soy ; 7. <j es Vd*? 8. Yds. no son. 
 
 9. is she ? 10. he is not ; 11. are they (FEM.) not ? 12. you 
 (PLUR.) are ; 13. are you not ? 14. are we ? 15. am I not ? 
 16. I am ; 17. she is not ; 18. I am not. 
 #.&* 
 
18 
 
 EXERCISE III. (on estar). 
 
 t. no estoy; 2. i esta el ? 3. <; no estamos nosotros? 
 4. Vd. no esta , 5. I estan ellos ? 6. <? esta Vd. ? 7. Vds. estan. 
 
 8. : \ve are ; 9. are you not ? 10. they (F.) are not ; 11. am 
 I ? 12. you (PLUR.) are ; 13. is he not? 14. she is not ; 
 15. are we ? 16 you are not ; 17, I am not ; 18. are 
 
 18. Estar is used in speaking of any TEMPORARY condition or 
 action, or of the place in which a person or thing is, thus : 
 be is at the door, esta a la puerta* ; I am here, estoy aqui 
 we are speaking, estamos hablando ; 
 they are not busy, no estan ocupados 
 
 Ser is used in speaking of a PERMANENT state or condition, 
 
 a profession or calling, or a natural characteristic. 
 am I tall ? j soy yo alto 1 he is not English, no es ingles ; 
 they are soldiers, son soldados ; 
 
 the paper is white, el papel es bianco ; 
 
 he is the manager of the firm, es el gerente* de la casa. 
 
 SPECIAL REMARKS. 
 
 Estar is of course used before any Present Participle, as the phrase 
 then expresses WHAT ONE is DOING at the time only. 
 
 I am smoking estoy fumando 
 
 PLACE is always expressed by estar, no matter how long the person 
 or thing has been in the place referred to. Estar is really almost equiva- 
 lent to 4 stand,* thus : 
 
 Madrid is (=stands)in Castile, Madrid esta en Castilla* 
 the Bank of England is in London, 
 el Banco de Inglaterra* esta en Londres* 
 
 ^ST Ser should always be employed, unless the action or condi- 
 tion spoken of must necessarily by its nature be temporary. 
 
 Property in (i.e. possession of) anything is always expressed by ser, 
 thus : this book is mine, este libro es mio. 
 
 The Passive Voice is always expressed by ser : he is loved, es amado 
 
 'PRONOUNCED : poo'air-tah, /fey-ren-tay, kah-stee-l'yah, 
 in-glab-tairr-rah, Ion-dress. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. (on ser and estar). 
 
 1. We are not workmen. 1 2. Are you ready 2 ? 3. They 
 (PEM.') are here. 3 4. Are you [a] soldier ? 5. I am not lis- 
 tening. 4 6. Who is in the street 5 ? 7, He is very 6 indus- 
 
19 
 
 trious. 7 8. I am [an*] Englishwoman. 8 9. I am not [an] 
 Italian.* 10, We are speaking 10 with his cousin. 11 11. Are 
 they nob princes 12 ? 12. We are sailors. 13 13. He is not 
 writing. 14 14. He is [a] postman. 15 15. We are not smoking. 16 
 16. Are you [a] Spaniard 17 ? 17. They are my uncles. 18 18. 
 My aunt is not here. 8 19. She is not at 19 home. 19 20. We 
 are waiting. 20 21. He is [a] professor. 21 
 
 1 obrero ; 2 listo ; 3 aqui ; 4 escuchando ; 5 calle (FEM.) ; 6 muy ; 7 
 laborioso : 8 inglesa ; 9 italiano ; 10 hablando ; 11 primo(M.), prima (F.) , 
 12 prlricipe ; 13 marinero ; 14 cscribiendo ; 15 cartero ; 16 fumando ; 17 
 espaflol ;. 18 tto ; 19 en casa ; 20 aguardando ; 21 profesor. 
 
 PRON. 1 o-bray-ro ; 2 lis-to ; 3 ah-kee ; 4 es-koo-chahn-do ; 
 6 kah-1'yay ; 6 moo'e ; 7 lah-bo-re-o-so ; 8 in-glay-sah ; 9 e-tah-le-ah- 
 no ; 10 ah-blahn-do ; 11 pree-mo ; 12 prin-the-pay ; 13 mah-re-nay- 
 ro? 14 es-kree-be-en-do ; 15 kar-tay-ro ; 16 foo-mahn-do ; 17 es-pah- 
 n'yol ; 18 tee-o ; 19 enn kali-sab ; 20 ah-goo'ar-dahn-do ; 21 pro-fess-or. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Our friends 1 are in 2 the garden, looking 3 for 3 their dogs. 4 
 2. Are you my friend's uncle ? 3. No, 6 sir, 6 I am not his 
 uncle, I am his father. 4. My friend is in 2 the street, 
 smoking a cigar. 7 5. Who is there 8 ? 6. What are you 
 (PLUB.) looking 3 for 3 ? 7. I am writing a letter to your 
 father. 8. Your children 9 are growing 10 very 11 fast. 11 9. My 
 friend's brother "is not industrious. 12 10. Have you a servant ? 
 11. Our sister is clever. 13 12. Your mother is in the garden. 
 13. My shoes are on 2 the floor, 14 near 15 the chair. 14. You 
 are not soldiers. 15. My book is in the drawer. 16 16. Is 
 your b brother b smoking a ? 17. To whom 17 have you written a 
 letter ? 18. We are not studying 18 our lessons. 19 ' 
 
 1 amigo (M.), amiga (F.) ; . 2 en ; 3 buscando ; 4 perro ; 5 no ; 6 
 senor ; 7 cigarro ; 8 alii ; 9 hi jo (*OTI); 10 crcciendo ; 11 mucho (much') ; 
 12 laborioso ; 13 babil ; 14 suelo ; 15 cerca de ; 16 caj6n ; 17 quin ; 18 
 estudiando; 19 leccion. 
 
 PRON. 1 ah-me-go ; 2 enn ; 3 booss-kahn-do ; 4 pairr-ro ; 5 no ; 
 6 say-n'yor ; 7 the-gahrr-ro ; 8 ab-l'yee ; 9 ee-Ho , 10 kray-the-en- 
 do ; 11 moo-cho ; 12 lah-bo-re-o-so ; 13 ah-bil ; 14 soo'ay-lo ; 15 thair- 
 kab day ; 16 kah-TZon ; 17 ke-en ; 18 es-too-de-ahn-do ; 19 lek-the-on. 
 
 *In the Exercises, words not to .be translated are placed between square 
 brackets [ ], and words which are required in Spanish, but not in Eng- 
 lish, between parentheses ( ). 
 
20 
 FOURTH LESSON. 
 
 QUALIFYING ADJECTIVES. 
 
 19. Adjectives agree in Gender and Number with the Noun 
 ihey qualify ; and generally FOLLOW that Noun. Thus : 
 a cheap watcb, un reloj barato; cheap watches, relojes baratoa 
 a cheap chain, una cadena barata ; cheap chains, cadenas baratas 
 an English newspaper, un pefiodico ingles 
 English newspapers, periodicos ingleses 
 French literature, la literatura francesa 
 Spanish grammars, gramaticas espanolas 
 
 . Adjectives generally PRECEDE the Noun they qualify if they 
 are, shorter than the Noun, or are used figuratively ; as, 
 
 a poor(=in poverty) writer un escritor pobre 
 
 a poor(=unfertunate) writer un pobre escritor 
 PRON. ray-lo#, bah-rah-to, kah-day-nah, pay-re -o-de-ko, in-gless, 
 le-tay-rah-too-rah frahn-thay-sah, grah-mah-te-kahs es-pah-n'yo-labs, 
 cs-kre-tor, po-bray. 
 
 Btieno (good) and malo (bad) usually precede the Noun. 
 They acfe then contracted to buen and mal, but in the MASCULINE 
 SINGULAR ONLY,- see Paragraph 94. 
 
 PRON. boo'ay-no, mah-lo, boo'en, mahl. 
 
 An. Adjective is sometimes put before the Noun for EMPHASIS : 
 a magnificent day, un magnificodia ; a splendid day, un csplendido dia 
 PRON. mahg-nee-fe-ko, es-plen-de-do, dee-ah. 
 
 The position of the Adjective before or after the Noun which it qualifies 
 is largely a matter of taste and euphony, respecting which no exact rules 
 ca be fiven. 
 
 A few Adjectires nearly always precede the Noun, see pars. 9*1, 95. 
 
 THE FEMININE OP ADJECTIVES. 
 
 80. 'If the MASCULINE ends in o, the FEMININE is formed by 
 changing the o into a ; as, 
 
 industrious, laborioso (masc.), laboriosA (fern.) 
 Busritn, ruso (masc.), rusA (tern.) 
 
21 
 
 81. If the Adjective denotes NATIONALITY,* and ends in a con- 
 sonant, the Feminine is formed by adding a to the Mas- 
 culine ; as, 
 
 Spanish, espafiol (m.), espafiola (f.); English, ing!6s(m.), inglesa (f.) 
 
 REMARK I. Adjectives denoting NATIONALITY can also be used as 
 Nouns : an- Englishman, un Ingles ; an Englishwoman, una Ingksa. 
 
 REMARK II. Most other Adjectives which can be used as Nouns de- 
 noting a person add a in the FEMININE, \vhether used as Nouns or Adjec- 
 tives. These generally end in n or or. Thus : 
 
 an idle servant, un criado holgazan (m.), una oriada holgazanA (.) 
 
 an idler, un holgazdn (m.), una holgazanA (f.) 
 
 22. Adjectives not included in the foregoing Rules DO NOT 
 CHANGE in the Feminine ; as, 
 
 an easy book, un libro f&cil ; easy books, libros faciles 
 
 an easy lesson, una leccion facil ; easy lessons, lecciones faciles 
 PBON. ol-gah-thahn, fah-thil, leck-the-on. 
 
 THE PLURAL OP ADJECTIVES. 
 
 23. The Plural of Adjectives is formed in the same way as the 
 Plural of Nounsf (see paragraph 4) ; as, 
 
 a skilful workman, un obrero hdbil : skilful workmen, obreros habiles 
 a happy girl, una muchacha feliz ; happy girls, muchachas felloes 
 a sick child, un nino enfermo ; sick children, ninos enfermos 
 
 an English manuscript, ufca escritura inglesa 
 English manuscripts, escrituras inglesas 
 PBON. fay-leeth or fay-lith, en-fair-mo, es-kre-too-rah. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 Form the Feminine Singular, and the Masculine and Feminine Plural, 
 of the following Adjectives : 
 
 1. good, bueno ; 2. dear, caro ; 3. capacious, oapaz ; 
 4. diligent, aplioado, laborioso ; 5. French, franoes ; 
 6. easy, fdoil ; 7. cheap, baratO ; 8. dry, seco ; 9. brave, 
 
 * These Adjectives do not commence with a capital letter in Spanish. 
 f The Plural is of course formed from the Singular of the 
 
valiente ; 10. cold, frio ; ll. hot, cdlido ; 12. German, 
 alemdn ; 13. difficult, difioil ; 14. English, ingles ; 
 15. heavy, pesado ; 161 Persian, persa. 
 
 17. a good horse ; 18. good horses ; 19. a bad pen ; 20. bad 
 pens ; 21. a difficult lesson ; 22. difficult lessons. 
 
 PRON. 1 boo'ay-no; 2 kah-ro ; 3kah-pahth; 4 ah-ple-kah-do ; 
 5 frahn-thess ; 6fah-thil ; 7bah-rah-to 8say-ko; 9 vah-le-ezm-tay; 
 10 free-o ; 11 kah-le-do ; 12 an-lay-malm ; 13 de-fee-tbil ; 14 in- 
 gless ; 15 pay-sah-de ,* 16 pair-sah. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1; His friends are not brave. 2. The French milliner 1 has 
 sold 2 a cheap hat. 3. Our lessons 3 are very easy. 4. Have 
 you a good servant ? 5. No, sir, my servants are not good 
 [ones]. 6. I have seen (to)* a brave soldier. 7. 1 have [some] 
 cold meat. 4 8. We are English sailors. 9. Why are you 
 (PLUR.) not studying 6 your lessons ? 10. The German girls 
 are happy 6 . 11. To whom 7 have you given your books ? 12. 
 I have given my Spanish books to my friend's cousin. 13. 
 Our lesson is very difficult. 14. How 8 are you ? 15. Very 
 well, 9 thank 10 you 10 ; but I have been 11 ill. 12 16. Your sister is 
 not ill. 12 17. Your (PLUR.) aunts are very clever. 18. 
 Her brothers are ill. 19. Your friend (FBM.) is [an] 
 Italian. 20. She is not Italian, she is Spanish. 21. What 
 have you done with my book ? 22. It is on the table. 18 
 
 1 modista ; 2 vendido ; 3 Iecci6n ; 4 came (FEM.) ; 5 estudiando ; 6. 
 feliz ; 7 quten ? 8 como ? 9 bicn ; 10 gracias (thanks) ; 11 estado ; 12 
 enfermo ; 13 mesa. * see paragraph 37. 
 
 PBON. 1 rno-dis-tah ; 2 ven-dee-do ; 3 lek-the-on ; 4 kar-nay j 
 5 es-toode-ahn-do ; 6 fay-leeth ; 7 ke-en ; 8 ko-mo ; 9 be-en ; 10 grab- 
 tbe-ahs ; 11 es-tah-do ; 12 en-fair-mo ; 13 may-sab. 
 
 SPECIAL REMARK. It must be constantly borne in mind that the 
 English and Spanish vowel sounds do not correspond exactly, and that the 
 Spanish sounds are not so long as those given in our Imitated Pronuncia- 
 tion. THEY SHOULD ALL BE PRONOUNCED SHORT (especially ' ah ' and 
 *ay ? ). To remind students of this, we give such words as Irenes, feliz, in- 
 differently as trenn-ess or trane-acc, fay-leeth, lay -lith, or fell-ith. 
 
FIFTH LESSON. 
 
 REGULAR VERBS 
 
 The INFINITIVE of every Spanish Verb ends in ar, er, or ir. 
 The part PRECEDING these terminations is called the STEM. 
 Thus : INFINITIVE : to speak hablAR STEM : habl... 
 to owe debER deb... 
 
 to live vivIR viv... 
 
 PRESENT INDICATIVE OP REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 24. The Present Indicative of Verbs ending in ar is formed by 
 adding to the STEM the following terminations : 
 
 SING. 1st Pers. 2nd Pers. 3rd Pers. PLUR. 1st Pers. 2nd Pers. 3rd Pers. 
 
 O as A AMOS ais AN 
 
 The full Conjugation of the Present Indicative is therefore as follows ; 
 
 we speak (nosotros) hablAMOS 
 you Vds. 
 they (ellos) 
 PRON. ah-blo, ah-blah, ah-blah-mos, ah-blahn. 
 Familiar Form : thou speakest, (tu) hablas ; you speak, (vosotros) bablais. 
 
 NOTE. Except in the FIRST PERSON SINGULAR, these terminations 
 are the same as those of estar (see Paragraph 17) ; but in Regular Verbs 
 the STRESS IS REGULAR (see page 6). 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. 1 buy 1 ; 2f y<jsu buy ; 3. he buys ; 4. we buy ; 5. 
 you (PLUR.) buy ; 6. they buy ; 7. he takes 2 ; 8. we find 3 ; 
 9. 1 find ; 10. they (F.) take ; 11. you find ; 12. you (PLUR.) 
 take ; 13. he smokes* ; 14, they smoke ; 15. you carry 5 ; 
 16. I carry ; 17. we send 6 ; 18. you (PLUR.) send. 
 
 1 comprar ; 2 tomar ; 3 hallar ; 4 f umar ; 5 llevar ; 6 enviar. 
 PRON. 1 kora-prar ; 2 to-mar ; 3 ah-l'yar ; 4 foo-mar : 5 1'yay- 
 var; 6en-ve-ar. 
 
 25. The Present Indicative of Verbs ending fn er is formed 
 like that of Verbs ending in ai% except that E is substituted 
 for A in the terminations. 
 
 I speak (yo) hablO 
 you speak Vd. ) -u^-un A 
 bespeaks (el) } hablA 
 
24 
 
 The full Conjugation of the Present Indicative is as follows: 
 
 I owe (jo) debO 
 
 we owe (nosotros) debEMOS 
 
 debE 
 
 PRON. day-bo, day-bay, day-bay-mos, day-ben. 
 Familiar Form : thou owest, (tu) debes ; you owe, (vosotros) debeis. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. I drink 1 ; 2. you drink ; 3. he drinks ; 4. we drink ; 5. 
 you (PLUR.) drink ; 6. they drink ; 7. he believes 2 ; 8. we 
 believe; 9. they eat 3 ; 10. I eat ; 11. you learn 4 ; 12. you (P.) 
 believe ; 13. he learns ; 14. 1 possess 5 ; 15. they possess. 
 
 1 beber ; 2 creer ; 3 comer ; 4 aprender , 5 poseer. PRON. 1 bay-bair ; 
 2 kray-air ; 3 ko-mair ; 4 ah-pren-dair ; 5 po-say-air. 
 
 26. In the Present Indicative of Verbs ending in ir, IMOS is 
 added to the Stem to form the IST PERSON PLURAL, and IS 
 to form the 2ND PERSON PLURAL. 
 
 ^- The terminations of the er and ir Verbs are otherwise 
 EXACTLY ALIKE, in every other Mood and Tense.* 
 
 The full Conjugation of the Present Indicative is as follows: 
 
 we live (nosotros) vivIMOS 
 
 I live (yo) VivO 
 'ou live Vd. 
 e lives (el) 
 
 y 
 
 you Vds. 
 they,, (ellos) 
 
 PRON. vee-vo, vee-vay, ve-vee-mos, vee-ven. 
 Pam. Form : thou livest, (tii) vivcs ; you live, (vosotros) vivls (vc-veess) 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. 1 receive 1 ; 2. you receive ; 3. he receives ; 4. we receive; 
 5. you (PLUR.) receive ; 6. they receive ; 7. he writes 2 ; 
 8. we write ; 9. you supply 3 ; 10. I supply ; 11. he divides 1 : 
 12. we divide ; 13. you (PLUR.) wrftef; 14. we supply. 
 
 1 recibir ; 2 escribir , 3 surtir , 4 dividir. 
 
 PRON. 1 rray-the-beer ; 2 es-kre-beer ; 3 soor-teer ; 4 de-ve-deer. 
 * The only (tther exception is the Plural Familiar Form of the Impera- 
 tive (sec par. 57). It is therefore the simplest plan for foreigners, who 
 should never use the Familiar Form, to consider the ir Verbs as conjugate! 
 exactly like the er Verbs throughout, except that the former take IMQ3 
 instead of EMOS in the First Person Plural of the Present Indicative. 
 
25 
 
 NOTE. -ALL REGULAR VERBS ending in AR are conjugated like 
 hablar, all in ER like deber, and all in IR like vivir, 
 Tener, haber, ser and estar are irregular. 
 
 27. QUESTIONS are formed by putting the Verb before the 
 Subject ; DO, DOES, DID, are not translated. Thus : 
 
 does he speak ?=speaks he ? i habla el ? 
 
 does his friend smoke ?=smokes his friend ? i fuma sn amig-o ? 
 
 do you owe ?=owe you ? debe Vd. ? 
 
 do the men write ?=write the men ? i escriben los hombres ? 
 
 28. NEGATIONS are formed by putting no before the Verb or 
 Auxiliary (see paragraph 13) ; DO, DOES, DID, are not 
 translated. Thus : 
 
 you do not buy=you buy not Vd. no compra 
 
 do you not buy ?=buy you not ? i no compra Vd. ? 
 
 the boy does not learn=the boy learns not el muehacho no aprende 
 
 does not the b$y learn ?=learns the boy not ? I no aprende el muohacho ? 
 
 does the train start ?=starts the train 1 i sale el tren ? 
 
 does not the boat arrive=arri ves not the boat ? i no llega el buque ? 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 1. you find, you do not find ; 2. do you find ? do you 
 not find ? 3. the men drink, the men do not drink ; 4. do 
 the men drink ? do the men not drink ? 5. we discover} 
 we do not discover ; 6. do we discover ? do we not dis- 
 cover ; 7. I receive, I do not receive ; 8. do I receive ? do 
 I not receive ? 9. the girl owes, the girl does not owe ; 10. 
 does the girl owe ? does the girl not owe ? 1. descubrir. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Do you owe [any] money to my friend ? 2. 1 do not 
 owe [any] money to your friend. 3. The Spanish servant 
 calls 1 to his dog. 4. We do not smoke cigars. 5. The indus- 
 trious pupil 2 learns his b less<ms b * easily. 3 * 6. What does 
 your mother want 4 ? 7. Do they (PEM.) not work 5 well? 
 
 'Words and phrases marked A precede in Spanish those marked &, 
 
M 
 
 8. Who livet in your aunt's hous ? 9. My ooueina 
 there, but my uncle i* in Madrid. 6 10. The officer 7 drinks a 
 delicious 8 wine. 9 11. We receive letters from your uncles 
 every 10 day. 11 12. I do not want* a stick 12 , because 13 I have 
 an umbrella. 14 13. We believe that 15 his samples 16 are in the 
 shop. 17 14. How 18 much 18 money do we owe ? 15. I believe 
 that we owe four 19 shillings 20 to the shopkeeper, 21 and three 22 
 shillings to the servant. 16. Perhaps* 3 he does not smoke. 
 17. Who lends 24 money to my friend ? 18. I often 255 lend* 
 money to your friend. 19. At- what time 26 does the train 27 
 for London 28 leave 29 ? 20. My train 27 does not start 29 yet. 80 
 
 21. I do not fear 31 the punishment 32 ; it is not very great. 8 * 
 
 22. The boys do not throw 34 stones. 23. You do not drink 
 beer. 35 24. Do you not understand 36 the lesson ? 25. I 
 understand 36 the lessons very well. 26. Do they understand 
 your explanation 37 ? 27. Where 38 do your cousins live ? 28. 
 My cousin (FEM.) lives in Madrid, and I live in London. 28 
 
 1 llamar ; 2 discipulo (M.), disclpula (F.) ; 3. facilmente ; 4. desear ; 
 5 trabajar ; 6 Madrid ; 7 oficial ; S delicioso ; 9 vino ; 10 cada (e.acli) ; 1 1 dla. 
 (MASC.) ; 12 bast6n , 13. porque ; 14 paraguas (SING, and PLUB. the 
 same) ; 15 que ; 16 muestra ; 17 tienda ; 18 cuanto? 19 cuatj-o ; 20 
 chelin ; 21 tende.ro ; 22 tres ; 23 tal vez ; 24 prestar ; 25 amenudo ; 
 26 hora ; 27 tren; 28 Londres ; 29 salir (par. 148); 30 todavia ; 
 31 temer ; 32 casiigo ; 33 grande ; 34 tirar ; $5 cerveza ; 36 comprender ; 
 37 explicaci6n ; 38 d6nde ? 
 
 PEON.* 1 ryah-mar ; 2 dis-thee-poo-lo , 3 fah-thil-men-tay ; 4 day- 
 say-ar ; 5 trah-bah-//ar ; 6 mah-drid ; 7 o-fee-the-ahl ; 8. day-lee-the- 
 O-so ; 9 vee-no ; 10 kah-dah ; 11 dee-ah ; 12 bahs-ton ; 13 por-kay ; 
 14 pah-rah-goo'ahs ; 15 kay ; 16 moo'ess-trah ; 17 te-en-dah ; 18 
 koo'ahn-to ; 19 koo'ah-tro ; 20 chay-leen ; 21 ten-day-ro ; 22 tress ; 
 23 tahl veth ; 24 pres-tar ; 25 ah-may -noo-do ; 26 o-rah ; 27 tren ; 
 28 Ion-dress ; 29 sab-leer ; 30 to-dah-vee-ab ; 31 tay-mair ; 32 kahs- 
 tee-go ; 33 grahn-day : 34 te-rar ; 35 thair-vay-thab ; 36 kom-pren- , 
 dair ; 37 ex-plc-kah-the-on ; 38 don-day. 
 
 * Respecting tbe Imitated Pronunciation, note once more tbat TH 
 must always be pronounced as in ' montb,' and S SHARP, like SS in 'hiss. 1 
 Tbe vowel sounds must not be made too long ; peseta (franc), for 
 example, which we give as ' pay-say-tah/ might almost as weJl be 
 imitated thus : ' pess-ett-ab.' 
 
2? 
 
 SIXTH LESSON. 
 
 DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES & PRONOUNS.* 
 
 29. MASC. FEM> MASC. FEM. 
 
 this este esta 
 (this) that ese esa 
 that aquel aquella 
 
 these estos estas 
 
 (these) those esos esas 
 those aquellos aquellas 
 
 PRON. es-tay, ay-say, ah-kel ; es-tah, ay-sah, ah-kell-yah; es-tos, etc. 
 
 Note that the Feminine Plural is formed by adding s to the Singular, 
 and that the Masculine Plural only differs'from the Feminine in the vowel 
 of the termination. Examples : 
 
 this man, este hombre these men, estos hombres 
 
 that pencil, ese or aquel lapiz ; those pencils, esos or aquellos l&pices 
 
 this letter, esta carta these letters, estas cartas 
 
 that house, esa or aquella casa ; those houses, esas or aquellas oasas 
 
 ; Este usually indicates something near the speaker, ese something 
 near the person addressed, and aquel something near neither. Thus : these 
 chairs (close to me), estas sillas ; those chairs (close to you), esas 
 'Sillas ; those chairs (close to neither), aquellas eillas. 
 
 pQ/ The Neuter forms for THIS (esto) and THAT. (6SO, 
 o"|tquellO) differ in the same way as the above. They have 
 no plural, and neither precede nor replace a Noun, thus : 
 * Who has done this ? i Quien ha hecho esto ? 
 
 I have not heard that. No he oido eso. 
 
 Kjuello is seldom used unless three things are referred to ; as, 
 I take this, my friend takes that, and his brother takes that 
 yo tomo esto, mi amigo toma eso, y su hermano toma aquello 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. that boy ; 2. these women ; 3. those envelopes ; 4. this 
 table ; 5. that church ; 6. those streets : 7. these horses ; 
 8. this ink ; 9. this cat ; 10. those pictures 1 ; 11. that bread 2 ;, 
 12. this town ; 13. these numbers 3 ; 14. that lady 4 ; 15. we 
 are not sure 5 of that ; 16. I do not' believe this. 
 
 1 cuadro ; 2 pan ; 3 niimero ; 4.senora ; 5. seguro. PEON. 1 koo'ah- 
 dro ; 2 pahn ; 3 noo-may-ro ; 4 say-n'yo-rah ; 5 say-goo-ro. 
 
 'ADJECTIVES are always followed by a Noun, and take the Gender 
 and Number of that Noun. PRONOUNS are used instead of a Noun, 
 and take the Gender and Number of that Noun. 
 
II 
 
 PRESENT AND PAST PARTICIPLES. 
 
 31. The Participles are formed bj adding to the STEM the 
 following terminations : 
 
 PRESENT PARTICIPLE. PAST PARTICIPLE. 
 Verbs ending in ar ...ANDO ADO 
 
 erorir ...IENDO ...IDO 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 1 speaking, hablando ; spoken, hablado ; 
 
 2 owing, debiendo ; owed, debido ; 
 
 3 living, viviendo ; lived, vivido ; 
 
 4 sending, enviando ; sent, enviado ; 
 
 5 receiving, recibiendo ; received, recibido ; 
 
 6 believing, creyendo* ; believed, creido. 
 
 An unaccented i between two vowels is always changed toy. 
 The Stress in Past Participles is invariably on the first vowel < 
 termination 
 
 PRON. 1 ah-blahn-do, ah-blah-do ; 2 day-be-en-do, day-' 
 3. vee-ve-en-do, ve-vee-do ; 4 en-ve-ahn-do, en-ve-ah-do ; 5 rray 
 be-en-do, rray-the-bee-do ; 6 kray-yen-do, kray-ee-do.* 
 
 The Participles of tener, haber, ser, and estar are regular,^ 
 1 having, teniendo, habiendo ; 2 had, tenido, habid 
 3 being, siendo, estando ; 4 been, sido, estado-^ 
 
 PBOK. 1 tay-ne-en-do, ab-be-en-do ; 2 tay-nee-do, ah-tp 
 3 se-en-do, es-tafcn-do ; 4 see-do, es-tah-do. 
 
 32. When the Subject in questions is a Noun, it is ft buaes 
 
 put last ; as, 
 
 Is the girl industrious ? i Es aplicada la muchachs 
 Is my servant waiting ? i Esta agruardando mi cfl 
 Are not the men drinking ? i No estan bebiendo lo ^pbbrtft ? 
 Is that wine good ? i Es bueno ese vino ? 
 
 (see also Paragraph 13) 
 
 This is optional, the English construction being preferable when the 
 meaning would otherwise be doubtful. Thus : Is the boy ill-treating the 
 dog ? i Esta el muchacfco maltratando el perro ? The other con* 
 ftiuotion might mean ' Is the dog ill-treating the boy V 9 
 
ft 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. smoking, smoked ; 2. owing, owed ; 3. living, lived ; 
 4. asking, 1 asked ; 5. reading 2 , read ; 6. have you not had ? 
 7. 1 am not having ; 8. being soldiers ; 9. being in the room 8 ; 
 10. not having written the letter ; 11. Have you been in 
 Spain 4 ? 12. We have not been sailors. 13. She is not 
 reading. 14. What is he drinking ? 15. Where has the man 
 been ? 16. Are not the English soldiers brave ? 17. Is not 
 this lady speaking ? 18. My uncle has not arrived. 5 
 
 1 preguntar ; 2 leer ; 3 cuarto or babitucion ; 4 Espana ; 6 llegar. 
 PBON. 1 pray-goonn-tar ; 2 lay-air ; 3 koo'ar-to, ah-be-tah-the-on ; 
 
 4 ess-palm-n'yah ; 5 1'yay-gar. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Have you not read that letter ? 2. Why is that boy not 
 studying his lessons ? 3 Those servants have drunk a bottle 1 
 of good wine, and five 2 bottles of German beer. 4. Are 
 they smoking cigars ? 5. Having read the book, I 3 shall send 
 it* to my brother. 6. When 4 does the boat 5 start ? 7. How 
 much money has the merchant 6 sent to his banker 7 ? 8. 
 Have not the pupils learned these lessons ? 9. These white 8 
 envelopes are my uncle's [translate : of my uncle]. 10. 
 Those ladies are my nieces. 9 11. The Spanish professor is 
 speaking now. 10 12. I am reading a French newspaper. 11 13. 
 We have been in the country. 12 14. These bottles 1 are not 
 full. 18 15. I have been [a] carpenter. 14 16. Have you had 
 time 15 to 16 read 16 this letter ? 17. Have you forgotten 17 this ? 
 18. Are those ladies looking for a cab 18 ? 19. Do you believe 
 that ? 20. I do not understand this. 21. Not being satisfied 1 * 
 with the book, I 20 shall sell it. 20 22. Is not that dog ugly 21 ? 
 
 1 botella ; 2 cinco ; 3 lo enviare* (see pars. 43 and 67) ; 4 cuando ? 
 
 5 buque ; 6 comerciante ; 7 banquero ; 8 bianco ; 9 sobrina ; 10 ahora ; 
 11 periddico ; 12 campo ; 13 lleno ; 14 carpintero ; 15 tiempo ; 16 para 
 leer*; 17 olvidar ; 18 cocbe ; 19 satisfecho ; 20 lo vender^ ; 21 feo. 
 
 PEON. 1 bo- tell -yah ; 2 thin-ko ; 3 lo en-ve-ah-ray ; 4 koo'ahn-do ; 
 5 boo-kay ; 6 ko-mair-the-ahn-tay ; 7 bahn-kay-ro ; 8 blahn-ko ; 9 so- 
 bree-nab ; 10 ab-o-rab ; 11 pay-re-o-de-ko ; 12 kahm-po ; 13 Pyay-no ; 
 14 kar-pin-tay-ro ; 15 te-em-po ; 17 ol-re-dar ; 18 ko*chay ; 19 sab-tig- 
 fay-cho ; 20 to ven-Hay-ray ; 21 fay-o. 
 
so 
 
 SEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 INTERROGATIVE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 
 
 33. who ? whom ? quien ? (SING.) qui^nes ? (PLUR.) 
 
 WHOSE ? I de quien ? literally : of whom ? 
 
 Who is upstairs ? ^ Quien esta arriba ? 
 
 To whom are you speaking ? ^ A quien esta Vd. hablando ? 
 
 Whose are these pens 1 i De quien son estas plumas ? 
 
 Whose hat is this ? ^ De quien es este sombrero ? 
 
 34. which or which one ? cudl ? which or which ones ? 
 
 what ? que ? (SING. & PLUR.) 
 
 which brother ? cual hermano ? which house ? cual casa ? 
 which men ? cuales hombres ? which chairs ? i cuales sillas ? 
 what dog ? i que perro ? what village ? que aldea ? 
 
 what churches ? i que iglesias ? which churches ! i cuales iglesias ? 
 what is that ? i que es eso ? 
 
 WHAT ? is translated by cudl ? cudles ? if preceding part of ser 
 
 followed by a Noun. 
 
 What is your opinion ? i Cual es su opinion (de Vd.) ? 
 
 What are his intentions ? i Cuales son sus intenciones ? 
 
 35. que is also used for WHAT A ! in exclamations ; as, 
 what a misfortune \ \ que desgracia I what a hat ! \ que sombrero ! 
 what pictures I j qu6 cuadros ! what a mistake ! \ que error ! 
 
 KoTE. If an Adjective occurs in such exclamat ions, tan (so) is generally 
 inserted for emphasis ; as, 
 
 what an ugly dog ! | quo" perro tan feo (=so ugly) ! 
 
 what beautiful horses I j que caballos tan hermosos f 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. which gentleman ? 2. which gentlemen ? 3. which 
 chair ? 4. which streets ? 5. what name ? 6. which shoe ? 
 7. what men ? 8. what a noise 1 ! 9. which train ? 10. 
 what a fog 2 ! 11. what a pity 3 ! 12. which woman ? 
 13. which days ? 14. which lamps 4 ? 15. which cup 5 ? 
 16. what hats ! 1 7. Whose is this knife 6 ? 18. Whose ink 
 
is this ? 19 % Whose friends are these ladies ? 20. Whose is 
 this ? 21. What idle 7 boys ! 22. What a great mistake 8 ! 
 23. What is the price 9 of this ? 24. What is the number 10 ? 
 
 1 ruido ; 2 niebla ; 3 lastima ; 4 lampara ; 5 taza ; 6 cuchillo ; 7 hol- 
 gazan ; 8 error ; 9 precio ; 10 numero. PRON. 1 rroo-ee-do ; 2 ne-ay-blah ; 
 3 lahss-te-mah ; 4 lahm-pah-rah ; 5 tah-thah ; 6 koo-chee-l'yo ; 
 7 oll-gah-thahn ; 8 airr-ror ; -9 pray-the-o ; 10 noo-may-ro. 
 
 36. The Past Tense can sometimes be rendered in Spanish by 
 the Perfect Tense,* thus : 
 
 PAST. PERFECT, 
 
 he spoke he has spoken ha hablado 
 
 did hq speak ? has he spoken ? i ha hablado (el) ? 
 
 he did not speak he has not spoken no ha hablado 
 did he not speak ? has he not spoken 1 i no ha hablado (el) ? 
 [NOTE CAREFULLY that the Past Participle must be preceded by part of 
 haber (to have). For instance, Vd. visto, yo escrito, etc., is an incorrect 
 construction, just as 'you seen, 1 'I written,' etc., is impossible ill English.] 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. he (has) bought ; 2. have they bought ? 3. 1 have not 
 bought ; 4. have you not bought ? 5. have they (FEM.) 
 spoken ? 6. the girl has spoken ; 7. has the doctor 2 written 1 ? 
 8. the merchant has not sold 3 ; 9. have not the ships arrived ? 
 10. 1 have not dined (Beaten) ; 11. has not the shopkeeper 
 sent ? 12. you have written 1 ; 13. you (PhUR.) have seen 4 ; 14. 
 have they not found ? 
 
 1 escrito ; 2 m<Sdico ; 3 to sell, vender ; 4 visto. 
 PRON. 1 ess-kree-to ; 2 may-de-ko ; 3 ven-dair ; 4 viss-to. 
 
 37. When the Object of a Verb is a person or persons, & (to) 
 should precede the Object ; as, 
 
 I do not understand your friend. 
 Do you believe the boys ? 
 BUT : I do not understand this letter. 
 Do you believe that story ? 
 
 No comprendo 4 sn amigo. 
 I Cree Vd. a los nnichachos ? 
 No comprendo esta carta. 
 I Cree vd. ese cuento ? 
 
 Tener is an important exception to this Rule, thus : 
 I have a sister. Tengo una hermana. 
 
 * The ordinary English Past Tense (I spoke, he wrote, we did not lend, 
 etc.) is usually best rendered by the Spanish Past Definite. The formation 
 of the Past Definite is explained in Lesson 9 ; student* may meanwhile 
 translate the English Past by the Spanish Perfect Tense, 
 
EXERCISE HI. 
 
 1. We have seen a very celebrated 1 general. 2 2. Have 
 you (PLUR.) found your friends ? 3. Has he [any] brothers ? 
 4. I'have seen that gentleman in Madrid. 5. Do you expect 3 
 your nieces to-day 4 ? 6/We do not expect? [any] letters. 
 7. We are looking 5 for 5 our keys. 6 8. Are you looking 5 for 5 
 your nephew 7 ? 0. i have not seen the b king b< fe>-day. a 
 
 1 cdlebrc ; 2 genera! ; 3 esperar ; 4 boy ; 5 buscar (to seek, look for) ; 
 C Have (FEM.) ; 7 sobrino: 
 
 PRON. 1 thay-lay.bray ; 2 //ay-nay-rahl ; 3 Css-pay-rar ; 4 oh-e ; 
 booss-kar ; C i'yah-vay ; 7 so-bree-no. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Have you found my brother in the garden ? 2. Which 
 book have you had ? 3. Whose is thai horse ? 4. What man 
 does not love 1 his mother? . 5. Whose is this umbrella ? 6. 
 Have you (PLUR.) seen the English travellers 2 ? 7. What a 
 cheap watch 3 you b have 51 bought* this morning 4 ! 8. The 
 clerk 5 has received that money. 9. Who is smoking in this 
 room? 10.Hehasnotsentthegoods $ in(=:to)time. 7 11. "What 
 easy lessons you b have a ! 12. For whom are these letters ? 
 13. To whom have you lent your knife ? 14. Who are these 
 men ? 15. What people 8 are 9 there 9 in the house ? 1C. Have 
 you not called the servant (FEM.) ? 17. Which cups has she 
 broken ? 18. In which room have you found the red 10 ink ? 
 19. What a b'ad pen this 5 is a ! 20 v \Vhich [ones] do you 
 want? 21. Which is the "way 11 'to the station 12 ? 22. 
 What is the cause 13 of his silence 14 ? 123. What are their 
 plans 15 ? 24. What is (hat ? __ 
 
 1 amar ; 2 viajcro ; 3 reloj , 4 maftana ; f> depcndientc ; 6 gcneros 
 (PLUR.) ; 7 tiempo ; 8 gente (FEM.) ; hay , 10 rojo ; 11 camino ; 
 12 cstaci6n ; 13 causa; 14 silencio ; 15 plan. 
 
 PRON. 1 ah-mar; 2 ve-ah-7/ay-ro, 3rray-lo//; 4 mah-n'yah-nah ; 
 5 de-penn-dc-enn-tay ; C //ay-nay-ros ; 7 te-em-po ; 8 /fenn-tay ; 
 9 ah'e or i ; 10 rro-//o ; 11 kah-mee-no ; 12 es-tah-the-on ; 13 kafc'oo- 
 aab ; H se-lenu-the-o ; 15 piabu. 
 
33 
 EIGHTH LESSON. 
 
 POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 38. mine, mio ; ours, nuestro ; his, hers, theirs, 
 
 FAMILIAR FORM : 2nd Pers. thine, tuyo ? yours, vuestro. 
 The Feminine is formed by changing the o into a, and the Plural by 
 adding 3 to the Singular (Ex. mia, mios, mias, suya, snyos, suyas, etc.) 
 
 PRON. me-o, noo'es-tro, soo-yo. too-yo, vob'es-tro, me-os, me-ahs, tc. 
 
 Your sister is in London, and 
 mine is in the country. 
 
 His friends are English, and 
 ours are Americans. 
 
 Su hermana de Vd. esta en Londres, 
 y la mia esta en el campo. 
 
 Los amigos de el son ingleses, y los 
 nuestros son americanos. 
 
 These words are preceded by the Definite Article, except when 
 used with ser, in a phrase meaning TO BELONG TO. 
 
 This pipe is not his ; it is mine. Esta pipa no es de el (or suya),* es mia. 
 Those pictures are not ours. Esos cuadros no son nuestros. 
 This trunk is mine. Este baiil es mio 5 BUT. 
 
 Here is your trunk ; where is Aqui est& su baiil ; i donde est& 
 
 mine ? el mio ? 
 
 Mine (FEM.) is on the table. La mia esta sobre la mesa. 
 
 NOTE that Possessive' Pronouns take the Gender and Number of the 
 Noun they stand for, NOT the Gender and Number of the Possessor. 
 
 * de el, de ella, etc., being clearer, are preferable to suyo, suya. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. This stick is not mine. 2. Is that house his ? 3. These 
 letters are ours. 4. Your pupils are industrious, and mine 
 are idle. 5. These pencils are hers. 6. Our friend (F.) is 
 here, but hers has not arrived yet. 7. That key is mine. 
 8. Our lessons are difficult, but theirs are very easy. 
 
 39. If any emphasis is placed on the Possessive Adjectives (see 
 par. 14), mio, SUyo, etc, are used instead, after the Noun : 
 
 It is not HIS mistake! J No es error suyo. 
 
 It is OUR fault. | Es culpa nuestra. 
 
 40. The phrases ' of mine, of ours, of his/ etc. are also usually 
 translated mio, nuestro, SUyO, etc. ; as, 
 
 a relation of mine I un pariente mio 
 
 two friends of bis \ dos amigos suyoo 
 
u 
 
 41. YOURS (polite forin) is translated suyo, or (preferably) el 
 de Vd., la de Vds., etc. Examples : 
 
 He Has brought my letters, but he 
 
 has forgotten yours. 
 Is this cab ours, or yours (plur.) ? 
 
 'This hat is .yours. 
 
 Are not those cigars yours ? 
 
 Ha traido mis cartas,pero ha 
 
 olvidado las de Vd. 
 I Es este coche nuestro, 6 de 
 
 Vds.? 
 
 Este sombrero es de Vd.* 
 i No son de Vd. esos oigarros ? 
 
 42.* De Vd., de 61, de ella, etc., are usually employed in 
 preference to suyo, suya, suyos, suyas, for greater 
 clearness, 
 my gloves, his and hers, mis guantes, los suyos y los de ella. 
 
 *Este sombrero es el de Vd. would mean * This hat is THE ONE WHICH 
 belongs to you * (in contradistinction to another that does not). 
 
 The phrases el de Vd., la de ella, etc., must be employed 
 in such phrases as the following : 
 
 my house or my father's mi casa 6 la de mi padre [amigos 
 
 our'horses and our friends* nuestros caballos y los de nuestros 
 neither his mistake nor his servant's ni su error ni el de su criado 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. my oak 1 and mahogany 2 tables ; 2. my dear 3 mother ; 
 3. an aunt of his ; 4. my wishes, hers, and theirs ; 5. This is 
 HEE work (= a work of-hers). 6. He is a clerk of -mine. 7. 
 Is this garden yours (PLUR.) ? 8. Those keys are not yours, 
 they are mine. 9. Is this newspaper yours ? 10. They are 
 frien'ds of -ours, 11. That is not MY mistake ; it is hers- 
 12. Neither 4 hi$ shop nor 5 his neighbour's 6 is open. 7 
 
 f roble , 2 caoba (translate : tables of oak and the of mahogany) , 3 
 querido (beloved)'', 4 m ; 5 ni , 6 vecino , 7 abierto (translate : are open). 
 
 ^ PEON. 1 rro-blay '; 2 kab-o-bab ; 3 kay-ree-dp , 4, 5 ne ; 6 vay-thee- 
 QO ' 1 ah-be-air-to. 
 
 THE FUTURE TENSE. 
 
 43. The Future Tense of all Regular Verbs is formed by adding 
 
 to the Infinitive the following terminations : 
 SING. 1st Pers. 2ndPers. 3rd Pers. PLUE. 1st Pers. 2nd Pers. 3rd Pers. 
 
 E 4s A EMOS eis AN 
 
 These terminations ace the same as those of the Present Tense of haber. 
 
S5 
 
 The full conjugations are therefore as follow : 
 
 hablare 
 hablara 
 
 hablaremos 
 hablaran 
 
 debere 
 debera 
 
 73 JJ 
 
 "* o 
 
 deberemos 
 deberan 
 
 5 *. vivira 
 10 viviremos 
 l ~'~ viviran 
 
 I shall speak 
 h will 
 we shall 
 they will ,, 
 
 PEON, ah-blah-ray, ah-blah-rab, ah-blah-ray-mos, ah-blah-ralm ; 
 day-bay-ray, etc, ; ve-ve-ray, etc. 
 
 Fam. Forms : hablaras, hablardis ; deberas, debereis ; viviras, vivirdis. 
 
 44. The Future Tense of tener is formed by adding these 
 terminations to tendr..., and of haber by adding them to 
 habr... 
 
 The Future Tenses of ser and estar are REGULAR. 
 The full conjugations are as follow : 
 
 I shall be sere estare 
 he will sera estara 
 we shall seremos estaromos 
 they will , v seran estaran 
 
 I shall have tendre ~ habre 
 he will tendra habra 
 we shall tendremos habremos 
 they will tendran habran 
 
 PRON. ten-dray, etc. ; ah-bray, etc. ; say-ray, etc. ; es-tah-ray, etc. 
 F. Form : tendras, tendr^is ; habras, habr^is ; seras, sereis ; estaras, estar^is. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. estaremos ; 2. i no tendra (el) ? 3. ^ hablaran Vds. ? 4. no 
 recibire ; 5. Vd. no bebera ; 6. <j hallara (ella) ? 7. escribiran. 
 
 8. shall I take ? 9. you will not have (tener) ; 10. will 
 they be (ser) ? 11. We shall not be (estar) ; 12. he will 
 divide ; 13. you will not have sold ; 14. they will smoke ; 
 15, shall we have sent ? 16. shall I have (tener) ? 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The professor has corrected 1 my exercises, 2 but not 
 yours. 2. Where shall you be to-morrow 3 ? 3. My friend 
 will be [a] doctor. 4. I shall not have enough 4 money. 5. 
 We shall speak to your father. 6. How much will you 
 receive ? 7. My friend has sold his house, and his son's 5 ; he 
 will now 6 live in mine. 8. I shall buy a table and six 7 
 chairs. 9. That mistake will be very serious. 8 10. They 
 will break that window* 9 11. I shall not buy this house. 12 
 I shall have sent his orders 10 and his neighbours'. 13. His 
 sister has found her gold 11 and her silver 12 rings. 13 14. Here 
 
Is my stick f where is yours ? 15. We have seen our mother 
 and his, but not hers. 16. It will be his fault, 14 not yours. 
 
 17. Why have you brought 16 your umbrella, and not mine ? 
 
 18. We shall keep 16 this watch, and .(shall) sell the other. 17 
 
 1 corregir ; 2 tema(MASC.) ; 3 mafiana ; 4 bastante ; 5 hijo ; 6 ahora ; 
 7 seis ; 8 grave ; 9 ventana ; 10 pedido ; 11 oro ; 12 plata ; 13 sortija ; 
 14 falta i 15 traido ; 16 guardar , 17 otro. 
 
 PEON. 1 kor-rray-#eer ; 2 tay-mah ; 3 mah-n'yah-nah ; 4 bahs- 
 tahn-tay , 5 ee-Ho ; 6 ah-o-rah \ 7 say-iss ; S grah-vay ; 9 ven-tah- 
 nah ; 10 pay -dee -do ; 11 o-ro ; 12 plah-lab ; 13.sor-tee-fab ; 14 
 fahl-tah; 16 trah-ee-do ; 16 goo'ar-dari 17o-tro. 
 
 NINTH LESSON. 
 
 COMPARISON OP ADJECTIVES. 
 more, m6s ; less, menos; than, que. 
 
 PEON, mahss, may-nos, kay. 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 I Es el Zar mas poderoso que 
 el emperador aleman ? 
 
 Estas fiores son menos hermo- 
 sas que las otras. 
 
 IB the Czar more powerful than 
 
 the German Emperor ? 
 These flowers are less beautiful than 
 
 the others. 
 
 The Comparative is always formed vith mds, thus : 
 
 She is worse (i.e more ill) to-day. 
 The climate of Norway is colder than 
 the climate of England. 
 
 Esta hoy mas enferma. 
 El clima de Nornega es mas frio 
 que el clima de Inglaterra. 
 
 THAN'IS translated by de before a Number, and by de lO 
 before a Verb. Examples : 
 
 I have more than ten pounds. Tengq mas de diez libras. 
 
 His trunk is heavier thaif he says. Su baul es mas pesado de lo qne dice. 
 
 46. The following Comparatives are irregular : 
 
 great, grande greaterj mayor 
 small, pequeno smaller, menor 
 good, bneno better, mejor 
 
 bad, malo worse, peer 
 
 high, tall, alto higher, superior 
 low, short, bajo lower, inferior 
 
 These words can also be compared regularly (mas grande, etc.) ; but 
 mas bueno and maB malo are hardly ever employed. 
 
 PEON, grahn-day, mah-yor ; pay-kay-n'yo, may-nor ; bcx/ay-no^ 
 ; mali-lo, pay -or ; ablto, soo-pay-re-or ; bah-JSTo, in-fay-re-or 
 
87 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. The coffee 1 is colder than the tea. 2 2. That man is 
 stronger 8 than you. 3. The apples 4 are not riper 6 than the 
 pears 6 . 4. This water is not colder than the other. 5. 
 London is larger than Paris. 7 6. Is not the city of Madrid 
 smaller than Paris ? 7. This beer is very good, but the wine 
 is better. 8. I shall not receive less than five shillings, 
 9. This house is cheaper than you believe. 
 
 1 cafe" ; 2 te ; 3 fuerte : 4 manzana ; 5 raaduro ; 6 pera ; 7 Paris. 
 PRON. 1 kah-fay ; 2 tay ; 3 foo'air-tay ; 4 mahn-thah-nah ; 5 man- 
 dOO-ro ; 6 pay-rah ; 7 pah-riss. 
 
 47. The Superlative is the same as the Comparative, but the 
 former is always preceded by " THE " ; as, 
 
 His exercise is the worst. Su tema es el peor. 
 
 The largest towns of France. Las ciudades ms grandes de Francia 
 
 They are the least clever of Son los menos habiles de mis disci- 
 
 my pupils. pulos. 
 
 48. When MOST means VERY, EXTREMELY,* it is generally 
 translated muy. 
 
 NOTE. A more emphatic way is to add isimo (-ma, -mos, -mas) to 
 the Adjective, omitting final vowels (see par. 157), thus : 
 
 They are most polite. Son muy corteses or Son cortesisimos 
 She is most diligent. Es muy aplicada or Es aplicadiaima 
 * *.e., when it is not used in a Comparison. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 1. He is the idlest of your servants. 2. It is most difficult 
 
 3. That picture is the most beautiful in 1 the collection.* 
 
 4. This water is the clearest. 3 5. These windows are the 
 smallest. 6. The smallest mistake has at times 4 most serious 
 consequences 5 . 7. Our house is the most convenient. 
 
 1 IN after a Superlative is de : 2 coleccio'n ; 3 claro ; 4 vez ; 5 consecuencia. 
 2 ko-lek-the-on ; 3 klah-ro ; 4 veth ; 5 kon-say-koo'en-the-fih. 
 
 49. as...as, tan...como; as much.. .as, tanto...como. 
 
 PRON. tahn, ko-mo ; tahn-to, ko-mo. 
 
 REMARK I. tan is invariable, and is used before Adjectives and Ad- 
 verbs ; tanto takes the Gender and Number of the following Noun. 
 
3$ 
 
 REMARK II. When following a NEGATION, the first AS is generally 
 changed to SO in English ; but the Spanish is the same. The Plural of 
 MUCH is MANY. Examples : 
 
 She is as diligent as you. Es tan aplicada como Vd. 
 
 They arc not so good as his. No son tan buenos como los de el. 
 
 I eat as much meat as you. Como tanta carne como Vd. 
 
 You have not found so many Vd. no ha hallado tantos nombres 
 names as your sister. como su hermana. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. Have you received as much, money to-clay as yesterday? 
 2. Your son is as clever as [he is] industrious. 3. These 
 chairs are as cheap as those. 4. Have y nl as many pens as 
 I [have] ? 5. This lady is not so tall as you. 6. He has brought 
 as many presents 1 as she [has]. 7. We have not bought so 
 much furniture 2 as you. 
 
 1 regalo ;. 2 rauebles (PLUR.). PRON. 1 rray-gah-lo ; 2-mbo' ay-bless. 
 
 50. THE PAST DEFINITE is formed by adding to the STEM 
 ,the following terminations : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Verbs ending in AR : 6 aste 6 amOS asteis aron 
 ER or IR : i iste 16 imos isteis ieron 
 
 The full conjugation is as follows : 
 
 I apoke hable 
 
 he hab!6 
 
 we hablamos 
 
 they hablaron 
 
 I owed debi 
 
 ne debio 
 
 we debimos 
 
 they debieron 
 
 I lived vivi 
 
 he vivi6 
 
 we vivimos 
 
 they vivieron 
 
 PRON. ah-blay, ah-blo, ah-blah-mos, ah-blah-ron ; day-bee, day- 
 be-o, day-bee-mos, day-be-ay-ron ; ve-vee, etc. 
 Fam. Forms : hablaste, hablasteis ; debiste, debisteis ; viriste, vi?isteis. 
 
 51. The Past Definite Stem of tener is tUV. . ., that of haber 
 is hub..., and that of estar is estuv... 
 
 52. Whenever the STEM of the PAST DEFINITE is irregular, the 
 Singular terminations are the same as those of the ar Verbs/ 
 and the Plural terminations the same as those of the er and 
 ir Verbs. The STRESS in the Singular, however, is regular. 
 
 'Except the Familiar Form, where the Termination is iste, not aste. 
 
Ser is quite irregular (see last column of table). 
 The full conjugations are as follow : 
 
 I had tuve hube 
 
 he tuvo hubo 
 
 we tuvimos hubimos 
 
 they fcuvieron hubieron 
 
 I was cstuve fui 
 
 he estuvp fue 
 
 we were estuvimos fuimos 
 
 they estuvieron fueron 
 
 PEON, too-vay, too-vo, too-vee-mos, too-ve-ay-ron ; oo-bay, etc. ; 
 es-too-vay, etc. ; foo'ee, foo'ay, foo-ee-mos, foo-ay-ron. 
 
 Fam. Forms : tuviste, tuvisteis ; hubiste, hubisteis ; estuviste, estuvisteis ; 
 fuiste, fuisteis. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. (on the-PAST DEFINITE*). 
 1. I sold ; 2. did they buy ? 3. you (PLUR.) received ; 4. 
 did she not arrive ? 5. they had not (tener) ; 6. was he 
 (estar) ? 7- did we fear ? 8. I smoked ; 9. we did not find ; 
 10. you were not (ser) ; 11. did you send ? 12. had I not 
 (haber) ? 13. we wrote ; 14. you (PLUR.) had not 
 learned ; 15. were they not in the room ? 
 
 * This Tense is used in speaking of an event entirely past. The Perfect 
 Tense (see par. 36) can be employed instead, as in English, if a recent past 
 is referred to. Thus : I (have) received your letter this morning ; 
 
 Recibi (orHerecibido)su carta esta maiiana- 
 
 TENTH LESSON. 
 
 RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 Relative Pronouns relate or refer to a preceding word or sentence. 
 In Spanish, they are the same as thfe Interrogative Pronouns (see Para- 
 graphs 33, 34), except that the Relative Pronoun cual, cuales is preceded 
 by the Definite Article, and that * WHOSE/ when Relative, is usually 
 translated cuyo (koo-yo), enya, cuyos, ciiyas, instead of de quien. 
 the gentleman whose bouse is there el senor cuya casa esta alii 
 
 63. WHO, WHICH, THAT (relative) are generally translated que. 
 
 the man who has done this 
 the girls who are downstairs 
 the houses which they built 
 the money that the child has lost 
 
 el hombre que ha hecho esto 
 las muchachas que estanabajo 
 las casas que edificaron 
 el dinero que el nino ha perdido 
 
 Paragraphs 54 and 55 show when que is NOT employed. 
 
40 
 
 64. WHOM after a Preposition is translated qtlien, quiene&; as, 
 
 the person of whom you spoke 
 
 the gentleman with whom we dined 
 
 the lawyer whom I shall consult 
 
 la persona de quien Vd. hablo 
 el senor con quien comimos 
 el abogado a quien consultare 
 
 WHO is translated quien, quienes after part of 'TO BE' 
 and a Noun or Pronoun ; as, 
 
 I Es el quien ha hecho el error ? 
 
 Is it he who has made the mistake ? 
 It is this workman who smokes. 
 It ia we who have spoken to the 
 banker. 
 
 Es este obrero quien fuma. 
 Somos* nosotros quienes ne- 
 mos hablado al banquero. 
 
 *Note that ser takes the same Number and Person as its SUBJECT. 
 
 55, WHO and WHICH, preceded by a comma,* are generally trans- 
 
 lated el cual, la cual, los cuales, las cuales ; as, 
 
 Your aunt, who was here yesterday, I Su tia, la cual estuvo gqui 
 will return to-morrow. | ayer, volvera mafiana. 
 
 *i e., when the Relative Sentence is as important as the Principal Sen- 
 tence, not subordinate to it. 
 
 REMARK I If cual is indirectly Interrogative, it is not preceded by 
 the Definite Article ; as, He does not know which of the two I shall 
 choose, No sabe cual de los dos eligire. 
 
 REMARK II. WHICH is translated lo que if referring to a preceding 
 sentence instead of to a word. He has forgotten the pronunciation, which 
 is not very surprising. Ha olvidado la pronunciaci6n, lo que 
 no es muy estrano. 
 
 56. The Relative Pronoun can NEVER be omitted as in English : 
 
 the man he met el hombre 4 quien encontro 
 
 This is not the hat I bought. Este ho es el sombrero que compre. 
 
 The Subject in Relative Sentences is frequently put LAST, if the trans- 
 position does not make the meaning doubtful (see par. 32) as, 
 
 the windows you have broken, las ventanas que ha roto Vd. 
 the goods the shopkeeper sells los g6neros que vende el tendero 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. The house you (PLUR.) have bought is more convenient 1 
 than mine. 2. Is this the captain 2 whose ship you have seen ? 
 3. The gentleman who spoke with the children is their 
 uncle. 4. We are not sure which [ones] he will keep. 5. Tho 
 
41 
 
 boy we saw (translate : have seen) is ill. 6. Have you forgot- 
 ten the name of the gentleman I live with (=with whom I 
 live) ? 7. He has read the letter I received, which is a pity. 
 8. The horse I have bought is not very strong. 9. I have 
 brought six books, which I shall lend this evening 3 to your 
 brother. 10. No, it is not this gentleman who is smoking. 
 
 1 convenient ; 2 capitan ; 3 tarde (FEM.). 
 PEON. 1 kon-vay-ne-en-tay ; 2 kah-pe-tahn ; 3 tar-day. 
 
 67. The IMPEBATIVE MOOD is formed by adding to the STEM the 
 following terminations : 
 
 SINGULAR. PLURAL. 
 
 Verbs ending in ar : E emos EN 
 
 erorir: A axnos AN 
 
 The Imperative (Familiar Form excepted) can therefore be formed from 
 the Present Indicative, simply by REVERSING THE TERMINATIONS ; that 
 is, by substituting E for A in the ar Verbs, and A for E in the others. 
 
 The following are the full conjugations : 
 
 let us speak hablemos I let us owe debamos I let us live vivamos 
 
 speak hable (s.), hablen (pi.) | owe deba, deban | live viva, vivan 
 
 PRON, ah-blay-mos, ah-blay, ah-blen ; day-bah-mos, day-ban, day* 
 bahn ; vee-vah-mos, vee-vab, vee-vahn. 
 
 Familiar Forms : habla, hablad j debe, debed ; vive, vivid. 
 
 Vd. is generally added to the Polite Form of the Imperative : 
 Do not read the letters. No lea las cartas. 
 
 Send (PLUR.) the goods. Manden los generos. 
 
 more elegantly, no lea Vd. las cartas, manden Vds. los generos. 
 
 68. The Imperatives of TO HAVE and TO BE are as follow : 
 
 tener. haber. ser. estar. 
 
 let us have tengamos hayamos 
 have Jtenga haya 
 (tengan hayan 
 
 let us be seamos estemos 
 . ( sea est6 
 
 ( sean esten 
 
 PRON. ten-gab, etc.; ah-yah, etc.; say -ah, ete.;es-tay, es-tay-mos, es-ten^ 
 
 Familiar Forms : ten, tened ; he\ habed ; s<5, sed ; esta, estad. 
 59. Such phrases as ' let him speak/ * let her owe/ c let them live/ 
 are usually rendered by putting que before the 3rd Person of 
 the Imperative, thus : 
 
 let him wait que espere (61) 
 
 let them send the wine que manden el vino 
 
When LET means TO ALLOW, it is translated by dejar. 
 
 Let the children (=allow them | Dejen Vds. & los 
 to) play in th*. room. | en este cuarto. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. Bebamos agua. 2. Venda (Vd.) su caballo. 3. No aguar- 
 dernos. 4. No compre (Vd.) estos cigarros. 5. No guardemos 
 estas muestras. 6. No fumen (Vds.) todavia. 7. Este (Vd.)en 
 tiempo. 8. \ Tenga (Vd.) lastima ! 9. Tome (Vd.) esta silla. 
 
 10. Lend your umbrella to my cousin. 11. Let the boy 
 speak == allow the boy to speak. 12. Let us dine now. 13. 
 Let them wait. 14. Let her buy the dress. 1 15. Be there 
 this evening. 16. Send the parcels 2 to my house. 17* Have 
 the kindness 3 to 4 wait a little 6 . 
 
 1 vestido ; 2 paquete ; 3 bondad ; 4 de ; 5 poco. 
 PRON. 1 ves-tee-do ; 2 pah-kay-tay ; 3 bon-dahd ; 4 day ; 5 po-ko. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Take the umbrella which is in the corner. 1 2 % Do not 
 break the plates 2 I bought yesterday. 3. Do not forget 
 (PL.) to 3 buy [some] tea, coffee, and sugar.* 4. Do not lend 
 [any] money to that man. 5. Let us eat this fruit. 5 6. Look 6 
 at 6 those shops. 7. Do not break that glass. 8. Do not let us 
 speak to that man. 9. The person 7 for whom he works is 
 here. 10. The officers you (have) found downstairs 8 will 
 be here to-morrow. 11. The bread you ate is as good as this. 
 12. They have not received the newspapers I sent, which is 
 very strange. 9 13. Guess 10 which of the girls is the best. 14. 
 
 I have found several 11 important 12 documents, 13 which I shall 
 send to our lawyer. 15. Do not answer 14 (to) that question. 16 
 16. Is it they who are working ? 17. Do not be so impolite. 1 
 
 1 rinc6n ; 2 plato ; 3 de ; 4 aziicar ; 5 fruta ; 6 mirar ; 7 persona ; 
 8 abajo ; 9 estraiio ; 10 adivinar ; 11 varies ; 12 importante ; 18 docu 
 mento ; 14 contestar ; 15 pregunta ; 16 descorte"s. 
 
 PRON. 1 rrin-kon ; 2 plah-to ; 4 ah-thoo-kar ; 5 froo-tah ; 6 me* 
 rar ; 7 pair-SO-nah ; 8 ah-bah-^o ; 9 es-trah-n'yo ; 10 ah -de ve-nar } 
 
 II vah-re-os ; 12 im-por-tahn-tay ; 13 do-koo-mea-to ; 14 kon-tess-t&T 
 15 pray-00un-tah ; 16 dess-kor-tess. 
 
41 
 
 ELEVENTH LESSON. 
 
 REGULAR VERBS (continued.) 
 
 The six remaining Tenses are formed according to this simple Rule : 
 
 60. In the Imperfect, the Conditional, and the four Tenses of the 
 Subjunctive, the Third Person Singular is like the First. 
 The remainder of the Tense can always be formed by adding 
 to the First Person Singular the following terminations : 
 
 SING. 1st Pers. 2nd Pers. 3rd Pers. PLUR. 1st Pers. 2nd Fers. 3rd Pers. 
 
 s MOS is N 
 
 These endings are the same as in the PRESENT TENSE. 
 
 5* In all parts of the Verb except the three Present Tenses (Indica- 
 tive, Imperative, and Subjunctive) the STRESS is on the 
 
 FIRST SYLLABLE OF THE TERMINATION. 
 
 61. THE IMPERFECT TENSE is formed by adding to the STEM 
 the following terminations : 
 
 Verbs ending in ar : ABA ; Verbs ending in er or ir : iA* 
 
 The following are the full conjugations t 
 JL j was speaking or used to speak hablaba 
 
 we were habldbamosJ 
 
 they were hablaban 
 
 I was owing or used to owe, etc., debia, debiamos, debian 
 I was living or used to live, etc., vivia, viviamos, Vivian 
 
 PRON. ah-blah-bah, ah-blah-bah-mos, ah-blah-bahn ; day-bee-ah, 
 day-bee-ah-mos, day-bee-ahn ; ve-vee-ah, etc. 
 
 Familiar Forms : hablabas, hablabais : debias, debiais ; vivias, viviais. 
 
 62. The Imperfect of SEE is era, dramos, eran. 
 
 Fam. Forms : eras, erais. PRON. ay-rah, ay-rah-mos, ay-rahn. 
 
 Tener, haber and estar are, regular in the Imperfect, thus : 
 tenia, etc. ; habia, etc. ; estaba, etc. 
 
 63. HAD, WAS, WERE are generally rendered by the Imperfect 
 Tense; as, 
 
 he had forgotten, habia olvidado ; it was not mine, no era mio 
 we were not writing, no est&bamos escribiendo, or no escribiamos 
 
44 
 
 EXERCISE L (on the IMPERFECT*), 
 1. yon used to have ; 2. were they not smoking ? 3. 1 
 used not to divide ; 4. was she eating ? 5. I used to b 
 (S8r) ; 6. we were not (estar) ; 7. had you (PLUR.) not 
 taken ? S. used you not to smoke ? 9. we used not to be 
 (ser) ; 10. had he dined ? 11. he was listening ; 12. used 
 you to read ? 13. we were working ; 14. were they not 
 calling ? 15. They were friends of mine. 16. He hadn't 
 time. 17. We had forgotten her name. 
 
 *The Imperfect Tense is used in referring to a CONTINUOUS, an INCOM- 
 PLETE, or a FREQUENTLY REPEATED past action. 
 
 64. THE CONDITIONAL MOOD is formed by adding ia to the 
 STEM, of the Future, thus : 
 
 I should speak I T. Q ^ IQ ^ Q I we should speak hablariamos 
 he would l&aDiana | they would hablarian 
 I should owe, etc., deberia, deberiamos, deberian 
 I should have, etc., tendria, etc. ; habria, etc. 
 I should be, etc., seria, etc. ; estaria, etc. 
 
 PBON ah-blah-ree-ah, ah-blah-ree-ab-mos, ah-blah-ree-ahn ; day- 
 bay-ree-ah, etc. ; ten-dree-ah, etc. , ah-bree-ah, etc. ; say-ree-ah, etc. ; 
 es-tah-ree-ah, etc. Familiar Forms : 
 
 hablarias, hablarlais ; deberias, deberlais ; tendrlas, tendrfais, etc. 
 
 REMABK. As in the Imperfect, the Stress is invariably on the first Vowel 
 of the Termination. 
 
 EXERCISE II. (on the CONDITIONAL). 
 1. they would receive ; 2. I should riot find ; 3. would 
 you believe ? 4f we should have ; 5. I should not have 
 sold ; 6. would he be (ser) ? 7. you would not be (estar) ; 
 8. would you (PETJR.) not have spoken ? 9. we should 
 break ; 10. she would not write ; 11. we should send ; 12. 
 would you learn 
 
 DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 
 
 (i.e., NOT Object of the Verb) 
 
 65. me, ml ; himself, herself, itself, themselves, ) gj 
 thee, tl ; yourself, yourselves (Polite Form) } 
 
45 
 
 These forms are used after Prepositions, thus : 
 
 for me, para mi ; without thee. sin ti ; of herself, de si. 
 conmigo is used for con mi (with me), contigo for con ti, and 
 consigo for con si. PEON, mee, tee, see ; kon-mee-go, etc. 
 
 After Prepositions, the other Pronouns retain the forms given in Para- 
 graph 1 ; but si is used in preference for Pronouns of the 3rd Person, and 
 for Vd., Yds., when the person has already been mentioned in the sentence, 
 by us, por nosotros ; with him, con el or consigo 
 to her, & ella ; for them, para ellos or para si 
 
 for you, para Vd. or para si. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. for her ; 2. towards 1 us ; 3. by 2 him ; 4. of you ; 5. 
 without 8 them (FEM.) ; 6. with you (PLUR.) ; 7. in him ; 
 8. at me ; 9. to her ; 10. from them ; 11. with me ; 12. by 
 us (F.) ? 13. without him ; 14. against 4 you ; 15. among 5 your- 
 selves ; 16. for them ; 17. with her ; 18. for yourself. 
 
 1 hacia , 2 por ; 3 sin ; 4 contra j 5 entre. 
 PEON. 1 ah-the-ah ; 2 por ; 3 sin ; 4 kon-trah ; 5 en-tray. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. We were working with him. 2. We should study 
 Spanish. 3. The milk 1 was in the jug. 2 4. Would you 
 speak to the merchant ? 5. The paper 3 was not good, but the 
 pens were very good. 6. They have always 4 beei} with me. 
 7. Who used to be the captain of this ship ? 8. Used we not 
 to have seven 5 chairs in this room ? 9. Was (PAST DBF.) 
 it not you who brought this present for me? 10. The 
 spoons 6 were not ours. 11. It was (fueron) these soldiers 
 who won 7 the battle. 8 12. Was it not early 9 when he arrived ? 
 13. Would you buy these knives and forks 10 ? 14. I should 
 not keep that dress. 15. He used always 4 to speak of himself. 
 16. We used not to travel 11 without him. 17. At what time 
 used you to dine 12 ? 18. Take 13 your children with you. 
 
 1 leche (FEM.) ; 2 jarro ; 3 papel ; 4 siempre ; 5 siete ; 6 cuchara ; 
 7 ganar ; 8 batalla ; 9 temprano ; 10 tenedor ; 11 viajar ; 12 comer ; 
 13 llevar (convey, carry). 
 
 PRON. 1 lay-chay ; 2 jE/ar-rro ; 3 pah -pel , 4 se-em-pray ; 5 se- 
 ay-tay ; 6 koo-chall-rah ; 7 gah-nar ; 8 bah-tah-Fyah ; 9 tem-prah 
 no ; 10 tay-nay-dor ; 11 ve-ah-Z/ar ; 12 ko-mair , 13 Tyay-var. 
 
46 
 
 TWELFTH LESSON. 
 66. me, to me, me ; us, to us, nos 
 
 thee, to thee, te ; you, to you (Fam. Form); OS 
 
 him, lo ; her, la ; to him, to her, le ; to them, les 
 it, lo (MASC.), la (FEM.) ; them, los (MASC.), las (FEM.) 
 
 PRON. may, tay, lo, lah, lay ; uos, os, less, loss, labss. 
 
 The above words (called Conjunctive Personal Pronouns) usually 
 PRECEDE the Verb of which they are the Object. 
 
 I have it lo tengo 
 
 do you lend us 1 i nos presta Vd.? 
 
 he does,not send me no me envia 
 shall I have them ? ; los tendre ? 
 
 I should not wait-for her No la' esperaria 
 In the polite form of address, YOU must be rendered thus : 
 
 MASC. SING. FEM. SING. MASC.PLUR. FEM.PLUR. 
 
 YOU lo la los las 
 
 TO-YOU le le les les 
 
 I do not understand you (PLUR.) no los (or las) comprendo 
 
 we send to you (PL.) les enviamos he lends (to) you le presta 
 
 In the Masculine Singular, le is often used instead of lo, as a 
 translation of YOU or HIM. But this substitution of le for lo is only 
 permissible when ONE MALE person is spoken to or of, thus : 
 
 Don't you believe him ? 
 Don't you believe it ? 
 Don't you believe her ? 
 Don't you believe them ? 
 
 No lo (or le) cree Vd. ? 
 I No lo cree Vd. ? 
 I No la cree Vd. ? 
 I No los (or las) cree Vd. ? 
 
 67. In Compound Tenses, these words PRECEDE the Auxiliary, as : 
 He has given me ten shillings. | .Me ha dado diez chelines. 
 Have you sold him your house ? I i Le ha vendido Vd. su casa ? 
 That man had spoken to us. | Ese hoinbre nos habia hablado. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. We have it (P.). 2. He has taken them. 3. Do you 
 understand me ? 4. 1 shall buy it to-morrow. 5. The shop- 
 keeper does not believe us. 6. Have you paid 1 him the bill 2 ? 
 7, We have seen them in the street. 8. 1 should not wait 3 
 for 3 them. 9. Would you have sold it ? 10. My friend 
 will keep them (F.). 11. Your uncle had forgotten us. 
 12. I shall speak to you this evening, 
 
 1 pagar ; 2cuenta ; Saguardar. 1 pah-gar j 2 koo'en-tah ; 3 ah-goo'ar-dar. 
 
47 
 
 88. When two Pronouns are Objects of the same Verb, the 
 Indirect Object (i.e. the PERSON) is put first. 
 
 The Object is always Indirect when preceded by TO, or when TO can 
 be placed before it without altering its meaning. Examples : 
 
 Does he sell it (F.) to us ? 
 
 He will lend it (to) me. 
 
 My friend has not sent them to me. 
 
 09. When both the Object Pronouns are in the Third Person, 
 the first (i.e. le or les) is changed to se ; as, 
 
 I N os la vende ? 
 Me lo prestara. 
 Mi amigro no me los ha enviado. 
 
 I used to owe it (F.) to them. 
 We often lend them to her. 
 She Bas brought them to him. 
 My clerk will send it to you. 
 We shall not sell them to you. 
 
 (Yo) se la debia. 
 
 Se los prestamos amenudo. 
 
 Se los ha traido. 
 
 Mi dependiente se lo enviara. 
 
 No se los venderemos. 
 
 70. d 61, & ellas, Vd. etc., (see page 45) may be placed after 
 the Verb, to make the meaning of se, le or les clearer, thus : 
 
 Why does he not sell it to them ? 
 The banker will lend them to him. 
 Who has given you the key ? 
 We do fcot owe her the money. 
 
 I Por que no se lo vende a ellps ? 
 El banquero se los prestara a 61. 
 I Quien le ha dado la Have a Vd? 
 No le debemos el dinero a ella. 
 
 He has written to us and to you. 
 [ shall lend them to her, but not to 
 
 her sister. 
 They owe the money to me, but not 
 
 to my cousin. 
 
 71. a mi, d 61, d nosotros, d Vd. etc., MUST be added, as 
 shown in the preceding paragraph, if there is any emphasis on 
 the Indirect Object : 
 
 Nos ha escrito a nosotros y a Vd 
 Se los prestare a ella, pero no a 
 
 su hermana. 
 
 Me deben el dinero a mi, pero 
 no a mi primo. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. They used to send it to me every day. 2. Has she sent 
 them to us ? 3. He has written to her, and (to) her mother. 
 4. His aunt has spoken to me, but not to you. 5. Did she read 
 it to them yesterday ? 6. The banker will lend it to them, 
 but not to their lawyer. 1 7. Have you explained 2 it to them ? 
 8. I have riot explained it to them yet, but I shall explain it 
 to them to-night 3 . 9. We sell to you (PLUR.), not to them. 
 10. He will sell it (FEM.) to us to-morrow. 11. The clerk has 
 not explained them (FEM.) to me. 
 
 1 abogado ; 2 explicar ; 3 this night (noche, FEM.). 
 PEON. 1 ah-bo-gah-do ; 2 ex-ple-kar ; 3 no-chay. 
 
48 
 
 72. The 'Object Pronouns are placed AFTER* the Infinitive and 
 the Present Participle ; and when they follow the Verb, they 
 form one word with it, but do not alter the Stress. Examples : 
 
 to find them, hallarlos I to lend them to me, prest&rmelos^ 
 
 owing you (PL.), debiendoles j sending it to him, envi&ndoselo 
 * This is* optional when an Auxiliary Verb, or a Verb used as an 
 Auxiliary, precedes. Examples : She was writing to us, estaba escri- 
 biendonos ; or, nos estaba escribiendo ; I want to speak to you, 
 deseo hablarle ; or, le deseo hablar. 
 
 73. The Object Pronouns are also placed AFTER the Imperative, 
 unless it is in the Negative, thus : 
 
 buy them, comprelos Vd. 
 send (PL.) it to me,- envienmelo 
 
 Yds. 
 lend it to her, presteselo Vd. 
 
 do not buy them, no los compre Vd 
 do not send it to me, ne me lo envien 
 Vds. [ Vd. 
 
 do not lend it to her, 510 se lo presto 
 
 send it to them (p.), and not to me, envieselo Vd. d ellas, y no a mi. 
 let him read it, que lo lea (Subjunctive, therefore Pronoun precedesX 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. Read it to me. 2. Read me the letter. .3. Read that 
 letter to us. 4. Do not read them (FEM.) to us. 5. Sell them 
 your watch. 6. Do not send her the letter. 7. Buy (PLUR.) 
 it. 8. Was he speaking to you, or to your .father ? 9. Lend it 
 to them. 10. Do not lend him [any] money. 11. It is not 
 easy [to] understand him. 12. Teach 1 (PLUR.) it to them. 13. 
 Do not teach 1 (PLtTR.) it to them. 14. Let him listen 2 tome. 
 
 lensefiar; 2escuchar. PRON. 1 en-say-n'yar ; 2 es-koo-cfcar. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Look at him, not at me. 2. Let me (i.e. allow me to) 
 have it. 3. Why have you sold her your ring ? 4. He will 
 not forget you (TLUR.). 5. Do they owe it to us ? 6. Do 
 not listen to him. 7. He has not brought them (FEM.) to us. 
 8. He used to lend money to you, but not to me, 9. When 
 shall you (PLUR.) buy it ? 10. Who has done it ? 11. How 
 much money do we owe him ? 12. 1 have lent them to her, 
 13. He will have them to-morrow. 14. Sell (PLUR.) them 
 to him. 15. Do not send it to me. 16. Does he owe it to 
 as ? 17. Let us keep it. 18. Do you expect him to-day ? 
 
THIRTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 74. Adverbs which are formed in English by "adding LY to the 
 Adjective are formed in Spanish by adding MENTB to 
 the Feminine Singular of the Adjective. Examples : 
 
 A^- f f dear caro I AA , f dearly caraxnente 
 Adjectives | ^ ficil j Adverbs | ^y facilmente 
 
 PRON.. kah-rah-men-tay ; fah-thil-men-tay. 
 NOTE. If two or more Adverbs ending in mente occur together, the 
 termination is added to the LAST only ; as, 
 
 They have fought bravely, enthusiastically, and nobly. 
 Han peleado valiente, entusiastica y noblemente. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 1. surely ; 2. cheaply ; 3. heavily ; 4, coldly ; 5. cleverly ; 
 
 6. bravely ; 7. gladly 1 ; 8. doubly 2 ; 9. purely. 8 
 
 1 glad, alegre ; 2 double, doble ; 3 pure, puro. 
 
 75. The Adverb usually follows the Verb (or the Participle in 
 Compound Tenses), and precedes the Noun which is the 
 Direct Object of the Verb.* 
 * This is customarily the case ; but the position of the Adverb is varied, 
 
 as in other languages, for emphasis or euphony. It is therefore to a large 
 
 extent optional. Examples : 
 
 The child does not always read. 
 I am now writing to my uncle. 
 They often used to speak to me. 
 He will not find the house easily. 
 
 El nino no lee siempre. 
 
 Estoy escribiendo ahora & mi tio 
 
 Me hablaban amenudo. 
 
 No hallara facilmente la casa. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 1. Copy 1 the names carefully. 2. Are they still 2 listening ? 
 
 3. Yesterday I, bought a watch, and to-morrow I shall sell it. 
 
 4. This man does not always work well. 5. Hardly 3 had I fi- 
 nished 4 !^ work when my friends arrived. 6. We always drink 
 tea and coffee. 7. To-morrow we shall receive eight 5 pounds.* 
 
 1 copiar ; 2 aiin ; 3 apenas ; 4 acabar ; 5 ocho ; 6 libra. 
 76. Adverbs are compared like Adjectives (see 9th Lesson) ; as, 
 
 coldly friamente 
 
 more coldly mas friamente 
 the most coldly lo mas friamente 
 
 easily fdcilmente 
 
 more easily mas fdcilmente 
 the most easily lo mas facilmentO 
 
 most surely, muy seguramente, or segurisimamente 
 B.8.S.4.) 
 
NEGATIONS. 
 
 77. never, nunca, jam&s*; nobody, nadie ; nothing, nada: 
 
 neither... nor, ni...ni ; no, not any, ninguno, ninguna. 
 PKON. noonn-kah, /Zah-mahs, nah -de-ay, nah-dah ; nee, nin-goo-no. 
 
 When the above words follow a Verb, no must precede the 
 Verb, thus : 
 
 I have never seen it. 
 He spoke to nobody. 
 I have neither your pen nor your pen- 
 He has no houses. [cil. 
 
 No lo he visto nunca. 
 
 No hablo a nadie. 
 
 No tengo ni su pluma ni su lapiz. 
 
 No tiene ningunaf casa. 
 
 If, however, these words precede the Verb, no is not used ; as, 
 
 Nobody has been her^e. 
 Never will I believe that. 
 To-day no letter has arrived. 
 
 Nadie ha estado aqui. 
 Jamas (or Nunca) creere eso. 
 Hoy no ha llegado ninguna carta 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. I shall not have any difficulty. 1 2. Neither my bus- ' 
 band 2 nor my son is 3 upstairs. 4 3. The servant has neither 
 brought coffee nor tea. 4. Nobody is do\vnstairs. 5. 1 met no- 
 body in the garden. 6. No house would be large b enough. 44 
 7. Nothing is more certain. 5 8. This boy understands nothing. 
 
 1 dificultad ; 2 esposo j 3=are ; 4 arriba ; 5 seguro. 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 (for Reference only) 
 
 78. The Third Person Singular of the PKESENT Subjunctive is 
 the same as the Imperative, thus : 
 
 liable- deba tenga haya sea este 
 
 hablemos debamos tengamos hayamos seamos estemos 
 bablen. deban tengan hayan sean esten 
 
 Fam, Forms : babies, hableis ; debas, debais ; tengas, tengdis ; hayas, 
 hayais ; "seas, seals ; est^s, est^is. 
 
 * Jamas is seldom used except with a Future Tense. 
 t The Plural Forms ningunos, ningunas, are not used. 
 
51 
 
 79- TbT Stem of "the IMPERFECT,^ FUTURE 
 
 Subjunctive is obtained by taking ron from the 3rd Person 
 Plural of the Past Definite (see Paragraphs 50 to 52), thus : 
 habla..., debie..., vivie..., tuvie..., hubie..., fue..., estuvie... 
 To this STEM the following Terminations are added : 
 
 IMPERFECT se ; FUTURE re ; CONDITIONAL ra 
 
 The full Conjugations are therefore as follow : 
 
 IMPERFECT : hablase, hablasemos, hablasen ; debiese, etc. ; 
 
 tuviese, etc. ; fuese, etc. 
 FUTURE : hablare, hablaremos, hablaren ; debiere, etc. ; 
 
 tuviere, etc. ; fuere, etc. 
 CONDITIONAL : hablara, hablaramos, hablaran ; debiera, etc. ; 
 
 tuviera, etc. ; fuera, etc. 
 
 Fam. Forms : IMPERFECT : hablases, hablaseis, etc. ; FUTURE : hablartfi, 
 hablareis, etc. ; CONDITIONAL : hablaras, hablarais, etc. 
 
 The STRESS is always on the vowel preceding the termination 
 se, re or ra. 
 
 NOTE. The Subjunctive is used under certain conditions, no rdatter 
 what the English construction is. We therefore refrain from the mis- 
 leading custom of giving MAY, MIGHT, etc., as the English of the 
 Subjunctive, because this would often be a totally incorrect translation. 
 The use of this Mood is explained in Lesson 24. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. I have a blue 1 dress here. 2. He hardly* waited b a 
 minute. 2 3. Perhaps I shall receive some presents to- 
 morrow. 4. That customer 3 has already 4 bought the lamp. 
 5. I shall certainly 5 speak to them to-night. 6. Did you 
 not find my umbrella here ? 7. Nobody is listening. 8. 
 He firmly 6 refused 7 [to] continue. 8 9. Sometimes 9 1 drink 
 beer, but I never drink wine. 10. I want principally 10 [to] 
 speak to him, not to his partner. 11 11. He spoke clearly and 
 energetically. 12 12. Do you expect a letter to-day ? 13. It 
 is of no consequence. 14. He believes nothing. 15. They 
 found nobody at home. 16. Never have I read [a] better b book, a 
 
 1 azul ; 2 minuto ; 3 parroquiano ; 4 ya ; 5 de seguro ; 6 firme 
 (Adjective) ; 7 rehusar ; 8 continual ; 9 4 veces ; 10 principal (Adjective) ; 
 11 socio ; 12 eneVgico (Adjective). 
 
^FOURTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 80. CARDINAL NUMBERS. 
 
 (Those printed in thick type are all that need be learned. The 
 remainder are Compound Numbers formed regularly.) 
 
 101 ciento uno, (una, F.) 
 200 doscientos (M.), dos- 
 
 cieutas (F.) 
 300 trescientos, -tas 
 400 cuatrocientos, -tas 
 500 quinientos, -tas 
 600 seiscientos, -tas 
 700 setecientos, -tas 
 800 ochocienlos, -tas 
 900 novecientos, -tas 
 
 1.000 mil 
 
 1.001 mil uno, (una F.) 
 
 1.100 mil cien(lo)t 
 
 1.101 mil ciento uno 
 1,200 mil doscientos, -tas 
 2,000 dos mil J 
 100.000 cien mil 
 200',000 doscientos mil 
 1,000,000 un millon 
 2,000,000 dos millones 
 
 PEON. 1 OO-no, 00-nah ; 2 doss ; 3 tress ! 4 koo'ah-tro ; 5 thin-ko ; 
 6 say-iss ; 7 se-ay-tay ; 8 o-cho ; noo'ay-Tay ; 10 de-eth ; Jl on- 
 thay ; 12do-thay; 13 tray -t bay ; 14 kah-tpr-thay ; 15 kin-thay ; 
 16 de-eth-e -say-iss ; 20 vay-in-tay ; 30 tray-in-tah, etc. 
 
 * The Compoiuid Numbers (17 to 99, except the even tens) can also be 
 spelt diez y seis, veinte y dos, cuarenta y cinco, etc. 
 
 t The numbers 1,100, 1,200, etc., cannot be translated oncecientOS, 
 etc. The correct form is mil cien(to), mil doscientos, etc. 
 
 J mil employed as a Numeral has no plural ; as, 
 6,000 iBeis mil ; BUT, 300 trescientos; 8,000,000 -ocho millones. 
 
 81. TJHO is contracted to un if a Noun or an Adjective follows, 
 and Ciento to cien, unless a Numeral Adjective follows. 
 
 fifty -one books, cincuentiun libros 
 
 cien buenos marineros 
 
 cien mil gracias 
 
 cien millones de hombres 
 
 mil and millon are considered as Nouns. de is always placed 
 
 after millon, millones, if the -Noun immediately follows. 
 
 1 uno (M.), una (F.) 
 
 21 veintmno* 
 
 l 
 
 2 dos 
 
 veintiuna 
 
 2 
 
 3 tres 
 
 22 veintidos 
 
 
 4 cuatro 
 
 23 veintitres 
 
 3 
 
 5 cinco 
 
 54 veinticuatro 
 
 4 
 
 6 seis 
 
 25 veinticinco 
 
 5 
 
 7 siete 
 
 26 vcintiseis 
 
 6 
 
 8 ocho 
 
 27 veintisiete 
 
 7 
 
 9 nueve 
 
 28 veintiocho 
 
 8 
 
 10 diez 
 
 29 veintinueve 
 
 9 
 
 11 once 
 
 30 treinta 
 
 1 
 
 12 doce 
 
 31 treintiuno, -na 
 
 1 
 
 13 trecc 
 
 32 treintidos,* etc. 
 
 1 
 
 14 catorce 
 
 40 cuarenta 
 
 1 
 
 15 quince 
 
 50 cincuenta 
 
 1 
 
 16 dieciseis* 
 
 60 sesenta 
 
 2 
 
 17 diecisietfe 
 
 70 setenta 
 
 1 
 
 18 dieciocho 
 
 80 ochenta 
 
 2 
 
 19 diecinueve 
 
 90 noventa 
 
 1 
 
 20 veinte 
 
 100 cien, ciento 
 
 2 
 
 one man, un hombre 
 a hundred good sailors 
 a hundred thousand thanks 
 a hundred million men 
 
53 
 
 82. All the Cardinal Numbers are invariable except UHO and 
 CientOS, which change in the Feminine to una, Cientas : 
 one woman, una mujer ; four hundred houses, cuatrocientas casaa. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. thirty-five children ; 2. nineteen days ; 3. six weeks 1 ; 
 4. twelve months 2 ; 5. eighty-eight years 3 ; 6. one minute ; 
 7. one week 1 ; 8. ninety-seven pounds ; 9. twenty-three 
 shillings ; 10. eighteen pence 4 ; 11. forty-two dollars 5 ; 
 12. one hundred and seven books ; 13. five hundred and 
 seventy-three shillings ; 14. thirteen hundred and fifty-one 
 houses ; 15. five thousand and twelve hours 6 ; 16. sixteen 
 thousand seven hundred and sixty-four miles 7 ; 17. a hun- 
 dred million pounds; 18. a hundred schools 8 ; 19. five 
 million two hundred and eighty-six thousand four hundred 
 and fifteen inhabitants. 9 
 
 1 semana ; 2 mes ; 3 aiio ; 4 penique ; 5 duro or peso ; 6 hora ; 
 7 milla ; 8 escuela ; 9 habitante. 
 
 83. The HOUR OF THE DAY is expressed in Spanish thus : 
 
 one o'clock, la una ; two o'clock, las dos ; five o'clock, las cinco, etc. 
 la, las are used because hora (hour), which is understood, is feminine. 
 
 84. QUARTER is translated cuarto, and HALF media. 
 
 PRON. koo'ar-to, may-de-ah. 
 Note the following expressions : twelve minutes past six, las 
 
 a quarter past four, las cuatro y cuarto 
 
 half past four, las cuatro y media 
 
 a quarter to five,las Cinco menos cuarto 
 
 seis y doce 
 twenty minutes to seven, las 
 siete menos veinte 
 
 85. "!T is" is translated es before la una, and son before 
 
 the other hours, thus ? 
 it is one o'clock, es la una ; is it half past two ? i son las dos y media ? 
 
 EXERCISE IT. 
 
 1. eleven o'clock ; 2. twenty-five minutes to eight ; 3, 
 half past ten ; 4. a quarter to eleven ; 5. five minutes past 
 one ; 6. ten minutes to eight ; 7. It is a quarter past nine. 
 8. Is it one o'clock ? 9. It is not twelve o'clock yet. 10. 
 It is nineteen minutes to three. 
 
54 
 
 86. The names of the DAYS and MONTHS are as follow * 
 Sunday, Domingo January, Enero , July, Julio 
 
 Monday, Lunes 
 Tuesday, Martes 
 Wednesday, Miercoles 
 Thursday, Jueves 
 Friday, Viernes 
 
 February, Febrero 
 March r Marzo 
 April, Abril 
 May, Mayo 
 June, Junio 
 
 August, AgostO 
 September, Septiembre 
 October, Oetubre 
 November, Noviembre 
 December, Diciembre 
 
 Saturday, Sabado 
 
 PRON. do-min-go, loo-ness, mar-less, me-air-ko-less, #ooay-vess, 
 ve-air-ness, sah-bah-do; ay-nay-ro, fay-bray-ro, mar-tho, ah-bril, 
 mah-yo, ^Too-ne-o, J3bo-le-o, ah-gos-to, sep-te-em-bray, ok-too-bray, 
 no-ve-em-bray, dee-the- em-bray. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. What time (trans, hour) is it ? 2. I 1 do not know 1 
 what time it is. 3. It is half past twelve. 4. The train 
 starts at twenty -three minutes past eight. 5. He has 
 travelled two hundred and eighty-one miles. 6. We have 
 in the bank 2 1,954 17s. 6d. 7. This country 3 has [a] hun- 
 dred million inhabitants. 8. I lent them eighteen hundred 
 and fifty pounds. 9. There 4 are 4 not [a] hundred good soldiers 
 in the regiment. 5 10. He will be here at ten minutes to one. 
 11. It is a quarter to twelve. 12. That merchant has 500,000. 
 13. Fourteen thousand eight hundred and fifty soldiers 
 fought 6 in that battle. 14. It is not a quarter past three yet. 
 
 15. They have sent [off] ninety-two parcels, haven't 7 they 7 ? 
 
 16. How 8 many 8 days are 4 there 4 in a week ? 17. There 4 are* 
 seven days, a hundred and sixty-eight hours, or ten thou- 
 sand and eighty minutes in a week. 18. What are 
 the names of the days ? 19. Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wed- 
 nesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday. 20. There 4 are 4 twelve 
 months, or three hundred and sixty-five days, in a year. 21. The 
 months are : January, February, March, April, May, June, 
 July, August, September, October, November, December. 
 
 1 no *6 ; 2 banco ; 3 pals ; 4 hay ; 5 regimieflto ; 6 peleor ; 
 7 i no ot veidad ? (is it not truth ?) ; 8 cudntos ? 
 
55 
 FIFTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 87. ORDINAL NUMBERS, 
 
 1st primero 6th sexto llth undcimo or d&fmo 
 
 2nd segundo 7th septimo primero 
 
 3rd tercero 8th octavo 12th duodecimo or dcimo 
 
 4th cuarto 9th noveno, nono 20th vig&imo [segundo 
 
 6th quinto 10th decimo 21st vige*simo priraero, etc. 
 
 (The student need only learn the first ten words in the above list. 
 Beyond the * TENTH,' Cardinal Numbers are nearly always used in prefe- 
 rence to the Ordinal, the latter being very lengthy and cumbrous. Thus : 
 
 the 36th page, la pagina trigesima sexta ; but better, la pagina 
 treintiseis ; the 27th chapter = chapter 27, el capitulo veintisiete). 
 
 88. All the ORDINAL NUMBERS form their Feminine and Plural 
 in the usual way, thus : 
 
 the fifth street* la quinta calle ; the first names, los primeros nombrea 
 
 89. The Cardinal Numbers are used for expressing the DAYS OB 
 THE MONTH, the first (el primero) excepted ; as, 
 
 the 1st of July el primero de Julio ; the 2nd of August el dos de Agoato 
 the 1 1 th of March el once de Marzo ; 30th of May el treinta de Mayo 
 
 90. In writing the date with figures, no letters corresponding to 
 the English th. are used after the figure, THE IST (1) again 
 excepted, thus : 
 
 London, July 1st. Londres, (el) 1 de Julio. 
 
 Madrid, August 21st. Madrid, (el) 21 de Agosto. 
 
 Dates can also be written thus : Agosto 21 de 1907, etc. 
 
 91. After the names cf monarchs, etc., the Ordinal Numbers are 
 used (WITHOUT the article) up to the 10th. Beyond the 
 lOfch, Cardinal Numbers are generally employed ; as, 
 
 Henry II., Enrique II. (segundo) ; Catherine III., Catalina III. (ter- 
 ccra) ; BUT Louis XIV., Luis XIV. (catorce). 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. the first inhabitants ; 2. the eighth part 1 ; 3. the tenth 
 mistake ; 4. the fifth shop ; 5. the second classes 2 ; 6. the 
 
se 
 
 seventh street on 3 the right 3 ; 7. the third window on 4 thd 
 left 4 ; 8. the 15th of October ; 9. the first of May ; 10; 
 the 25th of August ; 11. Pius 5 the ninth ; 12. Isabella 6 II. ; 
 13. Charles 7 XII. ; 14. Paris, June 18th, 1907, 
 
 1 parte(FEM.) ; 2clase (FEM.) ; 3 la derecha* ; 4a la izquierda* ; 5 Pio J 
 6 Isabel ; 7 Carlos. * Feminine, Jsecaupe mano (hand) is Feminine. 
 
 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS.t 
 
 92. The following words form their Feminine and Plural in the 
 usual way (see Paragraphs 20 and 23) : 
 
 any, some, alguno ; no, none, not -any, ninguno ;t 
 
 muoh,J mucho how much ? <{ cudtito ? 
 
 other, otro ; same, mismo ; all, the whole, everything, todo ; 
 too much, demasiado ; little, a few, poco. 
 
 PRON. ahl-goo j no ; nin-goo-.no; moo-cho ; koo'ahn-to j 0-tro ; 
 mi3-mo: to-do; day-mah-se-ah-da ; po-ko. 
 
 the other men, los otros hombres 
 all the ink, toda la tinta 
 how much money ? ;cu,nto dinero ? 
 ti many streets ? i cuantas calles 1 
 
 much patience, mucha paciencia 
 many numbers, muchos numeros 
 the same book, el mismo libro 
 the same cups, las mismas tazas 
 
 93. The following words do not change : 
 
 anyone, anybody, alguien ; nobody, nadie ; 
 each, every, cada ; nothing, nada ; something, anything, 
 
 PKON. ahlg-e-cn ; nah-de-ay ; kah-dah ; nah-dah ; ahl-go. 
 EXAMPLES : every three weeks, oada tres semanas ; 
 
 is (there) any one at home ? I hay alguien en casa ? 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. I have found nothing. 2. A rich 1 man always has 
 [a great] many friends. 3. They looked at it every ten 
 minutes. 4. How many pounds 2 do I owe you ? .5. Do not 
 drink all the water. 6. Have you bought any books to-day ? 
 7. Is 3 there 3 anybody upstairs ? 8. We sold it to them the 
 other day. 9. You have too many dogs. 
 
 1 rico ; 2 libra ; 3 hay. 
 tw* foot-notas, pages 27 and 50. \ The Plural of MUCH is MANY, 
 
5? 
 
 04. The final o of primero (first), tercero (third), bueno 
 (good), malO (bad), alguno (some, any), and ninguno 
 (no, none), is omitted if a Noun immediately follows ; as, 
 
 have you any money ? i tiene Vd. algiin dinero ? 
 the first day, el primer dia ; a good soldier, un buen soldado 
 BUT : a good and brave soldier, un bueno y valiente soldado 
 
 The final A of Feminine Forms is not omitted ; as, 
 
 the third door la tercera puerta 
 
 This is not a good pen. Esta no es una buena pltuna. 
 
 95. When grande (great, large) precedes the Noun, the final 
 de is generally omitted. 
 
 grande precedes the Ncun when refferjing to QUALITY instead of to 
 tactual size (see Remark to Paragraph 19), fcbijs : 
 
 a great queen, una gran reina ; a great friend of mine, un gran 
 amigo mio ; BUT a great (i.e., large) ship, un buque grande. 
 
 06. Santo (Saint) is contracted to San when preceding the 
 name of a saint ; as, 
 
 St. Peter, San Pedro ; a great saint, un gran santO 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 L a bad a voyage 111 ; 2. a great a noise b ; 3. a great chimney 2 ; 
 4. a great favor 3 ; 5. St. Paul 4 ; 6. the third boy in the first 
 class ; 7. There 5 is 5 a little (of) coffee, but I have neither 
 sugar nor milk. 8. He never spends [any] money here. 
 9. I have a bad pen, but good paper. 
 
 1 viaje ; 2 chimenea ; 3 favor ; 4 Pablo ; 5 hay. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Alexander 1 1. died 2 December 1st, 1825. 2. How much 
 ink is 8 there 3 in the inkstands 4 ? 3. This is a good* boy, b but 
 the others have not done any work. 4. He is the first in 5 
 his class, which is very large. 5. My cousins (PEM.) 
 are almost 6 always the first in the list, 7 and my sister is the 
 last. 6. Who was (PAST DEF.) the first King of Spain 8 ? 7. 
 Copy every fourth line. 9 8. How many words 10 have, you 
 (PLUR.) written ? 9. Catherine 11 II. was 12 born 12 May 2nd, 
 
sa 
 
 1729, and died 2 Nov. 17th, 1796. 10. This is the first tim* 
 that I have found anyone at home. 11. The second lesson 
 is the most difficult. 12. On 13 the contrary, 13 1 think 14 that 
 the first lessons are very easy, and that the eighth is the most 
 difficult. 13. Do yomnot think 14 that the Iast 15a chapters 16b of 
 this book are very amusing 17 ? 14. She was (PAST DBF.) a great 
 queen. 18 15. This is the first mistake I have made to-day. 16. 
 I have filled 19 this inkstand, 4 and my brother has filled all the 
 others. 17. How many brothers have you ? I have only^one. 
 
 1 Alejandro ; 2 mnri6 (see par. 163) ; 3 hay ; 4 tintero ; 5 de ; 6 casi ; 
 7 lista ; 8 Espana ; _9 renglbn ; 10 palabra ; ] 1 Catalina ; 12 nacio" (see 
 par. 168); 13 al contrario ; ) 4 use creer (to believe) ; 15iiltimo; 16oa 
 pltulo ; 17 divertido ; 18 reina ; 19 llenar ; 20 solamente. 
 
 SIXTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES & PRONOUNS (concluded). 
 
 97. SOME and ANT before a Noun in the Singular are either not 
 translated, or rendered un poco or un poco de (A LITTLE) : 
 
 He has given me some sugar. Me ha dado un poco (de) azucar. 
 
 98. SOME and ANY before a Noun in the Plural (i.e. meaning A 
 FEW) are either not translated, or rendered by unos or 
 algunOS; as, 
 
 Have you any.nuts ,{ * Vd.^ece^^algunas nueces, 
 
 99. After a Negation, ANY is translated ninguno, and ANY- 
 BODY (or ANYONE) nadie, thus : 
 
 They have not built anyhouse[s]. No han edificado ninguna casa. 
 I have not seen anybody. No he visto a nadie. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. Lend him some tools. 1 2. We have some salt, 2 but we 
 have neither mustard 3 nor pepper. 4 3. Have you not met 5 
 anybody ? 4. Has the waiter 6 brought [any] bread and 
 cheese ? 5. My wife 7 has bought some furniture. 6. Haven't 
 you seen any samples to-day ? 7. This pupil hasn't [any] 
 
59 
 
 ink. 8. That servant (PEM.) has broken some plates, but 
 she has not broken any glass [es]. 9. He has given me 
 some presents for my daughter. 8 
 
 1 herramienta ; 2 sal (PEM.) ; 3 mostaza ; 4 pimienta ; 6 encontrar ; 
 6 mozo ; 7 esposa (or senora) ; 8 hija. 
 
 REFLECTIVE VERBS. 
 
 When the Object of a Verb is the same person or thing as its Subject, 
 the Verb is called REFLECTIVE. Examples : 
 
 NOT REFLECTIVE. REFLECTIVE. 
 
 He amused me. I amuse him. He amused himself. I amuse myself. 
 
 The boys amused us. The boys amused themselves. 
 
 100. The Reflective Pronouns MYSELF, THYSELF, OURSELVES, 
 YOURSELVES (Fam. Form), are translated me, te, BOS, OS. 
 
 Note that these are the same as the ordinary Object Pronouns (see Par. 66). 
 himself, herself, itself, one's self, ) translated q 
 
 themselves, yourself, yourselves (Pol. Form) ) a 
 
 101. These words immediately precede or follow the Verb, in ac- 
 cordance with the Rules in the 12th Lesson, thus : 
 
 to wash one's self, lavarse 
 I wash myself, me lavo 
 you wash yourself, Vd. se lava 
 has the boy washed himself ? j se ha 
 
 lavado el nmchacho ? 
 wash yourself, lavese Vd. 
 do not wash yourself, no se lave 
 
 Vd. 
 
 washing one's self, lavandose 
 we wash ourselves, nos lavamos 
 you wash yourselves, Vds. se lavan 
 the childrenwill not wash themselves 
 
 los ninos no se lavaran 
 let us wash ourselves, lavemonos* 
 do not let us wash ourselves, no nos 
 
 lavemos, etc., etc. 
 
 * The final S or D of the Imperative is omitted "before the Reflective 
 Pronouns nos and os. Thus, the Familiar Form for " wash yourselves " 
 is lavaos, not lavados. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. I shall wash myself ; 2. we are not washing ourselves ; 
 3. have they not washed themselves ? 4. you will tire 1 your- 
 self ; 5. she would congratulate 2 herself ; 6. do not tire 1 
 yourselves ; 7. has he hurt 3 himself ? 8. have you not 
 hurt 3 yourselves ? 9. they congratulate 2 themselves ; 10. 
 wash yourselves ; 11. the workmen used to tire 1 them- 
 selves ; 12. we shall congratulate 2 ourselves. 
 
 1 cansar ; 2 felicitar ; 3 lastimar. 
 
60 
 
 102. Many Verbs are reflective in Spanish, but not in EngKdi. 
 
 to make a mistake, equivocarse 
 
 to get up, levantarse 
 
 to complain, qnejarse 
 
 to aJight, apearse or bajarse 
 
 1 made a mistake, me he equivocado 
 he used to get up, se levautaba 
 we do not complain, no nos quejamos 
 you will alight, Vd se apeara or bajar 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. do not complain ; 2. my friend has made a mistake; 
 3. why do you interfere 1 ?. 4. I shall interfere ; 5. they used 
 not to interfere ; 6. has the man escaped 2 ? 7. get up im- 
 mediately 3 ! 8. I am getting 4 tired 4 ; 9. has he not alighted 
 yet ? 10. we should get up ; 11. let us rejoice 5 ; 12. get down 
 (=alight) here ; 13. they have got married, 6 
 
 1 to interfere, meterse ; 2 to escape, escaparse ; 3 inmediaiamente ; 
 4 to get tired, cansarse ; 5 to rejoice, alegrarse ; 6 to get married, casarse. * 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. That clerk is very careless, 1 but he thinks 2 - that he 
 never makes a mistake. 2. They alighted at the door 3 of the 
 church. 3. I do not complain of this, but 4 of that. 4. Why 
 does that boy not wash himself ? 5. 1 have not made a mistake 
 this time. 5 6. We get up every day at half past six. 7. We 
 shall not interfere in that. 8. The children laave behaved 6 
 themselves 6 very well. 9. Your friend, congratulated himself 
 too 7 soon. 8 10. Do not tire yourselves. 11. We do not want 
 [to] tire ourselves. 12. Let us get out ( = alight) at 9 this 
 station. 13. They sold me some good tobacco, 10 and him 
 some very b good b cigars. a 14. This is a good pupil ; he 
 rarely 11 makes a mistake. 15. At what time do they get up ? 
 16. We shall alight at the door 3 of the hotel. 12 17. He 
 always gets up too 7 late. 13 18. Don't interfere in these 
 matters. 1 * 19. When will they get married ? 20. They 
 have already got married* 21. Why don't you get up ? 
 
 1 descuidado ; 2 creer (to believe) ; 3 puerta ; 4 sino (see par. 115) ; 
 5 time=iocca8ion, vez ; 6 comportarse ; 7 demasiado ; 8 pronto ; 9 =2 ; 
 10 tftbaco ; ILraramente ; 12 hotel ; 13 tarde ; J4 asunta 
 
61 
 SEVENTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 THE PASSIVE VOICE. 
 A Verb is made Passive by changing its Object into the Subject, thus : 
 
 ACTIVE VOICE. I PASSIVE VOICE. 
 
 Our mother loves us We are loved by our mother 
 
 I did not write the letter | The letter was not written by me 
 
 103. The Passive Voice is formed in Spanish with Ser, the 
 Past Participle taking the Gender and Number of the Subject. 
 
 1 (M.) am respected, soy respetado 
 I (F.) am respected, soy respetada 
 will she be respected ? i sera respetada ? 
 is he not respected ? j no es respetado ? 
 
 they (F.) are not .respected, no 
 _son respetadas 
 were we (M.; not respected ? 
 i no eramos respetados ? 
 
 EXERCISE I. (on the PASSIVE VOICE). 
 
 1. they are not believed ; 2. are you (PEM. SING.) not 
 
 feared ? 3. we were called ; 4. is she loved ? 5. the glasses will 
 
 be broken ; 6. the window was broken by the servant; 7. the 
 
 queen is loved ; 8. am I not believed ? 9. they are not loved. 
 
 104. After the Passive Voice, BY is usually translated de if the 
 Verb expresses a MENTAL action ; otherwise por is used. 
 
 He was respected by all his family 
 The houses were built by these 
 
 masons 
 
 Fue respetado de toda su familia 
 Las casas fueron consfruidas por' 
 estos albaniles 
 
 105. The Passive Voice is not much used in Spanish, the 
 Reflective Form (or the Active Voice) being generally em- 
 ployed instead, thus : 
 
 it is believed 
 Spanish spoken 
 that house was sold 
 
 se cree 
 
 se habla* espanol 
 esa casa se vendio 
 
 *In such phrases, the Subject is often placed after the Verb. 
 
 106. The Reflective Form is also generally used in phrases like 
 PEOPLE BELIEVE, THEY (not meaning certain persons) 
 BELIEVE, etc. 
 
 they expect, people expect, it is expected = it expects itself, se espera 
 
 NOTE. The Reflective Form should be avoided if the Verb expresses 
 a mental actipn. For instance, 'the Queen is loved' is better translated 
 la reina es amada, because la reina &e ama means * the Queen 
 loves herself.' 
 
62 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 (In translating this ExercisS, only use the Passive Voice befor^BY.) 
 
 1. Foreign 1 money is changed 2 in that shop. 2. Are these 
 
 'books lent to 3 read 3 ? 3. People believe that the queen is 
 
 very ill. 4. These oranges 4 are sold at sixpence a 5 dozen. 6 
 
 5. Those masters 7 are respected 8 by their servants. 6. Milk c 
 
 . sold b here. a 7. Cigars 6 sold b here. a 8. The box 9 was (PAST 
 
 DEF.) inad6 10 by this carpenter. 9. It .is feared that the 
 
 accident 11 will be serious. 10. Money lent. 11. The 
 
 letters will be written by the clerk. 12. It is hoped 
 
 that he ^will arrive to-morrow. 
 
 1 cxtranjero ; 2 cambiar ; 3 para leer ==for readying') ; 4 naranja ; 
 ; 6docena ; 7 amo ; Srespetar ; 9 caja ; 10 hecho ; 11 accidente. 
 
 REMARKS ON THE STEM OF REGULAR VERBS. 
 
 107. The spelling of the STEM of some Regular Verbs is slightly al- 
 tered in 'certain parts of the Conjugation, so that the ORIGINAL 
 PRONUNCIATION may be preserved. These alterations are : 
 VBBBS ENDING'IN 
 
 car 
 
 gar 
 
 zar 
 
 ceroroir 
 
 gerorgir 
 
 quir 
 
 change the C into QU before e 
 GU 
 
 Z 
 C 
 G- 
 
 QU 
 
 C 
 Z 
 J 
 C 
 
 e 
 
 a or o 
 
 aoro 
 
 aoro 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 -to look f or, Jbuscar ; 
 
 1 looked for, -busque 
 (.to pay, pagar ; 
 ( let him pay, que pague 
 J to attain, alcanzar ; 
 ( let us attain, alcancemos 
 j to conquer, veneer ; 
 ( I conquer, venzo 
 J to direct, diyigir; 
 ( let us direct, dirijamos 
 ( tp transgress, delinquir ; 
 ( I trangress, delinco 
 
 eer change the^ unstressed i of the termina- j to read, leer 
 tion into y, whenever it occurs between ] be read, Iey6 
 two vowels,see page 28. I BUT : he used to read, leia 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. they believed ; 2. let us pay 1 ; 3. Do not let us pick 2 
 it up 3 ; 4. I attained 3 ; 5. Let us touch 4 ; 6. let him pick 2 
 it up 2 ; 7. do I conquer 5 ? 8. he read ; 9. I did not read ; 
 10. I enjoyed 6 ; 11. touch 4 them ; 12. do not touch (PLUR.) 
 them ; 13. do not arrive too late ; 14. pay 1 me ; 15. let 
 
63 
 
 him pay ; 16. I touched ; 17. Let us conquer 5 this difficulty. 
 18. Pick 2 up 2 thac apple. 19. Let us look for a cab. 20. 
 Direct 7 the letters. 21. Do not touch those books. 
 
 1 pagar ; 2 recoger ; 3 alcanzar ; 4 tocar ; 5 veneer ; 6 gozar ; 7 dirigir. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Newspapers sold here. 2. Pay the carpenter. 1 3. This 
 window was not broken yesterday. 4. I arrived [on] the 
 tenth of December. 5. As 2 soon as 2 I overtook 3 him, I spoke 
 to him. 6. Pick up that stone ; I want [to] examine 4 it. 
 7. They believed that I had made a mistake. 8. Without 
 doubt 5 the parcels 6 will be found by the boy. 9. The message* 
 was sent to the captains. 10. Let us take 8 hold of 8 this rail 9 ; 
 the staircase 10 is not very safe. 11 11. Do not let us touch the 
 papers, because we shall disarrange 12 them. 12. He addressed 18 
 himself to his friend, but received no answer. 14 13. It is 
 believed that a ship has been wrecked. 15 14. A good 
 mother is loved by her children. 15. They were wounded 
 by the soldiers. 16. It is doubted 16 whether 17 he will ha<ve 
 enough patience. 17. I advanced 18 carefully towards- 
 
 the horse's head. 19 18. People believed (IMPERF.) that the 
 message 7 had arrived. 19. Luggage 20 is not received here. 
 
 1 carpintero ; 2 luego que or tan pronto como ; 3 alcanzar ; 4 examinar ; 
 5 duda ; 6 paquete ; 7 parte ; 8 coger; 9 barandilla ; 10 escalera* ; 11 seguro ; 
 12 desarreglar; 13 dirigir ; 14 contestation ; 15 to be wrecked, nau- 
 fragar ; JL6 dudar ; 17 si ; 18 avanzar ; 19 cabeza ; 20 equipajes (PLUR.> 
 
 EIGHTEENTH LESSON. 
 
 VERBS SLIGHTLY IRREGULAR. 
 
 108. Many Verbs change the VOWEL OF THE STEM whenever it 
 takes the STRESS,* but are otherwise quite Regular. These 
 Verbs consist of the following two classes f 
 
 (1) Verbs which change the E of the Stem to IE 
 
 (2) O UE 
 
 * i.e., in all the Persons of the Singular, and in the Third Person Plural, 
 of the IMPERATIVE, PRESENT INDICATIVE and PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 Tbe remaining Tenses are perfectly Regular, as the Stress is ON THE TER- 
 MINATION, see par. 60. 
 
64 
 
 EXAMPLES, 
 to shut, cerrar ; to lose, perder ; to cost % costar ; to move, mover.' 
 
 
 SINGULAR.. 
 
 PLURAL. 
 
 
 /I shut, etc., cierro cierra 
 
 cerramos 
 
 cierran 
 
 PRES. INDIC. 
 
 1 1 lose, etc., pierdo pierde 
 1 1 cost, etc. cuesto cuesta 
 
 perdemos 
 costamos 
 
 pierden 
 cuestan 
 
 
 VI move, etc., muevo mueve 
 
 movemos 
 
 mueven 
 
 
 rshut, etc * cierre 
 
 cerremos 
 
 cierren 
 
 IMPERATIVE 
 
 1 lose, etc., pierda 
 1 cost, etc., cueste 
 
 perdamos 
 costemos 
 
 pierdan 
 cuesten 
 
 
 Vmovc,etc., nmeva 
 
 movamos 
 
 muevan 
 
 
 {that I shut, etc., cierre 
 
 cerremos 
 
 cierren 
 
 PRES. SUBJ. 
 
 I lose, etc., pierda 
 I cost, .etc., cueste 
 
 perdamos 
 costemos 
 
 pierdan 
 cuesten 
 
 
 I move, etc. mueva 
 
 movamos 
 
 muevan 
 
 The Familiar Form changes the stem vowel in the Singular, being 
 stressed (cierras, piercles, etc.) ; f but not in the Plural, as the termination 
 takes the Stress (cerrais, perdeis, etc.). 
 
 THE CONJUGATION OP THESE VERBS REQUIRES NO LEARNING, their , 
 terminations being perfectly regular. When once it is known that the 
 Verb belongs to one of these groups, it is simply necessary to change 
 the stressed vowel of the stem always, the unstressed vowel never. 
 
 Complete lists of these groups are given in Hugo's ' Spanish Verbs 
 Simplified.' 
 
 109. The following are the principal Verbs conjugated like 
 cerrar or perder : 
 
 to begin, empezar 
 to commence, comeuzar 
 to defend, defender 
 to deny, negar 
 
 to freeze, helar* 
 to light, encender [dar 
 to recommend, recomen- 
 to sit down, sentarse 
 
 to snow, nevar* 
 
 to think, pensai 
 
 to understand,entender 
 
 to warm, calentar 
 
 110. The following are the principal Verbs conjugated like 
 costar or moveir : 
 
 to approve, aprobar 
 
 to dream, sofiar 
 
 to fly, volar 
 
 to go to bed, acostarse 
 
 to remember, acordarse 
 to return, comeback, vol- 
 to show, mostrar [ver 
 to thunder, trouar* 
 
 to meet, encontrar 
 to prove, probar 
 to rain, llover * 
 to relate, contar 
 
 'Impersonal Verbs are only used in the 3rd Pers. Sing., see par. 129. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. let us shut ; 2. do not shut ; 3. it costs ; 4. they 
 cost ; 5. I do not move ; 6. do we move ? 7. they lose ; 
 8, we do not lose ; 9. it rains ; 10. is it not raining ? 11. 
 I shall return ; 12. were you not relating ? 13. does the 
 
childlifibw ? 14."dolT6t show us ; ISrwe should think ; 
 16. do you think ? 17. 1 do not deny it. 18. show me ; 19. 
 let us sit down ; 20, Why do you not sit down ? 21. Do 
 you think 1 (that) it will freeze to-morrow ? 22. Let us return 
 home 2 ; it b will rain b soon. a 23. If 3 I meet him, I shall speak 
 to him. 24. They would come back at half past nine. 25. 
 It does not thunder now. 26. Why does not your servant 
 come back ? 27. If they deny it, I shall not believe them. 28. 
 Has he not lighted the fire yet ? 1 use creer ; 2 & casa ; 3 si. 
 
 REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS AND CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 111. Verbs immediately preceded by a Preposition must be in" 
 the Infinitive ; as, 
 
 in speaking, en hablar | without arriving late, sin llegar tarde 
 
 before reading, antes de leer | after having seen,despu6s de haber visto 
 
 112. FOR (para) is translated por when referring to an 
 EXCHANGE or EQUIVALENT ; i.e., when meaning in exchange 
 for, in return for : 
 
 He has given me his watch for mine. 
 I shall change this shilling for twelve 
 pennies. 
 
 Me ha dado su reloj por el xnio. 
 Cambiar6 este chelin por doce 
 peniques. 
 
 113. AND (y) is translated 6 before words commencing with i pr 
 lli : as, 
 
 He is very clever and ingenious. I Es muy habil e ingenioso. 
 The* poems and stories of this author. | Laspoesias 6 historias de este 
 
 escritor. 
 
 114. OR (6) is translated u before words commencing with o or 
 hO; as, 
 
 Lend me seven or eight pounds. [ Presteme Vd. siete u ocho libras 
 Did you break it yesterday or to-day? | i Lo rompio Vd. ayer u hoy? 
 
 115. BUT (pero) is translated sino after a Negation, unless 
 a Verb follows ; as, 
 
 I have not seen him, but his wife. 
 BUT I have not seen him,but I have 
 seen his partner. 
 
 No le he visto a el, sino a su es- 
 
 posa. [& su socio. 
 
 No le he visto a 61, pero he visto 
 
 116. The Conjunction que (that) should not be omitted in 
 Spanish; as, 
 I am sure it does not freeze. | Estoy seguro que no hieia. 
 
C6 
 
 . EXERCISE" 11^ 
 
 I. in working; 2. after 1 having waited; 3. silver or 
 gold ; 4. sons and daughters ; 5. sons or daughters ; 6. 
 before 2 starting ; 7. without drinking ; 8. before 2 lending 
 it ; 9, brothers and sisters ; 10. after having shown me his 
 music 3 and instruments 4 ; 11. in showing them to him; 
 12. ten or eleven ^hillings ; 13. Change this cup for the 
 other. 14., It is not my fault, 5 but his. 15. The boat has 
 uot arrived to-day, but perhaps it will arrive to-morrow 
 
 1 despu& de ; 2 antes de ; 3 iniisica j 4 instrumento ; 5 culpa, 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. His master 1 does not approve [of] his conduct. 2 2. 
 Before recommending the book, I shall examine it. .3. They 
 bought it without examining it, 4. I believed it would rain. 
 5. After having sat down, I related the facts 3 and incidents 4 
 of my voyage. 6. Is your room light 5 or dark 6 ? 7. He did 
 not show his ticket 7 to me, but to you. 8. Do you deny that 
 the discoveries 8 and inventions 9 of this century 10 have been 
 very useful 11 ? 9. Let us begin now. 10. Do not begin 
 yet ; I am not ready. It. Do not light the fire in my room, 
 but shut the windows. 12. If I return in time, I will explain 
 &11 my opinions 12 and ideas. 13 13. Show me what 14 you 
 have in your (translate : the) hand. 14. I have seven or 
 eight shillings in my pocket. 15 15. He sold me his ring for 
 sixty dollars, 16. He returned last 16 week. 1G 17* Do not 
 come back without speaking to him. 18. Warm yourself 
 before starting, 19. How much did you receive for your 
 watch ? g). After having done their work, they will come 
 back, 21. He recommended a grammar 17 to us, but we have 
 forgotten the title, 18 22. My breakfast 19 costs me about 20 two 
 shillings a 21 day. 23. Mine costs me more. 
 
 1 amo ; 4 2 conducta ; 3 hecho ; 4 incidente ; 5 claro ; 6 obscuro ; 7 billetc ; 
 8 descubrimiento ; 9 invenci6n ; lOsiglo : 11 litil ; 12 opinion ; 13 idea ; 14 
 lo que (= that v:hich) ; 15 bolsillo ; 16 la semana pasada ; 17 gramatica; 
 18 titulo ; 19 almuerzo ; 20 aproximadamente ; 21=eacA. 
 
C7 
 mNETEENTH LESSONl 
 
 IRREGULrAR VERBS. 
 
 117. Verbs which differ in any respect from the regular Con- 
 jugations, either in stem or termination, are called IRREGULAR. 
 Even the irregularities, however, are subject to certain rules ; 
 and when these rules are mastered, the Irregular Verbs present 
 little difficulty. The following are the chief points to be 
 remembered : 
 
 I. The Termination's of every Tense except the PRESENT 
 INDICATIVE are QUITE 4 REGULAR.* 
 
 II. The Stem of the IMPERFECT is regular. 
 
 Exceptions : ir, to go ; ver, to see ; ser, to be. 
 III. The PAST DEFINITE follows the Rule in Paragraph 52.f 
 
 Exception : ir, to go, the Past Definite of which is the same as that of ser. 
 IV. The IMPERATIVE (polite form) is formed by changing 
 the final vowel of the FIRST PERSON SINGULAR of the PRESENT 
 INDICATIVE. 
 
 Exceptions : ir, to go ; dar, to give ; saber, to know. 
 
 V. The CONDITIONAL and SUBJUNCTIVE are always formed 
 according to the Rules in Paragraphs 64, 78, 79, no exceptions. 
 
 i^T Therefore, to be able to conjugate any Irregular Verb in 
 full, the Student WHO HAS LEARNT THE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS, 
 
 AND THE ABOVE RULES, 
 
 need only know the irregularities in the PRESENT INDICATIVE, the 
 FUTURE and PAST DEFINITE STEMS, the Singular (familiar form) 
 of the IMPERATIVE, and the PARTICIPLES. 
 
 We now proceed to give the important Irregular Verbs. All the irregu- 
 larities are printed in thick type, the few exceptions to the above Rules 
 being indicated by CAPITALS, and given in this lesson. TENSES FORMED 
 ACCORDING TO OUR RULES ARE OMITTED HERE; the full conjugation of every 
 Irregular Verb is giveu for reference in Hugo's * Spanish Verbs Simplified.' 
 
 118. to give, dar. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I give, etc., doy, das, da ; damos, dais, dan. 
 
 PAST DEF. I gave, etc., di, diste, dio ; dimos, disteis, dieron. 
 
 * Excepting also the Singular (familiar form) of the Imperative, the final 
 vowel of which is sometimes omitted. 
 
 f A few Verbs ending in ir change the Vowel of the Stem in the Third 
 Person of the Past Definite. These will be found ia the 23rd Lesson. 
 
119. to know, saber. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I know, etc., se, sabes, sabe ; sabemos, sabe'is, saben. 
 PAST DBF* I knew, etc., supe, snpiste, supo ; supimos, supisteis, supieron 
 FUTURE I shall know, etc., sabre*, sabrds, sabra ; sabremos, sabreis. 
 IMPERATI 1 E know, etc., sabe, sEPa ; sepamos, sabed, sepan. [sabrani 
 
 120. to go, ir (to go away, irse). 
 PRES. PARTIO. going, yendo. PAST PARTIC. gone, ido. 
 PRES. INDIC. I go, etc., voy, vas, va ,- vamos, vais, van. 
 
 IMPERFECT I used to go, etc., iBa, ibas, iba ; ibamos, ibais, iban. 
 
 PAST DEF. I went, etc., fuf, fuiste, fuE ; fuimog, fuisteis, fueron. 
 IMPERATIVE go, etc., Ve, VAYa ; vamos, id, vayan. 
 
 121. Such phrases as * I am going ' cannot be rendered by 
 yendo preceded by part of estar. The simple Tense of ir 
 must be used, thus : 
 
 Was be not going to speak ? i No iba el a hablar ? 
 
 122. TO or AND, if preceded by part of ir, and followed by 
 another Verb, is translated &. 
 
 I am going to smoke, voy a fumar ; go and look for it, Vaya a buscarlo. 
 
 EXERCISE L 
 
 1. I gave ; 2. I shall not give ; 3. do you know ? 4. he 
 did not go ; 5. will they know ? 6. I do not give ; 7. they 
 knew ; 8. let us go ; 9. I do not know ; . 10. going ; 11. 1 
 go ; 12. you used not to give ; 13. used they to kno\y ? 14. 
 go away ! 15. do you go away ? 16. we do not give ; 17. do 
 not give (PLUR.) ; 18. know ! 19. go away (PLUR.) ! 20. Let 
 us give him this grammar. 21.The professor is giving a'lesson. 
 22. Go (PLUR.) to his house the 1 day after to-morrow. 1 23. 
 Give it to us soon. 24. We gave it to you last 2 week. 2 25. 
 Will your cousin not go to-night 3 ? 26. Do you know it ? 
 27. I do not know who has gone to buy them. 
 
 i pasado manana ; 2 la semana pasada ( past) ; 3=this night. 
 
 123. to say, to tell, decir. 
 
 PRES. PARTIC. saying, diciendo ; PAST PARTIC. said, dicho. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I say, etc., digo, dices, dice ; decimos, decis, dicen. 
 
 PAST DEF. I said, etc., dije, dijiste, dijo ; dijimos, dijisteis, dyeron. 
 
 FUTURE I shall say, etc., dire\ diras, dira ; diremos, dir^is, dir&n. 
 
 IMPERATIVE say, etc., dl, diga ; digamos, decid, digaru 
 
124. to see, ver. 
 
 PBES. PARTIC. seeing, viendo ; PAST PARTIC. seen, visto ; 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I see, etc., veo, ves, ve ; vemos, veis, ven. 
 
 IMPERFECT I used to see, etc., vEia, velas, vela ; veiamos, veiais, veiah. 
 
 IMPERATIVE see, etc., ve, vea ; veamos, ved, v'ean. 
 
 125. to err, errar (very rarely employed). 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I err, etc., yerro, yerras, yerra ; erramos, errais, yerrari. 
 IMPERATIVE err, etc., Yerra, yerre ; erremos, errad, yerren. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. let us see ; 2. they said ; 3. I do not see ; 4. shall 
 we not tell ? 5. they say ; 6. he used to see ; 7. we do not 
 see ; 8. what is he saying ? 9. you saw ; 10. we have told ; 
 11. do not say ; 12. seeing ; 13. did we say ? 14. do not see ; 
 15. I do not say ; 16. Go and see who is in the garden. 17. 
 Tell me whether you are tired. 18. He has told me nothing. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The captain did not give anything to the sailors. 2. 
 They told me that their clerk had no experience. 1 3. Let us 
 tell them what 2 we think. 4. I do not kno\y whether they 
 go every day by rail. 3 5. When I go into 4 the country, I see 
 them. 6. Let us see who has gone home. 7. He does not 
 understand what 2 they are saying. 8. I am going to explain 
 it to him. 9. We are going to see our uncle. 10. Go and see 
 who is at the door. 11. He used to know several languages, 5 
 but he has forgotten them. 12. Tell me when he will come 
 back. 13. Why do they not tell us the truth 6 ? 14. Go home ; 
 your father wants to see you. 15. If I see the man, I will 
 tell him what 2 you want. 16. We went to London last 7 year/ 
 17. They used often to go to the theatre. 8 18. We never see 
 our friends until 9 (the) evening. 10 19. Why do you not give 
 him a chair ? 20. Who told her that ? 21. 1 tell you it is 
 true. 11 22. When I saw him, he was going home. 23. I shall 
 soon know it. 24. I never give it to him. 25. I shall go to the 
 station to-morrow. 26. Do not give it to him, but to me. 
 
 1 experiencia ; 2 what-=that which is translated 4 lo quc ' ; 3 ferro- 
 carril ; 4=/o ; 5 idioma (MASC.) ; 6 verdad ; 7 el afio pasado ; 8 teatro ; 
 9 hasta ; 10 nocbe OEM.) ; \\=ztruth> verdad. 
 
70 
 TWENTIETH LESSON. 
 
 126. to do, to make, nacer. 
 
 PAST PARTIC. done, made, hecho. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I do, I make, etc., bago, haces, hace ; hacemos, hace'is, hacen. 
 
 PAST DEF. 1 did, J made, etc., hice, hiciste,bizo ; hicimos, hicisteis, hi- 
 
 FUTURE I shall do or make, etc., hare\ haras, hara, etc. [cieron 
 
 IMPERATIVE do, make, etc., haz, haga ; hagamos, haced, hagan. 
 
 127. to put, poner. 
 
 PAST PARTIC. put, puesto. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I put, etc., pongo, pones, pone ; ponemos, pond's, pdhen, 
 
 PAST DEF. I put, etc., puse, pusiste, puso ; pusimos, pusisteis, pu- 
 
 FUTURE I shall put, etc., pondr, etc. [sieron 
 
 IMPERATIVE put, etc., pon, ponga ; pongamos, poned, pongan. 
 
 128. to be worth, valer. 
 
 PRES. INDIC, I am worth, etc., valgo, vales, vale ; valemos, valets, valen. 
 
 FUTURE I shall be worth, etc., valdxe', etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE be worth, etc., val or vale, valga ; valgamos, valed, valgan. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. he would put ; 2. I do not make ; 3. let us do ; 4. do 
 not put (PLUR.) ; 5. am I worth ? 6. they are not worth ; 
 7. you have put ; 8. we shall make ; 9. will it be worth ? 
 10. putting ; 11. they did not make ; 12. we do ; 13. did 
 you put ? 14. I do not put ; 15. let us be worth ; 1C., 
 would it not be worth ? 17. Where shall we put them ? 18. 
 Do not do it yet. 19. Put them in the corner. 20. Does he 
 put his letters here ? 21. He used not to maKe them, 22. What 
 have you done this morning ? 23. 1 am not doing any thing 
 
 IMPERSONAL VERBS. 
 
 129. Impersonal Verbs have no person or thing as their subject, 
 and are only used in the Third Person Singular ; as, 
 
 it is growing dark, anochece it is raining, llueve 
 
 it does not appear, no parece it thunders, truena 
 
 130. Impersonal expressions are frequently constructed with 
 liacer, ser, and other Verbs.' Note the following : 
 
 it is hot, hace oalor ; it is cold, hace frio ; it is windy, hace viento 
 it is certain, es cierto; it is true, es verdad ; it is necessary, es menester 
 
 All such phrases can of course be vised in any Tense, negatively and inter- 
 rogatively, thus : will it be windy ? i hard viento ? it was not true, no. 
 era verdad ; is it not cold ? i no hace frio ? 
 
71 
 
 13J. THERE is, ARE, WAS, WERE, WILL BE, WOULD BE, etc., are 
 translated by the Third Person Singular of haber ; but in 
 the Present Tense, hay is used instead of ha. Examples : 
 
 there is, there are, hay 
 
 there is not, there are not, no hay 
 
 is there not ? are there not 1 i no hay ? 
 there was or were not, no habia 
 
 is there ? are there 1 i hay ? 
 
 will there be 1 i habra ? 
 there would be a great many men there, habria alii muchos hombres 
 there is no ink or there is not any ink, no hay tinta 
 there will not have been time, no habra habido tiempo 
 NOTE. hay simply expresses EXISTENCE. If anything has to be POINTED 
 OUT alii esta (there is), or alii estan (there are) is employed. 
 
 132. If SOME, ANY (not followed by a Noun), or NONE, is 
 preceded by THERE is, WAS, WILL BE, etc., it is translated like 
 IT or THEM. Examples : 
 
 We shall buy some cakes, if there are 
 
 any. {none. 
 
 I looked for some inkj but there was 
 
 Compraremos algunos paste- 
 
 les, si los hay. 
 Busque tinta, pero no la habia. 
 
 133. AGO is translated hace (or h*), thus : 
 
 a month ago, hace un mes ; three years ago, hace tres auos 
 * ha can only be used at the end of the sentence ; as, 
 
 a long time ago, mucho tiempo ha 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. twenty years ago ; 2. it would be worth more ; 3. 
 there is no difficulty ; 4. there is your hat. ; 5. was* it [the 
 weather] hot ? 6. there was* no chair ; 7. was* there a 
 train ? 8. will it not be worth ? 9. an hour ago ; 10. there 
 are our cousins ; 11. is it not certain ? 12. will it be windy ? 
 13. there will not be enough bread ; 14. it is not hot to-day ; 
 15. there was* no mistake ; 16. is it [the weather] cold ? 17. 
 was* it not worth more ? 18. is there [any] water ? 19. there 
 is the station ; 20. six months ago ; 21. He wanted* [some] 
 money, but he had* none. 
 
 134. mucho (much) is used with VERBS and NOUNS. 
 
 it was very hot=it made much heat hacia mucho calor 
 it is not very windy=it does not make much wind, no hace mucho viento 
 Jie has not hurt me much no me ha lastimado mucho 
 
 * Use the Imperfect in all these cases, see Note on page 44. 
 
136. muy (very)~is used with ADVERBS and ADJECTIVES, and 
 with Past Participles used as ADJECTIVES.! Examples : 
 
 Are you much hurt 7 i i Esta Vd. muy lastimado ? 
 
 The window was not much broken. I La ventana no estaba muy rota. 
 The prince is much beloved. I El principe es muy amado. 
 
 fi.e., when the Past Participle is preceded by part of ser or estar. 
 
 m-ucho is used instead of muy when the Participle or Adjective PRECEDES : 
 they are celebrated, but not very, son celebrados, pero no mucho 
 
 136. tan (see par. 49) follows the same Rules as muyyand 
 tanto the same Rules as mucho ; as, 
 
 it is not so certain no 63 tan segUTO 
 
 it is as cold=it makes as much cold hace tanto frio 
 
 137. Adjectives qualified by muy follow the Noun, thqs : 
 
 it is a. good pen es una buena pluma 
 BUT it is a very good pen es una pluma muy buena 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. they are much esteemed ; 2. are you (FEM.) fatigued 1 ? 
 not very ; 3. a bad boy ; 4. a very bad boy ; 5. is it as windy 
 as [it was] yesterday ? 6. I am not so satisfied as you ; 7. a 
 very celebrated 2 painter 3 ; 8. It will be very cold ; 9. Was 
 it not very hot ? 10. He was not much applauded 4 . 11. Is 
 the queen much loved ? 12. I have not so much money. 
 13. He was as much hated 5 as his father. 
 
 1 fatigar ; 2 celebre i 3 pintor ; 4 aplaiidir ; 5 odiar. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Do me the favor 1 to wait a little. 2. Is this picture 
 worth as much as the other ? 3. There were several 2 child- 
 ren who were making [a] noise. 4. Put [some] wine on the 
 table. 5. I hope it will not be so windy. 6. I shall do it to- 
 morrow, if I have time. 7. This beautiful 3 f urniture b was 
 made a hundred years ago. 8. He will put some flowers in 
 the window. 9. The king is not so much esteemed as the 
 queen. 10. I believe it will be very hot to-morrow. 11. I 
 put them in the box a week ago. 12. There is no room 3 to 4 
 put our hats, 13. Have you put it here ? 14. There is ths 
 
78 
 
 stick ; give it to him. 15. There will not be enough time to 4 
 do it. 16. I never do it. 17. There was one picture which 
 was very much admired 5 . 18. Those are the pictures that 
 were so much admired. 19. The travellers 6 were (IMPERP.) 
 tired, but not very. 20. I have not put anything in the 
 boxes. 21. What is he putting inside 7 the drawer ? 22. 
 Why does he not do his work ? 23. I put it there now. 
 
 1 favor ; 2 varies ; 3 sitio ; 4 para ; 5 admirar ; 6 viajero ; 7 dentro de. 
 
 TWENTY-FIRST LESSON. 
 
 138. to be willing to, to like or wish to, to like to have, querer. 
 
 PRES, INDIC. 1 wish, I am willing, etc., quiero, quieres, quiere ; quere- 
 mps, quere*is, quieren. [mos, quisisteis, quisieron. 
 
 PAST DEF. I wished, I was willing, etc., quise, quisiste, quiso ; quisi- 
 FUTURE I shall wish, I shall be willing, etc., querre*, etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE wish, etc., quiere, quiera ; queramos, quered, quieran. 
 
 WILL in the sense of TO BE WILLING TO is translated by querer ; as. 
 Will you lend me your umbrella 1 1 Quiere Vd. prestarme su paraguas? 
 
 139. to be able to, poder. 
 
 PRES. PARTIC. being able, pudiendo. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I can, I am able to, etc., puedo, puedes, puede ; podemos, 
 pode*is, pueden. [pudisteis, pudieron. 
 
 PAST DEP. t could, I was able to, etc., pude, pudiste, pudo ; pudimos, 
 FUTURE I shall be able to, etc. t poctre*, etc. 
 
 140. CAN (and sometimes MAY) is translated by the Present 
 Tense of poder ; as, 
 
 We cannot see the light. I No podemos ver la luz. 
 May I speak to you ? J i Puedo hablarle a Vd. ? 
 
 141. COULD is translated by the Past of poder : 
 
 Could you find the house ? | i Pudo Vd. fcallar la casa ? 
 They could not come yesterday, f No pudieron venir ayer. 
 COULD=SHOULD or WOULD BE ABLE TO is rendered by the Conditional 
 of poder : they could come to-morrow, podriazf* venir manana. 
 
 When CAN, COULD, SHALL BE ABLE, etc., referjJo an accomplishment 
 that has to be ACQUIRED, saber is usually employed instead of poder. 
 Can you swim ? i Sabe Vd. nadar ? I cannot paint, No se pintar. 
 They could not (=s*lid not know how to) write, No sabian escribir. 
 
74 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. liking ; 2. I do not want to ; 3. was he able to ? i. we 
 shall not be willing to ; 5. can he ? 6. wilj they not like.to.? 
 7. were you willing to ? 8. we could (== were able to) ; 9. we 
 could (= should be able to) ; 10. being able to ; 11. do you 
 (PLUR.) not wish to ? 12. I used to be able to ; 13. we do 
 not wish to ; 14. he will not be able to ; 15. would she like 
 to ? 16. may we ? 17. you cannot ; 18. they used to like to ; 
 19. will you ? 20. would she not be able to ? 21 , we cannot i 
 22. You cannot doubt it. 23. 1 was not able to arrive in time* 
 24. He could not speak Spanish. 25. Can't the child read ?;' 
 
 TRANSLATION OF "TO" BEFORE AN INFINITIVE. 
 
 The second of two Verbs coming together must be in the 
 Infinitive* ; as, 
 
 I am beginning to understand it. I Empiezo a comprenderlo. 
 Do not forget to send them to us. [ No olvide Vd. de enviafnoslos, 
 * The Auxiliaries c to be ' and ' to have ' are immediately followed by a 
 Participle ; but this Rule is otherwise invariable. 
 
 TO before an Infinitive is generally translated de, unless 
 meaning IN ORDER TO, when it is rendered by para. 
 
 It is time to- begin. 
 
 I shall not refuse to give it to him. 
 
 That gentleman was waiting (in 
 
 order) to see you. 
 He said it to prove I had made a 
 
 mistake. 
 Did he bring the pictures to sell 
 
 them to you 7 
 
 143. TO is translated after certain Verbs, of which the 
 principal are the following : 
 
 Es tiempo de em^ezar. 
 
 No rehusare de darselo. 
 
 Ese caballero estaba espe- 
 
 rando para verle. 
 Lo dijo para probar que me 
 
 habia equivocado. 
 I Ha traido los cuadros para. 
 
 venderselos a Vd. ? 
 
 to authorize, autorizar 
 
 to begin, empezar 
 
 to commence, comenzar 
 
 to learn, aprender 
 to persuade, persuadir 
 to teacb, ensenar 
 
 to continue, contin li- 
 ar fconvidar 
 to invite, invitar, 
 Also Verbs of MOTION, such as : 
 
 to run, correr ; to go out, salir (IEREG.) ; to walk, andar (IRREQ.) 
 to come back, volver (IRREG.) ; to come, venir (IRREG.), 
 
 The ladies began to sing. 
 I shall teach him to write. 
 He ran to see who was there. 
 
 Las senoras empezaron dcantar. 
 Le ensenare a escribir. 
 Corrio a ver quien estaba alii. 
 
 NOTE. Paragraphs 121 and 122 apply to all Verbs of MOTION , as, 
 He is coming to see me to-night. Viene a verme eeta noche. 
 
75 
 
 144. TO is not translated at all after certain Verbs, of which the 
 
 principal are the following : 
 to be able, poder to make, hacer 
 
 to allow, to let, dejar 
 
 to_aj)pear, parecer 
 
 "todesire, to want, desear 
 
 to fear, temer 
 
 to feel, sentir 
 
 to hear, oir 
 
 to hope, esperar 
 
 to intend, intentar 
 
 to know (how to), saber 
 
 EXAMPLES. 
 
 to order, to command, mandar 
 to owe (must, ought), deber 
 to permit, permitir 
 please = have the kindness to> ser- 
 
 virse (see par. 160.) 
 to promise, prometer 
 to see, ver 
 to be willing, etc., querer 
 
 Was he not able to understand you ? 
 They want to speak to us. 
 Please walk in. 
 He promised to bring it to me. 
 
 I No pudo comprenderle ? 
 Desean hablarnos. 
 Sirvase Vd. entrar. 
 Prometi6 traermelo. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. We have invited them to dine with Us. 2. It began to- 
 rain. 3. I cannot answer. 4. Will you give -me your card 1 ? 
 
 5. I wrote to him yesterday to tell him you had arrived. 
 
 6. We went to see your uncle yesterday. 7. It appears to be 
 impossible. 2 8. He did not intend to look at them. . She 
 has brought the letter home to read it. 10. 1 used to teach my b 
 children b to a swim. 3a * 11. Do me the favor to give me a glass 
 of water. 12. Leave off (PLUR.) talking (=cease 4 to speak). 
 
 1 tarjeta ; 2 imposible \ 3 nadar ; 4= cesar, *" 
 
 145. Deber used before another Verb expresses DUTY, or 
 (a certain amount of) COMPULSION. 
 
 Tener que (or haber de) expresses a stronger degree of 
 compulsion, see Hugo's ' Spanish Verbs Simplified/ page 93. 
 
 MUST (or HAVE TO) is rendered by the PRESENT TENSE of 
 deber, or by tener que, haber do, thus : 
 
 I must speak to them. Debo hablarles. 
 
 I have to speafc to the.. { g SStSff^ 
 Must you (0?- are you to) copy this letter ? i Debe Vd.. copiar esta carta ? 
 
76 
 
 These expressions can be used with the same meaning in other 
 Tenses, tlius:^' 
 
 El criado tendra que (or habra de) 
 llenarlo. [bajar? 
 
 The servant will have to fill it. 
 Would they not have to work ? 
 
 I No tendrian que (or habrian de) tra- 
 
 L b 
 de 
 
 1 shall have to sell them=the right thing | , , , . 
 
 for me to do will be to sell them| debere venderlos 
 
 146. OUGHT is rendered by the CONDITIONAL of deber. 
 
 In such cases, the Conditional Subjunctive is generally employed in pre- 
 ference to the Conditional Indicative . but either is 7 correct. 
 You ought to sell them to him. I Vd. debiera (better than deberia) ven- 
 The children ought not to make | derselos. [ruido. 
 
 so much noise, f Lo$ nines' no debieran hacer tanto 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. We must go home. 2. You ought not to do that. 3. 
 You will have to wait until (the) evening. 4. How much 
 work have you to do ? 5. They had to start without buying 
 their tickets. 6. Must you copy it ? 7. He has several 
 things to do. 8. We should not have to pay so much money 
 as you. 9. They ought not to smoke so much. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. The soldiers ought to obey 1 the officer, but they do not 
 always do it. 2. Why will you not show me the picture ? 
 3. I do not like to put it here. 4. Will you tell him your 
 name ? 5. I cannot lend you this book ; it is not mine. & 
 He had nothing to do. 7. I must teach him to speak more 
 correctly. 2 8. We were able to finish 3 it yesterday. 9. We 
 could finish it to-morrow. 10. They have not been able to 
 find them yet. 11. We (have) said it to persuade 4 him. 
 12. They wanted to learn to speak Spanish. 13. Run 5 and see 
 who is at the door. 14. We could not wait to see him ; we 
 had to go away. 15. He wanted to keep all the money for 
 himself. 16. He will not like to come back without receiving 
 a reply. 6 17. You ought to give me more time. 18. Could 
 the lawyer understand ? 19. We expect to receive a reply 6 
 to-morrow. 20. He wrote .to me to say he had made a. 
 
77' 
 
 mistake. 21. Would you be able to send us the goods 
 to-day ? 22. We must ask our master now. 23. 1 am going 
 to give them to him, to show 7 him that I am not offended. 8 
 24. You must not sing 9 so loud. 10 25. Cannot your friend 
 speak German ? 26. Ought you not to invite them to dine ? 
 27. When shall I be able to draw 11 as well as you ? 28. I 
 cannot play 12 the piano. 13 
 
 1 obcdecer ; 2 correctamente ; 3 acabar : 4 persnadir ; 5 correr- 
 6 resptiesta ; 7 demostrar (demonstrate) ; 8 ofendido ; 9 cantar ; 10 alto 
 (high) ; lldibujar ; \2=touch (tocar) ; 13 piano. 
 
 TWENTY-SECOND LESSON. 
 
 147. /to come, venir. 
 
 FEES. PARTIC. coming, viniendo. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I come, etc., vengo, vienes, viene ; venimos, venis, vienen. 
 
 PAST DEF. 'I came, etc., vine, viniste, vino ; vinimos, vinisteis, vinieron. 
 
 FUTURE I shall come, etc., vendre", etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE come, etc., ven, venga ; vengamos, venid, vengan. 
 
 148. ; to go out, salir . * 
 
 PRES. INDIC, I go out, etc., salgo, sales, sale ; salimos, sails, salen. 
 
 FUTURE I shall go out, etc., saldre", etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE go out, etc., sal, saiga ; salgaraos, salid, salgan. 
 
 149. to walk, andar. 
 
 PAST DBF. I walked, etc., anduve, anduviste, anduvo ; anduvimos, 
 auduvisteis, anduvieron. 
 
 150. to hear, oir. 
 
 PRES. PARTIC. hearing, oyendo.' PAST PARTIC. beard, oido. 
 PRES. INDIC. I hear, etc., oigo, oycs, oye ; olmos* ois, oyen. 
 PAST DEF. I beard, etc., oi, oiste, oy6 ; oiraos, oisteis, oyeron. 
 IMPERATIVE hear, etc., oye, oiga ; oigamos, old, oigan. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. I hear ; 2. do not come ; 3. did they walk ? 4. you 
 will not go out ; 5. they will come ; 6. I came ; 7. we used 
 to walk ; 8. gone out ; 9. coming ; 10. did we hear ? 11. do 
 not let us go out ; 12. walking ; 13. I do not come ; 14. do 
 you (PLUR.) come ? 15. they did not hear ; 16. you will 
 
 "conjugated like valeh 
 
78 
 
 "hear ; 17. hearing ; 18. we used to come ; 19. let us hear ; 
 20. does she not go out ? 21. do we come ? 22. I should 
 come ; 23. do not go out (PLUR.) now. 24. I have come to 
 see you. 25. He has heard me speak. 26. He walked very 
 quickly. 1 27. I am going out to see the town. 28. We shall 
 come next 2 week. 2 29. He heard me perfectly, 3 because I 
 spoke slowJy. 4 30. I am coming to explain it to you. 
 31. Try 5 to hear what 6 is being said. 32. The noise is not 
 often heard from 7 here. 
 
 1 deprisa ; 2=the week which comes ; 3 perfectamente ; 4 despacio ; 
 5 tratar ; G lo que (WHAT is translated lo que when Kelative) ; 7 desde. 
 
 151. to bring, traer. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I bring, etc., traigo, traes, trae ; traemos, trae*is, traen. 
 PAST DEF. I brought, etc., traje, trajiste, trajo ; trajimos, trajisteis, tra- 
 IMPERATIVE bring, etc., trae, traiga ; traigamos, traed, traigan. [jeron. 
 
 152. to fall, caer. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I fall, etc., caigo, caes. cae ; caemos, cadis, caeD. 
 IMPERATIVE fall, etc., cae, caiga ; caigamos, caed, caigan. 
 
 153. to be able to be contained, caber.* 
 
 PRES. INDIC. quepo, cabes, cabe ; cabemos, cabe'is, caben. 
 
 PAST DEF. cupe, cupiste, cupo , cupimos, cupisteis, cupieron. 
 
 FUTURE cabre, etc. 
 
 IMPERATIVE cabe, quepa ; quepamos, cabed, quepan. 
 
 *The % following examples show how this difficult Verb is employed : 
 This room used to hold all his fumiture=AH his furniture was able to be con- 
 tained in this room. Todos sus muebles cabian en este cuarto. 
 There is room for me here=I am able to be contained here. Quepo aqui. 
 
 154. toplay,jug*ar. 
 
 PRES. iNDiq. I play, etc., juego, juegas, juega ; jugamos, jugais, juegan. 
 IMPERATIVE play, etc., juega, juegue ; juguemos, jugad, jueguen. 
 
 15fx, The following Verbs have irregular Past Participles : 
 INFINITIVE. PAST PARTICIPLE. INFINITIVE. PAST PARTICIPLE 
 
 to absolve, absolver absuelto 
 
 to cover, cubrir cubierto 
 
 to dissolve, disolver disuelto 
 
 to open, abrir abierto 
 
 to print, imprimir impreso 
 to resolve, resolver resuelto 
 to return, come back, volver vuelto 
 to write, escribir escrito 
 
 REMARK. These eight Verbs are otherwise quite Kegular, except those 
 ending in OLVER, which are conjugated Jike mover (see paragraph 108). 
 
79 
 
 156. Many Spanish Verbs have a regular and an irregular form 
 for the Past Participle. The Irregular Form, however, is 
 generally used as an Adjective only, the Regular Form being 
 employed in the Compound Tenses. For complete list, see 
 Hugo's 4 Spanish Verbs Simplified,' pages 62 to 64. 
 
 to join, juntar . we have joined them, los hemos juntado ; 
 it is not joined, no esta junto or junta 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. we play ; 2. do you not play ? 3. I used to write ; 
 4. have they opened ? 5. we do not bring ; 6. do not bring 
 (PLUR.) ; 7. it is able to be contained ; 8. they were not able 
 to be contained ; 9. we have not printed ; 10. do not fall ; 
 11. you have not brought ; 12. it is covered ; 13. hasn't he 
 come back yet ? 14. let us print- it ; 15. I do not open them ; 
 16. it will not be able to be contained ; 17. I have brought; 
 18. I do not bring ; 19. you will fall ; 20. do not play ; 
 21. cover them ; 22. I fall ; 23. There is room 1 for all the 
 money in this box 24. Bring it to me now. 25. I expect 
 they will fall. 26. Will you open the window ? It is 
 already open(ed). 27. There is not room 1 for me in .this 
 carriage. 28. Every 2 kind 2 of foreign books printed here. 
 29. Bring us the answer as 5 soon as possible. 3 30. Why do 
 you not put 4 your hat on 4 ? 
 
 1 use caber ; 2=all class ; 3 lo antes posible , 4 cover yourself. 
 
 SUPERLATIVE OF ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS. 
 
 157. MOST (meaning VERY, EXTREMELY) can be expressed by 
 affixing islmo (-ma, -mos, -mas) to the Adjective, 
 omitting the final vowel. Adverbs can be formed by affixing 
 mente to the Feminine Singular of the Superlative. 
 
 very difficult dificilisimo I very easily facilisimamente 
 very rare rarisimo j very rarely rarisimamente 
 
 The termination ble is changed to bil, CO to qu, go to gu, 
 and z to c, thus : 
 
 noble noble 
 
 nobly noblemente 
 
 bitter amargo 
 
 richly ricamente 
 
 very noble nobilisimo 
 
 very nobly nobilisimamente 
 
 very bitter amarguisimo 
 
 very richly riquisimamente 
 
80 
 158. The most important Irregular Superlatives are as follow : 
 
 very celebrated celebemmo 
 very faithful fidelisimo 
 very good bonisimo 
 
 very new novisimo 
 
 very strong fortisimo 
 very wise sapientisimo 
 
 celebrated celebre 
 
 faithful fiel 
 
 good bueno 
 
 new nuevo 
 
 strong fuerte 
 
 wise sabio 
 
 Many Adjectives, such as those of more than three syllables ending in 
 ble, cannot take the isimo termination, which is given here for Reference 
 only. The Student should employ muy, except in the following Exercise. 
 
 EXERCISE III. (on the isimo Termination). 
 1. most certainly ; 2. extremely happy 1 (MASC. SING.) ; 
 3. very happily ; 4. most rare 1 (MASC. PLUR.) ; 5. extremely 
 good (PEM. PLUR.) ; 6. most honorable 2 (MASC. PLUR.) ; 
 7. with very much pleasure 3 ; 8. My dogs are most faithful. 
 9. These children are extremely good. 10. His answer is ex- 
 tremely useful. 11. It is an extremely easy [piece of] work. 
 
 1 raro ; 2 honorable ; 3 gusto. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. Bring them to me as 1 soon as possible 1 . 2. He never 
 comes very early. 3. We ought to give it to him. 4. You 
 ought to wait a little. 5. He will not come 2 back 2 before six 
 o'clock. 6. They came back last 3 month. 3 7. We shall 
 come back to-morrow 4 morning. 4 8. We shall have to open 
 all the windows at 5 once. 5 9. Open the drawers. 10. There 
 will be room 6 for the things in this box. 11. I hope they 
 will come back soon. 12. He will have to bring it to me to- 
 morrow 4 morning. 4 13. At what time will the carriage come 
 back ? 14. I have to go out to buy several things. 15. Why 
 do you walk so slowly ? 16. I hope they will come to see us 
 next 7 week. 7 17. It is almost impossible to hear the noise. 
 18. The children are playing downstairs. 19. The train 
 always leaves 8 at half past eight. 20. He never brings them 
 early b enough.* 
 
 1 lo antes posible : 2 volver ; 3 el mes pasado ; 4 manana por la mana- 
 na ; 5 enseguida ; 6 use caber ; 7 the week which is~cominy ; 8 goes out. 
 
81 
 TWENTY-THIRD LESSON. 
 
 (The Verbs in this Lesson change the Vowel of the Stem whenever it 
 takes the Stress, like those in Lesson 18 ; but their PRESENT PARTICIPLE, 
 PAST DEFINITE (3rd Person), and PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE and IM- 
 PERATIVE (1st Person Plural), contain a further irregularity in the Vowel 
 of the~STEM. For complete list, see Hugo's * Spanish Verbs Simplified.' 
 
 159. to ask, to request, pedir. 
 
 PRES. PARTIC, asking, pidiendo. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I ask, etc., pido, pides, pide ; pedimos, pedis, piden. 
 PAST DEF. I asked, etc., pedi, pediste, pidid ; pedimos, pedlsteis, pi- 
 
 IMPERATIVE ask, etc., pide, pida ; pidamos, pedid, pidan. [dieron. 
 PRES. SUBJUNC. I ask, etc., pida, pidas, pida ; pidamos, pidais, pidan. 
 
 160. The principal Verbs conjugated like pedir are as follow : 
 
 to choose, elegir 
 to clothe, vestir 
 to correct, corregir 
 to dye, tenir 
 
 to follow, seguir 
 to laugh, reir 
 to measure, medir 
 to prevent, impedir 
 
 to repeat, repetir 
 to rule, regir 
 to serve, servir 
 to smile, sonreir 
 
 In Verbs conjugated like pedir, the UNACCENTED i of the termination 
 is omitted after i or n, thus : laughing, riendo ; he laughed, rio ; dyeing, 
 tifiendo ; they dyed, tineron ; BUT he used to laugh, reia ; we used 
 to dye, teniamos, etc. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. you asked ; 2. we did not repeat ; 3. will he laugh ? 
 4. do not choose (PLUR.) ; 5. smiling ; 6. you used to laugh ; 
 7. do you not rule ? 8. we follow ; 9. It is not known 
 whether he can prevent it. 10. Why are you laughing ? 
 11. Do not laugh. 12. Follow us. 
 
 161. to feel, to be sorry, sentir. 
 
 PRES. PARTIC. feeling, sintiendo. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I feel, etc., siento, sientes, siente ; sentimos, sentis, sienten. 
 PAST DEF. I felt, etc., sentl, sentiste, sinti6 ; sentiraos, sentisteis, sin- 
 IMPERATIVE feel, etc., siente, sienta ; sintamos, sentid, sientan. [tieron. 
 PRES. SUBJUNC. I feel, etc., sienta, sientas, sienta; sintamos, sintais, sientan 
 
 162. The principal Verbs conjugated like sentir are as follow : 
 
 to consent, consentir 
 to defer, diferir 
 to divert, divertir 
 H.S.S. 6. 
 
 to (tell a) lie, mentir 
 
 to prefer, preferir 
 
 to repent, arrepentirse 
 
 to require, requerir 
 to suggest, sugerir 
 to wound, herir 
 
82 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. did he consent ? 2. I did not suggest ; 3. what did you 
 suggest ? 4. we did not wound ; 5. they will consent also 1 ; 6. 
 Do not defer it. 7. Which of the two do you prefer ? 
 8. Used he not to tell lies ? 9. He is b now* repenting. 10. 
 Did you not feel the blow 2 ? 11. Let us repent. 12. We 3 are 
 very sorry for it. 3 13. I am very sorry -[to] disturb 4 you. 
 
 1 tambie'n ; 2 golpe ; 3=wefeel it much ; 4 molestar. 
 
 163. to die, morir. 
 
 PRES. PARTIC. dying, muriendo. PAST PARTIC. died, muerto. 
 PRES. INDIC. 1 die, etc., muero, mueres, muere; morimos, moris, mueren 
 PAST DEF. I died, etc., morl, moriste, muri6 ; morimos, moristeis, mu- 
 
 IMPERATIVE die, etc., muere, muera ; muramos, morid, mueran. [rieron. 
 PRES. SUBJUNC. 1 die, etc., muera, mueras, muera ; muramos, murais, 
 mueran. 
 
 164. dormir, to sleep, is conjugated exactly like morir, 
 except that its PAST PARTICIPLE (slept, dormido) is regu- 
 lar ; dormirse means to fall asleep, go to sleep. 
 
 165. Irregular Verbs and their compounds are usually conju- 
 gated alike. Examples : 
 
 suponer (to suppose) is conjugated like poner 
 
 convenir (to agree) venir 
 
 contrahacer (to counterfeit) hacer* 
 
 * satisfacer (to satisfy) is also conjugated like hacer ; but the Singular 
 Familiar Form of the Imperative is sometimes regular (satisface). 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. All the Compounds of decir (contradecir, to contra- 
 dict ; predecir, to predict, etc.) take dice instead of di in the Singular 
 Familiar Form of the Imperative, thus : contradice. The Past Participle 
 and the Future Stem of the Compounds of decir are regular. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. he will contradict ; 2. don't go to sleep ; 3. we sleep ; 
 4. they died ; 5. they did not agree ; 6. dying ; 7. I slept ; 
 8. you would die ; 9. used you (PLUR.) not to sleep ? 10. 
 had he supposed ? 11. do not let us'counterfeit ; 12. He died 
 rather 1 young. 2 13. Do you ever 3 sleep in 4 the afternoon 5 r 
 14. Are the children not sleeping ? 15. I suppose so. 6 
 
 1 algo ; 2 joven ; 3 alguna vez ; 4 por ; 5 tarde (FEM.) ; 6=that yes. 
 
83 
 THE FAMILIAR FORM. 
 
 The Second Person of Verbs and Pronouns is used by Spaniards in ad- 
 dressing near relations, intimate friends, children, servants, and animals. 
 A knowledge of this form of address is therefore essential, as it is of fre- 
 quent occurrence in books ; but FOREIGNERS SHOULD NOT EMPLOY THE 
 FAMILIAR FORM. Its formation has been explained in previous lessons. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. (on the FAMILIAR FORM) 
 1. buy (SING.) ; 2. fear (PLUR.) ; 3. thou findest ; 4. do 
 you owe ? 5. thou dost not fear ; 6. you used to send ; 
 7. thou wilt break ; 8. thou wouldst not do ; 9. you have 
 come ; 10. art thou (FEM.) ready ? 11. hast thou not put ? 
 12. what hast thou ? 13. you went ; 14. write (PLUR.) ; 15. 
 are you listening ? 16. are you willing to come ? 17. you 
 will not have ; 18. thou hadst not ; 19. had you waited ? 20. 
 show (SING.) it to me ; 21. do (PLtJR.) it ; 22. art thou not 
 English ? 23. you are not workmen. 
 
 166. The Familiar Form of the Imperative cannot be used in 
 the negative. The Present Subjunctive* (see Paragraph 78) 
 is employed instead, thus : 
 
 speak (SING.), habla I do not speak (SING.), no hables 
 drink (PLUR.), bebed | do not drink (PLUR.), no bebais 
 
 167. When the Reflective Pronoun OS is added to the Plural 
 Familiar Form of the Imperative, the final d is omitted,t thus : 
 
 wash yourselves, lavaos (not lavados) ; rejoice, alegraos (not alegrados) 
 
 EXERCISE V. (on the FAMILIAR FORM) 
 1. take (PLUR.) ; 2. do not take (PLUR.) ; 3. write (SING.) ; 
 4. do not write (SING.) ; 5. go away (SING.) ; 6. go away 
 (PLUR.) ; 7. speak to me (SING.) ; 8. do not speak (SING.) to 
 us ; 9. do not tire yourself ; 10. do not tire yourselves ; 11. 
 learn (PLUR.) ; 12. do not learn (PLUR.). 13. Buy (SING.) this 
 watch. 14. Do not sell (SING.) this watch. 15. Lend (PLUR.) 
 me your umbrella. 16. Do not read the letter. 17. Read it (P.). 
 
 * The Polite Form is really the Subjunctive used as an Imperative, 
 t The only exception is irse (to go away), the Plur, Impera, of which is idos. 
 
S4 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 
 
 1. He asked me [for] five shillings. 2. I shall give them 
 to him this evening. 3. Show me what you have chosen. 
 4. Please 1 take [a] seat. 2 5. When I arrived, the children 
 were asleep. 3 -6. 1 shall ask him [for] something. 7. Repeat 
 it. 8. Will you follow me ? 9. He never corrects us 
 when we make a mistake. 10. Please 1 (PLUR.) wait a little. 
 11. One of the two has been 4 telling lies, 4 but I don't know 
 which. 12. 1 find 5 it extremely difficult. 13. He is very sorry 
 he will not be able to come to-night. 14. When did he die ? 
 15. Please tell me the exact 6 time. 16. 1 cannot tell you (it) ; 
 my watch isn't going. 7 17. I am very sorry for (=1 feel much) 
 that accident. 18. Don't make any noise ; they are both 8 
 asleep. 3 19. 1 suppose they will arrive soon. 20. Repeat what 
 you (have) said. 21. He consented at once. 22. They laughed 9 
 when we told them that. 23. He prevented us f rom 10 seeing it. 
 
 1 Imperative o/servirse ; 2 asiento ; 3 dormido (or durmiendo) ; 4 lied ; 
 6 encontrar ; 6 exacto ; 7 andar ; 8 ambos ; 9 reirse ; 10 de. 
 
 TWENTY-FOURTH LESSON. 
 
 168. Verbs ending in acer,* ecer, OC6IS* or ucir, change 
 the C into ZC before A or O. 
 
 to know (to be acquainted with), conocer. 
 PRES. 1NDIC. I know, etc., conozco, conoces, conoce ; conocemos, etc. 
 IMPERATIVE know, etc., conoce, conozca; conozcamos, conoced, co- 
 nozcan. 
 
 169. The Verbs ending in ducir are also irregular in the Stem 
 of the Past Definite. 
 
 to translate, traduclr. 
 
 PRES. INDIC. I translate, etc., traduzco, traduces, traduce ; traducimos, etc. 
 IMPERATIVE translate, etc., traduce, traduzca ; traduzcamos, traducid, 
 
 traduzcan. 
 PAST DEF. I translated, etc., traduje, tradujiste, tradujo ; tradujimos, 
 
 tradujisteis, tradujerou. 
 
 *Except hacer and its Compounds, and cocer (to cook), which is conju- 
 gated like mover (cuezo, cueces, cuece ; cocemos, coc&s, cuecen). 
 
85 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. 1 grow 1 ; 2. does he not grow 1 ? 3. it did not shine 1 ; 
 4. do they cook 3 ? 5. I do not know 4 ; 6. do not recognize 5 ; 
 7. they were born 6 ; 8. we produced 7 ; 9. let ns translate 8 ; 
 10. do I not cook 3 ? 11. shine 2 ! 12. they deducted 9 ; 13. used 
 you to cook 3 ? 14. When were you born 6 (PAST DBF.) ? 15. 
 Do I appear 10 to be tired ? 16. They will translate 8 this letter 
 in half [an] hour. 17. I do not know 4 the price. 18. Do 
 you know 4 this gentleman ? 19. I do not recognize 5 him. 
 
 1 crecer ; 2 lucir ; 3 cocer ; 4 conocer ; 5 reconocer ; 6 to be born, 
 nacer ; 7 producir ; 8 traducir ; 9 ded'ucir ; 10 parecer . 
 
 170. Verbs ending in uir* are conjugated like the following 
 example : to destroy, destruir. 
 
 PEES. INDIC. I destroy, etc., destruyo, destruyes, destniye ; destruimos, 
 
 destruls, destruyen. 
 IMPERATIVE destroy, etc., destruye, destruya ; destruyamos, destruid, 
 
 destruyan. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. do you distribute 1 ? /2. they fled 2 ; 3. following 3 ; 4. I 
 do not attribute 4 ; 5. I follow 3 ; 6. we did not follow 3 ; 
 7. you will destroy 5 ; 8. would you (PLIJR.) not distinguish 6 ? 
 9. I argue 7 ; 10. you used not to distribute 1 ; 11. Please 8 fol- 
 low 3 them. 12. Do not destroy 5 these documents. 
 
 1 distribuir ; 2 huir ; 3 seguir (see Par. 160) ; 4 atribuir ; 5 destruir ; 
 6 distinguir ; 7 argiiir ; 8 servirse (see Pars. 144, 160). 
 
 THE INTERJECTIONS. 
 171. The principal Interjections are : 
 
 I ah ! i oh ! OHj (denoting grief) 
 
 i ay ! l oh ! OH ! (denoting pain) 
 
 I chito ! i chiton ! SILENCE ! 
 
 j cuidado ! TAKE CARE ! 
 
 I die veras ! INDEED ! 
 
 I ea ! j animo ! WELL ! COME ON f* 
 
 i ha ! i he ! AH ! (denoting joy) 
 i ho ! j hola HI ! HULLO I 
 i hombre ! DEAR ME ! 
 I o ! i Oh ! OH ! (denoting sur- 
 prise) 
 i ojald ! WOULD TO GOD ! 
 
 *This form of conjugation only applies to Verbs where the u is pronounced $ 
 not to such as distinguir (to distioguigh). 
 
SI 
 
 THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 Write out the four Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood of the following Verbs 
 (see paragraphs 78, 79). 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. tener, to have ; 2. haber, to have ; 3. ser, to be ; 4. 
 estar, to be ; 5. tomar, to take ; 6. beber, to drink ; 7. 
 dar, to give (paragraph 118) ; 8. escribir, to write ; 
 9. ver, to see (par. 124) ; 10. venir, to come (par. 147) ; 
 11. poder, to be able to (par. 139) ; 12. ir, to go (par. 120) ; 
 13. decir,to say (par. 123) ; 14. morir, to die (par. 163). 
 
 TWENTY-FIFTH LESSON. 
 
 INTRODUCTORY REMARKS ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 
 
 The employment of this mood is largely a matter of taste. The 
 Indicative would sometimes be equally correct ; and even when the Sub- 
 junctive ought to be employed, the omission to do so seldom destroys or 
 alters the meaning of the sentence. The proper use of the Subjunctive is 
 a GRAMMATICAL NICETY, which foreigners need not study too deeply. 
 
 The second of two Verbs connected by que must be put in 
 the Subjunctive under certain conditions, explained in Paragraphs 
 
 172 to 190, NO MATTER WHAT THE ENGLISH WORDING JS ; and if 
 
 the second Verb in English is not preceded by ' that,' the altera- 
 tion in construction must be made before translating, thus : 
 
 CHANGE INTO 
 
 We deny their hav- 
 ing said that. 
 
 It is impossible for 
 him to do it. 
 
 It is not fair for us 
 to keep them. 
 
 We deny that they 
 have said that. 
 
 It is impossible that 
 he [should] do it. 
 
 It is not fair that we 
 
 [should] keep them 
 
 Negamos que hayan diclio 
 
 eso. 
 
 Es imposible que lo haga. 
 
 
 
 No es justo que los guar- 
 demos. 
 
 The sentence following Hhat' is called the DEPENDENT sentence. 
 EXAMPLES OP 
 
 PRINCIPAL SENTENCES and DEPENDENT SENTENCES. 
 
 it is necessary (es menester) that he should read it (que lo lea) 
 
 I am sorry (Siento) that they are aiot here (que no esten aqui) 
 
 <gT If the Subject of the Verb in the dependent sentence 
 would be the same as ' in the principal sentence, the Infinitive, a 
 (simpler construction, is employed in preference, thus : 
 
87 
 
 } Negamos haber dicho eso. 
 
 I am very pleased to have met you. ) Me alegro mucho de haberle 
 I am very pleased that I have met you. J encontrado. 
 
 EMPLOYMENT OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 
 
 172. The Subjunctive is used after most Verbs expressing a 
 
 MENTAL ACTION OB EMOTION. Examples i 
 We cannot allow you to keep it No podemos dejar que Vd. 
 
 (=allow that you keep it). lo guarde. 
 
 I want them to tell me (= I wish Quiero que me lo digan. 
 that they tell it to me). 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. Does he want her to read it* ? 2. They want you to 
 accept 1 this. 3. They will not want us to keep it. 4. She 
 wants us to stay 2 there. 5. We do not want them to hear 
 us. 6. Do you want me to shut the door ? 7. What does he 
 want me to do ? 8. They want us to pay the bill at 3 once. 3 
 1 aceptar ; 2 quedarse (to stay, to remain) ; 3 enseguida. 
 
 * Translate : ' Does he want that she read it ? ' and use the same con- 
 struction (desear, followed by que and the Subjunctive) throughout the 
 above Exercise. In all cases where the Subjunctive Mood is required in 
 this Lesson, the PBESENT Subjunctive is to be employed. 
 
 173. The Subjunctive is used after most IMPEKSONAL VERBS and 
 expressions. Examples : 
 
 It is necessary for us to give it to Es menester que se lo demos. 
 
 them (=that we give it to them). 
 
 Is it right that the prisoners Esjusto que los presos sean 
 
 [should] be punished ? castigados ? 
 
 It is. better that we [should] send Es mejor que enviemos la 
 
 the answer by post. respuesta por el correo. 
 
 EXERCISE II 
 
 1. It is not necessary 1 for him to pay us (=^ that he pay 
 us) much. 2. It is necessary that he [should] start 2 directly. 3 
 3. It is possible that the money is his. 4. We are 4 sorry 4 that 
 he has not found us. 5. She is 5 afraid 5 he will come. 6. Is it 
 necessary for us to write to them ? or, that we [should] write 
 to them ? 7. Do you wish 6 me to open the windows ? 8. Does 
 he wish 6 us to put it here ? 
 
 1 necesario ; 2salir(seepr. H8) ; Sal instante ; 4 sentir ; 5 fears ; 6 querer 
 
8S 
 
 174. The Subjunctive is used after certain CONJUNCTIONS, of 
 which the principal are : 
 
 after, despnes que ; before, antes que ; unless, a menos quo ; 
 in order that,a fin de que, para que ; until, hasta que ; when, cuando. 
 
 EXAMPLES : 
 
 nntil he arrives hasta que llegue 
 
 jefore he telegraphs antes que telegrafie 
 
 when they send (at some future time) cuando envien 
 
 Cuando is only followed by the Subjunctive when it is not 
 Interrogative, and refers to the future, thus : 
 When I have time, I shall do it. Cuando teng A tiempo, lo har6. BUT : 
 When [ever] I have time, I do it. Cuando tengo tiempo, lo'hago. 
 I used to do it when I had time. Lo haoia, cuando tenia tiemp6. 
 1 did it when I had time. Lo hice cuando tuve tiempo. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. after he comes to see us ; 2. in order that it [may] not 
 cost too much ; 3. before they do the work. 4. When I 
 receive his answer, I shall show it to you. 5. I shall expect 
 you, unless it rains. 6. When he arrives, I shall speak to 
 him. 7. We shall send them the goods when we have time. 
 8. Let 1 me know 1 when you are disengaged. 2 9. Wait until 
 they are ready. 10. We shall pay them before they have 
 finished 3 it. 11. They will pay his bill 4 when they have 
 more money. 12. When he comes to s"ee me, he never stays 5 
 very 6 long. 6 13. When they come back, I shall explain it to 
 them. 14. He always speaks to me when he sees me. 
 
 1 to let know = advise, inform, avisar ; 2 desocupado ; 3 terminal ; 
 4 cuenta ; 5 permanecer ; G much time. 
 
 175. The Subjunctive is generally used after the NEGATIVE 
 FORM of Verbs. 
 
 IMPORTANT EXCEPTION : The Negative Forms of saber and decir 
 are not followed by the Subjunctive, thus : 
 Don't you know he will be there ? i No sabe Vd. que estara alii ? 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 1. 1 do not believe he wants to go out. 2. He did not 
 Bay whether he would be able to do it. 3. We do not 
 believe he will receive any reward. 1 4. Is it not probable 2 
 
M 
 
 that they will be able to see it ? 5. Don't you expect that 
 his cousin will come the 3 day after to-morrow 3 ? 6. We 
 don't expect they will bring it. 7. It is not necessary for us 
 to copy the addresses 4 he gave us. 
 
 1 premie 2 probable ; 3 pasado manana ; 4 direcci6n. 
 
 TWENTY-SIXTH LESSON. 
 
 USE OF THE TENSES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.. 
 
 176. If the first Verb is PRESENT or FUTURE, the PRESENT 
 Subjunctive is employed, as shown in the previous lesson. 
 
 177. If the first Verb is PAST or CONDITIONAL, the IMPERFECT 
 Subjunctive is employed. 
 
 We were afraid you would not re- Temimos que Vd. no lo reci- 
 
 ceive it. biese. 
 
 Would you like me to copy it (=would ) . 
 
 it please you that I copied it) t (I Le Sustana que lo copiase ? 
 
 REMARK I. The Conditional Subjunctive can often be used in place 
 of the Imperfect Subjunctive, and vice versa ; but the Imperfect is prefer- 
 able after the Conjunctions mentioned in par. 174, and after Relative 
 Pronouns. 
 
 REMARK II. The Conditional Subjunctive is frequently substituted 
 for the Conditional Indicative (see par. 146). 
 
 Who would have guessed that ? i Quien hubiera adivinado eso ? 
 
 You ought to explain it to them. Vd. debiera explicarselo. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. 1 didn't think 1 he had come. 2. We wish 2 they hadn't 
 begun. 3. I wish 2 she were not here. 4. Did he want 3 
 me to do it ? 5. It was not necessary for them to speak. 
 
 6. He would have denied that his brother was there. 
 
 7. I should like to have more money. 
 
 1 use ' creer ' ; 2 render as l should like ' (Conditional of * desear ') ; 3 
 Imperfect of ' desear.' 
 
 178. The Imperfect Subjunctive is used after si (if), when the 
 other clause of the sentence is in the Conditional. 
 
 We should give them a prize, if Les dariamos un premio, Si 
 they were more industrious. fuesen mas aplicados. 
 
do 
 
 179. When si (if) means ' whether,' it is followed by the 
 Conditional of the INDICATIVE. Examples : 
 
 I did not know if they would 'come. No sabia si vendrian. 
 He asked me if I could lend him Me pregunto si podria pres- 
 ten pounds. tarle diez libras. 
 
 180. The FUTURE Subjunctive may be used, if it refers to the 
 future ; but this Tense is very seldom employed. 
 
 I will do it, if I can. Lo hare si pudiere (far better, si puedo). 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. 1 should help 1 him, if I were less busy. 2 2. He would 
 copy it, if he had more time. 3. "We should pay them at 
 once, if we had enough money. 4. If he were here, I 
 should give them to him. 5. I should work better, if I had. 
 better tools. 3 6. Ask them if (= whether) they will be at 4 the 
 station to-night. 7. Do you know if he lives in Madrid now ? 
 1 ayudar ; 2 ocupado ; 3 hcrramientaj 4 en. 
 
 AUGMENTATIVE AND DIMINUTIVE TERMINATIONS 
 
 are added to Nouns (and occasionally to Adjectives) to qualify their mean- 
 ing ; but as the use of these terminations presents great difficulties, foreigners 
 should always employ Adjectives instead. The following are the principal : 
 
 181. on, azo, acho, ote express LARGENESS, the three" latter 
 also implying some degree of DISPEOPORTION and AWKWARDNESS. 
 
 hombron, a big man ; hombrazo, a tall, badly built man ; 
 mujerona,* a big woman. 
 
 182. ito, iCO, illo, uelo express SMALLNESS, ito implying in 
 addition NICENESS, FONDNESS, and uelo CONTEMPT. Examples : 
 
 senorita,* an unmarried lady ; Pedrillo, little Peter ; 
 perrillo, a little dog ; perruelo, a cur. 
 
 * All these terminations have a Feminine Form. 
 
 THE PLUEAL OF NOUNS (see also par. 4). 
 
 183. ' Nouns of more than one syllable which end in s, and do 
 not take the stress on the last syllable, are alike in the 
 Singular and Plural, thus : 
 
 the umbrella, el paraguas ; the umbrellas, los paraguas. 
 
 184. Nouns ending in i (accented) add es, thus : 
 
 the ruby, el rubi ; the rubies, los rubies. . 
 
91 
 
 FURTHER RULES ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
 
 FOR REFERENCE ONLY. 
 
 185* The Subjunctive is generally used after quienquiera 
 que (whoever), cualquiera que (whatever), arid donde 
 quiera que (wherever). 
 
 I shall not believe it, whoever says so. No lo creere, quienquiera que 
 
 lo 4iga. 
 
 186. The Subjunctive is also used in a wish or imprecation. 
 Long live the King ! j Viva el rey ! 
 
 Thy Kingdom come ! j Venga Tu reinp ! 
 
 May he arrive in time ! j Que llegue a tiempo ! 
 
 A preceding Verb is understood in such sentences, thus : 
 
 Quiero que viva el rey, Deseo que llegue a tiempo. 
 
 187. The Subjunctive is used after a Superlative, and words" 
 equivalent to Superlatives, such as primero (first) and 
 ultimo (last). 
 
 Give it to the first man that Deselo Vd al primer hombre que 
 comes. venga. 
 
 188. The Verb is put in the Indicative if it expresses a CERTAIN 
 FACT instead of a doubtful contingency. Compare the following : 
 although (= even if) he writes to me aunque me escriba 
 
 although it is late, I shall not go away aunque es tarde, no me ire 
 
 189. The following are the 'principal Verbs expressing a 
 MENTAL EMOTION which are followed by the Subjunctive 
 (unless the Infinitive can be substituted, see page 86). 
 
 aconsejar, to advise esperar, to hope prohibir, to prohibit 
 
 alegrarse, to be glad evitar, to prevent querer, to wish 
 
 avisar, to advise impedir, to prevent regocij arse, to rejoice 
 
 consentir, to consent insistir, to insist rogar, to entreat 
 
 decir, to tell (only when intentar, to intend sentir, to regret 
 
 meaning * to order ') negar, to deny sorprenderse,. to be 
 
 dejar, to allow pedir, to request surprised 
 
 desear, to want permitir, to permit suplicar, to entreat 
 
 dudar, to doubt preferir, to prefer temer, to fear 
 
 190. The Subjunctive is used after the following Conjunctions, 
 in addition to those given on page 88. 
 
 although, aunque in case, en caso que 
 
 except, salvo que, excepto que notwithstanding-, no obstante que 
 
 for fear that, por miedo que provided that, con tal que 
 
 however, por mas que supposing that, (su)puesto que 
 
 in such a way that, de modo que, whether, sea que 
 
 de manera que without^ sin que 
 
VOCABULARY. 
 
 The Numbers indicate the Paragraphs in which the Conju- 
 gations of IRREGULAR VERBS, and the various ways of 
 translating PRONOUNS, etc., are given. 
 
 .The Cardinal and Ordinal NUMBERS, and the names of the 
 DAYS and MONTHS, will be found in Lessons 14 and 15. 
 
 The Gender of Nouns is only given when it is not in accor- 
 dance with the Rule in Paragraph 5. 
 
 A, AN, un, una, 6 
 to be able to, 139 
 accident, accidente 
 to address, dirigir 
 to admire, admirar 
 after, despue's de 
 afternoon, tarde, FEM. 
 against, contra 
 ago, 133 
 to agree, 1 65 
 to alight, apearse, 1 02 
 all, todo, 92 
 to allow, dejar 
 almost, casi 
 already, ya 
 afso, tarnbie*n 
 altar, altar 
 always, siempre 
 among, entre 
 amusing, dpertido 
 anchor, ancla 
 and, y, 113 
 answer, contestaci6n 
 to answer, contestar 
 any, 6, 92, 97 to 99, 132 
 anybody, anyone, 93, 99 
 to appear, parecer, 168 
 to applaud, aplaudir 
 apple, manzana 
 to approve, 1 10 
 are there ? hay ? 
 to arrive, llegar 
 as, 49, 136 
 
 as many, as much, 49 
 as soon as, luego que 
 to ask (enquire), pre- 
 
 guntar 
 to ask (request), 159 
 
 asleep, dormido, durmi- 
 
 to break, romper 
 
 at, a ; at the, 8 [endo 
 
 breakfast, almuerzo 
 
 at home, en casa 
 
 to bring, 151 
 
 at once, ahora 
 
 broken, roto 
 
 to attain, alcanzar 
 
 brother, hermano 
 
 attentive, atento 
 
 brought, traido 
 
 aunt, tla 
 
 but, pero, 115 
 
 author, escritor 
 
 to buy, comprar 
 
 
 by, por, 104 
 
 BAD, malo, 19, 94 
 
 
 badly, mal 
 
 CAB, coche 
 
 bank, banco 
 
 to call, llamar 
 
 banker, banquero 
 
 can, 140, 141 
 
 battle, batalla 
 
 capacious, capaz 
 
 to be, 17 
 
 captain, capitan 
 
 beautiful, herinoso 
 
 careful, cuidadoso 
 
 because, porque 
 
 careless, descuidado 
 
 been, estado 
 
 carpenter, carpintero 
 
 beer, certeza 
 
 carriage, coche 
 
 before, antes de 
 
 to carry, llevar 
 
 to begin, 109 [portarse 
 
 cat, gato 
 
 to behave one's self, corn- 
 
 cause, causa 
 
 to believe, creer 
 
 celebrated, celebre 
 
 better, best, mejor 
 
 certain, seguro 1 
 
 bill, cuenta 
 
 chair, silla 
 
 bird, pajaro 
 
 to change, cambiar 
 
 black, negro 
 
 chapter, capitulo 
 
 blue, azul 
 
 cheap, barato 
 
 boat, buque, bote 
 
 cheese, queso 
 
 book, libro 
 
 child, nino 
 
 to be born, nacer, 168 
 
 child=son, hijo 
 
 both, ambos, ambas 
 
 to choose, 160 
 
 bottle, botella 
 
 church, iglesia 
 
 bought, comprado 
 
 cigar, cigarro 
 
 box, caja 
 
 city, ciudad 
 
 boy, muchacho 
 
 class, clase, FEM. 
 
 brave, valiente 
 
 clear, ciaro 
 
 bread, pan 
 
 clerk, dependieate 
 
clever, habif 
 
 directly, al instante 
 
 -father, padre 
 
 to close, cerrar, 108 
 
 to discover, descubrir, 
 
 to fatigue, fatigar 
 
 coffee, cafe 
 
 distinct, distinto [155 
 
 fault, culpa, falta 
 
 .cold, frio, 130 
 
 to- divert, 162 
 
 favor, favor 
 
 collection, colecci6n 
 
 to divide, dividir 
 
 to fear, temer 
 
 to come, 147 
 
 to do, 126 
 
 to feel, 161 
 
 to come back, 110 
 
 docfor, me'dico 
 
 to fight, pelear 
 
 to commence, 109 
 
 document, docurnento 
 
 to fill, llenar 
 
 to complain, quejarse 
 
 dog, perro 
 
 to find, hallar 
 
 concert, concierto 
 
 dollar, duro, peso 
 
 to finish, acabar, termi- 
 
 to congratulate, felicitar 
 
 done, hecho 
 
 fire, fuego [nar 
 
 to conquer, veneer 
 
 door, puerta 
 
 firm, firme 
 
 to consent, 162 [cia 
 
 double, doble 
 
 floor, suelo 
 
 consequence, consecuen- 
 
 doubt, duda 
 
 flower, flor, FEM. 
 
 to be able to be con- 
 
 to doubt, dudar 
 
 fog, niebla 
 
 tained, 153 
 
 downstairs, abajo 
 
 to follow, 160 
 
 to continue, continual 
 
 dozen, docena 
 
 for, para, 112 
 
 to contradict, 165 
 
 drawer, caj6n 
 
 foreign, extranjero 
 
 on the contrary, al con- 
 
 to dream, 110 
 
 to forget, olvidar 
 
 trario 
 
 dress, vestido 
 
 fork, tenedor 
 
 convenient, conveniente 
 
 to drink, beber 
 
 France, Fran cia 
 
 to cook, cocer, 108 
 
 dry, seco 
 
 to freeze, 109 
 
 to copy, copiar 
 
 
 French^ trance's 
 
 corner, rinc6n 
 
 EACH, cada 
 
 friend, amigo 
 
 to correct, 160 
 
 ear, oreja 
 
 from,de; from the, 8 
 
 to cost, 108 
 
 early, teraprano 
 
 fruit, fruta 
 
 could, 141 
 
 easily, facilmente 
 
 full, lleno 
 
 to count, contar, 110 
 
 easy, facil 
 
 furniture, muebles, PLU. 
 
 country, campo 
 
 to eat, comer 
 
 future, futuro 
 
 cousin, primo 
 
 English, ingle's 
 
 
 to cover, 155 
 
 to enjoy, gozar 
 
 GARDEN, jardin 
 
 cup, taza 
 
 enough, bastante 
 
 general, general 
 
 customer, parroquiano 
 
 envelope, sobre 
 
 gentleman, senor, caba- 
 
 
 to escape, escaparse 
 
 German, aleman [Hero 
 
 DARK, obscuro 
 
 to esteem, estimar 
 
 to get up, levantarse 
 
 daughter, hija 
 
 evening, tarde, FEM. . 
 
 girl, muchacha 
 
 -day, dia, MASC. 
 
 noche (night), FEM. 
 
 to give, 118 
 
 the day after to-morrow 
 
 every, cada 
 
 given, dado 
 
 pasado manana 
 
 everyday, todoslosdias 
 
 glass, vaso 
 
 dear, caro 
 
 everything, todo 
 
 glove, guante 
 
 to defer, 162 
 
 to examine, examinar 
 
 to go, go away, 120 
 
 delicious, delicioso 
 
 exercise, tema, MASC. 
 
 to go out, 148 
 
 to deny, 109 
 
 to expect, esperar 
 
 gold, oro 
 
 to destroy, 170 
 
 experience, experiencia 
 
 good, bueno, 19, 94 
 
 to die, 163 
 
 to explain, explicar 
 
 goods, gneros, PLUR. 
 
 difficult, dificil 
 
 explanation, explicacioa 
 
 grammar, gramatica 
 
 ^difficulty, dificultad 
 
 eye, ojo 
 
 great, grande, 95 
 
 diligent, diligente 
 
 
 greater, 46 
 
 to dine, comer 
 
 FACT, hecho 
 
 to grow, crecer, 168 
 
 dinner, coraida 
 
 faithful, fiel 
 
 growing, creciendo 
 
 to direct; dirigir 
 
 to fall, 152 
 
 to guess, adivinar 
 
94 
 
 HALF, medio 
 
 itself, 65, 100 
 
 band, mano, FEM. 
 
 
 happy, feliz 
 
 JOURNEY, viaje 
 
 hardly, apenas 
 
 jug, jarro 
 
 hat, sombrero 
 
 
 to have, 2, 1 1 
 
 *o KEEP, guardar 
 
 to have to, 145 
 
 key, Have, FEM. 
 
 he, a 
 
 kindness, bondad 
 
 head, cabeza 
 
 king, rey 
 
 to hear, 150 
 
 knife, cuchillo 
 
 heavy, pesado 
 
 to know, 119, 168 
 
 her, to her, 14, 15,66 
 
 
 here, aqui 
 
 LADY, senora 
 
 hers, 38 to 42 
 
 lamp, Jampara 
 
 herself, 65, 100 
 
 large, grange, 95 
 
 high, alto 
 
 last, ultimo 
 
 him, to him, 66 
 
 late, tarde 
 
 himself, 65, 100 
 
 to laugh, 160 
 
 his, 14, 15,38 to 42 
 
 lawyer, abogado 
 
 home, a casa 
 
 lazy,, holgazan 
 
 at home, en casa 
 
 to learn, aprender 
 
 to hope, esperar 
 
 to leave=start,salir, 148 
 
 horse, caballo 
 
 on the left, a >a izquierda 
 
 hot, calido, 130 
 
 to lend, prestar 
 
 hotel, hotel 
 
 less, menos 
 
 hour, hora 
 
 lesson, leccidn 
 
 house, casa 
 
 to let, dejar, 59 
 
 how ? como ? 
 
 letter, carta 
 
 how much ? cuanto ? 
 
 to (tell a) lie, 162 
 
 how many, 92 
 
 to he down, acostarse, 
 
 to hurt, lastimar 
 
 light (NOUN), luz [110 
 
 husband, esposo 
 
 light (ADJECT.), claro 
 
 
 to light, 109 
 
 i yo 
 
 to like, 138 
 
 idle, holgazan 
 
 list, lista 
 
 if, si 
 
 to listen, escuchar 
 
 ill, enfermo [tarn en te 
 
 listening, escuchando 
 
 immediately, inmedia- 
 
 little, pequeno 
 
 important, importante 
 
 a little, un poco 
 
 impossible, imposible 
 
 to live, vivir 
 
 in, en [aplicado 
 
 London, Londres 
 
 industrious, laborioso, 
 
 to look at, mirar 
 
 inhabitant, habitante 
 
 to look for, buscar 
 
 ink, tinta 
 
 looking-for, buscando 
 
 inkstand, tintero 
 
 to lose, 1 08 
 
 to intend, intentar 
 
 to love, amar 
 
 to interfere, meterse 
 
 low, ba;r 
 
 to invite, convidar 
 
 luggage, equipajes 
 
 is there ? hay ? 
 
 
 Italian, italiano 
 
 MADE, hecho 
 
 it, 66; its, 14, 15 
 
 to make, 126 
 
 to make a mistake, equi- 
 
 man, bombre [vocarse 
 
 many, 92 
 
 to get married, casaise 
 
 master, amo 
 
 may, 140 
 
 me, 65, 66 
 
 meat, carne, FEM. 
 
 to meet, eucontrar, 110 
 
 merchant, comerciante 
 
 message, parte 
 
 met, encontrado 
 
 milk, leche, FEM. 
 
 mine, 38 to 40 
 
 minute, minuto 
 
 mistake, error, 102 
 
 money, dinero 
 
 month, mes 
 
 more, mas 
 
 morning, mafiana 
 
 most, 47, 48, 157 
 
 mother, mad re 
 
 to move, 108 
 
 much, 92, 134, 135 
 
 music, musica 
 
 must, 145 
 
 mustard, mostaza 
 
 ray, 14, 15 ; myself, me 
 
 NAME, nombre 
 near, cerca de 
 nearly, casi 
 necessary, n^cesario 
 neighbour, veclno 
 neither, ui 
 nephew, sobrino 
 never, jamas, nunca, 77 
 new, nuevo 
 newspaper, periodico 
 niece, sobrina 
 night, noche, FEM. 
 no, no 
 
 no, none, 92, 132 
 nobody, nadie 
 noise, ruido 
 nor,,ni 
 not, no 
 
 nothing, nada 
 now, ahora 
 number, nuuiero 
 nut, nuea 
 
95 
 
 roOBEY,obedecer,168 
 
 to possess, poseer 
 
 o'clock, 83 
 
 possible, posible 
 
 of, de 
 
 postman, cartero 
 
 of the, 8 
 
 pound, libra 
 
 officer, oficial 
 
 to prefer, 162 
 
 often, amenudo 
 
 present, regalo 
 
 <>n, sobre 
 
 to prevent, 160 
 
 at once, enseguida 
 
 price, precio 
 
 one's self, se, 100 
 
 prince, principe 
 
 only, solamente 
 
 principal, principal 
 
 open, abierto 
 
 to print, 155 
 
 to open, abrir, 155 
 
 professor, profesor 
 
 opinion, opini6n 
 
 to promise, prometer 
 
 or, 6, 114 
 
 proof, prueba 
 
 orange, naranja 
 
 to prove, 110 
 
 order, pedido 
 
 pupili disclpulo 
 
 to order, mandar 
 
 to put, 127 
 
 Dther, otro 
 
 
 ought, 146 
 
 QUARTER, cuarto 
 
 our, 14, 15 
 
 queen, reina 
 
 ours, 38 to 40 
 
 question, pregunta 
 
 ourselves, nos 
 
 quickly, deprisa 
 
 to overtake, alcanzar 
 
 
 to owe, deber 
 
 RAIL, barandilla 
 
 
 rail(way), ferrocarri) 
 
 PAGE, pagina 
 
 to rain, Hover 
 
 painter, pintor 
 
 rare, raro 
 
 'paper, papel 
 
 to read, leer 
 
 parcel, paquete 
 
 ready, listo 
 
 part, parte, FEM. 
 
 feq receive, recibir 
 
 partner, socio 
 
 to recommend, 109 
 
 patience, paciencia 
 
 red, rojo 
 
 to pay, pagar 
 
 to refuse, rehusar 
 
 pear, pera 
 
 regiment, regimiento 
 
 pen, pluma 
 
 to rejoice, alegrarse 
 
 pencil, lapiz, MASC. 
 
 to relate, 110 
 
 penny, nenique 
 
 to repeat, 160 
 
 pepper, pimienta 
 
 to repent, 162 
 
 perhaps, tal vez 
 
 reply, respuesta 
 
 to permit, permitir 
 
 to reply, contestar 
 
 person, persona 
 
 to resolve, 155 
 
 to pick up, recoger 
 
 to respect, respetar 
 
 picture, cuadro 
 
 to return, 110 
 
 pin, alfiler 
 
 rich, rico 
 
 pipe, p'ipa 
 
 on the right, a la derecha 
 
 pity, lastima 
 
 ring, sortija 
 
 plate, plato 
 
 ripe, maduro 
 
 to play, 154 
 
 room, cuarto, habitaci6n 
 
 please, sirva(n)se, see 
 
 room (space), sitio, 153 
 
 pleasure, gusto [page 84 
 
 to rule, regir, 160 
 
 pocket, bolsillo 
 
 to run, correr 
 
 SAFE, seguro 
 
 said, dicho 
 
 sailor, mafinero 
 
 saint, 96 
 
 salt, sal, FEM. 
 
 same, misrao, 92 ' 
 
 sample, muestra 
 
 to satisfy, 165 
 
 to say, 123 
 
 scarcely, apenas 
 
 school, escuela 
 
 to sefe, 124 
 
 to seek, buscar 
 
 to seem, parecer, 168 
 
 seen, visto 
 
 to sell, vender 
 
 to send, enviar, mandar 
 
 serious, grave 
 
 servant, criado 
 
 to serve, 160 
 
 several, varies 
 
 she, ella 
 
 shilling, chelin 
 
 ship, buque 
 
 shoe, zapato 
 
 shop, tienda 
 
 shopkeeper r tendero 
 
 short, bajo 
 
 to show, ensenar, 110 
 
 to shut, 108 
 
 silver, plata 
 
 to sing, cantar 
 
 sir, senor, caballero 
 
 sister, hermana 
 
 to sit down, 109 
 
 to sleep, 164 
 
 slowly, despacio 
 
 small, pequeflo, 46 
 
 to smile, 160 
 
 to smoke, fumar 
 
 smoking, fumando 
 
 to snow, 109 
 
 so, 49, 136 
 
 soldier, soldado 
 
 some, 6, 92, 97, 98, 132 
 
 something, algo 
 
 sometimes, a veces 
 
 son, hijo 
 
 soon, pronto 
 
 as soon as, luego que 
 
 to be sorry, 161 
 
Spain, Espafia 
 Spanish, espanol 
 to speak, hablar 
 speaking, hablando 
 to spend, gastar 
 spoken, hablado 
 spoon, cuchara 
 to start, salir, 148 
 station, estaci6n 
 stick, bast6n 
 still, aiin 
 stone, piedra 
 street, calle, FEM. 
 strong, fuerte 
 to study, estudiar 
 studying, estudiando 
 sugar, azucar 
 to suggest, 162 
 to supply, surtir 
 to suppose, 165 
 sure, segurb 
 
 TABLE, mesa 
 
 to take, tomar 
 
 taken, tornado 
 
 tall, alto 
 
 tea, te" 
 
 to teach, ensefiar 
 
 to tell, 123 
 
 than, que 
 
 thank you, gracias 
 
 that (CONJ. & EEL.) que 
 
 that (DEMONST.), 29, 30 
 
 the, 6, 7 
 
 theatre, teatro 
 
 thee, 65, 66 
 
 their, 14, 15 
 
 theirs, 38 to 42 
 
 them, to them, 66, 69 
 
 themselves, 65, 100 
 
 then, entonces 
 
 there, alli v 131 
 
 there is, are, etc., 131 
 
 these, 29 
 
 they, ellos, ellas 
 
 thing, cosa 
 
 think, creer, 109 
 
 this, 29, 30 ; those, 29 
 
 thou, tti 
 
 to throw, tirar 
 
 to thunder, 110 
 
 96 
 
 thy, 14, 16 
 
 thyself, te 
 
 ticket, billete 
 
 time, tiempo 
 
 time = occasion, vez 
 
 time (of day), hora 
 
 to tire, cansar 
 
 tired, cansado 
 
 to get tired, cansarse 
 
 to, a (and page 74) 
 
 to the, 8 
 
 to-day, hoy 
 
 to-morrow, maiiana 
 
 to-night, esta noche 
 
 tobacco, tabaco 
 
 told, dicho 
 
 too, demasiado 
 
 too much, too many, 92 
 
 tool, herramieuta 
 
 to touch, tocar 
 
 towards, hacia 
 
 town, ciudad 
 
 train, tren 
 
 to travel, via jar 
 
 traveller, viajero 
 
 truth, verdad 
 
 UGLY, feo 
 
 umbrella, i paraguas 
 
 uncle, tlo 
 
 to understand, com- 
 
 prender 
 until, hasta 
 upstairs, arriba 
 us, to us, 66 
 useful, util 
 
 VERY, muy, 134, 137 
 vessel, buque 
 village, aldea 
 voyage, viaje 
 
 to WAIT (for), aguar- 
 
 dar, esperar 
 waiter, mozo, criado 
 waiting, aguardando, 
 
 esperando 
 to walk, 149 
 to want, desear, 138 
 to warm, 109 
 to wash, lavar 
 
 watch, reloj 
 
 water, agua 
 
 way, camino 
 
 we, nosotros 
 
 week, semana 
 
 well, bien 
 
 what? jque*? 
 
 what (RELATIVE) lo que 
 
 when, cuando 
 
 where, donde 
 
 whether, si 
 
 which, 34, 53, 55 
 
 white, bianco 
 
 \vho, 33, 53, 54, 55 
 
 \vhole, todo 
 
 whom ? 33, 54 
 
 whose, 33 
 
 why ? i por que* ? 
 
 wife, esposa, senora 
 
 to be willing to, 138 
 
 to win, ganar 
 
 wind, viento 
 
 window, veutana 
 
 windy, 130 
 
 wine, vino 
 
 wing, ala 
 
 wish, deseo 
 
 to wish, 138 
 
 with, con 
 
 without, sin 
 
 woman, mujer 
 
 word, palabra 
 
 work, trabajo 
 j to work, trabajar 
 j workman, obrero 
 
 worse, peor, 46 
 
 to be worth, 128 
 
 to wound, 162 
 
 to write, escribir, 155 
 
 writing, escribiendo 
 
 written, escrito 
 
 YEAR, auo 
 last year, el afio pasado 
 yes, si 
 
 yesterday, ayer 
 yet, todavia 
 you, to you, 1, 66 
 youjr, 14, 15, 16 
 yours, 41, 42 
 yourself, -ves, 65, 100 
 
SPANISH 
 READING 
 
 SIMPLIFIED 
 
 A COLLECTION OF 
 
 AMUSING ANECDOTES, Etc. 
 
 with 
 
 COPIOUS FOOT-NOTES ON EVERY PAGE 
 
 rendering a 
 
 DICTIONARY UNNECESSARY 
 
 THE ONLY FULLY ANNOTATED READER IN EXISTENCE 
 
 PHILADELPHIA 
 
 DAVID McKAY, Publisher 
 
 604-8 S. Washington Square 
 
INSTRUCTIONS TO STUDENTS. 
 
 The Student is assumed to know the ARTICLES and 
 NOMINATIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS (Lesson 1 in " Spanish 
 Simplified ") the POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES (Lesson 3) and 
 PRONOUNS (Lesson 8), the DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES- 
 and PRONOUNS (Lesson 6), the INTERROGATIVE ADJEC- 
 TIVES and PRONOUNS (Lesson 7), the RELATIVE PRONOUNS 
 (Lesson 10), the NUMBERS (Lessons 14 and 15), the PRESENT 
 TENSES of * tener, haber, ser, estar, 1 and of the REGULAR 
 VERBS (Lessons 1 to 5), and a few words of very frequent 
 occurrence. He should also know the ordinary way of 
 forming the FEMININE and PLURAL ; and it would be advi- 
 sable to read carefully through Lesson 12 in our Grammar, 
 before beginning this Reader. 
 
 A number after a word refers to the English translation 
 at the foot, which bears the same number. If several words 
 are translated together, the number is given after the first 
 word and the last. The literal translations are followed by 
 a translation in good English, preceded by the sign = 
 
 Nouns are translated in the SINGULAR, and Regular 
 Verbs in the INFINITIVE, 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 In the study of Languages, the importance of READING 
 the Foreign Idiom as soon as possible is universally admitted. 
 
 Unfortunately, every year thousands of students give up 
 the attempt in despair. Very few have the time and perse- 
 verance required to search for every word in a Dictionary. 
 A beginner takes three or four hours to go through an 
 ordinary page under these circumstances ; and even then it 
 is doubtful whether he has translated correctly. 
 
 "HUGO'S SIMPLIFIED READER " has been compiled to 
 prevent this great waste of time. By its aid a beginner 
 after a few weeks' study of our Grammar can easily 
 translate a page in less than half an hour, WITH THE CER- 
 TAINTY THAT HE HAS NOT MISTAKEN ME MEANING OP A 
 SINGLE PHRASE. This is ensured by the copious foot-notes, 
 every word being translated until it has occurred' several times. 
 An extensive Vocabulary is thus acquired without effort. 
 
 The contents consist of interesting Anecdotes, etc., which 
 amuse the student, as well as instructing him. In selecting, 
 dry extracts from classical authors have been carefully 
 avoided, it being of far more practical use to acquire the 
 language as spoken and written at the present time. 
 
 Compilers of Reading Books usually explain the absence 
 of notes by the statement that looking out words in a Dic- 
 tionary impresses them better- on the memory. This is a very 
 poor excuse. The real reason is that ONE PAGE WITH CARE- 
 FULLY PREPARED NOTES INVOLVES AS MUCH LABOR AS 
 A DOZEN UN ANNOTATED PAGES, and therefore cannot be 
 produced without much trouble ami expense. 
 
 Most Reading Books are of no more tise to the average 
 student than a newspaper or an ordinary book, as it is nearly 
 as much trouble to refer to a Dictionary as to a Vocabulary 
 on a different page; whereas the copious notes in Hugo's 
 Reader, being always at hand for instantaneous reference, 
 make this book invaluable to the learner. 
 
LIST of WORDS 
 not translated in the Foot- Notes. 
 
 & to, at 
 
 dijo, (he) said or 
 
 mismo, same 
 
 Segwido, second 
 
 ahord, now 
 
 tqld 
 
 muchacho, boy 
 
 sees, six 
 
 al, to the, at the 
 
 dinero, money 
 
 mucho, much 
 
 senor, gentleman, 
 
 alii, there 
 
 Z>ios, God 
 
 machos, many 
 
 sir, Mr. 
 
 amigo, friend. 
 
 doce, twelve 
 
 mujer, woman 
 
 senora, lady, 
 
 aqueL that 
 
 donde, where 
 
 TTM^, very 
 
 madam, Mrs. 
 
 aquellos, those 
 
 dos, two 
 
 
 sesenta, sixty 
 
 aqui, here 
 
 
 Nz^o, child 
 
 sesto, sixth 
 
 aycr, yesterday 
 
 EJ, the 
 
 no, no, not 
 
 setenta, seventy 
 
 
 e7, he, him, it 
 
 noche, night 
 
 setimo, seventh 
 
 "Bieu, well 
 
 ella, she, her, it 
 
 ?zowo, ninth 
 
 si, if, whether 
 
 buen(o)> good 
 
 ellos, they, them 
 
 nosotros, we, us 
 
 si, yes 
 
 
 07z, in, on 
 
 noventa, ninety 
 
 sa'ete, seven 
 
 Caballero, sir, 
 
 entre, between, 
 
 nuestro, our(s) 
 
 sew, without 
 
 gentleman 
 
 among 
 
 nueve, nine 
 
 sobre, on, upon 
 
 caballo, horse 
 
 ese, that 
 
 ?mevo, new 
 
 soldado, soldier 
 
 ca/Ze, street 
 
 esos, those 
 
 
 sombrero, hat 
 
 carta, letter 
 casa, house 
 
 espanol, Spanish 
 este, this 
 
 o, w, or 
 ochenta, eighty 
 
 sw, his," her, its, 
 your, their 
 
 catorce, fourteen 
 
 estos, these 
 
 oc^o, eight 
 
 suyo, his, her(s), 
 
 c^ew (to) , hundred 
 
 
 octavo, eighth 
 
 your(s), their(s) 
 
 ciwco, five 
 cincuenta, fifty 
 
 Orran(de), great, 
 large 
 
 once, eleven 
 otro, other 
 
 Mercer (o), third 
 
 ciudad t town, 
 city 
 COAHO, as, how, 
 like, what 
 
 Hablar, (to) 
 speak 
 hermano, brother 
 
 Padre, father 
 pa,pel, paper 
 para, for, (in or- 
 
 tiempo, time 
 ^'//to, ink 
 todo, all 
 trabajar, to work 
 
 con, with 
 cosa, thing 
 
 &yo, son 
 hombre, man 
 
 der) to 
 pequeno, small, 
 
 trabojo, work 
 irece, thirteen- 
 
 criado, servant 
 
 Aora, hour, time 
 
 little 
 
 treinta, thirty 
 
 cual t which 
 cuando, when 
 
 Aoy, to-day 
 
 pero, but 
 pluma, pen 
 
 /res, three 
 to, thy 
 
 cuarenta, forty 
 
 La, Zas, the 
 
 JDOCO, little, a few 
 
 <w, thou, thee 
 
 cuartOi room, 
 
 lection, lesson 
 
 por, by, for 
 
 ta#o, thine 
 
 fourth 
 
 
 porque, because 
 
 
 cuatro, four 
 cuchillo, knife 
 CM^o, whose 
 
 /o, /os, the 
 MaaVe, mother 
 
 por tfwe, why 
 primer (o), first 
 puerta, door 
 
 Un(o), a, an, one 
 w?2os, some, any 
 usted, Fa*., you 
 
 De, of, from, to, 
 
 mal(o), bad, ill 
 manana, morn- 
 
 Qwe, which, what, 
 who, that, than 
 
 Veinte, twenty 
 
 with 
 
 ing, to-morrow 
 
 quien, who, whom 
 
 vez, time 
 
 cfeoer, (to) owe 
 
 mas, more, most 
 
 quince, fifteen 
 
 rm'r, (to) liv.e 
 
 decimo, tenth 
 
 menos, less, least 
 
 quinto, fifth 
 
 vosotros, you 
 
 c^, of the, from 
 
 wzi, my 
 
 
 vuestro, your(s) 
 
 the 
 
 iwi, me 
 
 "Reloj, watch, 
 
 
 dia, day 
 
 mi7, thousand 
 
 clock 
 
 Y, e, and 
 
 cfre?, ten 
 
 mio, mine 
 
 rey, king 
 
 y) i 
 
'La Hospitalidad.* 
 
 Un soldado pregunto 2 a uno de sus camaradas, 3 que volvia* 
 de una campafia, 5 si habia 6 hallado 7 mucha 1 hospitalidad 1 en 
 Holanda. 1 j Oh ! si, mucha, 1 respondio 1 ; todo el tiempo que 
 he estado 8 alii lo he pasado 9 en el hospital. 
 
 not to be translated , 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 2 asked ; 3 comrade ; 4 was returning ; 5 campaign ; 6 (he) had ; 7 found ; 
 8 been ; 9 passed. 
 
 La Cuna. 2 
 
 Una pobre 3 mujer pidio 4 un dia limosna 5 a un caballero 
 muy alto 6 con unos pies 7 desmesurados, 8 y le 9 dijo, viendo 1 . 
 que no la 13 queria 11 socorrer, 12 que por el amor 14 de Dios le 16 
 diese 15 al menos 17 uno de sus zapatos. 18 
 
 I Como 19 ! uno de mis zapatos 18 ? Y que quiere 20 Vd. 
 hacer 21 con el ? 
 
 Hare 22 una cuna 2 para mi nino. 
 
 2 cradle ; 3 poor ; 4 asked ;' 5 alms ; 6 tall ; 7 foot ; 8 huge ; 9 (to) him ; 
 10 seeing ; 11 (he) would ; 12 succour ; 13 her ; 14 Jove ; 15 he should give ; 
 16 her ; 17 least ; 18 shoe , 19 what ; 20 will ; 21 do ; 22 (1) shall make. 
 
 El Charlatan. 
 
 Un charlatan 1 de los 2 que venden 3 especificos 1 universales, 1 
 mando 4 a buscar 5 aun medico 6 porque 7 estaba 8 malo. 9 Llego 10 
 el medico, 6 y luego 11 que 11 le 13 vio 12 le 13 dijo 14 que no 15 tenia 
 nada r 15 y que podia 16 haberse excusado 16 de llamarle 17 por una 
 cosa tan 18 frivola. 1 
 
 i Como 19 frivola 1 ? respondio 1 el charlatan, 1 <; sabe 20 Vd. 20 
 que por descuido 21 he tornado 22 una de mis pildoras 23 ? 
 
 2 those ; 3 sell ; 4 sent ; 5 seek , 6 physician ; 7 because ; 8 (he) was , 
 9 ill ; 10 arrived ; 11 as soon as ; 12 (he) saw ; 13 (to) him ; 14 (he) said ; 
 15 (he) had nothing=nothing was the matter with him ; 16 (he) might 
 have excused himself (=avoided) ; 17 call(ing) him ; 18 so ; 19 how ; 20 do 
 you know ; 21 carelessness ; 22 taken ; 23 pill. 
 
 * English words ending in ^usually end in dad in Spanish. 
 
El Valor. 
 
 Un hombre, que se 2 habia vanagloriado 2 de su valor, 1 huy6 3 
 en eierta 4 ocasion 1 de su contrario, 5 y uno de los testfgos 6 
 de sus fanfarronadas, 7 que le 8 vio 8 correr, 9 le 11 grit6 10 : 
 t Donde esta ese valor 1 ? y el, sin dejar 12 de correr, 9 le 11 
 replieo 13 : En las piernas. 1 * 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 2 had bragged ; 3 fled ; 4 (a) certain ; 5 opponent ; 6 witness ; 7 boast ; 8 
 saw him ; 9 run ; 10 called out ; 1 1 to him ; 12 =ceasing ; 13 replied ; 14 leg. 
 
 El Aldeano 2 y los Monos.3 
 
 Un aldeano 2 que llevaba 4 de 5 parte 5 de su amo 6 al seiior 7 del 
 pueblo 8 de 9 regalo 1 ^ un canasto 11 de peras, 13 encontr6 13 en la 
 escalera 14 dos grandes monos 3 con vestidos 16 azules 15 bordados 17 
 de oro 18 y espada 19 ceiiida, 20 que se 21 arrojaron 21 a la fruta 1 
 en 22 cuanto 22 la 24 vieron. 23 Como 25 el aldeano 2 no habia 26 visto 28 
 nunca 27 esta especie 1 de animates, 1 se 29 quito la montera 29 con 
 mucha 1 cortesia, 1 y les 31 dejo 30 hacer 32 lo 38 que quisieron. 33 
 
 Apenas 34 agarraron 35 los monos 3 algunas 36 peras 12 cuando se 87 
 marcharon 37 a comerlas, 38 y tomando 39 en ton ces 40 su canasto, 11 
 se 41 presento 41 al senor. 7 Este 42 noto 43 la falta 44 y preguntole 45 
 -^n que consistia, 46 a lo que contesto 48 el labriego 47 : 
 
 44 Senor, lleno 50 venia, 49 pero los senoritos, 51 vuestros hijos, 
 han tornado 52 las 53 que f altan, 54 y quedan 55 comiendolas 56 en la 
 escalera. 14 Algunos 36 criados que habian 26 sido 57 testigos 58 del 
 Jance, 59 descubrieron 60 la sencillez 61 del aldeano, 2 que fue 62 
 muy celebrada 1 en la casa, y todo el pueblo 8 se 63 rio 63 de ella. 
 
 2^ villager , 3 monkey ; 4 was taking , 5=on the part ; 6 master ; 7 squire ; 
 8 village ; 9=as-a ; 10 present , 11 basket , 12 pear , 13 encountered , 14 stair- 
 case ; 15 blue ; 16 dress ; 17 embroidered , 18 gold , 19 sword , 20 girded ; 
 21 flung themselves=darted , 22 immediately , 23 they saw ; 24 it ; 25 as ; 
 26 had , 27 never , 28 seen , 29 he took off his cap , 30 let ; 31 them ; 
 32 do ; 33 what they liked \ 34 hardly , 35 seized ; 36 some ; 37 they 
 marched off ; 38 eat them ; 39 taking ; 40 then , 41 he presented him- 
 self ; 42 =the latter ; 43 noticed , 44 deficiency ; 45 asked him ; 46 it con- 
 sisted ; 47 peasant ; 48 answered ; 49 it came ; 50 full ; 51 young gentlemen ; 
 r>2 taken , 53 those ; 54 are missing ; 55 remain=are now ; 56 eating them ; 
 f>7 been ; 58 witness ; 59 incident ; 60 discovered=made known ; 61 sim- 
 plicity ; 62 was ; 63 made merry. 
 
From this point the Student is assumed to understand the formation 
 of the Participles and the Future Tense (see Lessons 6 and 8 in 
 "SPANISH SIMPLIFIED.") 
 
 Dispute 1 de dos Reos. 2 
 
 Un salteador 3 de caminos 3 y un deshollinador, 4 convencidos 6 
 de un robo 6 domestico, 1 fueron 7 condenados 1 a muerte 8 a un 
 mismo tiempo. El salteador, 3 ricamente 9 vestido, 10 subio 11 al 
 patibulo 12 con mucha 1 arrogancia 1 y descaro, 13 pero parecio 14 
 que ponia 15 la mayor 16 atencion 1 en las exhortaciones 1 del re- 
 ligioso, 17 y el deshollinador 4 se 18 acerco 18 a el para escuchar 19 
 sus palabras 21 edificantes. 20 Retirate, 22 le 24 dice 28 el salteador 8 
 de camirios, 3 y trata 25 de resignarte. 26 No quiero, 27 le 24 respon- 
 de, 1 pues 28 yo tengo tanto 29 derecho 30 como 31 tii a estar aqui. 
 
 2 criminal ; 3 highwayman ; 4 chimney-sweep ; 6 convicted ; 6 robbery ; 
 7 wre ; 8 death ; 9 richly* ; 10 dressed ; 11 mounted ; 12 gallows ; 13 im- 
 pudence ; 14 it appeared ; 15 was placing ; 16 greatest ; 17 clergyman ; 
 18 approached ; 19 listen to ; 20 edifying ; 21 word ; 22 go back ; 23 says ; 
 24 (to), him ; 25 try ; 26 resign thyself j 27 I will ; 28 since ; 29 as much ; 
 30 right j 31 as. _ _ 
 
 Un Hijo obediente. 
 
 Un padre anciano 2 y rico 3 pkro bastante 4 avaro, 5 envid 6 a 
 su hijo a estudiar 1 a Salamanca, encargandole 7 sobre 8 tpdo que 
 viviese 9 con la mas estricta 1 economia. 1 El joven, 10 a 11 f uer de 11 
 hijo obediente, se 12 informo 12 del precio 13 de los principales 1 
 articulos 1 de consu'mo 1 luego 14 que 14 llego 15 a la ciudad. 
 
 Pregunto 16 cuanto 17 costaba 19 una vaca 18 y le dijeron 20 que Q 
 de trescientos a cuatrocientos francos 1 ; informose 12 luego 21 
 del precio 13 de las perdices 22 y le respondieron 1 que de dos a 
 tres francos 1 cada 23 una. 
 
 Entonces, 24 dijo para si 25 el mozuelo, 26 sera bueno comer 27 
 perdices 22 todos los dias para obedecer 28 y dar 29 gusto 30 a mi 
 padre. 
 
 2 old ; 3 rich ; 4 enough rather; 5 stingy ; 6 sent ; 7 charging him ; 8 
 above ; 9 he should live ; 10 youth ; 11 like ; 12 informed himself=en- 
 quired ; 13 price ; 14 as soon as ; 15 he arrived ; 16 he asked ; 17 how much ; 
 18 cow ; 19 cost ; 20 they told ; 21 afterwards, next ; 22 partridge ; 23 each ; 
 24 then ; 25 himself ; 26 youth ; 27 to eat ; 28 obey ; 29 give ; 30 pleasure, 
 
 * English Adverbs ending in ly usually end in mente in Spanish* 
 
8 
 
 Estratagema singular de Cristobal Col6n. 
 
 Cristobal 2 Colon 2 hizo 3 un desembarco 4 en Jamaica en 
 1504, y trat6 5 de formar 1 un establecimiento. 6 Los insulares* 
 se 8 apartaron 8 de la costa 9 dejando 10 a los Espanoles 11 sin 
 viveres. 12 Una estratagema 1 singular 1 se 13 puso 13 en ejecucidn 1 
 en vista 14 de tal 16 apuro. 16 
 
 Debia 17 haber muy en breve 17 un eclipse 1 de luna. 18 Col6n 
 mand6 19 llamar 20 a los jefes 21 de los pueblos 23 vecinos, 22 y les 24 
 dijo con tono 1 firme 1 : Muy pronto 25 sereis 26 castigados 26 ; el 
 dios todopoderoso 27 de los Espanoles, 11 que yo adoro, 1 va 28 a 
 daros 28 sus mas terribles 1 golpes, 29 y en prueba 30 de lo que 
 os 32 digo, 31 vereis, 33 desde^esta 34 noche, encenderse 35 la luna, 18 
 despues 36 oscurecerse, 37 y negaros 58 su luz. 39 Este seri 40 el 
 preludio 1 de vuestras desgracias, 41 si no os 42 aprovechais 43 de 
 mi aviso. 43 
 
 Comienza 44 en^efecto 1 a 45 pocas 45 horas el eclipse. 1 La deso- 
 lacidn 1 entre 46 los salvajes 47 es tan 48 grande que van 49 todos 4 
 postrarse 50 ^ los pies 51 de Colon, jurando 52 que nada 53 le 55 falta- 
 ria. 54 Este hombre habil 56 aparenta 57 dejarse conmover 67 ; se 58 
 encierra 58 como 59 para desarmar 1 la colera 60 celeste, 1 y mues- 
 trase 61 pocb despues, 36 anunciando 1 que Dios se 62 haapiadado 62 
 y que la luna 18 volveria 63 a aparecer. 63 Los Indios, 1 que qneda- 
 ron 64 persuadidos 1 deque este estranjero 1 disponia 65 de lanatura- 
 leza 06 a su arbitrio, 67 no le 69 dejaron 68 carecer 70 de cosa alguna. 71 
 
 2 Christopher Columbus ; 3 made ; 4 landing ; 5 tried ; 6 settlement ; 7 is- 
 lander ; 8 withdrew ; 9 coast ; 10 leaving ; 11 Spaniard ; 12 provisions ; 13 
 =was put ; 14 y^ew ; 15 such ; 16 want ; 17 =there was very soon tp take 
 place ; 18 moon j_ 19 ordered ; 20 to call ; 21 chief ; 22 neighbouring ; 23 
 village ; 24 to them ; 25 soon ; 26 you will be punished : 27 almighty ; 28 ia 
 going to give you ; 29 blow ; 30 proof ; 31 I say ; 32 to you ; 33 you will see ; 
 34 from this=this very ; 35 =show its light ; 36 afterwards ; 37 disap- 
 pear ; 38 deny you ; 39 light ; 40 will be ; 41 misfortune ; 42 you avail 
 yourselves ; 43 warning ; 44 begins ; 45 =in a few ; 46 among ; 47 savages ; 
 48 so ; 49 they go ; 50 prostrate themselves ; 51 foot ; 52 swearing ; 53 
 nothing ; 54 should be wanting ; 55 to him ; 56 clever ; 67 pretends to allow 
 himself to be affected ; 58~withdraws ; 59 as if ; 60 anger ; 61 shows him- 
 self ; 62 lias been appeased ; 63 would appear again ; 64 remained ; 65 dis- 
 posed ; 66 nature; 67 will j 68 let ; 69 him ; 70 be in want ; 71 any 
 
Ifrom this point the Student is assumed to understand the formation 
 of the Imperative and Past Definite (see Lweow 9 and 10 in 
 " SPANISH SIMPLIFIED "). 
 
 tin nino positivo. 
 
 Un nino lloraba 2 mucho porque habia 3 perdido 4 dos fran- 
 cos 1 que tenia. 8 Un tio 5 suyo 6 le rega!6 7 igual 8 cantidad 9 para 
 con'solarle, 10 pero el nino Iloraba 11 aun 12 mas y decia 13 : "Si no 
 hubiese 14 perdido 4 mis dos francos, 1 ahora tendria 15 cuatro." 
 
 2 wept ; 3 he had ; 4 lost ; 5 uncle ; 6 (of) his ; 7 regalar, to present ; 8 
 equal ; 9 quantity ; 10 console him ; 11 wept ; 12 still ; 13 said ; 14 1 had ; 
 161 should have. 
 
 La Forma de la Tierra. 
 
 Un maestro 2 de escuela, 3 querlendo 4 un dia explicar 5 a sus 
 discipulos 6 la forma 1 de la Tierra, 7 la 9 compar6 8 con su taba- 
 quera, 10 la cual era 11 redonda. 12 Pocos dias despues, 13 presen- 
 t6se 14 en la escuela 3 un inspector, 1 y segiin 15 costumbre, 16 
 dirigio 17 algunas 18 preguntas 19 a los escolares. 1 Despues 20 de 
 examinarlos 20 de gramatica 1 y aritmetica, 1 paso 21 a geograf ia, 1 
 y les 23 pregunto 22 cual era 11 la forma 1 de la Tierra. 7 
 
 Todos permanecieron 24 callados. 25 El maestro, 2 a 26 fin de 26 
 ref rescar 27 la memoria 1 de los muchachos, saco 28 la tabaquera 10 
 del bolsillo 29 ; pero desgraciadamente, 30 para hacer 31 honor 1 al 
 inspector, 1 habia 32 aquel dia traido 33 una tabaquera 10 de plata 34 
 que no 35 usaba mas que 35 Ios 36 domingos, 36 y que era cuadrada. 37 
 
 Inmediatamente, 1 un discipulo 6 levanto 38 la mano 39 para 
 indicar 1 que el sabia 40 la respuesta, 41 y dijo : 
 
 " Senor, la Tierra 7 es cuadrada 37 los 36 domingos, 36 y redon- 
 da 12 los demas 42 dias de la semana. 43 " 
 
 2 master ; 3 school ; 4 wishing ; 5 to explain ; 6 pupil ; 7 earth ; 8 com- 
 parar, to compare ; 9 it ; 10 snuff-box ; 11 was ; 12 round ; 13 after , 14 
 presented himself ; 15 according to ; 16 custom ; 17 dirigir, to address ; 18 
 Borne ; 19 question ; 20 after examining them ; 21 pasar, to pass ; 22 pre- 
 guntar, to ask ; 23 them ; 24=remained ; 25 silent ; 26 in order to.; 27 re- 
 fresh ; 28 sacar, to draw out ; 29 pocket ; 30 unfortunately ; 31 do ; 32 had ; 
 33 brought ; 34 silver ; 35 he only used ; 36 on Sundays; 37 square ; 38 le 
 yantar, to raise ; 39 hand ; 40 knew ; 41 answer ; 42 other ; 43 week. 
 
10 
 
 Los ciuco Toros. 
 
 El Marques 1 de Villa Hermosa 2 tenia 3 intenci6n x de pasar* 
 un lugar 5 vecino 6 4 sus estados 7 donde se 10 celebraba 10 una 
 corrida 8 de toros. 9 Sabiendo 12 los alcaldes 11 la intencion 1 del 
 marques, 1 f ueron 13 a Cuenca, donde estaba, 2 y con expresivas 1 
 suplicas 14 le 16 rogaron 15 se 17 dignase 17 ir 18 a tiempo que pudiese 19 
 ver 20 la f uncion. 1 Alegrose 21 el marques del convite, 22 y con 
 grande alborozo 23 les 25 pregunto 24 : <r y que toros 9 teneis 26 ? 
 
 Uno de los alcaldes 11 respondio 1 : Cuatro, excelentisimo 1 
 seiior ; y si vuestra Excelencia 1 viene, 27 seran cinco. 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 
 2 beautiful ; 3 tad ; 4 pass ; 5 place ; 6=near ; 7 state ; 8=fight ; 9 bull ; 
 10 was taking place ; 11 magistrates, authorities ; 12 knowing ; 13 went ; 
 14 request ; 16 rogar, to entreat ; 16 him ; 17=to condescend ; 18 to go ; 
 19 he could ; 20 see , 21 was pleased j 22 invitation ; 23 joy ; 24 preguntar, 
 to ask ; 25 them ; 26 have you ; 27 comes. 
 
 La Habladora. 
 
 Para vengarse 2 de una habladora 3 in sufrible 4 y per judicial, 1 
 la 5 presentaron 1 un dia un sujeto 6 que la 8 dijeron 7 era 9 un 
 literato 10 de una conversacion 1 interesante. 11 Como 12 su flaco 13 
 era 9 el 14 de hablar mucho y de creerse 15 con talento, 1 le 16 re- 
 cibio 16 con mucho placer 17 ; pero ansiosa 18 por lucir 19 su pico 20 
 se 21 puso 21 a hablar al momento 1 haciendole 22 mil preguntas 23 
 diferentes 1 sin lograr 24 la men or 25 respuesta. 26 
 
 Hecha 27 la visita, 1 1 esta Vd. contenta 1 de su 28 presentado 28 ? 
 la 8 preguntaron. 
 \ Oh ! si 29 estoy encantada 29 : es hombre de gran talento. 1 
 
 A esta exclamacion 1 todos se 30 echaron a reir, 30 pues 31 este 
 gran talento era 9 un mudo. 32 
 
 2 avenge themselves ; 3 chatterbox ; 4 insufferable ; 5 to her ; 6 subject 
 =person ; 7 they told ; 8 her ; 9 was ; 10 literary man ; 11 interesting ; 12 
 as ; 13 weakness ; 14=that ; 15 belie v(ing) herself ; 16 she received him ; 
 17 pleasure ; 18 anxious ; 19 to show off ; 20 loquacity , 21 she put herself 
 =she began ; 22 making to him=putting to him ; 23 question ; 24 obtain- 
 (ing) ; 25 least ; 26 reply ; 27 done=over ; 28=the person presented to you -, 
 29=1 am indeed encBTanted ; 30 burst out laughing , 31 for ; 32 dumb, 
 
11 
 
 From this point the Student is assumed to understand the formation 
 of the Imperfect Indicative and Conditional Indicative (see Lweon 
 11 in" SPANISH SIMPLIFIED 1 '). 
 
 El Cura y sus Visitas. 
 
 Cuando los curas 3 parrocos 2 visitan 1 sus feligreses, 4 algu- 
 nas 5 veces 6 hallanse 7 en varies 1 incidentes, 1 unos 5 agradableg 8 
 y otros tristes. 9 Hallose 10 en uno de los primeros casos 11 el 
 cura 3 de una parroquia 12 no lejos 13 de Londres. 
 
 Habia visitado 1 algunos 5 de sus feligreses 4 cuando llego 14 
 a la casa de uno que se 15 hallaba 15 en las delicias 16 del 
 dia 17 de lavado. 17 La buena mujer no queriendo 18 presen- 
 tarse 19 delante 20 del senor cura 3 ^ con el vestido 21 de lavar, 21 
 escondiose 22 detras 23 del enjugador, 24 y dijo a su muchacho 25 
 que cuando abriera 26 la ,puerta al cura, le 28 dijera 27 que habia 
 salido 29 de casa. 
 
 Entro 30 el cura, y el muchacho cumpliendo* 1 su encargo 32 
 empezo 33 a decirle 34 que su madre habia salido 29 a dar 56 un 
 paseo. 36 Pero la mujer, sin advertirlo, 37 dejaba 38 ver 38 la 
 punta 39 del pie 40 por debajo 41 del enjugador. 24 
 
 El cura apercibiendolo 42 dijo al muchacho : Cuando tu 
 madre vuelva 43 le 45 diras 44 que la proxima 46 vez* 5 que saiga 47 
 a paseo, 48 no 49 olvide 49 de Ilevarse 50 los pies, 50 porque son cosas 51 
 muy utiles 62 para las peisonas 1 aficionadas 53 a andar. 53 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the game, as in English. 
 
 2 parochial ; 3 parson ; 4 parishioner ; 5 some ; 6 time ; 7 they find 
 themselves; 8 agreeable; 9 sad; 10 found himself j 11 case; 12 
 parish ; 13 far ; 14 llegar, to arrive ; 15 found herself =was ; 16 delight ; 
 17 washing-day ; 18 wishing ; 19 to present herself ; 20 before ; 21 
 washing-ciress ; 22 hid herself ; 23 behind ; 24 clothes-horse ; 25 boy=son ; 
 26 he should open ; 27 he should tell ; 28 him ; 29 gone out ; 30 entrap to 
 enter ; 31 cumplir, to fulfil ; 32 instruction ; 33 began ; 34 tell him ; 
 35 give=take ; 36 walk ; 37 noticing it ; 38=allowed to be seen ; 89 
 point ; 40 foot ; 41 underneath ; 42 perceiving it ; 43 cornea back ; 
 44 thou wilt tell ; 45 her ; 46 next ; 47 she goes out ; 48 walk ; 49= 
 she is not to forget ; 50 t^ke he.r feet with her ; 51 thiag j 53 uge.ful ; 
 53=fond of .walking. 
 
El Laoftyo inocente. 
 
 XJn caballero mando 3 a su lacayo 8 que viese 4 la hora qt 
 era en el reloj 5 de so! 5 qne habia 6 sobre una piedra 7 en el jardin 6 ; 
 y despues 9 de haber 9 tardado 10 mas de 11 una hora, le 18 13ev6 12 
 el reloj 5 de sol 5 y le 13 dijo : Ahi 14 esta, busque 15 Vd. la 
 hora, 15 pues 16 yo no he podido 17 ' hallarla. 18 
 
 2 mandar, to send ; 3 footman ; 4 he might see ; 5 sun-dial ; 6=(there) 
 was ; 7 stone ; 8 garden ; 9 after having ; 10 tardar, to delay ; ll=than ; 
 12 llevar, to carry ; 13 to him ; 14 here ; 15 look for the time yourself ; 
 16 for ; 17 been able ; 18 to find it. 
 
 La Tetera. 
 
 Un marinero 1 a 2 bordo 2 de una fragata 3 mercante, 1 tuvo 
 la desgracia 4 de dejar 5 caer 6 al mar 7 una tetera 8 de plata, 9 y 
 lleno 10 de temor 11 se 12 fue 12 al camarote 13 del comandante, 1 y 
 le 15 dijo 14 : Mi capitan, 1 ; se 16 puede decir 16 de una cosa" 
 que se 18 sabe 18 donde esta, que esta perdida 19 ? 
 
 No, puesto 20 que se 18 sabe 18 su paradero. 21 
 
 En ese caso, 1 nada 22 teneis que temer 22 por vuestra tetera, 8 
 porque yo se 23 que esta en el fondo 24 del mar. 7 
 
 2 on board ; 3 frigate ; 4 misfortune , 5 let f 6 fall ; 7 sea ; 8 tea-pot ; 
 9 silver ; 10 full ; 11 fear ; 12 he went ; 13 cabin ; 14 said ; 15 to him ; 
 
 16 can it be said ; 17 thing ; 18 (it) is known ; 19 lost ; 20 supposing ; 
 21 position ; 22 you have nothing to fear ; 23 know ; 24 bottom. 
 
 Una Orden. 
 
 El ilustre 1 caballero Taylor ref eria 8 un dia los honored 
 que habia recibido 3 de las diferentes 1 cortes 1 de Enropa, 1 y 
 las 6rdenes 4 con que habia sido condecorado 1 por un gran 
 niimero 1 de soberanos. 5 
 
 Un caballero que se 6 hallaba 6 cerca 7 de 7 el le dijo que no 
 habia nombrado 8 al rey de Prusia 1 : Presumo 1 (anadio 9 ) que 
 este 10 no os 12 dio 11 ninguna 13 orden. 
 
 Perdone 14 Vd., 14 repuso 15 Taylor, pues 16 me ha dado 17 la 
 orden 4 perentoria 1 de salir 18 de 18 sus Estados. 19 
 
 2 was relating ; 3 received ; 4 order ; 5 sovereign ; 6 found himself= 
 was ; 7 near ; 8 nombrar, to name ; 9 anadir, to add ; 10=tnis one 5 
 11 gave ; 12 you ^ 13 no ; 14 (I beg your) pardon ; 15 replied j 16 since; 
 
 17 given ; 18 go out of=quit ; 19 states. 
 
13 
 
 From this poinTthe Student is assumed toMsnow the Conjunctive 
 Personal Pronouns, and the Rules on their po&ition (see Lesson 12 in 
 SPANISH SIMPLIFIED"). 
 
 El Condenado. 
 
 Un hombre condenado 2 a las llamas 3 se escapo 1 de las 
 manos 4 de la justicia. 1 No pudiendo 5 hacer 6 otra cosa, 7 le 
 quemaron 8 en efigie. 1 Aquel mismo dia atraveso 10 cabal- 
 mente 11 el reo 9 una de las mas altas 12 montafias 13 de los Piri- 
 neos, 1 ir decia u despues 15 : Nunca 16 he tenido 17 mas f rio 18 
 que el dia que me quemaron. 8 
 
 2 condenar, to condemn ; 3 flame ; 4 hand ; 5 being able ; 6 to do ; 7 thing; 
 8 quemar, to burn ; 9 criminal ; 10 passed over ; 1 1 exactly ; 12 high ; 13 
 mountain ; 14 he used to say ; 15 afterwards ; 16 never ; 17=been : 18 cold. 
 
 El Juez, el Abogado y el Burro. 
 
 En un distrito 1 judicial 1 de Luisiana, 1 estaba el tribunal 1 
 ocupado 1 con la vista 2 de una causa, 3 cuyo abogado 4 no 
 gozaba 5 de gran favor 1 con el juez. 6 Resumia 7 el magistrado 1 
 los hechos 8 de la* causa, 3 cuando rebuzn6 10 descompasada- 
 mente 11 un burro, 5 alii 12 cerca. 12 
 
 <? Que es eso ? pregunto 13 el juez 6 con enojo. 14 
 
 Nada, 15 seiior, contesto 16 el abogado, 4 es el eco 1 de la voz 17 
 de vuestra senoria. 18 
 
 Callose 19 el juez, 6 aunque 20 hubiera 21 podido mandar 21 a la 
 carcel 28 al insolente, 22 pero la casualidad 24 vino 25 en su ayuda. 2 * 
 
 Cuando el abogado 4 ref utaba 1 con gran calor 27 ciertas 28 ob- 
 servaciones 1 del juez, 6 volvio 29 el burro a rebuznar 20 con 
 tanta 80 f uerza, 31 que no se 32 oia 32 la voz 17 del abogado. En- 
 tonces 33 el juez dijo con mucha gravedad 1 : 
 
 "Calle 34 uno de Vds. si quieren 35 ser oidos, 36 porque 
 hablanda los dos a un tiempo es imposible. 1 " 
 
 2 =lrial ; 3 lawsuit ; 4 lawyer ; 5 gozar, to enjoy , 6 judge ; 7 was 
 summing up ; 8 fact ; 9 donkey ; 10 rebuznar, to bray ; 11 excessively ; 12 
 there near=close by ; 13 preguntar, to ask ; 14 anger , 15 nothing ; 16 con- 
 testar, to reply ; 17 voice ; 18 lordship ; 19 kept silent ; 20 although ; 21 he 
 could have sent ; 22 insolent (fellow*) ; 23 prison ; 24 chance ; 25 came ; 
 2-5 aid ; 27 heat ; 28 certain ; 29 the donkey brayed again ; 30 so much ; 
 31 force ; 32 was heard ; 33 then ; 34 be silent ; 35 you wish ; 36 heard* 
 
 * Adjective* are very frequently used as Nouns in Spanish. 
 
14 
 
 Dispute entre un Viajero Espaflol y un Indiano. 
 
 TJn viajero 2 espanol encontro* a un indiano 1 en cierto 4 
 bosque. 5 Ambos 6 iban 7 a 8 caballo. 8 El espanol, que temia 9 
 que el suyo no pudiese 10 hacer 11 el viaje, 12 porque era muy 
 malo, quiso 13 cambiar 14 con el 15 del indiano, 1 que era 3 oven 18 
 y vigoroso. 1 El indiano se 17 nego a ello, 17 y el espanol en- 
 tonces 18 le 19 movio 19 una disputa. 1 Vinieron 20 a las manos, 21 
 y el espanol, que estaba bien armado, 1 se 22 apoder6 22 del 
 caballo del indiano, en 23 el que 23 siguio 24 su camino. 25 
 
 El infeliz 26 indiano le siguio 24 a 27 lo lejos, 27 y fue 28 a dar 29 
 queja^al juez 31 del primer pueblo 32 ; obligado 1 el espanol a com- 
 parecer 33 con el caballo, sostuvo 34 que este era suyo, y muy 
 suyo como que lo habia criado 35 el mismo 36 desde 37 chico. 38 
 
 No habiendo pruebas 39 de lo contrario, 1 el juez 31 iba 40 a 
 declarar 1 absuelto 41 de la demanda 1 al espanol, cuando qui- 
 tandose 42 su capa 43 el indiano y cubriendo 44 con ella repentina- 
 mente 45 la cabeza 46 del caballo, dijo al mismo tiempo al juez 31 : 
 
 Yo probare 47 de un modo 48 incontestable 1 mi asercion 1 ; 
 que 49 diga 49 ahora mi contrario, 50 de que ojo 51 es tuerto 52 el 
 caballo ? 
 
 Del derecho, 53 contesto 54 el espanol sin detenerse. 55 
 
 Pues 56 no 57 lo es de mnguno, 57 repuso 68 el americano, 1 des- 
 tapando 59 la cabeza 46 del animal. 1 
 
 Oonvencido 60 el juez 31 con una prueba 39 tan higeniosa 1 
 y fuerte, 61 adjudic6 1 el caballo al indiano, y se termino 1 la 
 disputa. 1 
 
 2 traveller ; 3 encoritrar, to meet ; 4 certain ; 5 wood ; 6 both ; 7 were 
 going ; 8 on horseback ; 9 temer, to fear ; 10 could ; 11 do ; 12 journey ; 
 13 wanted; 14 to change ; 15 the (one) ; 16 young ; 17 refused i ; 18 then ; 
 19 moved him to ; 20 they came ; 21 hands=blows ; 22 took possession ; 
 23 upon which ; 24 followed ; 25 way ; 26 unhappy ; 27 at a distance ; 
 28 went ; 29 give=make ; 30 complaint ; 31 judge ; 32 village ; 33 to 
 appear ; 34 he maintained ; 35 brought up ; 36 himself ; 37 from ; 38 (its) 
 youth ; 39 proof ; 40 was going ; 41 absolved ; 42 taking off ; 43 cloak ; 
 44 covering ; 45 suddenly ; 46 head ; 47 probar, to prove ; 48 manner ; 
 49 let . . .say ; 60 opponent ; 51 eye , 52 one-eyed ; 53 right j 54 contestar, 
 to answer ; 65=he8itating ; 56 then ; 57 not it is of none=he is not so in 
 either ; 58 replied ; 59 -uncovering , 60 convinced ; 61 strong. 
 
15 
 
 El Suftalterno E3ooc&3._ 
 
 Se 2 refiere 2 una anecdota 1 de un Eseoces 3 qiie era oficia! 4 
 del Ejercito 5 Britanico 6 y fue mandado 7 con su regimiento 1 
 a Gibraltar. En aquel entonces 8 era subalterno 1 y hallabase 9 
 un dia de 10 guardia 10 con otro companero 11 oficial 4 que tuvo 
 la desgracia 12 de caer 13 en un .preeipicio 1 de cuatrocientos 
 pies 14 de profundidad 1 - 5 y quedo 16 muerto. 16 
 
 Era deber 17 del subalterno 1 dar 18 cuenta 19 de lo 20 ocurrido 20 
 en 10 la guardia 10 y habiendolo 21 hecho asi, 21 anadio 22 la 
 formula 1 de costumbre 23 ; " nada 24 de particular 1 ha ocurrido 1 
 en la guardia." 
 
 El fatal 1 accidente 1 de la caida 25 en el precipicio 1 del otro 
 oficial 4 vino 26 a, oidos 27 del comandante, 1 y naturalmente 1 la 
 frase 28 de "nada 24 de particula^ocurrido, 1 " le caus6 1 extrafiez^. 29 
 
 "; Como 30 ! " exclamo 1 el Mayor 31 de la Brigada, 1 u <;Yd. 
 llama 32 a esto nada 24 de particular, cuando su companero 11 
 oficial 4 ha 16 muerto 16 cayendo 33 de una altura 34 de cuatro- 
 cientos pies 14 ?" 
 
 " Bien, Senor," replico 1 el joven 35 oficial, " no he creido 38 
 que hubiera 37 en ello nada de extraordinario 1 ; si el pobre 3 * 
 amigo hubiese 39 caido 40 en un precipicio 1 de cuatrocientos pies 
 y no hubiera 39 muerto, 41 lo hubiera 42 hallado 43 muy extra- 
 ordinario 1 en 44 efecto, 44 y lo hubiera 42 puesto 45 en el parte. 46 " 
 
 2 is related ; 3 Scotchman ; 4 officer ; 5 army ; 6 British ; 7 
 mandar, to send ; 8 then ; 9 found himself =was ; 10 on guard ; 11 com- 
 panjon=fellow , 12 misfortune ; 13 (to) fall ; 14 foot ; 15 depth ; 
 lt)==was killed ; 17 duty ; 18 to give ; 19 account ; 20 what occurred ; 
 21 having done so ; 22 anadir, to add ; 23 custom ; 24 nothing ; 25 fall ; 
 26 came ; 27=ears ; 28 phrase ; 29 astonishment ; 30 what ; 31 major.; 
 32 llamar, to call ; 33 falling ; 34 height ; 35^ young ; 36 creer, to 
 believe ; 37 there was ; 38 poor ; 39 had ; 40 fallen ; 41 died ; 42 
 I should have ; 43 hallar^-to find ; 44 indeed ; 45 put ; 46. report. 
 
 Un predicador 2 dijo en un sermon 1 que san 3 Francisco 1 
 Xavier habia convertido 1 en un dia diez mil 4 hombres en 
 isla 1 desierta. 1 
 
 2 preacher ; 3 saint ; 4 thousand. 
 
El Enfermo invisible. 
 
 Un filosofo, 1 poco 2 arnigo de los medicos, tuvo una 3 vez 3 
 que 4 guardar cama 4 por una grave 1 enfermedad, 1 y un 
 amigo envio 5 al 6 momento 6 a 7 buscar 7 un facultative. 8 Luegoa 
 que llego 9 se lo anunciaron 1 al enfermo, 10 quien respondio 1 : 
 Decidle 11 que estoy malo, y que no recibo 1 a nadie. 12 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 2 little ; 3=once ; 4 to keep [his bed] ; 5 sent ; 6 at once.; 7 to seefc=for J 
 8 physician j 9 as soon as he arrived ; 10 invalid ; 11 tell him ; 12 nobody. 
 
 El Negro. 
 
 Carlos 2 y dos amigos suyos Ilegaron 3 a un hotel 1 de Nueva 4 
 York, donde debian 5 pasar 1 la noche. 6 No habia 7 vacia 8 msts que 
 una habitacion 9 con una cama, 10 en la cual se 11 acomodaron u 
 sus dos amigos, y Carlos 2 se resolvio 1 a dormir 12 en un sofa. 1 
 
 Un negro 1 que estaba parando 13 en el mismo hotel, ofrecio 1 * 
 dividir 1 su cama 10 con el, cuya oferta 1 fue inmediatamente 1 
 aceptada. 1 Carlos fue 15 a acostarse, 16 encargando 18 antes 17 al 
 mozo 19 que 20 le despertase 20 a las cinco de la manana ; pero 
 apenas 21 cayo 22 dormido, 22 cuando sus amigos deseando 23 di~ 
 vertirse 24 a su costa, 1 vinieron 25 a la habitacion, 9 y le 20 
 ennegrecieron la cara 26 con hollin, 27 de 28 tal 28 manera 1 que 
 parecia 29 que en la cama 10 habia 80 dos negros. 1 
 
 El mozo 19 le desperto 31 a la hora que habia indicado 1 ; pero, 
 j cual no seria su sorpresa 1 cuando al 32 mirarse 32 al espejo 33 con 
 objeto 1 de peinarse, 34 vio 35 una cara 37 negra 36 en 38 vez 38 de v una 
 blanca 39 ! -" i Oh ! " exclamo 1 ; " este imbecil 1 de mozo 19 ha 
 despertado 31 al negro 1 en 38 vez 38 de despertarme 31 a mi"; y 
 diciendo 40 esto, volvio 41 a acostarse 41 tranquilamente. 1 
 
 2 Charles ; 3 llegar, to anrive ; 4 new ; 5 they had to; 6 night ; 7 there was ; 
 8 empty ; 9 room ; 10 bed ; 11 accommodated themselves ; 12 sleep ; 
 13 parar, to stop ; 14 offered ; 15 went ; 16 lie down ; \1 before=first ; 
 18 instructing ; 19 waiter ; 20 that he should wake him ; 21 hardly ; 
 22 he fell asleep ; 23 desear, to wish ; 24 to divert themselves ; 25 came ,' 
 26 .blacked his face ; 27 soot ; 28 in such ; 29 it seemed ; 30 there were ; 
 31 despertar, to' wake ; 32 on looking at himself ; 33 mirror ; 34 comb(ing) 
 hte hair ; 35 he saw ; 36 black ; .37 face ; 38 instead ; 3D white ; 
 ^0 saying'; 41 he weni t back to bed* 
 
IT 
 
 From tm'8~ point the Student is assumed to be acquainted with the 
 Rules in " SPANISH SIMPLIFIED," as far as the commencement of the 
 Irregular Verbs (Lesson 19) . 
 
 El Sermon. 
 
 En el ultimo 2 sermon 1 de una mision, 1 que se 3 predioaba 3 
 en cierta 4 parroquia, 5 lloraron 6 todos los oyentes 7 menos uno, 
 a quien pregunto 9 su vecino 8 : <; For que no lloras 6 ? y el 
 respondio 1 : Porque no soy de esta parroquia. 5 
 
 2 last ; 3 was preached ; 4 certain ; 5 parish ; 6 llorar, to weep ; 
 7 hearer ; 8 neighbour ; 9 asked. 
 
 Los Hijos de Noe. 
 
 Se 3 presento 3 un tonto 2 al obispo 4 para 5 que le ordenase, 5 y 
 el padre habia ya 6 suplicado 1 que no se 8 le pusiesen 8 cuestio- 
 nes 1 dificiles 1 en 9 atencion a 9 su escaso 10 talento. 1 El obispo 4 
 para servirle 11 le hizo 12 -solo 13 esta pregunta 14 : Sem, 1 Cham 1 y 
 Japhet, 1 hijos de Noe, 1 quien fue su padre ? 
 
 No supo 15 responder, 1 y no fue aprobado. 16 
 
 Fuese 17 a su casa y dijo a su padre lo 18 que 18 se 19 le habia 
 preguntado, 19 y que no habia podido 20 responder, 1 porque esas 
 cosas tan dificiles 1 eran solo 13 para hombres muy abios. 21 
 
 Su padre se 22 echo a reir, 2 - 2 y le dijo que no habia 23 cosa 
 mas facil. 24 S'i el obispo 4 te hubiera 25 preguntado 26 : <j el hijo 
 del gobernador 27 de quien es hijo ? hubieras 28 respondidoi 
 " del gobernador 27 ": <z no es verdad 29 ? 
 
 En 30 ef ecto, 30 dijo el necio 2 a su padre, no hay 31 cosa mas facil. 24 
 
 En 32 seguida 32 se 17 fue 17 al obispo, 4 y le dijo que ya 6 sabia 33 
 la respuesta 34 que debia 35 darse 35 a su pregunta. 14 
 
 Volvio 36 a hacersela 36 el obispo con su santa 37 paciencia 1 : 
 Sem, Cham y Japhet, hijos de Noe, <; quien fue su padre ? 
 
 Y respondio 1 muy satisfecho 38 : El gobernador. 27 
 
 2 fool ; 3 presentarse, to present one's self ; 4 bishop ; 5 in order that he 
 might ordain him ; 6 already ; 7 suplicar, to request ; 8=should be put to 
 him ; 9 in view of ; 10 scanty ; 11 serve him ; 12 made=put ; 13 only ; 
 14 question ; 15 he knew==could ; 16 aprobar, to approve ; 17 he went ; 
 18 what ; 19=he had been asked ; 20 been able to ; 21 learned ; 22 burst 
 out laughing ; 23 there was ; 24 easy ; 25 had ; 26 pregwitar, to ask ; 
 27 governor ; 28 thou wouldst have ; 29 truth ; 30 in effect=indeed ; 
 31 there is ; 32=then ; 33 he knew ; 34 answer ; 35=ought to be given ; 
 36=put it to him again ; 37 holy ; 38 satisfied, 
 
 38 R 8 
 
IS 
 
 La Venganza heroic*. 
 
 Tuvieron* un altercado 1 bastante 4 acalorado* en un caf & dos 
 particulares, 2 y uno de ellos, para vengarse, 6 tuvo 3 la bafeza? 
 de escribir 8 al amanecer 9 en la puerta del otro, INFAME. 10 
 
 JSste Ultimo 11 f ue 12 a buscarle 12 ; pero un criado le dijo que 
 no estaba en su casa, y le suplico 13 dejase 14 per 15 escrlto 15 lo 16 
 que 16 tuviese 3 qtie comunicarle. 1 
 
 No, respondio, 1 puede 17 Vd. 17 solamente 18 decirle 1 * que he 
 yenido 20 a volverle 21 su visita, 1 porque esta maiiana me ha 
 dejado 22 escritfe 23 su nombre 24 en mi puerta. 
 
 2 certain persons ; 3 i*ad ; 4 enough=rather ; 5 heated ; 6 revenge him- 
 self ; 7 meanness ; '8 -write ; 9 dawn ; 10 rascal ; 11 latter ; 12 went to 
 seek him'=called on him ; 13 suplicar, to request ; 14 (that) he should leave; 
 15==in writing ; 16 what ; 17 you may ; 18 only ; 19 tell him ; 20 dome ; 
 2.1 return him ; 22 dejar, to leave ; 23 written ; 24 name. 
 
 Los cuatro Caballeros de Industria. 
 
 Cuatro caballeros 2 de industria 2 habiendo comido 8 en una 
 taberna, 1 hicieron 4 subir al criado 4 y acordaron 5 el escote 6 por 
 el gasto 7 liecho. 8 El primero hizo 9 como que ponia 9 la mano 10 
 en el bolsillo. 11 El otro se 12 la cogi6 12 deteniendola, 13 diciendo 14 
 que queria 15 pagar. 16 El tercero hizo 17 la misma riibrica, 18 y el 
 cuartomand6 19 al criado que no tomase 20 dinero 21 alguno 21 de ellos. 
 
 Como ninguno 22 queria 15 ceder, 23 uno de ellos dijo : vende* 
 mos 24 los ojos 25 al criado, como en el juego 26 de la gallina 27 
 ciega, 27 y aquel 28 que coja 29 pagara.. 16 
 
 Ponen 30 en obra 31 su proyecto 1 : y mientras 32 que el muchacho 
 iba 33 palpando^en el cuarto, ellos descamparon lindamente. 35 
 
 Sube 37 el amo 36 y nuestro muchacho le coge, 29 y teniendolo 38 
 firine 1 le decia 39 : Vd. sera el que pagara la cuenta. 40 
 
 2 swindler ; 3 comer, to dine ; 4 they made the servant mount=called 
 the servant upstairs ; 5 acordar, to agree on ; 6=settlement ; 7 expense ; 
 8 made ; 9 did as though he put=pretended to put ; 10 hand ; 11 pocket ; 
 12 took hold of it ; 13 detaining it ; 14 saying ; 15 would ; 16 pagar, to 
 pay ; 17 did ; 18=performance ; 19 mandar, to order ; 20 he should take ; 
 21 any money ; 22 no one ; 23 give way ; 24 veiidar, to blindfold ; 25 eye ; 
 26 game ; 27 blind hen=blind man's buff ; 28=the one ; 29 (he) catches 
 hold of ; 30 they put ; 31 work=execution ; 32 while ; 33 was going ; 
 34 palvar, to grope about ; 35 neatly=softly ; 36 master ; 37 subir t to go 
 up ; 3$ holding him ; 39 said ; 40 bill. 
 
19 
 
 Lnifl XIV. y el Cortesano. 
 
 Luis 1 catorce pregunto un dia a uno' de SUB cortesanos 2 : 
 <? Sabe 3 Vd. el castellano 4 ? 
 
 No, Senor, respondio 1 el cortesano, 2 pero lo aprendere. 6 
 
 Se 6 aplico 6 mucho para aprender 5 aquel idioma, 7 y despue"s 8 
 de haber 8 tornado muchisimo trabajo, 9 porque le parecia 10 
 que el rey tenia intencion 1 de nombrarle 11 embajador 1 en la 
 corte 1 de Espana, 12 dijo un dia a Luis catorce 
 
 Senor, ahora ya 13 se 14 el castellano. 4 
 
 Muy bien, respondio 1 el rey, en ese caso 1 puede 15 Vd. 
 
 leer 15 el Don Quijote en su original. 1 
 
 . - i . i i i 
 
 2 courtier ; 3 'know; 4 Castilian=Spani8h ; 5 aprender, to learn ; Qapli- 
 carse, to apply one's self ; 7 language ; 8 after having ; 9 work ; 10 it ap- 
 peared ; 11 appoint him ; 12 Spain ; 13 already ; 14 1 know ; 15 you can read. 
 
 ;E1 Estudiante sagaz. 2 
 
 Estando en la clase 1 un escolar 1 travieso 3 y chistoso, 4 pidi6 6 
 licencia 6 a su maestro para salir, 7 pero este 8 se 9 la nego 9 con 
 enfado. 10 Finjio 11 el estudiante 1 que no le habia oido, 12 
 repitio 1 la suplica, 13 y se 14 le volvio a decir 14 que no ; pero 
 entonces 15 salio, 16 y el maestro no le detuvo. 17 
 
 Entro 1 una liora despues* 18 y el maestro encolerizado 19 le 
 dijo : i Como te has atrevido 20 a salir 7 sin mi licencia 6 ? 
 
 Respondiole 1 muy humildemente 21 el discipulo 1 : 
 
 Le pedi 5 a Vd. licencia 6 dos veces y ambas 22 me dijo que 
 no'; como dos negaciones 1 afirman, 1 crei 23 que consentia 1 Vtl. 
 Y ?ali 16 sin aguardar 24 mas respuesta. 25 
 
 Quedo 26 desenojado 27 el maestro, y se 28 ri6 28 de la agudeza. 29 
 
 2 sagacious ; 3 turbulent ; 4 humorous ; 5 asked ; 6 permission ; 7 go(ing) 
 out ; 8=the latter ; 9 denied it to him ; 10 vexation ; 11 finjir^ to pretend ; 
 12 heard ; 13 request ; 14=was again told ; 16 then ; 16 went out ; 
 17 detained ; 18 afterwards ; 19 angry ; 20 atreverse, to dare ; 21 humbly ; 
 22 both ; 23 I thought ; 24 wait(ing) ; 25 reply ; 2G qtiedar, to remain ; 
 27 appeased ; 28 he laughed ; 29 acuteness. 
 
 i Ha visto Vd. " el Barbero 1 de Sevilla 1 ? 
 No, senor, me 2 afeito 2 solo. 3 
 
 2 I shave myself ; 3 aloae. 
 
El Barfcero de 'JoatTTt. 
 
 Tin dia, habiendo llegado el emperador 1 Jose 1 a una ciudad 
 antes 2 que 3 su acompanamiento, 3 le pregunto el ama 4 df la 
 posada, 5 si pertenecia 6 al sequito 8 del emperador. 1 
 
 No, respondio 1 el prineipe. 7 
 
 Sin 8 embargo, 8 , con tan laconica 1 respuesta 9 no quedo 10 satis- 
 f echa 1 la curiosidad 1 de la buena mujer. Busco 11 un pretesto 1 
 para entrar 1 en su cuarto, y viendole 12 ocupado 1 en af eitarse, 13 
 le pregunto si tenia algiin 14 cargo 15 cerca 16 del emperador. 1 
 
 Si, respondio 1 el monarca 1 ; algunas 14 veces le afeito. 13 
 
 2 before ; 3 suite ; 4 mistress ; 5 inn ; 6 he belonged ; 7 prince ; 8 never- 
 theless ; 9 reply ; 10 quedar, to remain ; 11 buscar, to seek ;12 seeing him ; 
 13 ofeitar } to shave ; 14 any, some ; 15 office ; 16 near. 
 
 .Los dos Marineros. 
 
 Dos marineros, 2 el uno ingles 8 y el otro irlandes, 4 convinie- 
 ron 5 en 6 socorrerse 6 mutuamente 1 en el caso 1 de sucederles 7 
 algun accidente 1 en el combate. 1 Tuvo el ingles la des- 
 gracia 8 de perder 9 tma pierna, 10 y su companero 11 le cargo 12 al 
 momento sobre sus espaldas 13 para llevarle^ a curar. 1 
 
 En el camino 15 vino 16 otra bala 1 de can6n, 1 y le 17 llevo 17 la 
 cabeza 18 al herido, 19 pero el irlandes 4 no lo advirtio 20 y 
 sigui6 21 con el cuerpo 22 sin deteners^. 23 
 
 Un oficial 24 que le vi6 25 pasar 1 con el tronco 26 de un hombre 
 eobre las espaldas, 13 le pregunto a donde iba. 27 
 
 A 28 buscar 28 al cirujano^responde. 1 Pero,majadero, 30 ^ no 
 ves 3 * que llevas 14 uri cuerpo 22 sin cabeza 18 ? 
 
 A estas palabraB 32 puso 33 en tierra 34 su carga, 35 y exclamo 1 
 mirando 86 atentamente 1 el cadaver 37 : 
 
 4 Si el mismo 38 me hardicho 39 que era una pierna 10 la que 
 habia perdido 9 ! ! ! 
 
 2 sailor ; 3 Englishman) ; 4 Irish(man) ; 5 agreed ; 6 to help each other ; 
 7 happening) to them ; 8 misfortune ; 9 perder, to lose ; 10 leg ; 11 com- 
 panion ; 12 loaded=took ; 13 shoulder ; J14 llevar, to carry ; 15 way ; 
 IScame; 17==took off ; 18 head ; 19 wounded (man) ; 20 noticed ; 
 21 ollowed=went on ; 22 body J 23 stop(pmg) ; 24 officer ; 25 saw j 
 26 trunk ; 27 he was going ; 28 to seek=for ; 29 surgeon ; 30 blockhead ; 
 31 seest thou ; 32 word ; 33 he put ; 34 ground ; 35 burden ; 36 looking at ; 
 37 corpse ; 38 himself ; 39 told. 
 
21 
 
 El nuevo Hercules. 
 
 Tin artesano 1 que pasaba 2 en el pais 3 por muy diestro 4 en 
 los ejercicios 5 de fuerzas, 6 y al mismo tiempo muy robusto> 1 
 se 7 veia 7 frecuentemente 1 obligado 1 a medirlas 8 con algunos. 9 
 Vino 10 uno*de muy lejos n a Iuchar 12 con nuestro campeon, 13 y 
 le dijeron 14 que estaba en el cercado 15 de la casa trabajando. lti 
 Echa 17 pie 18 a tierra 19 y va 20 a buscarle al memento, con el 
 caballo de la brida, 21 que ato 22 a una estaca 23 del cercado. 15 
 
 Camarada, 1 le dice, 24 he oido 25 hablar mucho de vuestras 
 fuerzas, 6 y vengo 26 de cuarenta millas 27 a veros 28 y ensayar 29 
 cual de los dos puede 30 tumbar 31 al otro. 
 
 No habia hecho 32 mas que concluir 1 estas palabras, 33 cuando 
 nuestro hercules solt6 34 al momento el azadon, 35 le cogi6 36 por 
 las piernas, 37 le arrojo 38 al prado 40 inmediato 39 por 41 encima 
 de 41 la tapia, 42 y volviendo 43 a tomar 43 con mucha serenidad 1 
 el azadon, 35 continue su trabajo. 44 
 
 Luego 45 que 45 el pobre 46 diablo 48 se 47 levant 6 47 como pudo 48 
 despues 49 de 49 tan fuerte 50 porrazo 51 : Y J?ien, le dice 24 -el 
 otro, & tiene'Vd. alguna cosa mds que 52 mandarme 52 ? 
 
 No, senor, gracias, 53 le responde 1 espantado 54 del vuelo 55 ; 
 echeme 56 Vd. aca 57 por el mismo camino 58 mi caballo, pues 88 
 he concluido 1 mi comision, 1 y me quiero 60 marchar. 61 
 
 2 pasar, to pass ; 3 country ; 4 dexterous ; 5 exercise ; 6 strength(s) ; 
 7 saw(=found) himself ; 8 medir, to measure ;9=others ; 10 came ; 11 far ; 
 12 to wrestle ; 13 champion ; 14 they told ; 15 enclosure ; 16 trabajar, to 
 work; 17 he throws=puts ; 18 foot; 19 ground ; 20 goes ; 21 bridle ; 
 22 atar, to tie ; 23 stake ; 24 (he) says ; 25 heard ; 26 I come ; 27 mile ; 
 28 (lo) see you ; 29=to try ; 30 can ; 31 overthrow ; 32 done ; 33 word ; 
 34 loosened=ttirew down ; 35 pick-axe ; 36 took hold of ; 37 legs ; 
 38 arrojar, to fling ; 39 adjoining ; 40 meadow ; 41 over ; 42 mud-wall ; 
 43 again taking ; 44 work ; 45 as soon as ; 46 poor devil=fellow ; 47 got 
 up ; 48 (best) he could ; 49 after ; 50 strong ; 51 blow ; 52 to command 
 me ; 53 thanks ; 54 espantar, to frighten ; 55 flight ; 56 echar, to throw ; 
 57 (over) here ; 58 way ; 59 since ; 60 I want ; 61 marchar 'se, to. go away. 
 
 I En qne mes 3 hablan menos 3 las mujeres ? 
 
 En Febrero, 1 porque s<5lo 4 tiene veinte y ocho dias. 
 
 2 month ; 3 least ; 4 only. 
 
22 
 
 Dos Borraohos. 
 
 Un borracho 2 de setenta anos 3 iba 4 una vez buscando por 5 
 todas paries 5 un cuervo 7 joven. 6 
 
 1 Para que lo quiere 8 Vd. ? pregunto un campesino. 9 
 
 He pido 10 decir, 11 respondio el beodo, 2 que estas aves 12 viven 
 trescientos anos, 3 y quiero 8 saber 13 por mi 14 mismo u si es cierto. 15 
 
 Otro borracho 2 se 16 hallaba 16 una noche a deshora 17 sen- 
 tado 18 en la esquina 19 de una calle, cuando acerto 20 a psisar 1 
 por 21 alii 21 una patrulla. 1 
 
 << Que haceis 22 ahi 23 ? le pregunta el sargento. 1 
 
 Veo 24 que la tierra 25 anda, 2< > y estoy esperando 27 que 28 pase 
 mi casa 28 por 29 aqui 29 para meterme 30 en ella. 
 
 * 2 drunkard ; 3 year ; 4 went ; 6=e very where ; 6 young ; 7 raven ; 8 want ; 
 9 countryman-; 10 heard ; 11 say ; 12 bird ; 13 (to) know ; 14 myself ; 
 15 certain=true ; 16==was ; 17=an untimely hour ; 18 seated ; 19 corner ; 
 20=happened ; 21=that way ; 22 are you doing ; 23 here ; 24 I see ; 
 25 earth ; 26 goes round ; 27 esperar, to wait ; 28=or my house to pass ; 
 29=this way ; 30 put myself=go. 
 
 El Quitamanchas. 
 
 Un brib6n 2 se introdujo 1 en casa de un caballero, entr6 l 
 hasta 3 la antesala 4 del primer piso, 5 y no viendo 6 cosa de que 
 pudiese 7 sacar 8 partido 8 sino 9 es de dos libreas 10 de los 
 criados, se decidi6 1 a apropiarselas 11 por no salirse 12 con las 
 jnanos 14 vacias. 13 
 
 Al 16 bajar 15 la escalera 16 hallo al amo, 17 quien le pregunt6 
 de qui6n eran aquellos vestidos, 18 y adonde los llevaba. 19 
 
 ^ Pues 20 que, 20 senor, responde 1 con mucha serenidad, 1 no 
 me conoc^is 21 ? Yo trabajo 22 para vuestros criados ; soy el 
 quitamanchas, 2S y limpio 24 los vestidos 18 de vuestros lacayos. 1 
 
 En ese caso, 1 dijo el dueiio 25 de la casa, voy 26 a darte 27 mi 
 fcata, 28 pues 29 la he llenado 30 de aceite. 31 
 
 Y al mismo tiempo se la dio. 32 
 
 2 rascal ; V 3 as far as ; 4 ante-chamber ; 5 floor : 6 seeing ; 7 he could ; 8= 
 make off with ; 9 except ; 10 livery ; 11 appropriate them to himself ; 12 go 
 away; 13 empty ; 14 hand ; 15 on descending ; 16 staircase; 17 master; 
 18 suits ; 19 llevar, to carry ; 20=why ; 21 do you know ; 22 tralajar^ to 
 work ; 23 scourer ; 24 limpiar, to clean ; 25 owner ; 26 I am going ; 27 give 
 thee ; 28 dressing-gown ; 29 since ; 30 llenar, to fill ; 31 oil ; 32 he gave. 
 
23 
 
 El Representante del Pueblo. 2 
 
 Un candidate 1 de un arrabal 3 de una eiudad dijo d BUS con- 
 stituyentes que si querian 4 nombrarle 5 diputado^ les haria 7 
 gozar 8 en todas estaciones 9 del tiempo 10 que quisiesen. 11 Este 
 ofrecimiento 12 fue tan seductor, 13 que no pudieron 14 menos de 15 
 nombrar 5 a este hombre que parecia 16 tener un don 17 celestial. 1 
 
 Algiin tiempo despues 18 de 18 la eleccion, 1 fue 19 a buscarle 
 uno de sus constituyentes, 1 y le pidio 20 un poco de lluvia. 21 , 
 
 Bueno, amigo mio, le dijo el diputado 6 : pero por que 
 pides 22 la lluvia 21 ? <j no hara 23 daiio 24 a vuestros prados 25 ? 
 
 Yo la necesito 26 para mis trigos, 27 pues la yerba 28 6 el 
 heno 29 ya 30 esta en casa. 
 
 t Pero vuestro vecino 31 ha encerrado 32 el suyo ? Yo estoy 
 persuadido 1 deque ahora la lluvia 21 le perjudicaria 33 mucho. 
 
 Eso si, es verdad, 34 no le vendria 35 muy bien. 
 
 Pues 36 en ese caso, 1 amigo mio, ya 30 sabeis 37 lo 38 que 38 os he 
 dicho. 39 Yo os he prometido 40 proporcionaros 41 el tiempo 10 
 que querais 42 ; pero si yo os cloy 43 la lluvia, 21 perjudicare 33 
 a vuestro vecino 31 : asi 44 pues, 44 el partido 45 mas prudente 1 
 sera el de oiros 46 juntos, 47 y que os 48 concerteis 48 sobre 
 la especie 49 de tiempo 10 que os convenga 50 a todos, y 
 entonces 51 os prometo 40 complaceros 52 ; porque mi intencion 1 
 no es de suscitar 53 querellas 1 entre mis conciudadanos 54 
 dando 55 la preferencia 1 a los unos sobre los otros. 
 
 2 village ; 3 suburb ; 4 they would ; 5 nombrar, to appoint ; 6 deputy ; 
 7 he- would make=cause ; 8 (to) enjoy ; 9 season ; 10 weather ; 1 1 they 
 wanted ; 12 offer ; 13 attractive ; 14 they could (do) ; 15=than ; 16 ap- 
 peared ; 17 gift ; 18 after ; 19 went ; 20 requested ; 21 rain ; 22 dost thou 
 ask ; 23 will it do ; 24 damage ; 25 meadow ; 26 want ; 27 wheat ; 28 herb 
 =grass ; 29 hay ; 30 already ; 31 neighbour ; 32 shut up=housed ; 33 per- 
 judicar, to injure ; 34 truth=true ; 35 it would come ; 36 then ; 37 you 
 know ; 38 what ; 39 told ; 40 promoter, to promise ; 41 to portion to you ; 
 42 you want ; 43 give ; 44 therefore ; 45 course ; 46 hear you ; 47 together ; 
 48 you agree ; 49 kind ; 50 suits ; 51 then ; 52 (to) please you ; 53 to stir ' 
 up ; 54 fellow-citizens ; 55 (by) giving. 
 
 Mas 2 vale* acostarse 3 sin cenar 4 que levantarse 5 con deudas. 6 
 
 2 it is worth more=it is better ; 3 to go to bed ; 4 sup [ping] ; 5 to get 
 up; 6 debt. 
 
M 
 
 El Corregidor y el Mayorazgo. 
 
 TTn caballerito 2 mayorazgo 3 muy loco 4 y muy gastador* 
 estaba disgustado 6 con el corregidor 7 del pueblo, 8 que era 
 hi jo de un carnicero. 9 El mayorazgo 3 vendio 10 unas tierras 11 
 para sostener 12 su lujo 13 y siis caprichos, 1 sin pensar 14 en sus 
 acreedores 15 ; y un^dia que se presento 1 muy elegante 1 en 
 un onyite 16 se 17 pusol 7 * a referir 18 las modas 19 y los trajes 20 
 que se 21 habia hecho, 21 cuando^ repenlinamente, 22 por 
 abochornarle 23 le dijo el corregidor 7 : 
 
 Mejor 25 hiciera 24 si tratase 26 Vd. 26 de pagar 27 sus deudas. 28 
 En 29 ef ecto, 29 tiene 30 Vd. razon, 30 y maiiana voy 31 a satis- 
 facerlas 32 ; hagame 33 su recibo 34 por una cabeza 35 de ternera 36 
 y unas lenguas 37 que debo a su padre de Vd. 
 
 2 young gentleman ; 3 first-born=heir ; 4 silly ; 5 spendthrift ; 6 dis- 
 pleased ; 7 magistrate ; 8 village ; 9 butcher ; 10 vender, to sell ; 11 land ; 
 12 support ; 13 luxury ; 14 think(ing) ; 15 creditor; 16 feast ; 1'7 he put 
 feimself=he began ; 18 relate ; 19 fashion ; 20 costume ; 21=hehadhadmade; 
 22 suddenly ; 23 (to) irritate him ; 24 you would do ; 25 better ; 26 you 
 tried ; 27 pay ; 28 debt ; 29 indeed ; 30 you are right ; 31 1 am going ; 32 
 satisfy them ; 33 make me (out) ; 34 receipt ; 35 head ; 36 calf ; 37 tongue. 
 
 Padre e Hyo. 
 
 El mar^cal 2 Lefevue era hijo de un pobre molinero 8 de la 
 Alsacia. Siendo aiin 4 joven 6 entro en las Guardias 1 Fran- 
 cesas, 1 y era sargento 1 cuando estallo 6 la^Revolucion, 1 que 
 hizo 7 sucesivamente 1 de el un oficial, un general, y por 8 
 ultimo, 8 bajo 9 el Imperia, 10 un mariscal* de Francia. 1 
 
 Estaba muy descontento 1 de su hijo, cuya conducta 1 
 dejaba 11 mucho que 12 desear. 12 Un dia estando dirigiendole 13 
 amargos 14 reproches, 1 le dijo entre otras cosas : 
 
 Tii no haces 15 caso 15 de mis consejos 16 ni reconvenciones, 17 
 mal sujeto 18 : diriase 19 que te crees 20 superior 1 a tu padre. 
 
 Es muy posible, 1 respondio desdenosamente 21 su hijo ; 
 porque despues 22 de 22 todo, mi padre era hijo de un pobre 
 molinero, 3 y yo soy hijo de un rico 23 mariscal de Francia. 
 
 2 marshal ; 3 miller ; 4 still ; 5 young ; 6 estallar> to break out ; 7 made ; 
 8 finally ; 9 under ; 10 empire ; 11 dejar, to leave ; 12 to desire ; 13 ad- 
 dressing to him ; 14 bitter ; 155=payest attention ; 16 advice ; 17 recrimi- 
 nation j l&rsfellow ; 'l9=one would say ; 20 creer, to believe ; 21 disdain- 
 fo%; 22 alter; 
 
El Juramento. 
 
 Tin escribano 2 tom6 un coche 1 de 8 alquiler 3 para ir 4 a un pue- 
 blo 5 cerca 6 de 8 Sevilla, 1 y el cochero 7 le pidi6 8 catorce pesetas. 
 
 1 Afirmaras 1 tii bajo 9 juramento 10 que ?se es el precio 11 que 
 se 12 paga 12 por este viaje 13 ? Si, senor. 
 
 El escribano 2 saco 14 entonces 15 y puso 16 sobre lar mesa un 
 crucifijo, 1 le hizo 17 jurar 18 y le dio 19 seis pesetas, dici6ndele 2d 
 que retenia 21 lo restante 2 * por el acta 1 de*la prestacion 23 del 
 juramento. 10 
 
 2 notary ; 3 on hire ; 4 go ; 5 village ; 6 near ; 7 driver ; 
 8 asked ; 9 under ; 10 oath ; 11 price ; 12 is paid ; 13 journey ; 14 sacar, 
 to draw out ; 15 then ; 16 put ; 17 made ; 18 swear ; 19 gave ; 20 teliing 
 him ; 21 retained ; 22 remainder ; 23 administration. 
 
 El Caballo y las Ostras. 
 
 Un viajero 2 llego a una posada 3 en una 4 noche de las mis 
 frlas 4 de Diciembre, 1 y al 5 pasar 5 por 6 la cocina 7 vi6 8 gue 
 todos los asientos 9 *estaban ocupados 1 por la mucha gente 10 que 
 habia 11 alrededor 12 del f uego, 13 causandole 1 la mayor 14 pena l& 
 el no poder 16 acercarse 17 a calentarse 18 las manos. 18 
 
 Mozo, 19 dijo en alta 20 voz 21 al criado, lleva 22 dos docenas 1 de 
 ostras 23 a mi caballo. 
 
 El mozo 19 obedeci6, 24 y las personas 1 que estaban calentan- 
 dose 25 alrededor 12 de la lumbre, 13 no pudiendo 1 * resistiri al 
 deseo 26 de ver 27 un animal 1 tan< extraordinario, 1 se 28 lefran- 
 taron 28 y marcharon 1 en tropel 29 a la caballeriza. 30 
 
 Entretanto, 31 el viajero 2 tomo el mejor 32 asiento 9 enfrente 33 
 del fuego, 13 y pocos momentos 1 despues 34 ^olvio 35 el aozo w a 
 decirle, 86 seguido 37 de los curiosos, 1 que el caballo no queria 38 
 comer 39 las ostras. 23 
 
 j Como ! ^ no las quiere 40 ? pregunta muy serio 1 el viajero 2 ; 
 pues 41 entonces, 41 ,ponme 42 aqui la mesa, y yo me las co- 
 mere a su salud. 43 
 
 2 traveller ; 3 inn ; 4 one of the coldest nights ; 5 in passing ; 6 through ; 
 7 kitchen ; 8 he saw ; 9 seat ; 10 people ; 11 there were ; 12 round ; 13 fire ; 
 14 greatest ; 15 pain ; 16 be(ing)able ; 1 7 (to) draw near ; 18 warm his 
 hands ; 19 waiter ; 20 high ; 21 voice ; 22 take ; 23 oyster ; 24 obeyed ; 
 25 calentar, to warm ; 26 desire ; 27 see ; 28 got up ; 29 crowd ; 30 stable ; 
 31 meanwhile ; 32 best ; 33 front ; 34 after ; 35 came back; 36 tell him^ 37 
 followed ; 38 would ; 39 eat ; 40 he likes ; 41 well then ; 42 put me ; 43 healthu 
 
26 
 
 Otra, otra. 
 
 Un capitdn de buque 2 que no habia estado nunca s en el 
 teatro, 1 ni tenia voto 4 ni aiin 5 oido 6 para la miisica, 1 fue 7 una 
 noche a la opera en compania 1 de un amigo. Cuando se 9 
 acabo 9 la f uncion, 8 se 7 fue 7 a su posada, 10 donde le preguntaron 
 como habian desempeiiado 11 las actrices 1 sus papeles. 12 
 
 No me ban gustado, 13 respondio ; alii habia 14 una mujer 
 que lo ha becbo 15 tan mal, que la ban becbo 16 volver 17 a 
 empezar 17 dos 6 tres veces gritando 18 : " etra, 19 otra." 
 
 2 ship ; 3 never ; 4=authority ; 5 yet ; 6 ear ; 7 went ; 8 performance ; 
 9 finished itself =:was over ; 10 inn ; 11 desempenar, to fulfil ; 12=parts ; 
 13 gustar^ to please ; 14 there was ; 15 done ; 16 made ; 17 return to begin 
 =begin again ; 18 gritar> to call out ; 19=encore. 
 
 Las Estatuas. 
 
 Un tendero 2 quo en poco tiempo se 3 hizo 3 rice, 4 compr6 5 
 las haciendas 6 de un caballero, y un dia quiso 7 hacer 8 ver 8 i 
 uno de sus amigos su nueva adquisicion. 1 
 
 Llegaron al jardin 9 y le mostro 10 diferentes 1 estatuas 11 de 
 bronce 1 qu^ adornaban 1 las avenidas. 12 
 
 ^ Que figura 1 es esta ? le dice 13 su amigo, mostrandole 14 un 
 busto, 1 
 
 <j Esa figura ? ... espere 15 Vd. ... no me 16 acuerdo 16 ...ah, si, 
 esa debe 17 ser la de Venus 6 Vulcano, pero no se 18 positiva- 
 mente 1 cual de las dos; lo preguntaremos al jardinero 19 ; 
 como son del mismo metal, 1 es muy dif icil 1 distinguirlas. 1 
 
 2 shopkeeper ; 3 made himself ; 4 rich ; 5 comprar, to buy ; 6 estate ; 
 7 wished ; 8 to make see=to show ; 9 garden ; 10 mosfrar, to show ; 
 11 statue ; 12 avenue ; 13 says ; 14 showing him ; 15 $sperar y to wait ; 
 16 I remember ; 17 must ; 18 I know ; 19 gardener. 
 
 Un caballero qxte tenia una grancle antipatia 1 por la miisica 1 
 fue preguntado <; por que no se suscribia 1 a una serie de 
 conciertos 1 ? y para decidirle 1 a ello le dijeron 2 que su 
 hermano se habia suscrito. 1 ^Bien, dijo el, si yo fuera 8 tan 
 eordo 4 como mi hermano, entonces me suscribiria. 
 
 2 they told ; 3 were ; 4 deaf . 
 
27 
 
 La Apuesta. 
 
 Cierto* caballero tenia, 8 oomo a punto 4 de honra, 6 no 5 ser- 
 virse jamds* de afirmativa. 1 Otro, a quien contaron 7 eata 
 rareza, 8 'apost6 9 que le haria 10 responder 1 SI,* 6 NO, la primera 
 vez que le encontrase. 11 
 
 Verificada 1 la apuesta, 12 sucedi6 18 que un dia vio 15 el 
 apostador 14 al caballero que se 16 dirigia 16 derechamente 17 a 
 entrar 1 en una iglesik 18 Saliole 19 al encuentro, 19 saludole, 20 
 y le pregunt6 : Con 21 que 21 <; va 22 Vd. a la iglesia 18 ? 
 
 Este es el camino, 23 respondio el caballero. 
 
 2 certain ; 3 held ; 4 point ; 5 honor ; 6=never to make use ; 7 cantor, to 
 relate ; 8 originality ; 9 apoetar, to bet ; 10 he would make ; 11 he met ; 
 12 bet ; 13 suceder, to happen ; 14 wagerer ; 15 saw ; 16 was directing 
 himself ; 17 straight ; 18 church ; 19=he went to meet him ; 20 aaludar, to 
 bow ; 21 well ; 22 go ; 23 way. 
 
 Las dos Orejas. 
 
 Un ratero 2 a quien ya 3 habian cortado 4 una oreja 5 en Bristol 
 por castigo, 6 entr6* en una tienda, 7 y dijo queria 8 una pieza 9 
 del mejor 10 encaje 11 que hubiese. 12 Mostraronle 13 varias, 1 y 
 despues 14 de haber 14 elejido 16 la que le agrado, 16 pregunto aj 
 comerciante 17 cuanto 18 le llevaria 19 por medirle 20 ei largo 21 
 igual 1 al espacio 1 que separaba 1 sus ore j as. 5 
 
 El comerciante 17 dijo que dos reales. 1 
 
 Bueno, dijo el ratero 3 pag&ndole 22 ; pero como yo tengo una 
 oreja 6 aqui, y la otra esti clavada 23 en la picota 24 de Bristol, creo 
 no tendri Vd. hoy bastante 25 encaje n para medirme 20 lo concer- 
 tado, 26 y voy 27 a tomar la pieza 9 a 28 buena cuenta, 28 sin 29 perjuicio 
 de que procure 29 completarme 1 el resto 1 lo mas pronto 30 posible. 
 
 2 rogue ; 3 already ; 4 cortar, to cut (off) ; 5 ear ; 6 punishment ; 7 shop j 
 8 he wanted ; 9 piece ; 10 best ; 11 lace ; 12 there was ; 13 they showed him ; 
 14 after having ; 15 chosen ; 16 agradar, to please ; 17 merchant j 18 how 
 much ; 19=he would charge ; 20 medir, to measure ; 21 length ; 22pagar f to 
 pay ; 23 clavar, to nail ; 24 gibbet ; 25 enough ; 26 agreed on (quantity) ; 
 
 27 I am going; 28 on account; 29=without prejudice to your try ing; 30 soon. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Que es lo 2 que 2 se 3 nos aparece 3 una vez en un minuto, 1 dos 
 
 veces 4 en un momento, 1 ' y nunca 6 en un siglo 6 ? La letra 1 M, 
 
 > i . j 
 
 2 what ; 3 appears to us ; 4 time ; 6 never ; 6 century. 
 
28 
 
 El gran Rey. 
 
 Uno de los liltimos 2 reyes de Espana, 8 a quien la suerte* 
 de las armas 1 habia privado 5 de varias 1 plazas 6 considerables, 1 
 recibia 7 sin 8 embargo 8 de la mayor 9 parte 1 de sus cortesanos 10 
 et titulo 1 de Grande. 
 
 Su Grandeza, 11 dijo un espanol, se 12 parece 12 a la de los 
 fosos, 13 que se 14 hacen 14 mayores 9 en proporcion a la tierra 15 
 que les 16 quitan. 16 
 
 2 last ; 3 Spain ; 4 chance=fortune ; 5 privar, to deprive , 6 place ; 
 7 recibir, to receive ; 8 nevertheless ; 9 greater ; 10 courtier , 11 great- 
 ness ; 12 resembles ; 13 ditch ; 14 make themselves=become ; 16 land, 
 earth ; 16 they take away from them. 
 
 El Aldeano y el Mercader. 
 
 Pasando un aldeano 2 por una tiei\da 3 que tenia la anaque- 
 leria 4 casi 5 vacia 6 de generos, 7 entro en ella, y con ironia 1 
 pregunto al mercader 8 que era lo que alii se vendia. 9 Este 
 quiso 10 tambien 11 burlarse 12 y le contesto 18 con enfado 14 : 
 Aqui se venden 9 cabezas 15 de/asnos. 16 
 
 Grande es Iaventa 17 de estacasa,segun 18 veo, 19 ledice 20 riendo 21 
 a carca'jadas 21 el aldeano, 2 pues no queda 22 mas* que la tuya. 
 
 2 villager ; 3 shop ; 4=shelves ; 5 almost ; 6 empty ; 7 goods ; 8 
 dealer; 9 vender se, to be sold j 10 wanted 5 11 also; 12 to jest; 13con- 
 testar, to answer ; 14 vexation ; 15 head ; 16 ass ; 17 sale ; 18 according 
 as ; 19 I see ; 20 says ; 21 laughing boisterously ; 22 quedar, to remain. 
 
 El Vice-C6nsul flemdtico. 
 
 Un soberano 2 mando 3 suspender 1 un dia su arenga 4 a un 
 orador 1 diciendole 5 : & Quien es Vd. ? Seiior, le respondio, 1 
 soy el segundo consul de mi pueblo. 6 ,; Y por que no ha ve- 
 nido 7 el primero ? Tened, 8 seiior, la bondad 9 de perdonarle, 10 
 pues tiene una razon 13 bastante 11 poderosa. 12 Yo no veo, 
 repone 14 el principe 15 irritado, 1 que es lo que piiede 16 alegar. 17 
 Sefior, contesta el orador 1 con su natural 1 flema, 18 es que 
 murio 19 ayer. Entonces el rey le mando 3 continuar. 1 
 
 2 sovereign ; 3 mcmdar, to order ; 4 harangue ; 5 saying to him ; 
 6 town ; 7 come ; 8 have ; 9 kindness ; 10 perdonar, to pardon ; 11 
 sufficiently ; 12 powerful ; 13 reason ; 14 replies ; 15 prince ; 16 he 
 can; 17 allege ; 18 phlegm; 19 he died. 
 
29 
 
 La Pronunciaeion Inglesa: 
 
 Para leer 2 el ingles no basta 3 saber 4 pronunciar 1 el alf abeto, 1 
 pues no hay 5 acaso 6 ninguna lengua 7 en Europa, 1 que pre- 
 sente 1 sonidos 8 tan varios 1 y excepciones 1 tan iiumerosas 1 a la 
 regla 9 general 1 ; de 10 modo que 10 s61o u por medio 12 de una 
 lectura 13 asidua 1 y constante, 1 bajo 14 la direccion 1 de un pro- 
 fesor 1 6 practicando 1 con ingleses, se 15 puede 15 conseguir 16 
 tener una pronunciacion 1 jnas 17 6 inenos 17 perfecta. 1 
 
 Hay 5 tambien 18 otra irr.egularidad 1 en la ortografia 1 del 
 ingles, f ranees 19 y otras lenguas, 7 a 20 saber 20 : una misma lefra 1 
 se pronuncia 1 de varias 1 maneras, 1 6 por 21 mejor deeir, 21 re- 
 presenta sonidos 8 enteramente 1 distintos, 1 en diferentes 
 palabras 22 ; y esta irregularidad 1 es muy extensa. 1 En Espanol 
 sucede 23 lo mismo con la " Y," la cual se pronuncia a veces 
 como " I " vocal, 24 y a veces como consonante. 1 
 
 Consideradas 1 todas estas irregularidades 1 que ocurren 1 tan 
 f recuentemente, 1 de una man era 1 u otra, en la mayor parte 1 de 
 las palabras, 22 casi 25 se 26 puede decir, 26 que las letras 1 inglesas 
 de ninguna manera 1 representan 1 los sonidos 8 del lenguaje, 1 
 y por 27 consiguiente 27 es en cierto modo 28 iinposible 1 hallar la 
 pronunciacion de las palabras 22 por la mera 1 vista 29 de las letras 
 inanuscritas 1 6 impresas 30 del modo 28 ordinario. 1 Una cosa 
 es aprender 31 a escribir 32 una palabra, 22 y otra enteramente 1 
 diferente 1 el saber 33 pronunciarla despues 34 de 34 escrita. 35 
 (se conthiuard en la paginal 1 siguiente.^) 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 
 2 read ; 3 bastar, to suffice ; 4 to know (how) ; 5 there is ; 6=perhaps ? 
 7 tongue ; 8 sound ; 9 rule ; 10 so that ; 11 only ; 12 means ; 13 reading ; 
 14 under ; 15=it is possible ; 16 to attain ; 1 7=approaching ; 18 also ; 
 19 French ; 2Q=viz. ; 21=it should rather be said ; 22 word ; 23 suceder^ 
 to happen ; 24 vowel ; 25 almost ; 26 it may be said ; 27 consequently ; 
 28 way ; 29 sight ; 30 printed ; 31 to learn ; 32 (to) write ; 33 know(ing 
 how to) ; 34 after; 35 written ; 36 following ; 37 page. 
 
 El gato 2 escaldado 3 del agua 6 fria 5 huye. 4 
 
 2 cat ; 3 escaldar, to scald ; 4 flees ; 5 cold ; 6 water. 
 
30 
 
 La Pronuhciacidn Inglesa (continuation). 
 La Pronunciation Inglesa es tan dificil, 1 que tanto 2 los 
 Americanos como 2 los Ingleses estan obligates 1 a tener para 
 su uso 1 " Diccionarios 1 de Pronunciation," con su clave 3 
 correspondiente 1 ; esto es, diccionarios en que las palabras 4 
 estan impresas, 5 tal 6 cual 6 deben 7 escribirse, 8 y a continuation 
 las mismas palabras 4 ' con ciertos signos, 1 que 'muestran 9 
 como deben 7 pronunciarse ; el metodo 1 6 sistema 1 con que 
 esto se 10 hace 10 se 11 denomina 11 " clave, 3 " la cual no es 
 siempre 12 la misma. Estos son los que se llaman 13 u Diccio- 
 narios de Pronunciaci6n.'**No los hay en castellano, 14 porque 
 no se 15 necesitan. 15 
 
 La diferencia 1 entre la manera 1 de escribir 16 y la de pro- 
 nuhciar las palabras 4 *en ingles, trae 17 su ori^en 1 ' parte 18 de 
 que la lengua 19 inglesa^e ha formado 1 de la mezcla 20 de un 
 gran niimero 1 de diferentes 1 idiomas, 19 parte 18 de los grandes 
 cambios 21 que han ocurrido 1 en el metodo^-de pronunciar 
 muchas palabras 4 durance 22 muchos siglos, 23 mientras 24 que 
 el metodo de escribirlas no ha cambiado 25 a proportion 1 ; pero 
 principalmente 1 a 26 causa de 26 haber ^adoptado 1 el alfabeto 1 
 romano 1 para representar 1 el ingles, que tiene muchos mas 
 sonidos 27 que el latino, 1 y aiin 28 mas que el castellano, 14 y que 
 por 29 tanto 29 no puede 80 representarlos 1 por el alfabeto romano. 
 
 2 tanto ... <&mo, both ... and ; 3 key ; 4 word ; 5 printed ; 6 like ; 7 they 
 must ; 8 be written ; 9 moslrar, to show ,- 10 does itself=is done : lL=is 
 entitled ; 12 always ; 13 llamar, to call ; 14 Castihan=Spanish , 15=are 
 r wanted ; 16 writing ; 17 draws=owes ; 18 part(ly) ; 19 language. 
 20 mixture ; 21 change ; 22 during ; 23 century ; 24 while ; 25 cambiar, 10 
 change ; 26 on account of ; 27 sound ; 28 yet ; 29 therefore ; 30 can. 
 
 El Libro prestado. 
 
 Preguntando un amigo a otro ; por que causa 1 no solian 2 vol- 
 verse 2 a BUS dueiios 3 los libros prestados 4 ? respondio : Porque 
 es mas facil 5 retener 6 los libros que lo 7 que 7 contienen. 8 
 
 2 were usually returned ; 3 owner ; 4 prestar, to lend ; 5 easy ; 6 (to) 
 retain ; 7 what ; 8 they contain. 
 
31 
 
 Se 2 cuenta 2 una buena y autentica 1 historia 1 de la mujer* 
 de un manufacturero 1 de encajes 4 de Nottingham, que hal- 
 l&ndose con su marido 5 en Paris y ocupada 1 en mirar 6 los 
 mostradores 7 como sucede 8 a los que visitan 1 Paris, se* 
 enamor6 9 de un panuelo 10 de encaje 4 de una finura 11 y 
 delicadeza 1 extrema, 1 por el cual el tendercf le pidio 12 la 
 moderada 1 suma 1 de cuatro cientos cuarenta francos. 1 
 
 Ella inmediatamente 1 lo hubiese 13 comprado 14 a 15 no impe- 
 dirselo 15 los dif erentes 1 signos 1 de disuasion 1 que le hizo 16 su 
 marido, 5 los cuales le sorprendieron 17 no poco, tanto 18 mas, 
 cuanto 19 sabia 20 que su marido* era un buen juez en la 
 materia 1 ; no podia 21 por 22 consiguiente 22 explicarse 23 esta 
 falta 24 de apreciacion 1 sobre tan hermoso 25 trabajo. 26 
 
 Ella examino 1 el panuelo 10 otra vez medio 27 dudando, 28 pero 
 el panuelo era suave^en te;jido 30 y de hermoso 25 dibujo 31 ; lanzo 32 
 otra mirada 33 a su esposo 5 y no le hallaba otro def ecto 1 que el 
 ser^caro 35 ; de 36 suerte que 86 con cierta pena 37 se 38 fue 38 dealli. 
 
 Apenas 39 habia 40 salido 41 de la tienda, 42 cuando interpe- 
 lando 43 a sb marido 6 le dijo : Juan, 44 <; por que no has querido 45 
 comprar 14 una cosa tan hermosa 25 como esa ? 
 
 Tienes 46 razon, 46 querida 47 mia, 47 fue la respuesta 48 de Juan. 
 I}fectivamente 49 es unarticulo 1 hermoso 25 : pero no he querido 46 
 compr&rtelo, 14 pues viene 50 de mi fabrica, 51 y puedo 62 darte w 
 otro igual 54 por veinte francos ! 
 
 2 is related ; 3 wife ; 4 lace ; 5 husband ; 6 look(ing) at ; 7 shop-counters; 
 8 suceder, to happen ; 9 enamorarse, to fall in love ; 10 handkerchief ; 11 
 fineness ; 12 asked ; 13 would have ; 14 comprar, to buy ; 15=but was pre- 
 vented by ; 16 made ; 17 sorprender, to surprise ; 18=all the ; 19 as ; 20 she 
 knew ; 21 she could ; 22 therefore ; 23 explicar, to explain ; 24 want ; 
 25 beautiful ; 26 work ; 27 half ; 28 dudar, to doubt ; 29 soft ; 30 texture ; 
 31 design ; 32 lanzar, to dart ; 33 glance ; 34 be(ing) ; 35 dear ; 36 so 
 that ; 37 pain=regret ; 38 she went away ; 39 hardly ; 40 she had ; 41 gone 
 out ; 42 shop ; 43 interpelar, to appeal ; 44 John ; 45 been willing ; 46 hast 
 reason=art right ; 47 my dear ; 48 reply , 49 certainly, indeed ; 60 it 
 comes ; 51 manufactory ; 52 I can ; 53 give thee ; 54 equal=like it. 
 
 I En qu6 se 2 parece 2 un esqueleto 3 a una comfda 4 de viernes 6 ? 
 En qne le 6 falta 6 la came. 7 
 2 resembles ; 3 skeleton ; 4 dinner ; 5 Friday ; 6 it lacks ; 7 flesh. 
 
82 
 
 El Hisisipi. 
 
 Paseabase 2 un europeo 1 por las orillas 3 del Misisipf, 1 rio 4 de> 
 curso 5 muy veloz, 6 y pregunto un labriego 7 : <; Como se^ 
 llama 8 este rio 4 ? No hay necesidad 1 de llamarle, senor, 
 porque el se viene 9 espontaneamente 10 solo. n 
 
 2 was passing ; 3 bank ; | river ; 6 current ; 6 rapid ; 7 peasant ; 
 co be called ; 9 comes ; 10 voluntarily ; 11 alone of its<own accord. 
 
 La Genero&idad. 
 
 Presentaron 1 a un caballero la cuenta 2 de gastos 3 del eti 
 tierro 4 de su mujer, 5 y al 6 ver 6 a lo 7 que 7 ascendia, \ como, 
 seiiores ! exclaino, 1 \ tanto 8 dinero por un convoy 9 f linebre 9 ! 
 
 Pues 10 que 10 <j cree Vd. que unos f unerales 'tan magnificos 1 
 se 11 hacen 11 por nada 12 ? no podemos 13 rebajar 14 un cuarto. 15 
 
 Vamos, 10 vamos, 10 les contesta, hacedme 16 el recibo, 17 .pue& 
 ahora ya me 18 hago cargo 18 de que mi pobre mujer 5 
 hubiera 19 pagado 20 muy gustosa 21 el doble 1 por -mi entierro,* 
 y no tfuiero 22 cederla 23 en generosidad. 1 
 
 2 account ; 3 expense ; 4 burial ; 5 wife ; 6 on seeing ; 7 what ; 8 so much i; 
 9 funeral ; 10 well ; ll=are done ; 12 nothing ; 13 we can ; 14 to bate ; 15 (a 
 small copper coin) ; 16 make me (out); 17 receipt ; 18 I think of it ; 19 would 
 have j 20 paid ; 21 cheerfully ; 22 I am willing ; 23 (to) give way .to fcer. 
 
 > Nueva Aritmetica. 
 
 Un abogado 2 hizo 3 la defensa 1 de un litigante 1 ante* ua 
 tribunal 1 compuesto 5 de tres jueces, 6 el uno muy sabio, 7 y los 
 otros dos bastante 8 ignorantes. 1 
 
 Perdio^ el pleito, 10 y queriendo 1 ^ uno de sus companeros 11 
 burlarse 13 de el, con este motivo 1 dijo : <; Pero, esperaban 14 
 Yds. 14 otra coaa ? Era preciso 16 sucediese 16 asi 17 con un 
 ,, tribunal 1 de cien jueces. 6 
 
 1 Cien jueces ! repuso 18 uno de ellos ; i pues 19 no eran tres ? 
 tFno y dos ceros 20 i cuanto 21 hacen 22 segiin 23 vuestra cuenta 24 ? 
 
 respondio el abogado. 2 
 
 2 lawyer ; 3 made ; 4 before ; 5 composed ; 6 judge ; 7 learned ; 8==rather; 
 9 he lost ; 10 law-suit ; 11 colleague ; 12 wishing ; 13 to make fun ; 14 did 
 you expect ; 15 necessary ; 16 it should happen ; 17 thus ; 18 replied ; 19 then 
 arbut ; 20 zero ; 21 iow many ; 22 do they make ; 23 according to ; 24 couat. 
 
From this point the Student is assumed to be acquainted with all the 
 Bules in "SPANISH SIMPLIFIED," including the principal Irregular 
 Verbs (see Lessons 19 to 24). 
 
 1 Campanario. 
 
 Una senora vio 2 entrar 1 en su cuarto a un hombre de una 
 estatura 1 gigantesca, 1 y pregunto quien era. Es un hombre 
 que viene 3 destinado 1 para la iglesia, 4 respondio el criado. 
 
 Mejor 8 diria Vd., 6 repnso 6 la senora, para el campanario. 7 
 
 2 saw ; 3 oomes=is ; 4 church ; 5 you would better say ; 6 replied } 7 steeple. 
 
 El Criado fiel. 
 
 Un sefior, necesitando 2 madrugar, 8 dice a su criado : Juan, 
 manana debes 4 despertarme 6 a las cuatro en 6 puntoJ* 
 
 Sera 7 Vd. servido. 7 
 
 Mira 8 que no te olvides. 9 No tenga Vd. cuidado. 10 
 
 Y Juan, fiel 11 a su promesa, 1 resuelve 1 no echarse 1 * en la 
 cama 12 aquella noche ; enciende 13 una vela, 14 y se sienta 16 en 
 una silla. 
 
 Pero el sueno, 16 que no hace diferencia 1 entre el desnudo 1 * 
 y el vestido, 18 acaba 19 por rendir 20 a Juan, que empieza 21 a 
 dormir 22 como un bendito. 23 De 24 siibito 24 se despierta, 5 
 consulta azorado 25 el reloj, que niarca 1 las dos, y siu darse 26 
 cuenta 26 de lo que hace, corre 27 a la camara 28 de su amo, y 
 empieza 21 a gritar 29 desaforadamente 30 : 
 
 \ Senor, senor ! <; Que 31 hay 31 ? <| son ya las cuatro ? res- 
 ponde 1 el amo sobresaltado. 32 
 
 No, senor, replica 1 Juan, no son mas que las dos : vengo a 
 decirle que aun 33 le quedan 34 dos hbras mas para dormir^; 
 aprovechelas 35 Vd. 
 
 2 wanting ; 3 to rise early ; 4 you must ; 5 despertar, to wake ; 6 pre- 
 cisely ; 7=it shall be done ; 8 look ; 9 olvidat, to forget ; 10 care= 
 anxiety; 11 faithful; 12=to go to bed ; 1 3 encetider^ to light ; 14 candle. ; 
 15 sentarse, to seat. one's self ; 16 sleep ; 17 undressed ; 18 dressed ; Waca- 
 fawyto finish ; 20 to overcome ; 21 empezar, to begin ; 22 to sleep ; 23 
 blessed ; 24 suddenly ; 25 terrified ; 26;=thinkiug ; 27 correr, to run ; 28 
 chamber ; 29 to call out ; 30 excessively,; 31 what is the matter ; 32 startled- 
 33 still ; 34 quedary to remain ; 35 aprovechar, to take advantage of. 
 
 3-SRS 
 
34 
 
 La Base fundamental de 1 Jnsticla. 
 
 tfn abogado 2 que iba a establecer 1 a a su escribiente* le dijo t 
 Mire 4 Vd. 4 ; antes 6 de 6 ausentarme 6 voy a comunicarle 1 una 
 cosa muy importante. 1 Ya sabe Vd. los favores 1 que me 
 debe, pues yo le he ensenado 7 el oficio, 8 y gracias 9 a mis 
 cuidados 10 no puede dejar 11 de hacer fortuna 1 en este mundo 12 ; 
 pero he reservado 1 para el ultimo 13 un servicio 1 interesante. 1 
 
 I Y cual es ? 
 
 Es el de inclicarle 1 la base 1 fundamental 1 de la justicia. 1 
 
 < Y cual es esa base ? No puedo decirla mientras 14 no me> 
 pague 15 tin buen almuerzo. 16 
 
 ti/onsiento 1 en ,ello, ordene 17 Vd. .lo que quiera. 18 
 
 l abogado 2 pidi6 19 dos docenab 20 de ostras, 21 jamon, 2 * un 
 pave,- 23 langostas, 24 en 26 fin 25 un almuerzo 16 suculento, 1 y des* 
 pues 26 le dijo : 
 
 Sepa 27 Vd., pues, que la base de toda-la justicia es la 
 prueba, 28 la prueba, amigp mio, la prueba. 
 
 Comen, 29 beben, 30 se divierten 31 ; pero todo placer 32 tiene su 
 fin 33 ; viene la cuenta, 34 y el abogado man da 35 se la 'den 36 al 
 <escribiente, 3 que es quien ha hecho aquel obsequio. 37 
 
 I Yo ? no, sefior. <; C6mo queno ? amiguito, 38 ya sabe Vd. 
 Jo que hemos convenido. 39 
 
 I Pues que convenio 40 he hecho yo ? 
 
 Que se ha comprometido 41 Vd. a pagarlo 16 to<i<K 
 
 1 Y d6nde esta la prueba 28 ? 
 
 El abogado 2 f ue 42 quien pago 15 por no poder darla, 45 siendo 
 eomo el mismo 44 le habia dicho, la base 1 fundamental 1 
 de la justicia. 1 
 
 2 lawyer.; 3 clerk ; 4 look (here) ; 5 before ; 6 aiteentarse> to absent one's- 
 self ; 7'ensenar, to teach ; 8 business ; 9 thanks ; 10 care ; 11 leave==fail ; : 
 12 world ; 13 last \ f 14 as loug as ; 15 pagar, to pay ; 16 breakfast ; 
 17 ordenar, to order ; 18 you like ; 19 requested ; 20 dozen ; 21 oyster j 
 22 ham ; 23 turkey ; 24 lobster ; 25 in fact ; 26 afterwards ; 27 know ; 
 28 proof'; 29 comer, to eat ; 30 beber, to drink ; 31 divertirse, to enjoy, 
 one's self ; 32 pleasure ; 33 end ; 34 bfll ; 35 mandar, to order ; 36 (that) 
 they give ; 37 civility ; 38 young friend ; 3d convetur, to agree ; 40 agree- 
 {pent ; 41 comprometerse, to undertake ; 42 GO was ' *& gi^e it ; 44 iumseli. 
 
HP 
 
 La Puerta cerrada.* 
 
 Un caballero de una conversacion f astidiosa 8 y eterna, 1 dio 4 
 en la costumbre 5 de ir f recuentemente 1 a una casa donde no 
 gustaban 6 mucho BUS visitas 1 ; fingia 7 no hacer 8 caso 8 de las 
 respuestas 9 de la criada, que le decia siempre 10 que los amos 
 no estaban en 11 casa, 11 y se introducia 1 sin cumplimiento 12 
 todos los dias con estos pretefctos 1 : Bien, bien ; mientras 13 
 vuelven u voy ahablar con los niiios... Hare 15 rabiar 15 un rato 17 
 al loro 16 .... Aprovechare 18 esta ocasi6n 1 para arreglar 19 mi 
 reloj por el del salon, etc. 
 
 Una manana que la criada tenia ya su contestacion 9 pen- 
 sada, 20 le vio venir de lejps 21 desde 22 una ventana, 23 fue cor- 
 riendo 24 a la puerta, y sin abrirla 25 le dijo desde 22 la rejilla 2 ^ : 
 Seiior don Ramon, mi amo y mi ama ban salido, los ninos estan 
 en la escuela, 27 el loro 16 ha muerto, 28 y el reloj esta, parado. 29 
 
 Cerro la rejilla 26 y no le dio lugar 30 a mas conversaci6n. 1 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 2 cerrar, to shut ; 3 tedious ; 4=was ; 5 habit ; 6 gustar, to please ; 7fingir t 
 to pretend ; 8=to take notice ; 9 answer ; 10 always ; 11 at home ; 
 \2=ceremony ; 13 while=until ; 14 volver, to return ; 151 will tease ; 
 16 parrot ; 17 short time; 18 aprovechar, to take advantage of ; 19 (to) 
 regulate ; 20 pensar, to consider ; 21 afar ; 22 from ; 23 window ; 24 correct 
 to run ;- 25 abrir, to open ; 26 lattice ; 27 school ; 28 died ; 29 parar, to 
 stop ; 30 place=opportunity,- 
 
 Un particular 2 que ajustaba 3 un borrico, 4 dijo al molinero 5 que 
 lo tomaria, con la garantia 1 de que no tuviese ningiin def ecto. 1 
 
 Convengo 6 en ello, respondio el duenoJ 
 
 Pasados 8 algunos dias el comprador 9 advirtio 10 que el 
 borrico 4 era tuerto, 11 y quiso devolverselo 13 diciendole : 
 
 Amigo mio, su borrico 4 de Vd. no ve mas que de un lado, 13 
 porque solo 14 abre 14 una ventana. 
 
 Toma, 15 responde, eso no es un def ecto, 1 sino una desgracia. 16 
 
 2 certain man ; 3 was bargaining ; 4 donkey ; 5 miller ; 6 convenir, to agree; 
 7 owner ; 8 passed=after ; 9 buyer ; 10 advertir, to notice^ ; 11 one-eyed 
 .12 to return it to him ; 13 side ; 14 only opens j 15... well ; 16 misfortune. 
 
88 
 
 Cddiz. 
 
 Pocos panoramas 1 hay mas bellos 2 en el mundo,* y casi 4 
 ningun cuadro 5 en la naturaleza 6 que cautive 7 mas los ojos 8 
 del espectador 9 por su diafanidad 10 y hermosura, 11 que el que 
 of rece 13 la vista 12 de la ciudad de Cadiz, desde 14 uno de los 
 vapores 15 que hacen la travesia 16 de Sevilla 1 a este puerto, 17 
 cuando tpca 18 al ternimo 19 de su espedicion, 1 a los viajeros 20 
 que contemplan 1 la linda 21 ciudad que se levanta 22 sobre el 
 mar, 23 a 24 la mahera 1 de 24 un palacio 1 de pJata 25 primorosa- 
 mente 26 afiligranado. 27 La blancura 28 de sus torres 2 ? y de las 
 azoteas 30 de sus casas, las ciipulas 1 y los torreones 31 de sus 
 templos, y la belleza 11 armonica 32 de su conjunto, 33 ceuido 34 
 por la ancha 35 faja 36 de piedra 37 que la circuye, 88 le dan por 
 otro lado 39 el aspecto 1 de un gran buque 40 de alabastro, 1 
 flotante 1 en medio 41 de los mares, 23 
 
 A 42 medida que 42 el vapor 15 va adelantando 43 rapido 1 
 hacia 44 el muelle, 46 el viajero 20 menos reflexivo 1 se convence 1 
 de que se 46 aproxima 46 a una poblacion 1 iniportante 1 por su 
 movimiento 1 mercantil 1 ; y los numerosos 1 buques 40 de todos 
 portes 47 y con banderas 48 de todas las naciones 1 de Europa, 
 que estan anclados 49 en su bahia, 50 y por 51 entre 51 los cuales 
 cruza 52 el vapor, 15 le indican 1 claramente 53 que la bella 2 
 ciudad aun 54 conserva 1 restos 56 honrosos 55 de su antiguo 57 
 poderio 58 y de su pristina grandeza. 59 
 
 2 beautiful ; 3 world ; 4 almost ; 5 picture ; 6 nature ; 7 cautivar, to 
 captivate ; 8 eye ; 9 spectator ; 10 transparency ; 11 beauty ; 12 view ; 
 13 offers ; 14 from ; 15 steamer ; 16 passage across ; 17 port ; 18 tocar, to 
 touch ; 19 end ; 20 traveller ; 21 pretty ; 22 levantar, to raise ; 23 sea i 
 24=like ; 25 silver ; 26 elegantly ; 27 filigreed ; 28 whiteness ; 29 tower ; 
 30 flat roof ; 31 turret ; 32 harmonious ; 33=grouping"; 34 cen/r, to gird ; 
 35 broad ; 36 band ; 37 stone ; 38 circuir, to surround ; 39 side ; 40 ship ; 
 41 middle ; 42 in proportion as ; 43 moving forward ; 44 towards ; 45 quay ; 
 46 he is approaching ; 47 tonnage ; 48 flag ; 49 anclar, to anchor j 50 
 bay ; 51 through ; 52 cvuzar, to cruise ; 53 clearly ; 54 still ; 55 honorable ; 
 66 remains ; 57 ancient ; 58 power ; 59 greatness. 
 
 I Quien es el que sin ceremonia 1 y con sombrero puestp, 2 
 se 3 sienta 3 delante 4 del rey, del papa, 5 6 del emperador 1 ? 
 
 El cochero. 6 
 
 2 put=on ; 3 sits down ; 4 before ; 6 pope ; 6 coachman. 
 
87 
 
 La Disputa de Cocina. 
 
 Tramaron 2 una disputa 1 la criada y el cochero 3 de un ban- 
 quero 1 de Murcia, sobre quien~~de los dos habia de ir al 
 desayuno 4 del amo ; y este, oyendo 5 los gritos, 6 les llamo 7 para 
 resolver 8 sobre esta diferencia. 1 La cocinera 9 se quejaba 10 de 
 que el cochero 3 pasaba toda la manana rodando 11 por 11 la co- 
 cina 12 corno un zangano, 13 y que ella tenia tanto 14 que hacer 
 que no podia separarse 1 del fogon 15 un solo 16 instante. 1 
 
 El cochero 3 dijo que la crema 17 no era de su obligacion. 1 
 
 Veamos, 18 pues, <; cual es tu obligacion ? le pregunto el amo. 
 
 Mi oficio, 19 seiior, es el;de cuidar 20 los caballos, limpiar 21 
 el coche 22 y llevarlo 23 a donde su merced 24 me mande. 25 
 
 Es verdad) 26 tienes 27 razon, 27 y no exijo 28 mas de ti, pues 
 solo 29 para eso te tengo ; y en este supuesto 30 todas las 
 mananas te levantaras 31 al amanecer, 32 limpiaras 21 inuy bien el 
 coche 22 y los caballos, y antes 33 de 33 almorzar 4 ngancharas 34 
 y llevaras 23 en el a la cociiiera 9 al mercado 35 para 36 que 
 eompre 36 la cremai 17 
 
 El cochero se 37 rasco las orejas, 37 y se retiro. 1 
 
 2 weaved=had ; 3 coachman ; 4 breakfast ; 5 hearing ; 6 cry ; 7 Hainan 
 to call; 8=decide; 9 cook ; 10 quejarse, to complain ; 11 wandering 
 about ; 12 kitchen ; 13 idler ; 14 so much ; 15 hearth ; 16 single ; 
 17 cream ; 18 let us see ; 19 business ; 20 to look after ; 21 to clean ; 
 22 coach ; 23 llevai'^to take ; 24 honor , 25 orders ; 2G truth ; 27 thou 
 art right ; 28 exigir, to require ; 29 only ; 30 supposition ; 31 levantarse, 
 to get up ; 32 dawn ; 33 before ; 34 enganchar, to harness ; 35 market ; 
 36 that she (may) buy ; 37 scratched his ears. 
 
 Entre un hombre pobre y un hombre rico hay todo un 
 hombre de diferencia. 1 
 
 Un bufon 1 pregunto a uno que tenia las piernas* torcidas 3 
 y la cadera 5 derecha 4 derrengada, 6 <r que camino habia tornado 
 para ir a Cadiz ? 
 
 He venido todo 7 derecho, 8 respondio. 
 
 Pues, senor, en ese caso, 1 repuso 9 el buf 6n, se ha. 'trans- 
 formado 1 Vd. enteramente 10 en el camino. 
 
 2 leg ; 3 distorted ; 4 right ; 5 hip ; 6 crooked ; 7=cquite ; 8 straight 
 9 replied ; 10 entirely. 
 
Esopo y el Viajero. 
 
 Esopo, 1 el celebre 1 fabulista, 1 era muy pobre, y mnchas 
 veces tenia que 2 ir a 3 pie^ de una ciudad a otra. ' En una de 
 BUS excursiones 1 encontro 4 en el camino aun viajero, el cual 
 deteniendose 5 le pregunto : 
 
 I Puede 6 Vd. decirme a que hora llegare a aquel pueblo 
 que esta sobre la colina 7 ? 
 
 En llegando lo sabra 8 Vd,, 8 contesto 9 Esopo. 1 
 
 Ya lo se, dijo el viajero ; pero lo que "deseo 10 saber, es 
 cuanto 11 tiempo tar dare. 12 
 
 Esopo parecio^ofenderse^y repitio^a misma contestation,** 
 
 El viajero continue 1 su camino diciendp para 15 si 15 : Es 
 hombre me parece 13 un ignorante 1 y no me dira 16 lo 
 necesito 17 saber. 
 
 Algunos minutos despues 18 oyo 19 que le llamaban, 20 y vol 
 viendo 21 la vista, 21 vi6 a Esopo que le seguia f ?2 
 
 i Que quiere Vd. ?' le pregunto. 
 
 Dentro 23 de hora y media 24 llegara Vd. al pueblo, respon* 
 di6 Esopo. 
 
 1 Y por qu6 no me lo dijo Vd. cuando se 25 lo pregunte 25 ? 
 Antes 26 necesitaba 17 ver lo 27 ligero 27 que Vd. andaba. 28 
 
 2=to ; 3 .on foot -> 4 enconlrar, to meet ; 5 detenerse, to stop ; 6 can ; 
 7 hill ; 8 you will know ; 9 contesiar, to answer ; 10 desear, to desire ; 11 
 how much ; 12 tardar, to delay ; 13 parecer, to seem j^^H answer ; 15 to 
 himself ; 16 will tell ; 17 mcesitar, to want ; 18 after ; 19 o/r, to hear j 
 20 llamar r io call ; 21=turning round ; 22 seguir, to follow ; 23 within ; 24 
 ^alf ; 25 I asked you ; 26 before=first ; 27=the rate ; 28 cindar,. to^walk. 
 
 Un pobre zapatero 2 remend6n 2 se vio un dia apurado 3 para 
 .encender 4 la lumbre, 5 y envi6 a un chiquillo, 6 hijo suyo, a 7 
 buscar un f uelle prestado, 7 por un momento, d casa de un. 
 avaro 8 que vivia en la vecindad 9 ; pero este dijo al nifio : 
 Mira, 10 dile 11 a tu padre, que yo no dejo 12 salir 'el fyielle 13 de 
 mi casa; pero f que puede venir cuando quiera^d sOplar 15 
 todo el dia en mi cocina. 16 
 
 2 cobbler ; 3=unable ; 4 (to) light : 5 fire ; 6 little boy ; 7 to seek a 
 pair of bellows lent=to borrow a pair of bellows ; 8 miser ; 9 neighbour- 
 hood ; 10 look (here) ; llteU; 12 ^ar, to let > 13 beUoTOl H be Ifces; 
 15(tp)blow; 
 
89 
 
 Foote y el Alcalde. 
 
 Viajando* una vez el actor Foote por el oeste 3 de Inglaterra 4 
 se detuvo 5 en una posada 6 para comer. 7 Al arreglar 8 las 
 cuentas 9 el posadero 10 le pregunto si estaba satisfecho. 1 
 
 Perfectamente, 1 dijo Foote, he comido 7 mejor 11 que nadie 13 
 en Inglaterra. 4 
 
 Excepto 1 el alcalde, 13 replico el posadero. 10 
 
 Yo no hago excepcion 1 alguna. 
 
 Pero debe 14 Vd. exceptuar 1 ^! alcalde. 13 
 
 Y Foote, encolerizado, 15 volvio 16 a replicar 16 recalcando 17 la 
 voz ]8 en cada silaba 1 que ni aun 19 exceptuaba a al mismo 20 alcalde. 
 
 Y tomo tales 21 proporciones 1 la pendencia, 22 que el posade- 
 ro 10 condujo 23 a Foote en presencia 1 del alcalde 13 del lugar. 24 
 
 Sr. Foote, le dijo este venerable 1 magistrado, 1 ha de saber 
 Vd. que desde 25 tiempo inmemorial 1 se 26 conserva 26 aqui la 
 costumbre 1 de hacer siempre 27 una excepcion 1 para el alcalde, 13 
 y con objeto 1 de que lo tenga Vd. presente 1 le condeno 1 
 a cinco reales 1 de multa, 28 6 a cinco horas de arresto 1 si asi 29 
 lo prefiere. 1 
 
 Foote se vio precisado 30 a pagar la multa. 28 A su salida 31 dijo : 
 
 En toda la cristiandad 32 no conozco 33 un hombre mas- 
 tonto 34 que ese posadero, 10 ... excepto 1 el senor 35 Alcalde e 
 hizo una solemne 1 reverencia 1 a Su Senoria. 36 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 
 2 viqjar, to travel ; 3 west ; 4 England ; 5 detenerse, to stop ; 6 inn ; 
 7 to dine ; 8 settling ; 9 account ; 10 innkeeper ; 11 better ; 12 nobody= 
 anybody ; 13 mayor ; 14 must ; 15 angered ; 16 returned to reply=replicd 
 again ; 17=empbasizing ; 18 voice ; 19 even ; 20 himself ; 21 such ; 22 dis- 
 pute ; 23 conducir, to conduct ; 24 place ; 25 from ; 26 is preserved ; 
 27 always ; 28 fine ; 29 thus, so ; 30 precisar, to compel ; 31 going out ; 32 
 Christendom ; 33 conocer, to know ; 34 foolish ; 35 Lord ; 36 lordship. 
 
 La mayor parte de los hombres pasan la mitad 2 de su 
 vida 3 estropeando 4 su salud, 5 y la otra mitad 6 haciendo en- 
 sayos 7 para remendarla. 8 
 
 2 half ; 3 life ; 4 estropear, to cripple, injure ; 5 health ; 6 half ; 7 eft- 
 cleavour ; 8 rementfari to mend. 
 
40 
 
 Habiendo una bala* enemiga 1 dejado 3 srn brazos 4 a un sol- 
 dado frances en la batalla de Hastembeck, su coronel 1 le 
 rega!6 5 un escudo. 6 ~Mi coronel, dijo el soldado, tal 7 vez 7 
 V. 8 S, 8 cree que he perdido 9 un par 10 de guantes. 11 
 
 2 ball ; 3 dejar, to leave ; 4 arm ; 5 regalar, to present ; 6 crown ; 7 per- 
 baps ; 8 vttestra serlor/a==your honor ; 9 perder, to lose ; 10 pair ; 11 glove. 
 
 Mosiraba* un rico sus joyas 3 a un fi^sofo, 1 y este le dijo : 
 Gracias, senor, por**^$as brillantes 1 joyas 3 de que tan ca- 
 'rinosamente 4 me hace Yd. participe, 1 <; Como 5 se entiende 
 Vd. participe 5 ? Si, senor, Vd. permite 1 que yo las con- 
 temple 1 ; y i hace Vd. con ellas otra cosa dif erente 1 ? 
 
 2 mostrar, to show ; 3 jewel ; 4 kindly ; 5=how do you mean share ? 
 
 Como en los antiguos 1 teatros 1 londonenses 2 no represen- 
 taban 1 las mujeres, tenian que desempenar 3 el papel 4 de estas 
 hombres disfrazados. 5 Impacientado 1 una yez Carlos II. 
 esperando 6 el comienzo 7 de la f uncion, 8 el director compare- 
 cio 9 ante el rey y le dijo : 
 
 S. 10 M. 10 dispense, u pero la reina 12 no se ha af eitado 13 todavia. 14 
 
 2 London ; 3 fulfil ; 4 part ; 5 disfrazar, to disguise ; 6 esperar, to expect; 
 7 commencement ; 8 performance ; 9 comparecer, to appear; 10 Su Majestad^. 
 Your Majesty ; 11 dispensar, to excuse ; 12 queen ; 13 to shave ; 14 yet. 
 
 Cay6se 2 en un rio 8 una senorita romantica 1 y poco 4 le f alto 
 para ahogarse. 4 Pasaba por casualidad 5 un nadador, 6 y lan- 
 zandose 7 al rio 5 la saco 8 desmayada, 9 en cuyo estado 10 fue 
 llevada a su casa. Cuandp volvio 21 en si, 21 declaro 1 a sus 
 padres 12 que queria casarse|? con el que le habia salvado 14 la 
 vida. 15 Es imposibl^, dice, su padre. ^ Es que esta ya 
 casado 13 ? No. Pues diga Vd. ,; no es aquel joven 16 vecino 17 ' 
 nuestro ? Oh, no : es un perro 18 de Terra-Nova. 19 
 
 2 fell ; 3 river ; 4 little was wanting to her to drown herself=was nearly 
 drowned ; 5 chance ; 6 swimmer \ r 1 lansar, to fling ; 8 sacar, to draw 
 dut ; 9 insensible ; 10 state ; l'i=came to herself again ; 12 parents ; 
 13 casar, to marry ; 14 salvar, to save ; 15 life j 16 young (man) ; 17 
 neighbour ; 18 dog ; 19 Newfoundland, 
 
41 
 
 Un caballerito que iba a casarse* despues de haber confe- 
 Bado, 1 entro 1 ea nn escrtipulo, 1 y se volvio 3 al confesor. 
 
 Padre, le dice, no s6 si me he confesado bien, pues veo que 
 no me habeis impuesto 4 ninguna peniteftcia. 1 
 
 El confesor, que era entendido, 5 le respondi6 : Pues no 
 me ha dicho Vd., hijo, que iba a casarse 2 ? 
 
 2 casarse, to get married ; 3 volverse, to go back ; 4 imponer> to impose ; 
 6 knowing. 
 
 En la representacion 1 de una nueva comedia 1 casera 2 
 hubo 3 tanta demanda 1 de 4 billetes 6 de entrada, 6 que no fueron 
 suficienies 1 los que habia 3 segiin 7 la capacidad 1 del saldn, 1 y 
 -algunos de los aficionados 8 que hacian la comedia, introduje- 
 ron 1 por v el escenario, 9 que tenia una puerta falsa, 1 mnchas 
 personas antes de abrir 10 la entrada 6 principal. Al 11 ver 11 esto 
 el director dijo muy enojado 12 : Es una vergiienza 13 dejar 
 llenar 14 el salon antes de entrar 1 la gente. 15 
 
 2 domestic ; 3 there was or were ; 4=for ; 5 ticket ; 6 entrance ; 7 ac- 
 cording to ; 8 amateur ; 9 scene ; 10 open(ing) ; 11 on seeing ; 12 an- 
 noyed ; 13 shame ; 14 (to) fill ; 15 people. 
 
 El gracioso 2 de un teatro 1 de Paris, 1 se 3 metio 3 una maiiana 
 en una fonda, 4 la primera que hallo a mano, y pidiendo 5 de 
 almorzar, 6 suplico 7 al fondista 8 le hiciese 9 cbmpaiiia 1 a la 
 meza. Este, para mostrarle 10 sin duda 11 su aprecio, 12 empezo, 13 
 sin hablar palabra, 14 a tirar 15 debajo 16 de 16 la mesa las cosas 
 que veia sucias. 17 
 
 El gracioso, 2 que vio arrojar 18 las servilletas, 19 los cubiertos 20 
 y los cuchillos, 21 no queriendo contrariarle, 22 le imito tirando 15 
 precipitadamente 1 las f uentes, 23 los platos 24 y los vasos, 25 
 
 El fondista, 8 sorprendido 26 al ver esto, le pregunto la causa, 1 
 y el con mucha serenidad 1 le dijo : Hombre, 27 pensaba 28 que 
 queria Vd. que almorzasemos 29 debajo 16 de 16 la mesa. 
 
 2 comic actor ; 3 put bimself=went ; 4 inn ; 5 asking ; 6 breakfast ; 7 
 suplicar, to entreat ; 8 innkeeper ; 9 that he should make=keep ; 10 mos- 
 trar, to show ; 11 doubt ; 12 esteem ; 13 empezar, to begin ; 14 word ; 
 15 ^'rar, to throw ; 16 under; 17 dirty; 18 fling; 19 napkin; 20 cover ; 
 21 knife ; 22 to oppose ; 23 dish ; 24 plate ; 25 glass ; 26 sorprender, to 
 surprise ; 27=well ; 28 pensar, to think ; 29 we should breakfast. 
 
42 
 
 El Barometro. 
 
 .Un medico andaluz 1 tenia un dia algunos amigos a comer 2 
 en su casa. Uno de ellos le dijo que-deseaba ver su hermoso 
 barometro 1 que decian ~ le habia costado 1 mil francos, 1 y 
 mando a nn criado que f uese 3 a buscarlo 3 ; pero este, al 4 
 traerlo, 4 lo dejo caer 5 y se 6 hizo pedazos. 6 
 
 Todos los convidados 7 demostraron al doctor su sentimiento 8 
 por tan desagradable 1 accidente. 1 : No os aflijais, 9 les dijo el 
 medico : este suceso 10 es de buen agtiero, 11 pues hace 12 mucho 
 tiempo que no llueye, 12 y como nunca 13 he visto el barometro 
 tan bajo, 14 es de presumir 1 que vamos a tener agua. 15 
 
 2 dine ; 3=he should go and fetch it ; 4 on bringing it ; 5 fall ; 6 made 
 itself pieces=broke" in pieces ;: 7 guest ; 8 regret ; 9 afligirse, to lament j, 
 10 event ; 11 omen ; 12=it has not rained for a long time ; J3 never i 
 14 low ; 15 water=rain. 
 
 Un principe, 2 queriendo divertirse 1 a costa 1 de uno de sus 
 cortesanos 3 a quien habia empleado 4 en diferentes 1 embaja- 
 das, & le dijo que se parecia s a un buho. 7 
 
 Yo, senor, no se a quien me parezco, 6 respondi6 : lo que 
 se es que he tenido el honor 1 de repregentar 1 muohas voces* 
 a Vuestra Majestad. 1 
 
 2 prince , 3 courtier ; 4 emplear, to employ ; 5 embassy ; 6 parecerse,) 
 to resemble ; 7 owl. 
 
 Un hombre naturalmente 1 gracioso 2 fue citado 3 para.de-j 
 poner 4 ante el tribunaPcriminal 1 sobre una disputa 1 muy seria 1 ! 
 que habian tenido dos comerciantes. 5 Un abogado, 6 que teniaj 
 la reputacion 1 de procurar 7 siempre desconcertar 1 a los testi* 
 gos, 8 le pregunto a que distancia estaba del sitio 9 de la escena.* 
 
 A un metro, 1 cinco centimetros 1 y BOJS milimetros, 1 . le 
 respondio. 
 
 <; Como puede Yd. ser tan exacto ? repusp 1 ^ el abogado.^ 
 
 Porque suponia 11 que algiiu curioso^ me lo preguntaria, y 
 he medido 13 el terreno. 14 
 
 2 witty?T 3 citar, to summon j 4 depose ; 5 merchant ; 6 lawyer ; 
 7.try(ing) ;' -8 witness \ 9 place ; 10 replied ; . 11 suponer t to suppose^ 
 i# inquisitive (person) ; 1 3 medir } to measure j II ground. 
 
43 
 
 El Cirujano. 
 
 Un cirnjano 2 muy gracioso 3 f ue llamado para curar 1 a un 
 caballero caprichoso 1 que se habia hecho una pequena llaga 4 
 en una pierna. 8 
 
 El criado habia ido volando 6 a buscarle y el pobre llego casi 7 
 sin aliento 8 suponiendo 9 que eracosa de la mayor importancia. 
 
 Reconocio 10 al her ido, 11 y no hallando sino 12 un rasgimo 13 
 que se podia curar 1 con tafetan, 14 por burlarse 15 de el mando 
 a un criado que f uese 16 sin parar 17 a su casa por un balsamo 1 
 que indico, 1 y que volviese 18 al momento. 
 
 Pues 19 que, 19 dice el herido, 11 palido 1 y tremblando 1 de 
 aprension, 1 <; tanto 20 es el peligro 21 ? 
 
 No, seiior, dice el cirujano 2 ; sino 12 que si tarda, 22 temo 28 que 
 no llegue a tiempo, p*orque la llaga 4 se va a curar ! por si 24 sola. 25 
 
 2 surgeon ; 3 witty ; 4 wound ; 5 leg ; 6 volar 4 to fly ; 7 almost ; 8 breath ; 
 9 suponer, to suppose ; 10 reconocer, to examine ; 11 wounded (man) ; 12 
 only ; 13 scratch ; 14 sticking-plaster ; 15 make game ; 16 he (should) go ; 
 17 stop(ping) ; 18 he (should) come back ; 19=why then ; 20 so much ; 
 21 danger ; 22 tardar, to delay ; 23 temer, to fear ; 24 itself ; 25 alone. 
 
 La hija de un alcalde 2 estaba cuidando 3 ttn canario 1 que 
 tenia, y habiendo dejado abierta 4 la ventanilla 5 de la jaula, 6 
 se escapo 1 el pajarillo. 7 
 
 La primera precaucion 1 que tomo su padre, luego 8 que 8 lo 
 supo, 9 fue mandar cerrar 10 las puertas de la ciudad. 
 
 2 mayor ; 3 cuidar t to take care of ; 4 open ; 5 little window ; 6 cage ; 
 7 little bird ; 8 as soon as ; 9 he knew ; 10 to (be) shut. 
 
 Un pobre artesano 1 que estaba enfermo 2 y sin un cuarto> 3 
 dijo a un amigo que pensaba consultar 1 su mal 4 con el medico 
 N , pero que recelaba 5 hacerlo por no poder pagarle, y el 
 amigo le contesto : Creo que haras 6 muy mal en llamarle si 
 no tienes dinero, porque cuando ^1 esta enfermo, 2 y se 
 consulta d si mismo sobre lo que debe 7 tomar, se saca 8 un 
 duro 9 de un bolsillo 10 y se lo mete 11 en otro. 
 
 2 ill ; 3 a small Spanish coin ; 4 complaint ; 5 recelar, to mistrust ; 6 thou 
 Wilt do ; 7 he must ; 8 sacar, to draw ; 9 dollar ; 10 pocket ; 1 1 mefcr, to put. 
 
44 
 
 El Hombre sin Sesos. 
 
 Dos suizos 2 estaban rifiendo 3 con el mayor encarnizamiento 4 
 en inedio 5 de una plaza 6 publica, 1 y an aldeano, 7 que casual- 
 men te l pasaba por 8 alii, 8 quiso 9 separarlos 1 por compasion 1 ; 
 pero ellos, que estaban ciegos 10 de furor, le echaron 11 a tierra 
 de un sablazo, 12 y le hicieron 13 .una herida u en la cabeza, 15 por 
 lo que fue preciso 16 le reeonocieW 8 un clr,ujano. 17 
 
 Procediendo 1 este 19 con tientp 20 para saber si tenia las- 
 timados 21 los sesos 22 : No se canse 23 Vd. en' buscarlos, le 
 dijo el aldeano, 7 pues cuando me meti 24 en la contienda, 25 
 ya no los tenia. 
 
 2 Swiss ; 3 renir, .to quarrel ; 4 fury ; 5 middle ; 6 place ; 7 villager ; 
 8=rthat way ; 9 wanted ; 10 blind ; 1 1 echar, to throw ; 12 cut from a sabre : 
 13 made=gave ; 14 wound ; 15 head ; 16 necessary ; 17 surgeon ; 18 should 
 examine ; 19=the latter ; 20=care ; 21 lastimar, to hurt ; 22 brains ; 23 
 cansar, to tire ; 24 meterse^ to put one's self=to interfere ; 25 quarrel. 
 
 Que hace Vd. ? dijo a un gotoso, 3 que estaba coimendo* 
 jamon, 4 un amigo suyo : no ve Vd. que el jamon 4 es malo 
 para la gota 5 ? 
 
 Asi 6 es, respondio el doliente 7 ; pero es bueno para el gotoso.* 
 
 2 gouty (person) ; 3 comer, to eat ; 4 ham ; 5 gout ; 6 so ; 7 invalid. 
 
 Habiendo dicho nn 2 sugeto 2 a una senora que un boti- 
 cario 3 amigo suyo habia quebrado 4 y.se habia visto obligado 1 
 a cerrar 5 la botica, 6 le pregun.t6 la causa. 1 Respondiola que 
 era un hombre honrado, 7 que en 8 vez 8 de cargar 9 de remedios 1 
 a sus enfermos, 10 les aconsejaba 11 respirar 1 aire 1 puro, 1 por 
 cuyo consejo 12 perdia 13 todo el -beneficio 1 que debia 16 <iejarle 
 la venta 14 de sus drogas. 15 
 
 j Pobre hombre ! replico la sefiora, es lastima 17 que no 
 pueda 18 vivir de aire 1 como sus enfermos. 10 
 
 2 a person=some one ; 3 apothecary ; 4 quebrar, to become bankrupt ; 
 6 shut ; 6 apothecary's shop ; 7 honorable ; 8 instead*; 9 load(ing) ; 10 
 patient ; 11 aconsejar, to advise ; 12 advice ; 13 perder> to lose ; H sale;. 
 15 drug ; 16 ought ; 17 pity ; 13 can. 
 
45 
 
 El Poeta y el Pastelero. 
 
 Un poeta 1 hizo en unos versos 1 el elogio 2 de un pastelero, 3 
 y este creyo debia 4 demostrarle 5 su reconocimiento 6 regalan- 
 dole 7 un pastel, 8 lo que ejecuto 1 inmediatamente 1 ; pero ha- 
 biendo advertido 9 el poeta 1 que el papel que cubria 10 el 
 fondo 11 del pastel 8 era parte 1 de su produccion, 1 reconvino 12 
 amargamente 13 a su protegido 14 por tal desprecio, 15 y este 
 le respondio : 
 
 <j Pero que motivo 1 tiene Vd. para quejarse 16 ? Ahora es 
 cuando estamos juego 17 a juego, 17 pues Vd. ha hecho versos 1 
 sobre mi pasta, 18 y yo he hecho pastas sobre sus versos. 1 
 
 2 eulogy ; 3 pastry-cook ; 4 he ought ; 5 demostrar, to demonstrate J 
 6 gratitude ; 7 regalar, to present ; 8 pie ; 9 advertir, to notice ; 10 
 cubrir, to cover ; 11 bottom ; 12 reconvenir, to reproach ; 13 bitterly ; 
 14 protected=pro%e ; 15 contempt ; 16 complain(ing) ; 17 game to 
 game=quite ; IB pastry. 
 
 Mas vale 2 un " toma," que dos " te dare.' 1 
 
 1 Me haria Vd. el favor 1 de prestarme diez pesetas 1 ? 
 Pero, senor, no tengo el honor 1 de conocerle. 3 
 Precisamente 1 acudo 4 a Vd. por esta misma 5 razon 5 ; pues 
 
 los que me conocen 3 nunca 6 quier^n prestarme un centime. 1 
 
 2 is worth ; 3 conocer, to know ; 4 acudir^ to appeal ; 5=?ery reason ; 
 
 6 never. 
 
 El jardinero del Jardin Botanico 1 confio 2 a un criado algo 3 
 tonto 4 dos hermosos higos 5 para Buffon. Por el camino 6 el 
 mensajero, 7 vencido 8 de la tentacion, 1 se trago 9 uno y al 
 presentar 10 el otro al Naturalista, 1 este, que esperaba 11 recibir 
 dos, dijo al criado : ^ Que has hecho con el otro higo 5 ? 
 
 He hecho asi, 12 le respondio, y tragose 9 el otro con la 
 mayor tranquilidad 1 del mundo. 13 
 
 2 cow/far, to entrust ; 3 somewhat ; 4 foolish, simple ; 5 fig ; 6 way ; 
 
 7 messenger ; 8 v e?cer, to conquer ; 9 tragar> to swallow ; 10 presenting) : 
 11 esperar t to expect ; 12 thus ; 13 world. 
 
46 
 
 El Eclipse suspendido. 
 
 El eclipse 1 de sol 2 que fue pronosticado 1 para el aiio de .1724* 
 asusto 3 tan to a los aldeanos 4 de algunos paises, & que el cura 6 
 de un pueblo, no pudiendo confesar 1 a tantos parroquianos 7 
 como acudian, 8 creyendo llegado el dia del juicio, 9 les dijo en 
 el piilpito 1 : Hijos mios, no 10 hay que daros prisa, 10 pues el 
 eclipse 1 ha sido trasladado 11 por orden 1 del senor alcalde 12 
 para el 13 mes que viene. 13 
 
 2 sun ; 3 terrified ; 4 villager ; 5 country ; 6 clergyman ; 7 parishioner ; 
 8=rwent (to him) ; 9 judgment ; 10 there is no occasion to give yourselves 
 hurry ==hurry yourselves ; 11 postponed ; 12 mayor ; 13 next month. 
 
 Un caballero que comia en un hotel pldi6 2 a uno a su lado* 
 si le haria el favor 1 de pasarle la mostaza. 4 
 
 1 Cree 5 Yd. que soy un criado ? le respondio. 
 
 Ah, no, senor, le dijo el otro, creia 5 que era Vd. un caballero. 
 2 pedir, to ask ; 3 side ; 4 mustard ; 5 creer, to believe, 
 
 Estaba una compania 1 de quintos 2 haciendo el ejercicio 3 
 cuando uno de ellos, en 4 vez 4 de Ievantar 5 lapierna 7 derecha, 6 
 levanto 5 la izquierda. 8 
 
 El oficial, que estaba al extremo 1 de la fila, 1 habiendo ob- 
 .servadp 1 dos piernas? muy proximas 9 grito 10 : <; Quien es ese 
 bruto 1 que levanta 5 las dos piernas 7 a la vez ? _____ 
 
 2 conscript ; 3 exercise=drilL ; 4 in place ; 5 levantar, to raise ; 6 right ; 
 7 leg ; $ leit ; 9 close together ; 10 shouted out. 
 
 Un sujeto 2 muy inocenton 1 aseguraba 3 que no tenia con- 
 fianza 1 alguna; en la/vacuna, 4 y f undaba 5 su aserto 6 en la 
 experiencia 1 : Habia 7 en una f amilia, 1 decia, un nino sano 8 y 
 robusto 1 que dos meses despuea de estar vacunado cayose 9 
 de unarbol 10 y se estrello 11 contra 12 las piedras. 13 <; Y aiin 
 se quiere prueba 14 mas^convincente 1 de que la vacuna 4 no 
 sirve 1 ^ para nada 1 ^?. 
 
 2 person ; 3 tisegurar, to assert ; 4=vaccination ; 5/wwc?ar,to base ; 
 eertion ; 7 there was ; 8 healthy ; 9 fell ; 10; tree ; 11 was dashed to pieces ; 
 12 against ; 13 stone ; 14 proof ';'.;! 5 serves for (==^s worth) nothing. 
 
451 
 
 El Pordiosero 3 holgazan. 2 
 
 Tin muchacho de once a doce aiios 4 se llego 5 un dia a una 
 senora que iba a 6 pie 6 con una doncella, 7 y la pidio un duro 8 
 de limosna. 9 
 
 1 Como ! <? un duro 8 ? responde admirada 10 : <; Que modo 1 
 e8 ese de pedir la caridad 11 ? 
 
 Senora, responde 1 el muchacho, pues que Vd. me lo niega, 12 
 ya no importunare 1 a ninguna otra persona : esta corta 13 
 cantidad 14 me hubiera 15 hecho desistir 1 del partido 16 que iba 
 a tomar. Y al 17 decir 17 esto dio un profundo 1 suspiro 18 y 
 se marcho 19 llorando. 20 
 
 \ Como ! dice la ' senora a su doncella 7 : <; tendra este 
 desgraciado 21 algiin designio 1 que le induzca 22 a ejecutar 1 un 
 disparate 23 ? No quiero que por un duro se 25 pierda 25 ese 
 infeliz. 24 Toma, dice llamandole, ahi 26 tienes tu duro : pero 
 dime, 27 <: por que te afligistes 28 tanto -cuando te lo neue 12 ? 
 
 Senora, es porque me veia en la precision 29 de trabajar. 
 
 2 idle ; 3 beggar ; 4 year ; 5 llegarse, to approach ; 6 on foot ; 7 maid ; 
 8 dollar ; 9 alms ; 10 astonished ; 11 charity ; 12 negar, to deny ; 13 short 
 =small ; 14 quantity ; 15 would have ; 16 course ; 17 on saying ; 18 sigh ; 
 19 marcharse, to walk away ; 20 llorar, to weep ; 21 unfortunate (one) ; 
 22 (may) induce ; 23 silly action ; 24 unhappy ; 25 (should) be lost ; 26 
 here ; 27 tell me ; 28 qfligirse, to lament ; 29 necessity. 
 
 Un, hombre muy gloton 2 decia : mi padre comia mucho, 
 mi madre muy aprisa, 3 y yo he heredado 4 ambas 5 cualidades. 1 
 
 2 gluttonous ; 3 quickly ; 4 heredar, to inherit ; 5 both. 
 
 Un ladron 2 que marchaba 3 al patibulo, 4 suplico 5 que 
 detuyiesen 6 la comitiva 7 delante 8 de 8 una taberna, 1 y pidio 
 un vaso 9 de aguardiente. 10 Se lo dieron, -y despues de 
 haberlo bebido 11 : No tengo suelto 12 en este momento, le dijo 
 al tabernero, 13 pero te lo pagare a la vuelta. 14 
 
 2 thief ; ^3 marchar, to go ; 4 gallows ; 5 suplicar, to request ; 6 they 
 (should) stop ; 7 retinue==procession ; 8 before ; 9 glass ; 10 brandy ; 
 11 beber, to drink ; 12 change ; 13 tavern-keeper ; 14 return* 
 
48 
 
 La Interpretacidn. 
 
 Un hombre f ue conducido 1 ante 2 el niagistrado 1 por la sos- 
 pecha 3 de haber robado 4 un hermoso 5 carnero^a 7 un pastor 8 liama- 
 do Bonifacio Conde Sanz Diaz, y le pregunto si sabia 9 leer. 10 
 
 Un poco, senor, respondio. 1 
 
 Pues entonces no podia 9 Yd. ignorar 11 de (Juien era el 
 carnero 6 que confiesa 1 haber hallado, y que sin 12 embargo 13 
 dice ser suyo, pues ya ve que tiene la inarca 1 de estas cuatro 
 iniciales, 1 B.C.S.D. 
 
 Es verdad 13 que las tiene, pero yo crei que decian : " Buen 
 Carnero Sin Dueno. 14 " 
 
 2 before ; 3 suspicion ; 4 robar, to steal ; 5 fine ; 6 sheep ; 7=from ; 
 8 shepherd ; 9 (he) could ; 10 read ; 11 be ignorant ; 12 neverthelecs ; 
 13 truth=true ; 14 owner. 
 
 Viajaban 2 en un coche 1 varios 1 amigos, uno de los cuales 
 empezo 3 a dormir. Al 4 poco rato 4 le desperto 5 uno de sus 
 companeros diciendole : Hemos corrido 6 ya una gran dis- 
 tancia 1 desde 7 que se 8 durmio Vd. 8 
 
 <j Mucha ? . pregunto el que dormia. 
 
 Si, muchisima, le dijo el otro, es tamos a mas de 9 diez 
 leguas 1 lejos 10 de aqui. 
 
 2 viajar, to travel ; 3 empezar, to begin ; 4 after a short time ; 
 pertar, to wake ; 6 correr, to run ; 7 since : 8 you fell asleep ; 9=sthan ; 
 10 far=distance. 
 
 Viajando un caballero^ llego a^un sitio 2 donde era preciso 3 
 pasar 1 nn rio en una barca. 4 Entro 1 en ella, y viendo que el 
 agua 5 ^staba agitada 1 : Digame Yd., amigo, dijo al ba?*quero, 6 
 ^ le ha sucedido 7 a Yd. alguna vez el perder 8 a los pasajeros 1 
 estando las aguas 5 enfurecidas 9 ? 
 
 Nunca, 10 sefior, le respondio, 1 porque los que se han 
 ahogado 11 siempre se 12 han vuelto a hallar 12 al dia siguiente. 13 
 
 2 place ; 3 necessary ; 4 boat ; 5 water ; 6 boatman ; 7 suceder, to 
 happen ; -8 losing ; 9 furious=rough ; 10 never ; 11 ahogarse, to bo 
 drowned ; 12=have been found again ; J3 follpwing. 
 
49 
 
 La Calabaza y la Bellota. 
 
 Tin campesino, 2 al'regresar 3 a su casa un dia de verano* ee 
 iendi6 6 para reposar 1 un ratito, 6 a la sombra 7 de una corpulenta 1 
 encina, 8 a la contemplaci6n de la cual nuestro campesino 2 se 
 puso 9 a menear 10 la cabeza 11 y A decirse 12 a si mismo 12 : ; 
 
 Si hubiera 13 yo sido el Criador, 14 hubiera 15 dispuesto 16 las 
 cosas de otra manera 1 ; hubiera 15 hecho que las calabazas 17 
 creciesen 18 de este arbol,* 9 y a las bellotas 20 las hubiera 16 hecho 
 el f ruto 1 de tallos 21 delicados. 1 Y en esto empezo 23 & dormir. 
 
 Apenas habia cerrado 23 los ojos, 24 cuando habiendose des- 
 prendido 25 una bellota 20 y dandole 26 en la nariz, 27 le desperto. 28 
 
 j Iinbecil 29 de mi 29 ! exclamo 1 entonces ; suerte^he tenido 
 que la fruta 1 de este arbol 19 es la bellota 20 ; pues si hubiese 13 
 sido una calabaza, 17 me hubiera 15 dejado aqui tendido 5 con la 
 cabeza 11 aplastada. 31 
 
 2 countryman ; 3 return ; 4 summer ; 5 tender, to stretch out ; 6 short 
 time j 7 shade ; 8 oak ; 9 ponerse=to begin , 10 shake ; 11 head ; 12 say to 
 himself ; 13 had ; 14 Creator ; 15 1 should have ; 16 disposed ; 17 pumpkin ; 
 18 (should)- grow ; 19 tree , 20 acorn ; 21. stalk ; 22 empezar, to begin ; 
 23 cerirar, to shut ; 24 eye ; 25 desprender, to loosen ; 26=strikjng him ; 27 
 nose ; 28^-despertar, to wake ;.29=fool that I am ; 30 luck ; 31 crushed. 
 
 1 Por que en invierno 2 sale 3 tarde 4 el sol 5 ? 
 Porque como hace 6 frio, 7 no 8 le gusta madrugar. 8 
 
 2 winter ; '3 goes out=rises ; 4 late , 5 sun ; 6 it makes=it is ; 7 cold ; 
 8 early rising pleases him not=he does not like getting up early. 
 
 Estaba un estudfante 1 acompanando 1 4 algunas senoras 
 por el museo 1 de Oxford y parandose 2 delante 3 de 3 una espada 4 
 muy enmohecida 5 les dijo : Ahi 6 tienen Yds. la espada 4 con 
 que Balaam amenazo 7 de muerte 8 a su burra.* 
 
 Jamas he oido, observo una de la concurrencia, 10 que 
 Balaam tuviese 11 una espada, 4 sino que ese prof eta 1 deseaba 
 una, como cuenta 12 su historia. 1 
 
 Tiene 13 Vd. razon, 13 replico el estudiante, y esta es precisa- 
 mente 1 la que el prof eta 1 deseaba. 
 
 2 stopping ; 3 before ; 4 sword ; 5 rusty ; 6 here ; 7 amenazar, to 
 threaten; 8 death; 9 ass ; 10 company ; 11 had j 12 contar, to relate; 
 13 you^have reason=you are right. 
 
 8*8 
 
50 
 
 Los Cometas. 
 
 Los cometas 1 son unos astros* que por su irregular 1 y 8or 
 prendente^paricion 1 ban despertado 4 el temor 5 de los pueblos, 6 
 siendo mirados 7 como signos 1 de la c6lera 8 celeste 1 y prof etas 1 
 de calamidades 1 y desastres. 1 Pero la eiencia 9 ha conseguido 10 
 demostrar 1 que son, valiendonos 11 de una celebre expresion, 1 
 "astros 2 inocentes, 1 " que se mueven 12 como los planetas 1 al- 
 rededor 13 del sol 14 en unas orbitas 1 elipticas, 1 es decir, de 
 forma 1 ovalada, 1 muy largas 16 y muy estrechas* 16 
 
 Se presentan 1 acompanados 1 de una raf aga 17 tuminosa 1 que 
 los rodea 18 completamente 1 6 se extiende 1 bacia 19 un sdlo 
 lado. 20 .Esta raf aga 17 recibe el nombre de cola, 21 barba 22 * 6 
 cabellera. 23 Los cometas, al 24 recorrer 24 su orbita, 1 se 25 en- 
 cuentran 25 unas veces muy lejanos 26 y otras muy proximos 27 
 al sol. 14 Cuando estan muy lejos, 26 se congelan 1 por falta 28 
 de calor, 29 y cuando se aproximan 30 al sol, el calor 29 gasifica 31 
 parte 1 de los liquidos 1 que pueden contener 1 en su superficie, 82 
 y extiende 1 su atmosf era 1 en el espacio. 1 El sol ilumina 1 esta 
 tenue 33 mater ia 1 asi extendida, 1 y forma esa rdfaga 17 luminosa, 1 
 causa 1 de tanto temor. 5 
 
 El numero lv de cometas es inmenso. 1 Keplero decia : Mis 
 cometas bay en el cielo 34 que peces 38 en el mar. 36 
 
 Sin 87 embargo, 37 son pocos 38 los que se 39 conocen, 39 de 40 tal 
 modo 40 que pueda 41 anunciarse 41 con exactitud 1 su reaparici6n. 
 
 Mucbos se alejan 42 a distantoias 1 inconcebibles 1 de nuestro 
 Bistema 1 planetario, 1 y es probable que atraidos 43 por astros 2 
 perteneciehtes 44 a otro sistema, 1 dejen 45 de pertenecer 44 al 
 nuestro, convirtiendose 1 en planetas de otro sol. 14 
 
 2 star ; 3 surprising ; 4 awaked ; 5 fear ; 6 people=nations ; 7 mirar, to 
 look on ; 8 anger ; 9 science ; 10 succeeded ; 11 availing ourselves ; 12 mover, 
 to" move ; 13 round ; 14 sun ; 15 long ; 16 narrow ; 17 cloud ; 18 rodear, to 
 encircle ; 19 towards ; 20 side ; 21 tail ; 22 beard ; 23 hair ; 24=in traversing ; 
 26=are ; 26 distant ; 27 near ; 28 want ; 29 heat ; 30 they approacB" ; 31 turns 
 to gas ; 32 surface ; 33 thin ; 34 sky ; 36 fish ; 36 sea ; 37 nevertheless ; 
 38 few ; 39 are known ; 40 in such a way ; 41 may be foretold ; 42 alejar, 
 to move away ; 43 attracted ; 44 pertenecer, to belong j 46 dejar } to cease. 
 
51 
 
 Los cometas son los linicos 46 cuerpos 47 celestes 1 que la 
 mayoria 48 de los astronomos 1 no creen que esten habitados, 1 
 porque no se 49 concibe 49 que existan 1 habitantes 1 en astros 2 
 que pasan 1 por tan bruscas 1 transiciones 1 de calor 29 y f rio, 50 
 y que estan sujetos 1 a una variacion 1 completa de todos sue 
 elementos. 1 
 
 46 only ; 47 body ; 48 majority ; 49 it is imagined ; 50 cold. 
 
 El Marinero y su Amigo. 
 
 Un marinero iba a einbarcarse 1 en un navio 2 proximo 3 a darse 
 a la vela 3 para las Indias, 1 y un amigo suyo que trataba 4 de di- 
 suadirle 1 de un viaje tan largo 5 y tan peligroso, 6 le pregunto : 
 
 Dime, 7 <j donde murio tu padre ? 
 
 En un nauf ragio, 8 respondio el marinero. 
 
 i Y tu abuelo 9 ? 
 
 Un dia yendo a la pesca 10 se levanto 11 una tempestad 1 tan 
 furiosa, 1 que la barca 1 se 12 fue a pique, 12 y el se ahogo. 13 
 
 1 Y tu bisabuelo 14 ? En un viaje que hizo a America, el 
 navio* choco 15 contra unas penas, 16 y se hundio. 17 
 
 Y i como eres tan temerario 18 que te atreves 19 a embarcarte, 1 
 eabiendo que tu padre, tu abuelo 9 y tu bisabuelo 14 han 
 muerto en el mar 20 ? 
 
 Es posible, respondi6 el marinero ; pero dime, 7 $ donde 
 murio tu padre ? v 
 
 Muy tranquilamente 1 en su cama. 21 
 
 ; Y tu abuelo 9 ? d y tu bisabuelo 14 ? 
 
 De la misma manera 1 ; muy dulcemente 22 en sus lechos. 23 
 
 (? Y como pues, repuso el marinero, eres tan temerario, 18 que 
 te atreves 19 a meterte 24 en la cama 21 todos los dias, sabiendo que 
 tu padre, tu abuelo y tu bisabuelo han muerto todos en ella ? 
 
 2 ship ; 3 near to give itself to the sail=about to set sail ; 4 tratar, to 
 try ; 5 long ; 6 perilous ; 7 tell me ; 8 shipWreck ; 9 grandfather ; 10 fishing ; 
 11 levantar, to raise ; 12 irse d pique, to founder ; 13 ahogar, to drown ; 
 14 great grandfather ; 15 chocar, to strike ; 16 rock ; 17 hundir, to sink ; 
 18 rash ; 19 atreverse, to dare j 20 sea ; 21 bed j 22 quietly ; 23 couch ; 
 24 put thy self =go. 
 
52 
 
 Fontenelle y los Esp&rragos. 
 
 Fontenelle gustaba 2 mucho de los esparragog, 1 sobre todo 
 arreglados 3 con aceite; 4 
 
 El abate 5 Terrasson, a 6 quien tamFie'n le gugtaban, 6 -pero 
 con nianteca, 7 vino un dia a pedirle 8 de comer, 8 y le suplico 1 
 que le hicie'ra 9 un gran favor dandole la mitad 10 de los 
 esparragos que tenia en su plato, 1 y mando que se 11 pusiese 11 
 esta mitad 10 con manteca. 7 
 
 Poco antes de sentarse 12 a la mesa 13 el abate 5 empezo 14 a 
 ponerse 15 mal, y al 16 fin 16 le dio una fuerte 17 apoplejia. 1 
 
 Fontenelle, que tal 18 vio> se levanta 19 de 20 subito 20 y corre 21 
 precipitadamente 1 a la cocina 22 gritando 23 : \ Todos con aceite, 4 
 todos con aceite ! 
 
 2=was fond ; 3=prepared ; 4 oil ; 5 a bb6 j 6=who also liked them *, 
 7 Gutter ; .7$ ask him to dine ; 9 would do ; 10 half ; ll=should be put ; 
 
 12 sentarse, to sit down ; 13 table ; 14 began ; 15=become ; 16 at length ; 
 17 strong ; 18 as much ; 19 levantarse, to get up ; 20 suddenly ; 21 runs ; 
 
 22 kitchen ; 23 calling out. 
 
 El amigo que no presta, 2 y el cuchlllo 3 que no corta, 4 
 Cuando se 5 pierden 5 poco importa. 6 
 
 2 prestar, to lend ; 3 knife ; 4 cor/ar, to cut ; 5 they are lost ; 6 it matters. 
 
 Una caravana 1 de cuatrocientos gallegos 2 pasaba de Madrid 
 a Galicia para la celebracion de las fiestas 3 de Santiago, 4 y a 5 
 pesar 5 de ser tantosse 6 dejaron robar 6 por media 7 docena 8 de 
 gitanos. 9 Al 10 Ilegar 10 a la villa 11 inmediata 1 se 12 dirigieron 12 
 los gallegos 2 a ver al alcalde, 18 que se extran6 14 de lo ocurrido. 15 
 
 <; C6mo puede explicarse que cuatrocientos hombres per- 
 jnitan 1 a seis pilletes 16 que les roben 1 hasta 17 el ultimo 
 centimo 1 ? Vergiienza 20 me daria el ser 18 tan cobarde. 19 
 
 A Id cual respondi6 uno de ellos, el mas cuerdo, 21 por 22 
 supuesto 22 : i Pero no ve Y. 23 S. 23 que ibamos solos 24 ? 
 
 2 Galician ; 3 festival ; 4 St. James ; 6 in spite ; 6 let themselves be 
 robbed ; 7 half ; 8 dozen ; 9 gipsy ; 10 on arriving ; 11 town ; 12=weiit ; 
 
 13 mayor ; 14 extranarse, to be astonished ; 15 occurrence ; 16 scoundrel ; 
 17 up to ; 18 "be(ing) ; 19 cowardly ; 20 shame ; 21 discreet ; 22s=doubtless ; 
 
 23 your worship (senoria) ; 24 alone. 
 
53 
 
 La falsa Alerta^ 
 
 Durante el sitio 3 de Gibraltar, 1 en el momento en que los 
 ingleses esperaban 4 de un instante 1 a otro un ataque 1 general, 
 un centinela 1 que habian colocado 5 de noche a la entrada 6 de 
 frente 7 de la torre 8 del Diablo, 9 estaba al extreme 10 de la 
 inuralla, 11 silbando 12 y fijando 13 sus miradas 14 sobre las lineas 1 
 espanolas, no sonando 15 mas que fuego, 16 bombas, 1 minas, 1 
 brecha 1 y fuego de fila. 17 Al lado 18 de su garita 19 tenia un 
 puchero 20 donde habia ocultado 21 su comida, 22 que consistia 
 en un potaje 1 de habichuelas. 23 
 
 Una mona 24 muy grande, (sabido es que la cima 25 de esta 
 roca 1 esta siempre cubierta 26 de estos animales) alentada 27 por 
 el silencio 1 del centinela, 1 y llevada 28 del olfato, 29 se acerco 30 
 al puchero 20 y inetio 31 su cabeza para regalarse 1 con lo que 
 contenia 1 ; pero despues que satisfizo 1 su necesidad,* cuando 
 quiso escaparse, 1 no pudo sacar 32 la cabeza, y se 33 llevo 83 el 
 puchero 20 por gorro, 34 marchando con las patas 36 traseras. 33 
 
 Esta terrible 1 aparicion 1 apenas 37 se presento a los ojos del 
 centinela, tropezando 38 con cuanto 39 encontraba, 40 convirtio 1 
 al pobre mono 24 en un granadero 1 espanol 1 ensangrentado, 41 
 y herido 42 mortalmente. 1 Ya exaltada 1 su imaginacion 1 con 
 esta idea, y lleno de miedo, 43 disparo 44 su fusil 45 gritando 46 con 
 todas.sus fuerzas 47 que el enemigo 1 habia escalado 48 la muralla. 
 
 La gran guardia 1 tom6 al momento las armas 1 con este 
 aviso, 49 el tambor 50 resono 51 por 52 todas partes, 52 y en diez 
 minutos estuvo toda la guarnicion 53 f ormada para la batalla. 1 
 
 not to be translated ; 1 the same, or nearly the same, as in English. 
 
 2 alarm ; 3 siege ;' 4 esperar, to expect ; 5 placed ; 6 entrance ; 7 front ; 
 8 tower ; 9 devil ; 10 end ; 11 rampart ; 12 silbar, to whistle ; ISfijar, to 
 fix ; 14 glance ; 15 sonar, to dream ; 16 fire ; 17 file ; 18 side ; 19 sentry- 
 box ; 20 pot ; 21 hidden ; 22 meal ; 23 bean ; 24 monkey ; 25 summit ; 
 26. covered ; 27 encouraged ; 28 attracted ; 29 smell ; 30 acercarse, to ap- 
 proach ; 31 meter, to put ; 32 draw out ; 33 carried away ; 34 night-cap ; 35 
 hind ; 36 paws, legs ; 37 hardly ; 38*"stumbling ; 39=whatever ; 40 it met ; 
 41 bloodstained ; 42-wounded ; 43 fear ; 44 disparar, to discharge ; 45 gun ; 
 46 calling out ; 47 force(s) ; 48 scaled ; 49 information ; 50 drum ; 51 resonar t 
 to resound ; 52=everywhere ; 53 garrison. 
 
64 
 
 El supuesto 54 granadero, 1 a quien incomodaba 1 nmcho el 
 sombrero, y que estaba casi ciego 55 con el peso 56 del piichero, 
 no estuvo niucho tiempo sin ser descubierto, y su prision 57 
 restablecip 1 la tranquilidad 1 en el campo 1 que se habia creido 
 sorprendido. 58 
 
 54 supposed ; 55 blind ; 56 weight ; 57 capture ; 58 surprised. 
 
 Destapa 2 un anio de casa un cantaro 3 de vino delicado,* 
 cuya 4 vasija 4 conservaba 5 cuidadosamente lacrada 6 y sellada 7 
 hacia 8 tiempo. 8 Como encontr6 9 que faltaba 11 la mitad 10 del 
 vino, empezo a investigar 1 las causas 1 de aquel fenomeno, 1 
 hallando en la parte inferior 12 del cantaro 3 un pequeno 
 agujero 13 tapado 14 con cera. 1 ^ 
 
 En vista 16 de esto llama a la criada, y le dice : i Quien te 
 ha mandado 17 beber el vino que aqui falta 11 ? 
 
 Por donde quiere 18 Vd. que lo haya 19 sacado 19 ? 
 
 Por este agujero 13 que has hecho. 
 
 1 Yo ! & Pero, seiior, aunque 20 hubiera 21 hecho el agujero, 15 
 no ve Yd. que por donde falta 11 el vino es por 22 encima 22 y el 
 agujero 13 esta por 23 debajo 23 ? 
 
 2 destdpar, to uncx>ver=open ; 3 pitcher ; 4 which vessel ; 5 conservar, 
 to preserve ; 6 waxed ; 7 Sealed ; 8=for a long time ; 9 he found ; 10 half ; 
 11 f altar, to be wanting or missing ; 12=lower ; 13 hole ; 14 tapar, to 
 stop up ; 15 wax ; 16 view ; 17 ordered ; 18=suppose ; 19 have drawn out ; 
 20 although, even if ; 21 I (should) have ; 22 at the top ; 23 at the bottom. 
 
 Una mujer rica calzada 2 por un zapatero 4 a 3 la moda^nota 1 
 que el mismo dia que estrenaba 5 unos zapatos estaban rotos 8 
 a 7 las 7 cuatro horas.^ Hace 8 llamar al zapatero, 8 y le inani- 
 ties ta 1 su estraneza 9 por aquel resultado. 1 
 
 El industrial coje 10 el zapato roto, 6 lo examina atentamente, 1 
 y despues de reflexionar 1 sobre las causas de aquel accidente, 1 
 exclama 1 de 11 pronto 11 : j Ya 12 caigo 12 ! ^ Ha salido Vd. a 15 
 pie 13 con ellos ? 
 
 2 shod j 3 fashionable ; 4 shoemaker ; 5 eslrenar, to use for the first time ; 
 6 broken ; 7=in ; 8=she has the shoemaker sent for ; 9 surprise ; JO eager* 
 to pick up ; U suddenly ; 12=1 have it ; 13 on foot- 
 
55 
 
 1 Ciego y su Iiinero. 
 
 Sabidas son las precauciones 1 que toman los ciegos 2 para 
 ocultar 8 el dinero. Uno que poseia 4 quinientos francos, no 
 considerandolos seguros en el miserable cuarto que habitaba,i 
 bajo 5 una noche al corral 6 de la casa y los enterro 1 al pie de 
 un arbol. 7 Un vecino de la misma casa que por casual idad 8 
 habia bajado 5 al patio, 9 noto 1 la accion 1 del ciego, y al 10 
 retirarse este, 10 desenterro 1 el dinero y se lo apropio. 1 
 
 Cuando,el ciego fue a visitar su tesoro, 11 no lo hallo, como 
 era natural ; pero lejos 12 de quejarse 13 y desesperarse, 13 disi- 
 inulq 1 su dolor 14 y se 15 puso 15 a reflexionar. 1 Informose de la 
 gente 16 que vivia en la casa y supo que habia en e.lla un vecino 
 desocupado, 17 chismoso 18 y malgastador. 19 No necesito saber 
 mas el ciego para sospechar 20 que el tal 21 vecino era el Iadr6n, 22 
 y con aire 1 risueno 23 fue buscarle y le dijo : 
 
 Vecino, se que sois hombre discreto 1 y amigo de hacer un 
 favor ; vengo a consultaros sobre un punto 24 muy importante 
 para mi. Poseo 4 mil francos, de los cuales tengo escondidos 36 
 quinientos en paraje 26 seguro. Tengo intencion de esconder 25 
 tambien la otra mitad 27 y desearia que me dijeseis 28 si debo 
 ocultarlos 3 en el inismo sitio 26 6 en otro diferente, para no 
 perderlo todo en caso de hurto. 29 
 
 Alegrdse 30 el vecino con la culpable 1 esperanza 31 de pillar 32 
 toda la eantidad, 33 e insto 34 al ciego a que los depositara 1 en 
 el mismo escondrijo. 35 
 
 Prometiolo 36 asi el robado, 37 y el ladron 22 se 3 ? apresuro 38 a 
 volver 39 a poner 39 los quinientos francos al pie del arbol, 7 
 para coger 40 luego 41 los mil. Pero aquella misma noche fue 
 
 2 blind ; 3 ocultar^ to conceal ; 4 poseer, to possess ; 5 bajar, to descend ; 6 
 yard ; 7 tree ; 8 chance ; 9 courtyard ; 10 on the latter's retiring ; 11 treasure ; 
 12 far ; 13 complaining) and despair(iDg) ; 14 grief ; 15=began ; 16 people; 
 17 unoccupied ; 18 slander repeating ; 19 extravagant ; 20 suspect ; 21= 
 said ; 22 thief ; 23 smiling ; 24 point ; 25 esconder, to hide ; 26 place ; 
 27 half ; 28 you (should) tell ; 29 theft ; 30 alegrarse, to rejoice ; 31 hope ; 
 32 plundering) ; 33 quantity ; 34 urged ; 35 hiding-place ; 36 prometer, to 
 promise ; 37 robbed ; 38 hastened ; 39 put again ; 40=get j 41 afterwards. 
 
56 
 
 el ciego al paraje 2 ? donde enterro sn dineroy y babiendo 
 hallado sus quinientos francos, se los metio 42 en el bolsillo 43 
 y puso 42 en su lugar 44 un papel con estas palabras : 
 
 Bien decia yo que era Vd. hombre amigo de bacer un favor ; 
 mil gracias por baberm6 ayudado 45 a recobrar 46 mi dinero. 
 
 42 put ; 43 pocket ; 44 place, stead ; 45 helped ; 46 recover 
 
 Vendiase en publica 1 subasta 2 la coleccion 1 de cuadros. de 
 un aficionado 3 inteligente. 1 Al 4 presentar el subastador 4 un 
 cuadrito 5 que representaba un burro, 6 y que tenia un 
 merito 1 real, empezaron a pujarlo 7 dos pintores, 8 pero un 
 ricacho 9 que se 10 la daba de 10 inteligente 1 lo subio 11 en un 
 momento a cuatro mil reales. 
 
 Uno de los pintores 8 se dirije 12 al rico, y le dice cortes- 
 mente 18 : Cuando tanto interes 1 demuestrk 14 Vd., presumo 1 
 que sera un fetrato* 5 de familia, 1 y me retiro para 'no 
 perjudicar 1 a Vd. 
 
 2 auction ; 3 amateur ; 4 on the auctioneer's presenting ; 5 small picture ; 
 6 donkey ; 7 outbid (for) it ; 8 painter ; 9 very rich man ;* 10=boasted of 
 being ; 11 subir, to raise ; 12 addresses - t 13 politely ; 14 manifest ; 15 portrait. 
 
 Para dar Maboma 1 mas credito 1 a sus imposturas 1 hizo 
 ocultar 3 en un pozo 5 seco 4 a uno de sus compaiieros, 2 con 
 orden 1 de gritar 6 cuando el pasara 1 : Mahoma es el enviado 7 
 de Dios. 
 
 Hizolo asi 8 el escondido, 9 quedaudo 11 todo 10 el mundo 10 
 admirado 12 de aquella maravilla 13 ; pero el falso apostol, 1 
 temiendp que se 14 descubriera 14 su artificio, 1 ordeno 15 inme- 
 diatamente 1 a los fanaticos 1 que le seguian 16 que cegaran 17 el 
 pozo 5 para evitar 18 que f uera 19 profanado en el porvenir, 20 
 
 2 companion ; 3 hide ; 4 dry ; 5 well ; 6 call out ; 7=messenger ; 
 8 .thus ; 9 hidden (person) ; 10 all the world=everybody ; 11 remaining ; 
 12 astonished ; 13 marvel ; 14 would be discovered ; 15 ordered ; 16 se- 
 guir, to follow ; 17 they should blind=stop up ; 18 avoid ; 19 it should 
 be ; 20 future. 
 
57 
 
 El Perro h&bil. 
 
 Es corriente 2 entre los cazadores 3 hablar de los extraordi- 
 narios sucesos^curridos 1 en su diversion 1 f avorita 1 y ponderar 5 
 las excelencias 1 de sus perros. En el descanso 6 de una partida 7 
 de caza, 7 a la que asistia 8 Alejandro Dumas, se hablaba de lo 9 
 de siempre 9 : de perros. Dumas oyo referir 10 maravillas 11 de 
 inteligencia 1 realizadas 1 por estos animalitos. 1 Cuando le 
 llego su turno, 1 pondero 5 tambien la inteligencia de su perro. 
 
 1 Oh ! decia, mi perro tiene una inteligencia 1 superior. 1 "On 
 dia que yo almorzaba 12 en el jardin con un amigo, Fanor 
 que asi se 13 llamaba 13 mi perro esperaba 14 sumiso 15 que, 
 como de costumbre, 9 le arrojara 16 los restos 17 de mi almuerzo. 18 
 
 Mas 19 viendo que no me acordaba 20 deel, se 21 f ue 21 al f ondo 22 
 del jardin y vino hacia 23 mi, trayendo en la boca 24 una rama 25 
 de NO 26 ME OLVIDES. 26 
 
 2=usual ; 3 hunter ; 4 incident ; 5 exaggerate ; 6 halting ; 7 hunting expe- 
 dition ; 8 was present ; 9=as usual ; 10 related ; 11 marvel ; J2 was break- 
 fasting ; 13 llamarse, to be called ; 14 was waiting ; 15 submissively ; 16 
 I(should) fling ; 1 7 remains ; 1 8 breakfast ; 1 9 but ; 20 acordarse de } to re- 
 member ; 21 irse, to go away ; 22 bottom ; 23 towards ; 24 mouth ; 25 sprig ; 
 26 forget me not. 
 
 Enrique VIII., rey de Inglaterra, y Carlos V., rey de Espaiia, 
 eran dos principes de un caracter 1 muy vivo 2 : el primero re- 
 solvi6 enviar un mensajero 3 al segundo, y nombr6 4 al 5 efecto 5 
 a sir Tomas More, su canciller. 6 Este al recibir sus instruc- 
 ciones 1 hizo 7 presente 7 a Enrique el temor 8 que tenia de encar- 
 garse 9 de semejante 10 mensage que podia costarle la vida 11 : a 
 lo cual respondio el rey, que si Carlos atentaba 12 a sus dias, 12 
 haria 13 degollar 18 a todos los espanoles que hubiese 24 en sus 
 estados. 15 Agradezco 16 mucho a vuestra majestad, 1 dijo el 
 canciller, 6 el honor que hace a mi persona,, pero dudo, 17 
 seiior, que ninguna de las cabezas de esos caballeros pueda 1 * 
 colocarse 19 sobre mis hombros. 20 
 
 2 hasty ; 3 messenger ; 4 appointed ; 5=for the purpose ; 6 chancellor ; 7 
 represented ; 8 fear ; 9 taking charge ; 10 (a)like ; 11 life ; 12 attempted his 
 days=life ; 13=he would have... beheaded ; 14 were ; 15 dominions ; IGagra- 
 decer, to be grateful ; 17 dudar } to doubt ; 18 can ; 19 be put ; 20 shoulders. 
 
58 
 
 El Asedio de Amteres. 
 
 Mientras 2 los Espaiioles mantenian 1 en 1580 el tenaz*asedio* 
 de Amber es, 5 sucedio 6 una cosa de poca importancia 1 que 
 acarreo 7 un grande acontecimiento. 8 Estaba enferma una 
 senora de la ciudad, y necesitaba para su cura 1 tomar leche 9 
 de burras. 10 Como no era posible hallarlas en la plaza, 11 un 
 joven 12 se of recio a ir por una a los arrabales, 18 no 14 obstante 14 
 hallarse en poder 15 del enemigo 1 ; en efecto ya traia 16 una, 
 cuando f ue apresado, 17 y conducido al duque 1 de Parma* 
 
 Este general trato 18 con bondad 19 al joven 12 ; alabo 20 su 
 honradez, 21 e hizo 22 cargar 23 la burra 10 de perdices, 24 capones 1 
 y de cuanto 26 pudiese 26 ser util 27 a un enfermo, ordenando 
 que todo se 28 lo llevase 28 a la senora, y dieiendo al ayunta- 
 miento 29 y pueblo de Amberes 5 que el les deseaba toda 
 suerte 30 de prosperidades. 1 
 
 Esta generosidad 1 inesperada 31 del duque produjo 1 una 
 revolucion general en su favor, sugeriendose 32 enviarle a 35 
 nombre 33 del publico 1 dulces 34 y vinos de la ciudad. Los 
 espiritus 1 se calmaron 1 con estas mutuas 1 atenciones, 1 y 
 empezando a pensar que los Espaiioles no eran tan fieros 35 
 como se creia, esta opinion evito 36 muchos males, 37 e hizo 22 
 que se rindiese 38 la plaza. 11 
 
 Este suceso 39 causo tanta alegria 40 a Felipe 1 II., que habien- 
 dole llegado la noticia 41 a media 42 noche, 42 a 43 pesar 43 de lo 
 misterioso 1 y austero 1 que era, fue al cuarto de su hija 
 Isabel, dando golpes 44 a la puerta,y gritando 45 : i Amberes 5 es 
 nuestro, Amberes es nuestro ! 
 
 Quien nacio 46 para ahorcado 47 no morira 48 ahogado. 49 
 
 2 while ; 3 tenacious ; 4 siege ; 5 Antwerp ; 6 suceder, to happen ; 7 car- 
 ried=led to ; 8 event ; 9 milk ; 10 ass ; 11 place ; 12 youth ; 13 suburb ; 
 14 notwithstanding ; 15 power ; 16 he was bringing ; 17 captured ; 18 
 tratar, to treat; 19 kindness; 20 alabar, to praise ; 21 gallantry ; 22= 
 caused ; 23 to (be) load(ed) ; 24 partridge ; 25=whatever ; 26 might ; 
 27 useful ;,28 should be taken ; 29 coloration ; 30 kind ; 31 unexpected ; 
 32==it being suggested ; 33=in the name ; 34 sweetmeats ; 35 cruel ; 
 36 avoided==prevented ; 37 evil ; 38 surrendered (rendir) ; 39 event ; 40 
 joy ; 41 news ; 42 midnight ; 43 in spite ; 44 blow ; 45 calling out j 
 46 was born ; 47=hangiDg ; 48 morir, to die ;, 49 ahogar^ to drown. 
 
59 
 
 El Negro fingido. 2 
 
 Dos jovenes hermanos, cerrajeros 3 de oficio, 4 se embarca- 
 ron 1 hace 5 sesenta anos para la Jamaica. Luego que llegaron 
 buscaron alguna ocupacion, 1 pero no la hallaron en su oficio, 4 
 porque necesitaban algiin dinero para establecerse. 1 Viendose 
 sin auxilio? alguno, apelaron 7 a un recurso* bastante 9 extra- 
 ordinario, y fue el siguiente. 10 
 
 Uno de ellos, que tenia los cabellos 11 nmy crespos, 13 se 
 disfrazo 13 de negro, 1 se tiiio 14 el rostro 15 y todo el cuerpo, 16 y 
 fue conducido 1 por su hermano a la casa de un banquero,* a 
 quien suplico 17 le prestase 18 cincuenta doblones 1 sobre la 
 venta 19 de aquel negro. Como este era f uerte 20 y vigoroso, 1 
 Iogr6 21 el hermano el prestamo 22 que deseaba. Recibido el 
 dinero, se escapo 1 el fingido 2 negro de casa del prestamista, 23 
 volvi6 a casa de su hermano, y se lavo 24 de pies a cabeza. 
 En vano 1 ofrecieron los periodicos recompensas al 25 que le 
 presentase, 26 pues era imposible hallarle. 
 
 Los dos hermanos f ormaron 1 su establecimiento 1 de cerra-\ 
 jeros 3 con los cincuenta doblones, ganaron 27 mucho dinero y 
 volvieron a su pais 28 ricos ; pero es de advertir, 29 que antes 
 de ausentarse 30 de la Jamaica, restituyeron 1 el prestamo 22 con 
 los intereses 1 al banquero, y le dieron las gracias recordan- 
 dole 31 la anecdofa del negro. 
 
 2.fingir, to pretend'; 3 locksmith ; 4 trade ; 5=ago ; 6 help ; 7 they had 
 recourse ; 8=expedient ; 9=rather ; 10 following ; 11 hair ; 12 curly ; 13 
 disguised ; 14 tefur, to dye ;. 15 face ; 16 body ; 17 he requested ; 18 he 
 (would) lend ; 19 sale ; 20 strong ; 21 obtained ; 22 loan ; 23 lender ; 24 
 washed ; 25 to the (one) ; 26 (might) present ; 27 gained ; 28 country ; 29 to 
 (be) observe(d) ; 30 absent(ing) themselves ; 31=reminding him of. 
 
 Deciaun andaluz 2 : Conoci a un hombre tan alto, tan grueso, 3 
 y que pesaba 4 tanto, que cuando se murio tuvieron los sepul- 
 tureros 5 que hacer dos viajes para llevarlo al cementerio. 1 
 
 UN KICO. Es tarde y voy a dejar 6 a Vd. 
 UN POBRE.^ Cuanto ? 
 
 2 Andalusiau ; 3 corpulent ; 4 weighed ; 5 grave-diggers ; 6 leave. 
 
60 
 
 El Eoo singular, 
 
 Hablando tin dia un gracioso 2 con un caballero muy men- 
 tiroso 8 que regresaba 4 de un largo 5 viaje, este le referia 6 los 
 ecos 1 maravillosos 7 que habia oido en .varios paises, particular- 
 mente 1 ,en las ruinas 1 de un templo* antiguo 1 que repetia 1 ia 
 misma palabra siete veces. 
 
 1 Ba ! ba ! eso no tiene nadade admirable, 8 responde nuestro 
 bufon 1 : acjui en este pais, sin ir mas lejos, 9 hay un eco... 
 i pero que eco ! ! ! un eco en el castillo* de un sefior cerca del 
 lago 11 Killarney, donde me ha^sucedido 12 muy f recuentemerite 1 
 gritar : Buenos dias, senor eco ; y nunca ha dejado 13 de 
 responderme : Buenos dias, caballerito, como esta Vd, ? 
 
 2 witty man ; 3 mendacious ; 4 was returning ; 5 long ; 6 was relating j 
 7 wonderful ; 8 extraordinary ; 9 far ; 10 castle ; 11 lake ; 12 happened ; 
 13 left=omitted. . 
 
 La Nuez. 
 
 Dos muchachos que jugaban 2 al pie de un nogal, 8 hallaron 
 en el suelo 4 una nuez 5 que se habia caido del arbol. 6 
 
 Es mia, dijo uno de ellos, pues yo he sido el xjue la he visto 
 el primero. 
 
 No, respondio el otro ; es mia^ porque yo he sido el que la 
 he recogido 7 del suelo. 4 
 
 No pudiendo ponerse 8 de acuerdo 8 respecto 1 al legitimo 1 
 dueno 9 de la nuez, 5 ya estaban dispuestos 10 a disputarsela 1 a 
 golpes, 11 cuando un joven 12 que pasaba, 1 habiendose enterado 13 
 del motivo 1 de la querella, 1 cogio 14 la nuez, la partio, 15 y 
 poniendose en medio 16 de los muchachos, les dijo : 
 
 Yo voy a poneros de 17 acuerdo. 17 La mitad 18 de la cascara 19 
 pertenece 20 al 21 que la vio el primero, y la otra mitad 18 al 21 que 
 la recogi6 7 del suelo. 4 Respecto a la pepita, 22 yo me la guardo 23 
 en pago 24 de la decisi6n 1 que he dado. Este es, anadio 25 
 riendo, 26 el resultado 1 usual de todos los pleitos. 27 
 
 2 jugar, to play ; 3 walnut-tree ; 4 ground ; 5 nut j 6 tree ; 7 recoger, to pick 
 up ; 8==to agree ; 9 owner ; 10 disposed ; 11 blow ; 12 young (man) ; 13 ac- 
 quainted ; 14 took hold of ; 15 divided=oracked ; 16 middle ; 17 in accord ; 
 18 haii j 19.ghell ; 20 pertenecer, to belong : 21 to the (one) ; 22 kernel ; 
 23 guardar, to keep ; 24 payment j 25 be added ; 26 laughing ; 27 lawsuit 
 
61 
 
 El Retrato mal pagado. 
 
 Mand'6se 2 retratar 2 un caballero, y contrat6 1 con el pintor 8 
 que le pagaria^generosamente, 1 si le sacaba 5 el retrato 6 pare*- 
 cido. 7 El pintor 3 lo hizo muy semejante 8 al original 1 ; pero 
 el retratado 9 cometio 1 la indignidad 1 de no querer pagarle, 
 imaginando 1 con esta malicia 1 sacar 10 baratisimo 11 el retrato, 6 
 que el pintor 3 para nada podia aprovechar. 1 * 
 
 Mas diestro 13 el artista, 1 le dijo que, supuesto 14 no queria 
 pagarle, se 15 quedaria 15 con el hasta 16 que tuviese 16 por con- 
 veniente cumplir 17 lo 18 contratado. 18 
 
 El pintor hizo 19 poner un marco 19 al ret-rato, 6 y lo expuso 1 
 al publico 1 sobre la puerta de su casa con esta inscripcifa 1 : 
 * Aqui estoy por no pagar mis deudas. 20 ' 
 
 El original del retrato, -'que fue conocido de todo 21 el 
 mundo, 21 supo al instante la burla 22 que le habia hecho el pin- 
 tor, y como todos le vituperaban, 1 se vi'6 precisado 23 a pagar 
 al artista cuanto 24 quiso para sacar 10 el retrato de sus manos. 
 
 2=ordered his portrait to be painted ; 3 painter ; 4 pagar, to pay ; 5 
 turned out ; 6 portrait ; 7=like (him) ; 8 resembling ; 9 (person) painted ; 
 10 to draw out=get ; 11 very cheap ; 12=make use of ; 13 skilful ; 14 sup- 
 posing ; 15 it should remain ; 16=until he found it ; 17 to fulfil ; 18 what 
 was contracted ; 19=had a frame put ; 20 debt ; 2J=everybody ; 22 jest, 
 trick ; 23 compelled ; 24 as much as. 
 
 Uno que estaba preso 2 en JParls por deudas, envio a buscar 
 a su acreedor, 3 diciendo que tenia algo 4 que comunicarle. 
 
 Presentose al acreedor, 3 y le dice i Pues, senor, pensando en 
 la vida 5 que paso 1 aqui tan triste 6 -yf astidiosa, 7 he creido con- 
 veniente decirle a Vd. que estoy con pena 8 por el gasto 9 que le 
 estoy ocasionando 1 diariamente, 10 y no se cuando se 11 acabara. 11 
 Escuche Vd. Hagame 12 salir 12 de esta prision, 1 y en lugar 13 de 
 los dos francos 1 que le cuesto en ella, m'e dara, estando libre, 14 
 la mitad, 15 y ^ resto 1 lo iremos 16 descontando 16 de la deuda. 
 
 2 imprisoned ; 3 creditor ; 4 something ; 5 life ; 6 dull ; 7 tedious ; 
 8 trouble ; 9 expense ; 10 daily ; 11 it will end ; 12=release me ; 13 
 place i 14 re ; 15 half ; 16cwe will gradually deduct. 
 
62 
 
 Las tres Freguntas. 
 
 Federico 1 el Grande tenia costumbre, 1 siempre ,<pf obser* 
 vaba 1 en su guardia 1 un nuevo soldado, de preguntarle estas 
 tres cosas : <? Que edad 2 tienes ? {. Desde 3 cuando* sirves 4 ? 
 I Recibes con regular! dad tu sueldo 5 y tus raciones 1 ? 
 
 Un joven Frances, que no podia hablar siquiera 6 una pala- 
 bra en aleman, 7 f ue admitido 1 en este cuerpo 8 de guardia. 1 El 
 rey debia 9 pasar revista 10 tres dias despues, y le Mcieron 
 aprender tres respuestas correspondientes 1 a las preguntas 
 que el rey solia 11 hacer y en el mismo orden. 
 
 Llegado el dia de la revista, 10 Federico observ6 estesoldado, 
 y no dejo 12 de hacerle dichas 13 preguntas, pero empezo por la 
 segunda. 
 
 <i Desde 3 cuando 3 sirves 4 ? Veinte y un anos, senor. 
 
 i Como ! <j veinte y un anos ? <j que edad 2 tienes, pues ? 
 
 Tres dias, seiior. 
 
 Ah, dijo el rey^ uno de los dos habra perdido el entendi- 
 miento. 14 Precisamente 1 los dos, dijo el joven, que tomaba 
 estas palabras por la tercera pregunta. 
 
 1 Como ! dijo el rey, esta es la primera vez que se 1B me 
 trata de 15 loco. 16 
 
 El Frances, que ya habia apurado 17 todo lo que sabia de ale- 
 man, 7 guardaba un silencio absoluto. Pero el capitan^e apresu- 
 ro 18 a explicar el en igma al rey, que celebro 19 mucho la chanza. 20 
 
 2 age ; 3 since when=how long ; 4 dost thou serve ; 5 pay ; 6 even ; 
 7 German ; 8 body ; 9 had to ; 10 review ; 11 was in the habit of ; 12= 
 omitted; 13 said ; 14 understanding ; 15=1 have been called ; 16 mad ; 
 17 exhausted ; 18 made haste ; 19=was amused with ; 20 joke. 
 
 Se habia dado orden terminante 2 a un suizo 3 de que no 
 dejara 4 entrar 1 a nadie en el jardin de las Tullerias. Se le 
 presenta 1 un ciudadano. 5 No se permite 1 la entrada, 6 dijo el 
 suizo. 3 Pero yo no quiero entrar, dijo el otro, solo 7 quiero 
 salir 8 de Pont-Royal. Ah, replied el suizo, eso ya es otra 
 cosa ; si se 9 trata 9 de salir 8 ya puede Yd. pasar. 1 
 
 2= definite, strict ; 8 Swiss ; 4 he (should) allow ; 5 citizen ; 6 entry ; 
 7 only ; 8 (to) go put ; 9 it i&a. question. 
 
63 
 
 El Gird 2 del Sol. 
 
 Hallabase un caballero, muy rudo, 3 en cierta tertulia 4 donde 
 se hablaba del sol y del modo 1 como gira 5 alrededor 6 de la tierra, 
 que tiene la figura 1 de una bola. 7 Quiso mezclarse 8 en la con- 
 versacion 1 para sostener 1 que aquello era imposible, 1 supuesto 9 
 que 9 los mismos 10 ojos convencian 1 de que la tierra era liana. 11 
 
 Dieronle diversas razones para desenganarle 12 de aquel 
 error, y entre otras cosas le dijeron : 
 
 Ya ve Vd. como el sol sale 13 diariamente 14 en un mismo 
 paraje, 15 y se 16 pone 16 al opuesto. 17 Como es pues posible, 
 que vuelva del Occidente, 18 donde se 16 pone, 16 al Oriente, 19 
 donde sale, 13 si no pasa por 20 debajo 20 ? 
 
 1 Bonita 21 pregunta ! replied el porfiado 22 ignorante 1 : viene 
 de 23 noche. 
 
 2 turning round=revolution ; 3=stupid ; 4 assembly ; 6 it rerolves ; 6 
 round ; 7 ball ; 8 (to) mix ; 9=because ; 10=very, even ; 11 flat ; 12 disabuse 
 him ; 13=rises ; 14 daily ; 15 place ; 16=sets ; 17 opposite ; 18 west ; 19 east ; 
 20 underneath ; 21 pretty (ironically used)=silly ; 22 obstinate ; 23=at. 
 
 En materia 1 de testamentos, 2 no heinos visto otro mas 
 notable 1 que el que otorg6 3 en 1793 un caballero 4 de in- 
 dustria 4 de Paris. Helo 5 aqui 5 : 
 
 Nada tengo, debo mucho, dejo lo demas 6 a los pobres. 
 2 will ; 3 executed=left ; 4 swindler ; 5 here it is ; 6 rest. 
 
 Un miisico, 2 diestro 3 en su arte, 1 pero muy envanecido 4 de 
 su merito, 1 tuvo un dia la honra 6 de hablar con cierto 
 soberano, 6 el cual reparando 7 que llevaba 8 unaa malisimas 
 medias, 9 le pregunt6 : <| si era el miisico 2 de quien le habian 
 hablado con tanto elogio 10 ? No lo se, senor, respondi6, 
 pero puedo vanagloriarme 11 de tener una voz que hago 12 de 
 ella cuanto 13 quiero. Pues si asi es, dijo el rey, te aconsejo 14 
 que te hagas un par 15 de medias, 9 porque las necesitas mucho. 
 
 De esta manera 1 se 16 burlo 16 el soberano 6 de la ridicula 1 
 vanidad 1 del musico. 2 
 
 2 musician ; 3 skilful ; 4= vain ; 6 honor ; 6 sovereign ; 7 noticing ; 
 8 llevar, to wr ; 9 stocking ; 10 eulogy, praise , 11 boast ; 12 I make ; 
 13 whatever ; 14 aconsejar, to advise ; 15 pair ; 16 made fun. 
 
El Cochero aturdidp,* 
 
 Un caballero de buen humor 1 tomo una noche con algunos 
 amigos de su mismo humor un coche 1 de 3 alquiler, 3 y mando 
 al cochero 4 les condujese 5 detras 6 de 6 una casa donde habian 
 de llamar a 7 otro 8 sujeto. 8 
 
 Llegaron, fingieron 9 subir 10 todos, y despues, dando 11 
 vuelta 11 al coche, 1 empezaron a entrar por una portezuela 12 
 y salir por la. otra, sin que lo notase 13 el cochero, 4 por 14 
 manera 14 que veia entrar mucha gente 15 y no alcarizaba 16 
 como podian ya caber 17 tantas personas alia 18 dentro, 19 hasta 20 
 que 20 el pobre diablo, 21 lleno de admiracion, 22 abandbno 1 el 
 coche y se fue a la taberna 1 inmediata, 23 donde declaro 1 que 
 conducia 24 una legion 1 de demonios, J pues habia contado 25 ya 
 diez y ocho, y no sabia donde se metian. 26 
 
 2 confused ; 3 on hire ; 4 coachman ; 5 to drive ; 6 behind ; 7=for ; 
 8=some one else ; 9 pretended ; 'lO to ascend; 11 going round ; 12 little 
 door ; 13 noticed ; 14=so ; 15 people ; 16=understood ; 17 be contained ; 
 18 there ; 19 within ;, 20 until ; 21=fellow ; 22 astonishment ; 23 adjoining ; 
 24 he was driving ; 25 counted ; 26 meter, to put. 
 
 Decia un mal pin tor 2 que iba a blanquear 3 su casa para 
 pintarla 4 despues. 5 Pintala primero, le dijo otro pintor, y 
 que 6 la blanqueen 6 enseguida. 7 
 
 1 Portero 1 ! <? Que manda 8 Vd. ? <j No vive aqui un 
 caballero que hace 9 pocos dias se ha muerto ? 
 
 No, senor, en la casa de 10 al lado. 10 Gracias. 
 
 2 painter ; 3 whitewash ; 4 paint it ; 5 afterwards ; 6 let them whitewash 
 it ; 7 directly after ; 8 order=want ; 9 ago ; 10=next door (lado, side). 
 
 Un particular 2 solicito 1 una importante plaza. 3 PeroVd. es 
 bibliotecario, 4 le dijo su protector, ; desea Vd. pues rennn- 
 ciar 5 este empleo 6 ? Oh, no, de 7 ninguna manera. 7 Entonces, 
 <: como podra Vd. cumplir 8 con su obligacion en el otro des- 
 tino, 9 que reclamara 10 todo su tiempo ? Con la mayor facili- 
 dad 1 del mundo, puesto 11 que 11 nunca voy a mi biblioteca. 1 ^ 
 
 2 certain person ; 3 place ; 4 librarian ; 5 give up ; 6 employment ; 7 not 
 at all j Siulfil ; 9 situation ; 10 will demand; ll=because ; 12 library. 
 
SPANISH 
 
 CONVERSATION 
 
 SIMPLIFIED 
 
 A collection of frequently occurring 
 CONVERSATIONAL PHRASES 
 
 INTRODUCING ALL THE 
 
 IMPORTANT IDIOMS 
 
 PHILADELPHIA 
 
 DAVID McKAY, Publisher 
 
 604-8 S. Washington Square 
 
/USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL" SENTENCES. 8 
 
 CONVERSATIONAL EXERCISES, 
 
 fcased chiefly on the Rules in u SPANISH SIMPLIFIED," and 
 gradually introducing the most IMPORTANT IDIOMS 
 
 Good day (or Good morning), 
 
 sir. 
 Good afternoon (or Good 
 
 evening), miss. 
 Good night (or Good evening)? 
 
 madam. 
 !How are you? 
 Very well, thank you ; and 
 
 you ? 
 I am very well now, but I 
 
 have been ill. 
 What was the matter with 
 
 you ? 
 
 What is the matter with her ? 
 Nothing is the matter with me. 
 What do you say ? 
 What do you mean ? 
 What is this called in 
 
 Spanish ? 
 
 ;How is that said in English ? 
 I have heard that he will 
 
 not do it. 
 Can you speak Spanish or, 
 
 Italian ? 
 
 1 1 am very sorry for it. 
 iThey were not very sorry, 
 Are you not sorry for it ? 
 | What do you want ? 
 I am glad to see you. 
 Good-bye (till to-morrow). 
 Good-bye (till Wednesday). 
 Good-bye(till I see you again). 
 Good-bye (farewell, adieu). 
 
 Buenos dias, sefior (or caba* 
 
 Hero). 
 Buenas tardes, senorita. 
 
 Buenas noches, senora. 
 
 i Como esta Vd. ? 
 
 Muy bien, gracias ; i y Vd. ? 
 
 Estoy muy bien khora, pero 
 
 he estado enfermo. 
 i Que tenia Vd. ? 
 
 i Que tiene ella ? 
 
 No tengo nada. 
 
 i Que dice Vd. ? 
 
 i Que quiere Vd. decir ? 
 
 i C6mo se llama esto en es- 
 
 panol ? 
 
 <; C6mo se dice eso en ingles ? 
 He oido decir que no quiere 
 
 hacerlo. 
 i Sabe Vd. hablar espanol 6 
 
 italiano ? 
 Lo siento mucho. 
 No lo sintieron mucho. 
 ^NolosienteVd. ? [Vd. 
 I Que quiere Vd. ? <f Que desea 
 Me alegro de verle. 
 Haste manana. 
 Hasfeyel Miercoles. 
 Hasta la vista. 
 Adios. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 I beg your pardon. 
 
 They were not very glad to 
 
 hear that. ; 
 We are very glad to find you 
 
 at home. 
 Please give me your hat and 
 
 your gloves. 
 Here they are. 
 Many thanks. 
 
 Do you think it will rain be- 
 fore the evening ? 
 It is certain that they have 
 
 not jnade a mistake. 
 We cannot do anything in 
 
 this matter. 
 I am hungry. 
 Are you not thirsty ? 
 They were very hungry. 
 Will not the child be hungry? 
 He would be very thirsty. 
 What will you do with this 
 
 letter ? 
 
 I shall send it by post. 
 Although I have not done my 
 
 work, I will go with you now. t 
 With the greatest pleasure. 
 When did the carriage come 
 
 back ? 
 It is better to arrive too soon 
 
 than too late. 
 
 There are several mistakes in 
 * this exercise. 
 Why will you not come to 
 
 the theatre to-morrow ? 
 Who told you so ? 
 That girl is very fond of 
 
 her brother. 
 Speak louder. 
 
 Dispenseme Vd. 
 
 No se alegraron mucho de 
 
 oir eso. 
 Nos alegramos mucho de en- 
 
 contrarle (a Vd.) en casa. 
 Sirvase darme su sombrero y 
 
 sus guantes. 
 Aqui los tiene Vd. 
 Muchas gracias. 
 I Cree Vd. que llovera antes 
 
 que anochezca ? 
 Es cierto que no se nan 
 
 equivocado. 
 No podemos hacej nada sobre 
 
 este asunto. 
 Ten go hambre. 
 i No tiene Vd. sed ? 
 Tenian mucha hambre. 
 <; No tendra hambre el nino ? 
 Tendria mucha sed. 
 I Que hara Vd. con esta carta ? 
 
 La enviare por el correo. 
 Aunque no he hecho mi tra- 
 
 bajo, ire ahora con Vd. 
 Con muchisiniQ gusto. 
 ,; Cuando volvio el coche ? 
 
 Vale mas llegar un poco tern- 
 
 prano, que demasiadotarde. 
 
 Hay varias f altas en este tema. 
 
 ^ Por que no quiere Vd. venir 
 
 manana al teatro ? 
 I Quien se lo dijo a Vd. ? 
 Esa muchacha quiere mucha 
 
 a su hermano. 
 Hable Vd. mas alto. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 The post has not come in yet. 
 
 Do not speak (jplur.) so low. 
 
 Wait a little ; I have several 
 things to tell you. 
 
 I cannot do it now. 
 
 Do us the favor to direct us to 
 the railway station, 
 
 I must do something else. 
 
 Listen to me a moment. 
 
 Please take a seat. 
 
 1 believe not. 
 
 We say it is so. 
 
 He was afraid not. 
 
 I hope -so. 
 
 Don't you think so ? 
 
 I say it is not. 
 
 I expect not. 
 
 Certainly not. 
 
 What are you looking for ? 
 
 Whom are you looking for ? 
 
 Do you know where Seiior 
 Martinez lives ? 
 
 Will you take anything ? 
 
 Many thanks ; I am not 
 hungry, but I should very 
 much like a glass of wine. 
 
 I am rather tired^. 
 
 .When did your mother re- 
 turn home ? 
 
 I do not know why he has 
 not sent the answer. 
 
 How old is your uncle ? 
 
 I am twenty-eight years old. 
 
 He is more than thirty. 
 
 I do not know what to do 
 about this matter. 
 
 You cannot make 9, mistake. 
 
 El corr eo no ha llegado todavia. 
 No hablen Vds. tan bajo, 
 Aguarde, Vd. un poco ; tengo 
 
 varias cosas que clecirle. 
 No puedo hacerlo ahora. 
 Haganos el favor de dirigirnos 
 
 a la estacion del f errocarril. 
 Debo hacer otra cosa. 
 Escucheme un momento. 
 Sirvase tomar asiento. 
 Creo que no. 
 Decimos que si. 
 TemiaTque no. 
 Espero que si. 
 I No cree Vdrque si ? 
 Digo que no. 
 Espero que no. 
 Ciertamente que no. 
 i Que busca Vd. ? 
 I A quien busca Vd. ? 
 I Sabe Vd. donde vive el seiior 
 
 Martinez ? 
 
 <j Quiere Vd. tomar algo ? 
 Mil gracias ; no tengo hambre, 
 
 pero de buenagana beberia 
 
 un vaso de vino.* 
 Estoy algo cansado, 
 I Cuando volvio a casa su 
 
 madre (de Vd.) ? 
 No se por que no ha enviado 
 
 la respues,ta. 
 
 <; Cuantos anos tiene su tio ? 
 Tengo veintiocho anos. 
 Tiene mas de treinta anos. 
 No se que hacer en este 
 
 asunto. 
 Vd. no puede equivocarse., 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 You must do it some other way. 
 
 I want to consult you about 
 this letter. 
 
 They will doubtless come 
 next week. 
 
 Could you not hear him ? 
 
 Yes ; but we could not un- 
 derstand what he meant. 
 
 Do you know what time it is ? 
 
 I don't know the exact time ; 
 my watch does not go well. 
 
 His watch always goes badly. 
 
 It is a little fast. 
 
 It is generally very slow. 
 
 [to ten. 
 
 It is exactly twenty minutes 
 
 It is about one o'clock. 
 
 It is not late yet. 
 
 My watch is not going. 
 
 I cannot wind it up ; I have 
 left the key at home. 
 
 This is of no importance. 
 
 It does not matter. 
 
 What does it matter ? 
 
 Where were you going when 
 we met you yesterday ? 
 
 I am going to read this news- 
 paper. 
 
 What is the news ? 
 
 Nothing is more certain. 
 Be quiet directly ! 
 These children will not be 
 silent. [first. 
 
 Please tell me who saw it 
 Come in ! 
 
 Vd. debe hacerlo de otro modo* 
 Deseo consultarle sobre esta 
 
 carta. 
 Sin duda vendran la semana 
 
 que viene. 
 
 .<? No podian. Yds. oirle ? 
 Si ; pero no podiamos com- 
 
 prender lo que queria decir. 
 ,; Sabe Vd. que hora es ? 
 No se la hora exacta ; mi 
 
 reloj no va bien. 
 Su reloj va siempre mal. 
 Esta un poco adelantado. 
 Va generalmente muy atra- 
 
 sado. [punto. 
 
 Son las diez menos veinte en 
 Es cerca de la una. 
 No es tarde. todavia. 
 Mi reloj no anda. 
 No puedo darle cuerda ; he 
 
 dejado la Have en casa. 
 Esto no es de ninguna im- 
 
 portancia. 
 No importa. 
 I Que importa ? 
 ; Adonde iba Vd. cuando le 
 
 encontramos ayer ? 
 Voy a leer este peri<5dico. 
 
 i Que hay de nuevo ? or Que 
 
 se dice de tfuevo ? 
 Nada es mas seguro. 
 I Callese Vd. al instante ! 
 Estos nifios no quieren ca- 
 
 llarse. [visto primero. 
 
 Sirvase decirme quien lo ha 
 i Entre Vd. ! 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Can you change me this 
 
 foreign money ? 
 Walk this way. 
 Is your master at home ? 
 No, madam ; he is out, and 
 
 will not return before the 
 
 evening. 
 What a pity ! I should like 
 
 to see him. 
 
 Will you give me your name ? 
 You are right.. 
 I am not right. 
 We are right this time. 
 I am sure they are wrong. 
 
 His friend was^ wrong. 
 Who is this gentleman who 
 
 is coming towards us ? 
 He is a friend of my cousin's, 
 
 but I do not know his name. 
 Can you direct me to 
 
 Street ? 
 
 With much pleasure. 
 You must take this road. 
 Go straight on. 
 Take the second street on the 
 
 right. 
 The street you want is the 
 
 first on the left 
 Ask again, when you get to 
 
 the market. 
 You Tvill see the station in 
 
 front of you. 
 
 Whom ar,e you writing to ? 
 I am writing to my brother ; 
 
 I have several things to say 
 
 to him. 
 L A11 that they told you is true. 
 
 <? Puede Vd. cambiarme este 
 
 dinero extranjero ? 
 Pase Vd. adelante. 
 i Esta su amo en casa ? 
 No, senora : esta f uera, y no 
 
 volvera antes de la noche. 
 
 I Que lastima ! desearia verle. 
 
 <i QuiereVd.darmesunombre? 
 Vd. tiene razon. 
 No tengo razon. 
 Tenemos razon esta vez. x 
 Estoy seguro de que no tienen 
 
 razon. 
 
 Su amigo no tenia razon. 
 <? Quien es este senor que 
 
 viene hacia nosotros ? 
 Es un amigo de mi primo, 
 " pero no se su nombre. 
 I Puede Vd. dirigirme a la 
 
 calle de ? 
 Con mucho gusto. 
 Vd. debe tomar este camino.' 
 Vaya.Vd. derecho. 
 Tome Vd. la segunda calle a 
 
 laderecha. 
 La calle que Vd. quiere es la 
 
 primera* a la izquierda. 
 Pregunte de nuevo, cuando 
 
 llegue al mercado. 
 Vd. vera la estacion en 
 
 frente. 
 
 I A quien escribe Vd. ? 
 Escribo a mi hermano ; tengo 
 
 varias cosas que decirle. 
 
 [verdad. 
 Todo lo que le han dicho^es 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 The windows ai ; e not shut. 
 
 Shall I shut the door ? 
 Please give me some bread 
 
 and cheese. 
 What will you drink ? 
 I should like a glass of beer, 
 
 if there is any. 
 You cannot do better. 
 Where are you going ? 
 I am going home ; will you 
 
 come with me ? 
 No, thank you ; I must stay 
 
 here, because I have a 
 
 great deal to do. 
 I am very sorry, but I cannot 
 
 do it. 
 
 Is 'any body at home ? 
 What hour is that striking ? 
 It is just striking eleven. 
 Thehourisjustabouttostrike. 
 Hasitstruck half past five yet? 
 Not yet ; but I think it will 
 
 strike soon. 
 It has just struck one. 
 It had just struck eight. 
 It is a beautiful day. 
 It is fine (weather). 
 It is very bad weather. 
 It was not fine. 
 Do you think it will be fine 
 
 to-morrow ? 
 It is not snowing. 
 I believe it will rain soon. 
 I expect a letter from my 
 
 sister in Paris. 
 These letters are not dated. 
 
 Las veritanas no es&n ce- 
 
 rradaa. [puerta ? 
 
 i Quiere Vd. que (yo) cierre la 
 Hagame el favor de darme 
 
 un poco de pan y queso. 
 <; Que quiere Vd. beber ? 
 Quisiera. un vaso de cerveza, 
 
 si la hay. 
 
 Vd. no puede hacer cosa mejor 
 i Adonde va Vd. ? 
 Voy a casa ; <; quiere Vd. venir 
 
 conmigo ? 
 No, gracias ; debo quedarme 
 
 aqui, porque tengo mucho 
 
 que hacer. 
 Lo siento mucho, pero no 
 
 puedo hacerlo. 
 I Hay alguien en casa ? 
 I Que hora esta dando ? 
 Estan dando las once. 
 La hora va a dar [media ? 
 <; Han dado ya las cinco y 
 Todavia no ; pero creo que 
 
 daran pronto. 
 La una acaba de dar. 
 Las ocho acababan de dar. 
 Hace un dia hermoso. 
 Haxje buen tiempo. 
 Hace muy mal tiempo. 
 No hacia buen tiempo. 
 <; Cree Vd. que hara buen 
 
 tiempo maiiana ? 
 No esta nevarido. 
 Creo que llovera pronto. 
 Espero una carta de mi her- 
 
 rnana que esta en Paris. 
 Esta cartas no tienen f echa. 
 
trSEFXTL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 What is the date ? 
 
 The first, second, third, etc. 
 
 Will you take this letter to 
 
 the post ? 
 We are going to send them 
 
 the answer to-morrow. 
 How much do you ask for this ? 
 How do you sell these ? 
 At the price which you see 
 
 marked. 
 
 Is this the lowest price ? 
 Yes ; we mark our prices as 
 
 low as possible, and we 
 
 cannot reduce them. 
 These goods are sold at three 
 
 shillings each. ; 
 This is a very cheap article. 
 It appears to me too much. 
 How much will you take ? 
 Do you think it will be 
 
 enough ? 
 I was not satisfied with the 
 
 material I bought here the 
 
 other day. 
 I was inclined to send it back 
 
 to you. 
 We are very sorry that you 
 
 did not do so. 
 We always do all we possibly 
 
 can to satisfy our cus- 
 tomers. 
 Can I show you anything 
 
 else ? 
 I will take those ; please 
 
 send them to my house. 
 Where do you wish them to 
 
 be sent ? 
 To No. 17, Prince's Street, 
 
 <; A cuantos estamos hoy ? 
 A primero, a dos, a tres, etc. 
 i Quiere Vd. llevar esta carta 
 
 al correo ? 
 Vamos a enviarles la respues- 
 
 ta manana. 
 
 d Cuanto pide Vd. por esto ? 
 <; A como vende Vd. estos ? 
 Al precio que ve Vd. marcado, 
 
 d Es este el precio mas bajo ? 
 
 Si ; marcamos nuestros pre- 
 cios lo mas bajo posible, y 
 no podemos reducirlos. 
 
 Estos generos pe venden a 
 tres chelines cada uno. 
 
 Este es un articulomuy barato. 
 
 Me parece dernasiado. 
 
 I Cuanto tomara Vd. ? 
 
 I Cree Vd. que sera bastante ? 
 
 No estaba satisfecho con el 
 
 material que compre aqui 
 
 el otro dia. 
 Estaba dispuesto a devolver- 
 
 selo (a Vd.). 
 Sentimos mucho que Vd. no 
 
 lo haya hecho. 
 Hacemos siempre todo lo que 
 
 podemos para satisfacer a 
 
 nuestros parroquianos. 
 I Puedo mostrarle a Vd. al- 
 
 guna otra cosa ? 
 Tomare esos ; sirvase man- 
 
 darlos a mi casa. 
 <jAd6nde quiere Vd. que se 
 
 inanden ? 
 A la calle del Principe, No. 17. 
 
10 
 
 tJSEFTTL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Is there a letter for me ? 
 They were obliged to go away. 
 We shall go out to-night, if it 
 
 is not too cold. 
 He asked us why we had 
 
 come, but we did not 
 
 answer him. 
 Open the door, and shut all 
 
 the windows. 
 Is the door locked ? 
 
 Do not come too late. 
 I beg your pardon. 
 There is no occasion for it- 
 There was no occasion for it. 
 There would not be an}- 
 
 need for it/ 
 It is better not to say anything, 
 
 than to speak too much. 
 It would be better not to say 
 
 anything more. ' 
 When we have finished our 
 
 work, we shall go out. 
 Where are you going ? 
 We are going to hear a very 
 
 celebrated speaker. 
 Did you enjoy yourselves at 
 
 the theatre yesterday ? 
 Thank you ; we enjoyed our- 
 selves very much. 
 Follow me ; I have something 
 
 for you. [me ? 
 
 Have you anything to show 
 Can you stay here for a little 
 
 while ? 
 
 I must go away at once. 
 I shall be here at a quarter to 
 
 eight exactly. 
 
 i Hay carta para mi ? 
 Tuvieron que irse. 
 Saldremos esta noche, si no 
 
 hace demasiado frio. 
 Nos pregunto por que ha- 
 
 biamos venido, pero no le 
 
 contestants. 
 Abra Vd. la puerta, y cierre 
 
 todas las ventanas/ 
 <? Esta cerrada con Have la 
 
 puerta ? 
 
 No venga Vd. demasiado tarde. 
 Dispenseme Vd ,0rPerdone Vd. 
 No hay de que. 
 No habia de que. 
 No habria de que. 
 
 Vale mas no decir nada, que 
 
 hablar demasiado. 
 Mas valdria no, decir nada 
 
 mas. 
 Cuando hayamos acabado 
 
 nuestro trabajo, saldremos. 
 I Adonde Iran Vds. ? 
 Vamos a- oir a un orador 
 
 may celebre. 
 <? Se divlrtieron Vds. ayer en 
 
 el teatro ? 
 Gracias ; nos divertimos 
 
 mucho. f 
 Sigame ; tengo algo para Vd. 
 
 [me? 
 
 <; TieneVd.algo que mostrar- 
 l Puede Vd. quedarse aqui un 
 
 poco? 
 
 Debo irme al instante. 
 Estare aqui 4 las ocho meaos 
 
 cuarto en punto. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 11 
 
 We are very glad that oiir 
 
 father has come home 
 
 again. 
 Do you want an umbrella or 
 
 a stick ? 
 
 I do not want either. 
 Do you want anything else ? 
 You must tell him as soon as 
 
 he arrives. 
 As you please. 
 When you go downstairs, 
 
 take this with you. 
 A week ago he was in the 
 
 country, but he came back 
 
 last night. 
 How many days have you 
 
 been here ? 
 
 Have you been here long ? 
 We have been here ten 
 
 minutes. 
 I have been learning Spanish 
 
 for a year. 
 Let us talk a little. 
 What have you to tell me ? 
 We must not catch cold. 
 The children will catch cold. 
 I have a cold. 
 She has not got a cold. 
 They all had colds. 
 I am afraid he will catch cold. 
 This bread is new (=f resh) ; 
 
 it is not cold yet. [hot. 
 The coffee and the tea are not 
 The iron was too hot. 
 
 At what time do you dine ? 
 It is already five o'clock. 
 
 Nos alegramos mucho de 
 
 que nuestro padre haya 
 
 vuelto a casa. 
 <? Quiere Vd. un paraguas 6 
 
 unbaston ? 
 
 No quiero ni uno ni otro. 
 <j Quiere Vd. otra cosa ? 
 Vd. debe decirselo en cuanto 
 
 llegue. 
 
 Como Vd. guste. 
 Cuando Vd. baje, llevese 
 
 esto. 
 Hace una semana estaba 
 
 en el campo, pero x volvi6 
 
 anocho. 
 i Cuantos dias hace que esta 
 
 Vd. aqui? [aqui? 
 
 I Hace mucho que esta Vd. 
 Hace diez minutos que esta- 
 
 mos aqui. 
 Hace un ano que aprendo 
 
 espanol. 
 
 Conversemos un poco. 
 i Que tiene Vd. que decirme ? 
 No debemos resfriarnos. 
 Los nifios se resf riaran. 
 Estoy resf riado. 
 No esta resfriada. 
 Estaban todos resfriados. 
 Temo que se resfrie. 
 Este pan esta fresco ; no esta 
 
 frio todavia. [lientes. 
 
 El cafe y el te no estan ca- 
 El hierro estaba demasiado 
 
 caliente. 
 
 I A que hora comen Vds. ? 
 Ya son las cinco. 
 
12 
 
 USEFUL 
 
 Ws snail dine at half past six. 
 I saw the people coming out 
 
 of church. 
 I thought I should receive 
 
 more money for my horses. 
 With your permission, I will 
 
 read this letter. 
 You are greatly mistaken. 
 I have come by coach, not 
 
 by train. 
 Send.him the answer by post. 
 
 The town consists of five 
 
 hundred houses. 
 This lady appears to be taller 
 
 than her mother. 
 Do you know that lady ? 
 We have known her for some 
 
 time. 
 J have seen her, but I do not 
 
 know her. 
 
 I know her by sight. 
 We know her by name. 
 What is this called ? 
 I do not remember what it is 
 
 called. 
 
 What are these things called ? 
 We do not know what they are 
 
 called. 
 
 What is your friend's name ? 
 My name is George. 
 We shall come back at the 
 
 end of the month. 
 Knock at that door. 
 Somebody is knocking at -the 
 
 door. 
 It is a gentleman, but I do not 
 
 know his name. 
 
 Comeremos a las seis y media. 
 Vi a la gente salir de la 
 
 iglesia. 
 Crei que recibiria mas dinero 
 
 por mis caballos. 
 Con permiso de Vd., leere 
 
 esta carta. 
 
 Esta Vd. muy equivocado. 
 He venido en coche, no en el 
 
 tren. 
 Enviele Vd. la respuesta por 
 
 correo. 
 La ciudad se compone de 
 
 quinientas casas. 
 Esta senorita parcce ser mas 
 
 alta que su madre. 
 I Conoce Vd. a esa senora ? 
 Hace algiin tiempo que la 
 
 conocemos. 
 La he visto, pero no la 
 
 conozco. 
 
 La conozco de vista. 
 La conocemos de n ombre. 
 i Como se llama esto ? 
 No me acuerdo como " se 
 
 llama. 
 
 <i Como se llaman estas cosas ? 
 No sabemos como se llaman. 
 
 i Como se llama su amigo ? 
 Me llamo Jorge. 
 Volveremos t a fines del mes. 
 
 Llame Vd. a esa puerta. 
 Alguien llama a la puerta. 
 
 Es un caballero, pero no se 
 su nombre. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 13 
 
 Go and see who it is. 
 
 Whom did he ask for ? 
 
 I am ashamed. 
 
 Are you not ashamed ? 
 
 He ought to be ashamed to 
 
 say that. 
 I am afraid he : cannot wait 
 
 any longer. 
 Were you not very much 
 
 afraid? 
 He will be afraid to go out 
 
 this evening. 
 
 I did not hear the question. 
 Ask whether they have 
 
 printed the books yet. 
 They brought a message to 
 
 >say she had died last 
 
 week. 
 I do not always hear all the 
 
 words. 
 
 I am very .hot. 
 Are you not warm ? 
 We shall be too hot here. 
 We are not cold. 
 Are you -cold ? 
 She was very cold. 
 You would be too cold in this 
 
 room. 
 
 These rooms are very cold. 
 The water was not cold. 
 We have not found what we 
 
 were looking for. 
 I shall not go out to-day, or 
 
 to-morrow either. 
 They arrived in time, but un- 
 f ortunatelyiie was not there. 
 Those who are idle are seldom 
 
 happy. 
 
 Vd. a/ver quien es. 
 <; For quien ha preguntado ? 
 Tengo vergiienza. 
 <? No tienen Vds. vergiienza ? 
 Debia tener vergiienza de 
 
 decir eso. 
 Temp que no pueda aguardar 
 
 mas. 
 <; No tenia Vd. mucho miedo? 
 
 Tendra miedo de salir esta 
 
 noche. 
 
 No oi la pregunta. 
 Pregunte Vd. si han impreso 
 
 los libros ya. 
 Trajeron un parte diciendo 
 
 que habia muerto la sema- 
 
 na pasada. 
 No oigo sLempre todas las 
 
 palabras. 
 
 Tengo mucho calor. 
 <? No^iene Vd. calor ? [calor. 
 Tendremos aqui demasiado 
 No tenemos frio. 
 i Tienen Vds. frio ? 
 Ella tenia tfiucho frio. 
 Vd. tendria deinasiado frio en 
 
 este cuarto. 
 
 Estos cuartos son muy frios. 
 El agua no estaba fria. 
 No hemos halladoloque bus- 
 
 cabamos. 
 No saldre hoy, ni manana 
 
 tampoco. 
 Llegaron a tiempo, pero por 
 
 desgracia el no estaba alii. 
 Los que son holgazanes sou 
 
 raramente felices. 
 
14 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Is this house for sale ? 
 No, madam ; it is to be let. 
 Have you any rooms to let ? 
 
 I want to take lodgings near 
 
 my friend's house. . 
 How many rooms do you wan t ? 
 I should like three rooms on 
 
 the second or third floor. 
 For how long do you want 
 
 them? 
 
 For three or four months. 
 How much have I to pay a 
 
 week ? 
 The price is eight dollars a 
 
 mojith. 
 
 I think it is too much. 
 These boots do not suit me. 
 They are too narrow. 
 They are not broad enough. 
 Did not the gloves fit him 
 
 well? 
 
 Your hat does not suit you. 
 It is too tight. 
 This ring fits me better. 
 His coats suit him very well. 
 This coat is very uncom- 
 fortable. 
 He called me by my name, but 
 
 I don't know who he was. 
 They appear to be a long way 
 
 from here, but they are not. 
 
 I shall finish the list this very 
 
 day. 
 It is not necessary that we 
 
 should keep them waiting. 
 I shall see him next Sunday. 
 
 i Se vende esta casa ? 
 No, senora ; se alquila. 
 <;Tiene Vd. cuartos para al- 
 
 quilar ? 
 Deseo alquilar un alojamiento 
 
 junto a la casa de mi ainigo. 
 I Cuantos cuartos desea Vd. ? 
 Quisiera tres cuartos en el 
 
 segundo 6 tercer piso. 
 <; Por cuanto tiempo los quiere 
 
 Vd.? 
 
 Por tres 6 cuatro rneses. 
 <; Cuanto tengo que pagar por 
 
 sernana ? 
 El precio es ocho duros al 
 
 mes (or por mes). 
 Creo que es demasiado. 
 Estas botas no me vienenbien. 
 Son demasiado estrechas. 
 No son bastante anchas. 
 I No le vinieron bien los 
 
 guantes ? 
 
 Su sombrero no le viene bien. 
 Es demasiado estrecho. 
 Esta sortija me ajusta mejor. 
 Sus levitas le vienen inu y bien. 
 Esta levita me incomoda 
 
 mucho. 
 Me llamo por mi nombre, 
 
 pero no se quien era. 
 Parecen estar muy lejos de 
 
 aqui, pero no lo estan. 
 
 Acabare la lista hoy mismo. 
 
 No es preciso que les hagamos 
 
 esperar. 
 Le vere el Domingo que viene. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 15 
 
 Do not keep us waiting any 
 
 longer. 
 
 Send for a cab. 
 I have merely come to ask 
 
 when you <jan finish it. 
 
 Who has taken away my cup ? 
 Take this umbrella with you. 
 
 Will you take the children 
 
 home ? 
 
 Are you wearing boots or shoes ? 
 In summer I generally wear 
 
 shoes, and in winter boots. 
 
 Do you generally wear a 
 
 jacket or a morning coat ? 
 My friend used to wear his 
 
 clothes too tight. 
 This phrase is not correct ; 
 
 it is better to write it in 
 
 this way. 
 They went away without 
 
 speaking to anybody. 
 He always forgets the pro- 
 mises he makes. 
 This wine is all that we could 
 
 wish. 
 The provisions were not all 
 
 that we could have wished. 
 I try as much as I can. 
 We are doing what we can. 
 We will do all we can. 
 It is the least they can do 
 
 for her. 
 
 Will you do it for me ? 
 There are many men who 
 
 can neither read nor write. 
 
 No nos haga Vd. esperar mas. 
 
 Mande Vd. por un coche. 
 Solo he venido para pregun- 
 
 tarle cuando puede aca- 
 
 barlo Vd. 
 
 <: Quien se ha llevado mi taza ? 
 Lleve Vd. este paraguas con- 
 
 .sigo. 
 ,; Quiere Vd. llevar los niiios 
 
 a casa ? 
 
 <i Lleva Vd. botas 6 zapatos ? 
 En verano uso (or llevo) 
 
 generalmente zapatos, y 
 
 botas en invierno. 
 <? Usa. Vd. generalmente casaca 
 
 6 levita ? 
 Mi amigo usaba(0r llevaba)su 
 
 vestido demasiado estrecho. 
 Esta f rase no es correcta ; 
 
 vale mas escribirla de este 
 
 modo. 
 Se fueron sin hablar a nadie. 
 
 Olvida siempre las promesas 
 
 que hace. 
 Este vino es tal cual lo po- 
 
 diamos desear. 
 Los viveres no eran tales 
 
 cuales los podiamos desear. 
 Procuro cuanto puedo. 
 Hacemos cuanto podemos. 
 Haremos cuanto podamos. 
 Es lo menos que pueden 
 
 hacer por ella. 
 
 <; Quiere Vd. hacerlo por mi ? 
 Hay muchos hombres que no 
 
 saben ni leer ni escribir. 
 
TJSEFtfL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Sit down. 
 
 Thank you ; I cannot stay. 
 
 I took advantage of his silence 
 
 to explain what you had 
 
 told me. 
 We shall take advantage of 
 
 their absence. 
 He has gone away without 
 
 waiting for the answer. 
 Both these books are ours. 
 Both the shops are that 
 
 merchant's. 
 Which of the two do you 
 
 prefer ? 
 They detained me nearly two 
 
 hours. 
 He slept for more than ten 
 
 hours. 
 There are more than fifty 
 
 ships in the harbour. 
 I receive more than twenty 
 
 letters a day by post. 
 I cannot approve of his con- 
 duct. 
 
 Nobody likes to be deceived. 
 I thought you wanted to 
 
 mislead me. 
 We have hardly had time to 
 
 read the answer. 
 I went to see his school yes- 
 terday. 
 Have you been to see your 
 
 bed-room ? 
 Yes ; it is convenient, but it 
 
 is not very big, 
 It is on the ground floor. 
 Mine is on the third fioor. 
 I prefer the first floor. 
 
 Sientese Vd. 
 
 Gracias ; no puedo quedarme. 
 
 Me aproveche de su silencio 
 
 para explicar lo que Vd. me 
 
 habia dicho. 
 Nos aprovecharemos de su 
 
 ausencia. 
 Se ha ido sin aguardar 
 
 respuesta. 
 
 Ambos libros son nuestros. 
 Ambas tiendas son de. aquel 
 
 comerciante. 
 t Cual de los dos prefiere Vd. ? 
 
 Me han detenido casi dos 
 
 horas. 
 Ha dormido mas de diez 
 
 horas. 
 Hay mas de cincuenta buques 
 
 *en el puerto. 
 Recibo mas de veinte cartas 
 
 por correo cada dia. 
 No puedo aprobar su con- 
 
 ducta. 
 
 Nadie quiere ser enganado. 
 Crei que Vd. deseaba en- 
 
 ganarme. 
 Apenas hemos tenido tiempo 
 
 para leer la contestation. 
 Ayer fui a'ver su escuela. 
 
 I Ha ido Vd. a ver su alcoba ? 
 
 Si ; es comoda, pero no es 
 
 muy grande. 
 Esta en el cuarto bajo. 
 La mia esta en el tercer piso. 
 Prefiero el primer piso. 
 
/ USEFUL COZTVERSATIOlf AL SENTENCES. 
 
 17 
 
 When you take the letters 
 
 to the post, do not forget to 
 
 pay the postage. 
 Have you aated them ? 
 Yes, but I have not signed 
 
 them. 
 I am very fond of music 
 
 (=music pleases me). 
 We do not likexdancing. 
 Does she like this picture ? 
 Do you like the pictures in 
 
 the exhibition ? 
 I do not like* them much. 
 I do not like this. 
 They all like country^life; 
 
 Used they to like this wine ? 
 We like the other better'. 
 Which of the three do you 
 
 like best ? 
 
 I am very fond of apples. 
 I prefer pears. 
 "We like oranges best. 
 So do I. So do we. 
 Everybody knows it. 
 It is not yet known where 
 ; they have gone. 
 I assure you that I did not do it. 
 While he was speaking, I 
 
 wrote the letter, 
 While they were waiting, he 
 
 went out. 
 Indeed ! 
 
 When wa that done ? 
 Is this frifat good to eat ? 
 
 We do not think it" is ripe 
 
 yeV 
 
 Cuando lleve Vd. las cartas 
 al correo, no olvide de 
 pagar el porte. 
 
 <; Les ha puesto Vd. la fecha? 
 
 Si, pero no las he firmado. 
 
 Me gusta la musica. 
 
 No nos gusta bailar. 
 
 <; Le gusta este cuadro ? 
 
 <; Le gustan a Vd. los cuadros, 
 
 de la exposicion ? 
 No me gustan mucho. 
 Esto no me gusta. 
 A todos ellos les gusta la vida 
 
 campestre. 
 
 i Les gustaba este vino ? 
 Nos gusta mas el otro. 
 I Cual de los tres les gusta i 
 
 Vds. mas ? 
 
 Me gustan muchb las manzanas. 
 Prefiero las peras. . 
 Nos^ gustan mas las naranjas. 
 Yotambien. Nosotrostambien. 
 Todo el mundo lo sabe. 
 Aiin no se sabe adonde han 
 
 ido. 
 
 Le aseguro que yo no lo hice. 
 Mientras el hablaba, yo es- 
 
 cribia la carta. 
 Mientras aguardaban, salio. 
 
 \ De veras ! 
 
 I Cuando se hizo eso ? 
 
 <jEs esta iruta buena para 
 
 comer ? 
 No creemos que est6 madura 
 
 todavia. 
 
18 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 They bought it the day before 
 
 yesterday. 
 I will send it to them the day 
 
 after to-morrow. 
 He does not generally come 
 
 before seven o'clock. 
 They will come back at the 
 
 end of a month. 
 It is not true. 
 No such thing. 
 Not at all. 
 How long have you been 
 
 living here ? 
 Since last month. 
 If I pay you now, will you 
 
 give me a receipt ? 
 He would not pay the account 
 
 without getting a receipt. 
 How far is it from here to 
 
 London ? 
 
 About two hundred miles. 
 How many miles is it from 
 
 Madrid to Paris ? 
 I did not think it was so far. 
 He was not showing much 
 
 dexterity. 
 I live in the west of the 
 
 town, but formerly I lived 
 
 in the east. 
 We shall live in the south, 
 
 and our relatives in f - the 
 
 north. 
 They used to live opposite 
 
 the market. 
 
 Can you walk more quickly ? 
 Do not walk so quickly. 
 He always used to walk too 
 
 quickly. 
 
 Lo compraron anteayer. 
 
 Se lo enviare pasado manana, 
 
 Generalmente no viene antes 
 
 de las siete. 
 Volveran al cabo de un mes. 
 
 No es verdad. 
 
 No hay tal cosa. 
 
 De ningun modo. 
 
 c Cuanto tiempo hace que vive 
 
 Vd. aqui ? 
 
 Desde el mes pasado. 
 Si le pago ahora, <; me dara 
 
 Vd. recibo ? 
 No queria pagar la cuenta 
 
 sin tomar recibo 
 <; Que distancia hay de aqui 
 
 a Londres ? 
 
 Cerca de doscientas millas. 
 t Cuantas millas Jiay desde 
 
 Madrid a Paris ? 
 No creia que fuese tan lejos. 
 No mostraba mucha destreza. 
 
 Vivo en el oeste de la ciudad, 
 pero antes vivia en el este. 
 
 Nosotros vivir6mos en el sud, 
 y nuestros parientes en el 
 norte. 
 
 Vivian f rente al mSrcado. 
 
 <; Puede Vd. andar mas aprisa ? 
 No anden Vds. tan aprisa. 
 Andaba siempre demasiado 
 aprisa. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 19 
 
 Let me copy it for you. 
 
 He began to run, but I easily 
 
 caught him. 
 It is not so late as I thought. 
 
 It is much later than they 
 thought. 
 
 They are stronger than we 
 expected. 
 
 You are walking more slowly 
 than I like. 
 
 Is the station far from here ? 
 
 Take the second street on the 
 right. 
 
 Can you tell me where the... 
 Hotel is ? 
 
 You must take the third turn- 
 ing on the left. 
 
 The house you passed by this 
 morning is my grandfather 's. 
 
 I want you to repair this 
 
 lock. 
 You ought to have a new 
 
 key. 
 
 At what time do you breakfast ? 
 They breakfasted with me 
 
 yesterday morning. 
 I often breakfast with him. 
 We shall breakfast with them 
 to-morrow at half past seven. 
 It is rather early for us. 
 
 They were informed of it. 
 I shall not be informed of 
 
 that. 
 Where does this letter come 
 
 from? 
 
 Djeme copjarlo por Yd, 
 Empez6 a correr, pero le al- 
 
 cance facilmente. 
 No es tan tarde como yo 
 
 creia. 
 Es mucho mas tarde de lo 
 
 que creian. 
 Son mas fuert.es de lo que 
 
 esperabamos. 
 Vd. anda mas despacio de lo 
 
 que quiero. 
 
 <? Esta Iejosdeaquilaestaci6n ? 
 Tome Vd. la segunda calle a 
 
 la derecha. 
 <; Puede Vd. decirme doixde 
 
 esta el hotel... ? 
 Vd. debe tomar la tercera 
 
 calle a la izquierda. 
 La casa por la cual Vd.. ha 
 
 pasado esta manana es de< 
 
 mi abuelo. 
 Deseo que Vd. repare esta: 
 
 cerradura. 
 Vd. debiera tener una Have 
 
 nueva. 
 
 <? A que hora almuerza Vd. ? 
 Alinorzaron conmigo ayer (por 
 
 la) manana. 
 
 Almuerzo arnenudo con el. 
 Almorzaremos con ellos ma- 
 
 jaana a las siete y media. 
 Es algo temprano para noso- 
 
 tros. 
 
 Tenian noticia de ello. 
 No tendre noticia de eso. 
 
 i De d6nde viene esta carta ? 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 She owes her life to him. 
 We shall soon know whether 
 
 it can be done.. 
 Why do you not get up ? 
 I am going to get jip now, 
 
 but I went to bed rather 
 
 late last night. 
 X I shall go to see them tb-day, 
 
 even if the weather is bad. 
 Breakfast is ready. 
 Supper is not ready. 
 Will you stop to supper ? 
 We are going to take tea. 
 Why do you not begin ? 
 You have not told us what we 
 
 ought to do. 
 We remember\his street very 
 
 well. 
 Don't you \ remember that 
 
 gong ? 
 I remember this song, but 
 
 not that one. 
 Bo not be angry ; it is not 
 
 my fault. 
 He often gets angry without ' 
 
 cause. 
 Will you come for a walk 
 
 with me ? 
 I will come for a walk with 
 
 you with much pleasure. 
 It cannot go any farther; I 
 
 am very tired. 
 At what time do your chil-, 
 
 dren get up ? 
 
 Generally about seven o'clock. 
 Mine does not get up before 
 
 eight. 
 They never take enoueh care. 
 
 Le debe la vida. 
 
 Pronto sabremos si puede 
 
 hacerse. 
 
 i For que no se levanta Vd. ? 
 Voy a levantarme'ahora, pero 
 
 anoche me acoste un poco 
 
 tarde. 
 Ire a verlos hoy, aunque baga 
 
 mal tiempo. 
 
 El almuerzo esta servido. 
 La cena no esta servida. 
 t Quieren Vds. quedarse a cenar ? 
 Vamos a tomar el te. 
 I Por que no empieza Vd. ? 
 Yd. no nos ha dicho lo que 
 
 debiamos hacer. 
 Nos acordamos de esta calle 
 
 muy bien. 
 i No se acuerda Vd. de aquella 
 
 cancion ? 
 Me acuerdo de esta cancion, 
 
 pero no de esa. 
 No se enoje Vd. ; no es culpa 
 
 mia. 
 Se enoja amenudo sin causa. 
 
 <; Quiere Vd. dar un paseo 
 
 conmigo ? 
 Con mucho gusto dare un 
 
 paseo con Vd. 
 No puedo andar mas ; estoy 
 
 muy cansado. 
 i A qu6 hora se levantan sus 
 
 hijos (de Vd.) ? 
 Generalmente cerca de las siete. 
 El mio no se levanta antes de 
 
 las ocho. 
 Nunca tienen bastante cu idado. 
 
TTSEFTTL 
 
 I have just written him a 
 
 letter, 
 I have not sent it to the post 
 
 yet. 
 
 My sister had just gone out. 
 They had just told him when 
 
 you arrived. 
 
 Do you not remember it ? 
 There is nothing better than 
 
 a good memory. 
 'What is your opinion ? 
 Ouropinion is that it is not true. 
 Whom is that child like ? 
 I'm sure I don't know. 
 I do not know whom he is like. 
 I am very like my mother. 
 It seems to me that we have 
 
 enough. 
 Did you not tell us that nothing 
 
 was the matter with her ? 
 On the contrary, she has got 
 
 a very bad cold. 
 -His answer made me laugh. 
 If you say that, you will 
 
 make your teacher laugh. 
 While he is out, I .will read 
 
 the newspaper. 
 I am going to Paris this year, 
 
 to see the exhibition. 
 So am I. So is my brother. 
 
 It is necessary that you should 
 
 go with him. 
 
 So must you. So must she. 
 He has never been in France, 
 I cannot believe him. 
 Neither can we. 
 Neither can his master. 
 
 Acabo de escribirle una 
 
 carta. 
 No la he mandado al correo 
 
 todavia. 
 
 Mi hermana acababa de salir. 
 Acababan de decirselo cuando 
 
 Vd. llego. 
 
 <; No lo recuerda Vd. ? 
 No hay nada mejor que un-a 
 
 buena memoria. 
 <; Cual es su parecer ? 
 Nos parece que no es verdad. 
 t A quiense parece aquelnino ? 
 Estoy seguro-de que no lo se. 
 No se a quien se parece. 
 Meparezcomuchoami madre. 
 Me parece que tenemos bas- 
 
 tante. 
 <; No nos dijeron Yds. que 
 
 (ella) no tenia nada ? 
 Al contrario, esta muy res- 
 
 friada. 
 
 Su respuesta me hizo reir. 
 Si dice Vd. eso, hara reir a su 
 
 profesor. 
 Mientras esta ffcera, leere el 
 
 diario. 
 Yoy a Paris este ano, para 
 
 ver la exposici6n. 
 Yo ^tambien. Mi hermano 
 
 tambien. 
 Es menester que Vd. vaya 
 
 con el. 
 
 Vd. tambien. Ella tambien. 
 Nunca ha estado en Francia. 
 No puedo creerle. 
 Nosotros tampoco. 
 Su aino tampoco. 
 
22 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Have you seen the key of my 
 
 grammar ? 
 It is better always to work 
 
 without a key. 
 Do you remember the name 
 
 of this flower ? 
 I should very much like a 
 
 watch like yours. [left. 
 We shall have enough meat 
 I have only one shilling left. 
 They only had ten shillings 
 
 left. 
 
 What is your income ? 
 My income is two hundred 
 
 pounds. 
 He asked your permission 
 
 before taking the knife. 
 I cannot promise to bring 
 
 the things to-night. 
 I will try to persuade him to 
 
 come. 
 
 Is there anything on this page 
 
 which you cannot understand? 
 
 What is the name of the 
 
 bridge we are going over ? 
 It is dangerous to cross the 
 
 street. 
 What are you going to do this 
 
 afternoon ? 
 I must first finish my work, 
 
 and then I shall see how 
 
 much time I have left. 
 I do not agree with you. 
 When is this newspaper pub- 
 lished ? 
 
 It coaxes out twice a week. 
 They are . publifthed_pnce a 
 
 month. 
 
 I Ha visto Vd. la clave de mi 
 
 gramatica ? 
 Es mejor trabajar siempre sin 
 
 clave. 
 <j Se acuerda Vd. del nombre 
 
 de esta flor ? 
 De buena gana quisiera un 
 
 reloj como el de Vd. 
 Nos quedara bastante carne. 
 Solo me queda un chelin. 
 Solo les quedaban diez 
 
 chelines. 
 
 <; Cuanto tiene Vd. de renta ? 
 Tengo doscientas libraa de 
 
 renta. 
 Le pidi6 permiso antes de 
 
 tomar el cuchillo. 
 No puedo prometer que traere 
 
 las cosas esta noche. 
 Procurare persuadirle de que 
 
 venga. 
 I Hay algo en esta pagina que 
 
 Vd. no pueda comprender ? 
 <: Como se llama el puente que 
 
 cruzamos ? 
 Es peligroso cruzar la calle. 
 
 ; Que va .Vd. a hacer esta 
 
 tarde? 
 Debo acabar mi trabajo pri- 
 
 mero, y entonces vere 
 
 cuanto tiempo me queda. 
 No convengo con Vd. 
 ^Cuando se publica este 
 
 peri6dico ? 
 
 Sale dos veces por semana. 
 Salen una vez por mes. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 What did you do during your 
 
 holidays ? 
 Everyone denies having 
 
 broken it. 
 Have you .any change about 
 
 you ? 
 
 The man who served me for- 
 got to give me the change. 
 You should not have come 
 
 away without it. 
 Bo you like Madrid ? 
 He is now employed in a 
 
 foreign firm. 
 Please answer me when I ask 
 
 you. 
 At what time <lo you leave 
 
 your office ? 
 How long ago did that 
 
 happen ? 
 Do you find Spanish difficult? 
 
 No, I think it is a very easy 
 language, but it wants 
 practice, like everything 
 else. 
 
 He cannot prove what he 
 said just now. 
 
 Will you translate this sen- 
 tence for me ? 
 
 I do not know how this word 
 is pronounced. 
 
 We are going to begin ; are 
 you ready ? 
 
 I shall be ready in half an hour. 
 
 Do you know the number of 
 his house ? 
 
 What is the news ? 
 
 I do not know any news. 
 
 <;Que hizo Vd. durante BUS 
 
 vacaciones ? 
 Todo el mundo niega haberlo 
 
 roto. 
 <j Tiene Vd. cambio encima ? 
 
 El tendero que me ha servido 
 
 haolvidado darme el cambio. 
 
 Vd. no debia (or debiera) fiaber 
 
 salido sin el (or sin recibirlo). 
 I Le gusta a Vd. Madrid 1 ^ 
 Esta ahora colocado en una 
 
 casa extranjera. 
 SIrvase contestarme cuandd 
 
 le pregunto. 
 ; A que hora sale Vd. de su 
 
 oficina ? 
 <; Cuanto tiempo hace que^ 
 
 sucedio eso ? 
 <; Encuentra Vd. dif icil el 
 
 espaiiol ? 
 No, creo que es mr idioma 
 
 muy facil, pero se necesita 
 
 practica, como en todo lo 
 
 demas. 
 No puede probar lo que acaba 
 
 de decir 
 <;Quiere Vd. tradueir esta 
 
 f rase por mi ? 
 No se como se pronuncia esta 
 
 palabra. 
 Vamos & empezar ; estan 
 
 Vds. listos ? 
 
 Estare listo en media hora. 
 I Sabe Vd. el niimero de WL 
 
 casa ? 
 
 ,; Que hay de nuevo ? 
 No se nada de nuevo. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 I cannot agree with you. 
 We shall come back sgpn. 
 I do not want tjiem to accom- 
 pany me this tkne. 
 They were talking among 
 
 themselves. 
 Do it again. 
 He does notfwant to eopy the 
 
 letters again. 
 Look for it carefully. 
 I tried to find it, but I could 
 
 not see it anywhere. 
 He has gone to dress himself. 
 They cannot be long in arriving. 
 Do not be long before coming 
 
 back. 
 
 Do not believe it. 
 T have let him keep all the 
 
 documents. 
 Will you allow me to read 
 
 his answer ? 
 -This house is the one I like 
 
 best. 
 Tell me what they are going 
 
 to do. 
 We shall not be abl to take 
 
 all these parcels with us. 
 Which paragraph do you 
 
 mean f 
 
 How difficult, this v is ! 
 How carefully he is doing 
 
 the svork ! 
 
 How lovely these, flowers are ! 
 They are a present from my 
 
 cousin. 
 
 We shall have a fine day to-day. 
 The country need* fine 
 
 weather. 
 
 No puedo convenir con Vd. 
 
 Volveremos pronto. 
 
 No quiero que me acompanen 
 
 esta vez. 
 Hablaban entre si. 
 
 Vuelva Vd. a hacerlo. 
 
 No quiere volver a copiar las 
 
 cartas. 
 
 Biisquelo cuidadosamente. 
 Procure hallarlo, pero no pude. 
 
 verlo en ninguna parte. 
 Ha ido a vestirse. 
 No pueden tardar en llegar. 
 No tarde Vd. en volver. 
 
 No lo crea Vd. 
 
 Le he dejado guardar todos 
 
 los documentos. . 
 <? Quiere Vd. dejarme leer su 
 
 respuesta ? 
 Esta casa es la que me gusta 
 
 mas. 
 Digame lo que van a hacer. 
 
 No podremos llevar todos 
 estos paquetes con nosotros. 
 
 <; Cual parraf o quiere Vd. 
 decir ? 
 
 I Que dif icil es esto ! 
 
 I Que cuidadosamente estar 
 haciendo el trabajo ! 
 
 I Que hermosas son estas flores j 
 
 Son regalo de mi primo. 
 
 Tendremos hoy un buen dia. 
 El campo necesita buen 
 tiempo. 
 
USEFUL COtfVfiBSATIOHAL 
 
 Is it going to rain ?. 
 
 I think not. 
 
 We are sure it is. 
 
 They are never punctual. 
 
 Be as punctual as you pos- 
 sibly can. 
 
 Such a beautiful thing is not 
 made for nothing. 
 
 He would n ot dare to deny that. 
 
 How do you dare to speak 
 so? 
 
 He asked my permission be- 
 fore going out. 
 
 They arrived an hour later. 
 
 Why did you call us for such 
 a trifling thing ? 
 
 We have never seen this kind 
 of machine. 
 
 He let us do what we liked. 
 
 Why do you not take off 
 
 your hat ? 
 When* I saw the others had 
 
 gone away, I went too. 
 
 We shall be there within half 
 
 an. hour. 
 At first sight, it seemed to be 
 
 impossible. 
 We must not show it to them 
 
 yet. 
 Is it true that you have 
 
 bought another bicycle ? 
 They wanted more money to 
 
 buy the jewels. 
 He spoke in a whisper, but I 
 
 heard all that he said. 
 Sit down by my side.. 
 
 I Esta para Hover ? 
 
 Creo que no. 
 
 Estamos leguros de que si. 
 
 Nunca son puntuales. 
 
 Sea Vd. tan puntual como le 
 
 sea posible. 
 Una cosa tan hermosa no se 
 
 hace de balde (or por nada). 
 No se atreveria a negar eeo. 
 <; Como se atreve Vd. a hablar 
 
 asi? 
 Me pidio permiso antes de 
 
 salir. 
 
 Llegaron una hora* despues. 
 i Por que nos llamo Vd. para 
 
 una cosa tan frivola ? 
 No hemos visto nunca esta 
 
 clase de maquina. 
 Nos dejo hacerlo que qui- 
 
 simos. 
 I Por que no se quita Vd. el 
 
 sombrero ? 
 Cuando vi que los otros se 
 
 habian ido, yo me fui 
 
 tambien. 
 
 Estaremos alii dentro de me- 
 dia hora. 
 A primera vista, parecia ser 
 
 imposible. 
 No debemos mostrarselo to- 
 
 davia. 
 I Es verdad que ha comprado 
 
 Vd. otra bicicleta ? 
 Necesitaban mas dinero para 
 
 comprar las joyas. 
 Hablo en voz baja, pero 
 
 oi todo lo que dijo. 
 Sientese Vd. a mi lado. 
 
26 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 There will not be much diffi- 
 culty in finding out his 
 address. 
 
 To tell the truth, I forgot to 
 ask for the bill. 
 
 Which of these bookshave you 
 read? This one, or that one? 
 
 Take care what you are doing. 
 
 Take care, or you will fall. 
 
 I would do it for you with 
 pleasure, if I had time. 
 
 We want to ask you some- 
 thing. 
 
 Did' you see what they were 
 doing ? 
 
 Did you not say I was to copy 
 and send off the letters ? 
 
 It is neither good for you, 
 nor for me. 
 
 He acted under my advice. 
 
 She died the next morning. 
 
 Look on the next page. 
 
 He refused to help me, al- 
 though I asked him to. 
 
 Did you not tell me that you 
 were satisfied ? 
 
 I^advise you not to say any- 
 thing about it. 
 
 The house is too small for 
 us. 
 
 The greater part of the houses 
 in this town are built of 
 wood. 
 
 I shall not wait, as they did 
 not say when they would 
 be back. 
 
 I shall come, unless the 
 weather is^very bad. 
 
 No habra mucha dificultad en 
 hallar sus senas. 
 
 En verdad, olvide pedir la 
 
 cuenta, 
 <j Cual de estos libros ha leido 
 
 Yd. ? este 6 ese ? 
 Tenga cuidado con lo que hace. 
 Tenga cuidado, 6 se caera. 
 Lo haria por Vd. con gusto. 
 
 si tuviera tiempo. 
 Deseamos preguntarle algo. 
 
 I Ha visto Vd. lo que hacian ? 
 
 No dijo Vd. que yo debiai 
 
 copiar y mandar las cartas ? 
 No es bueno para Vd., ni 
 
 para mi. 
 
 El obro bajo mi consejo. 
 Murio a la maiiana siguiente.' 
 Mire Vd. la pagina siguiente. 
 Rehuso ayudarme, aunque se 
 
 lo pedi. 
 <; No me han dicho Vds. que 
 
 estaban satisfechos ? 
 Le aconsejo a Vd. que no diga 
 
 nada de ello. 
 La casa es demasiado pequena 
 
 para nosotros. 
 La mayor parte de las casas 
 
 de esta ciudad son de 
 
 madera. 
 No esperare, pues no dijeron 
 
 cuando volverian. 
 
 Vendre, a menol que haga 
 muy m$l tiempo. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTElCCIg". 
 
 27 
 
 Do not go away until it leaves 
 
 off raining. 
 See whether my umbrella is 
 
 behind the door. 
 Put the wine and the fruit on 
 
 the table. 
 The child has thrown its toys 
 
 under the table. 
 Throw it out of window. 
 Go on with your work ; there 
 
 is still a great deal to be 
 
 done. 
 Jt rained a great deal here 
 
 yesterday. 
 The weather will soon get 
 
 warmer. 
 
 That is not the way to do it. 
 "We shall come as soon as 
 
 we have put our papers 
 
 straight. 
 L The servant has disarranged 
 
 them. 
 
 He has hardly done anything. 
 It is not worth my while to 
 
 buy another one. 
 I hope to see you again to- 
 morrow morning. 
 You do not look well^ 
 Are you in a hurry ? 
 I am not very busy to-day. 
 We gave him all that we 
 
 had. 
 We did what we could to 
 
 persuade them. 
 Nothing we could say to him 
 
 convinced him. 
 This room is twenty feet long, 
 
 and ten broad. 
 
 No so vaya Vd. hasta que cese 
 
 de Hover. 
 Mire Vd. si mi paraguas esta 
 
 d'etras de la puerta. 
 Ponga Vd, el vino y la fruta 
 
 encima de la mesa. 
 El nino ha tirado sus jugue- 
 
 tes ciebajo de la mesa, 
 Tirelo Vd. por la ventana. 
 Siga Vd. con su trabajo; 
 
 todavia hay mucho ^ qu* 
 
 hacer. 
 Ayer llovio mucho aqui. 
 
 Pronto hara mas calor. 
 
 Ese no es el modo de hacerlo. 
 Vendremos luego que haya- 
 
 mos arreglado nuestros 
 
 papeles. 
 La criada los ha desarreglado. 
 
 Apenas ha hecho algo 
 
 No vale la pena de que' 
 
 compre otro. 
 Espero volverle a ver manana 
 
 por la manana. 
 Vd. no tiene buena cara. , 
 ^ Tiene Vd. prisa ? 
 No estoy muy ocupado hoy. 
 Le dimos todo lo qiie tenia- 
 
 mos. 
 Hicimos cuanto pudimos para- 
 
 persuadirles. 
 Nada de lo que podiamos de- 
 
 cirle le convencia. 
 Este cuario tiene veinte pies 
 
 de largo, y diez de ancho. 
 
28 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 How high is this house ? 
 
 I am tired of listening to him. 
 
 How do you generally go to 
 
 your office ? 
 Sometimes by rail, and some" 
 
 times by omnibus. 
 Which is the quickest way ? 
 There is not much difference. 
 He does not know how the 
 
 word is spelt. 
 When are you going to take 
 
 your holidays ? 
 I shall leave England in a 
 
 few days. 
 What do you think of the 
 
 weather we have had dur- 
 ing the last fortnight ? 
 1 cannot promise to lend you 
 
 both songs, 
 The gentleman who called 
 
 here wanted to know why 
 
 you had not sent the things 
 
 he ordered. 
 They used to live here some 
 
 years ago. 
 Let us go on the other side of 
 
 the street. 
 Which is the nearest way 
 
 (to go) to the river ? 
 They would not be satisfied. 
 
 if we did what they ask. 
 What are the four seasons of 
 
 the year called in Spanish ? 
 
 They are as follow : Spring, 
 Summer, Autumn, and 
 Winter. 
 
 He could not do it, even if 
 he wanted to. 
 
 i Que altura tiene estacasa ? 
 Estoy cansado de escucharle. 
 I Como va Vd. generalmente 
 
 a su oficina ? 
 A veces por el ferro-carril, y 
 
 a veces por el omnibus. 
 <; Cual es el caminomas corto ? 
 No hay mucha diferencia. 
 No sabe como se deletrea la 
 
 palabra. 
 <? Cuando tendra Vd. sus 
 
 vacaciones ? 
 Dentro de algunos diassaldre 
 
 de Inglaterra. 
 I Que piensa Vd. del tiempo 
 
 que tenemos desde hace 
 
 quince dias r 
 No puedo prometer prestarle 
 
 ambas canciones. 
 El caballero que vino aqut 
 
 queria saber por que no! 
 
 habia Vd. enviado los arti- 
 
 culos que pidio. 
 Vivian aqui hace algunos 
 
 an os. 
 Vamos por el otro lado de la 
 
 calle. 
 i Cual es el camino mas corto 
 
 para ir al rio ? 
 No estarian satisfechos, si hi- 
 
 cieramos lo que piden. 
 I Como se llaman en espariol 
 
 las cuatro estaciones del afio? 
 Son las siguientes: Prima- 
 
 vera, Verano, . Otoiio, e 
 
 Invierno. 
 No podria fiacerlo, aunque 
 
 quisiera. 
 
.USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 29 
 
 I have not had much oppor- 
 tunity of speaking Spanish 
 since I came back to 
 England. 
 
 How long were you in South 
 America ? 
 
 I was there nearly six months. 
 
 You ought to speak Spanish 
 fairly well. 
 
 Excuse me for keeping you 
 waiting so long. 
 
 They went home without 
 asking leave. 
 
 Have you heard what hap- 
 pened last night ? 
 
 As you were not there, we 
 went away at once. 
 
 Would you advise me to 
 accept the money ? 
 
 Write and tell them not to 
 come. 
 
 He came after I- Jiad 
 started. 
 
 I am glad you are better. 
 
 I wonder (=who knows) 
 
 what they Tvill bring. 
 Did anybody call to see me 
 
 while I was out ? 
 ,A gentleman enquired for 
 
 you, but he woqid not tell 
 
 me his name. 
 Tell me what you want, and I 
 
 will give it to you if I can. 
 I was very much surprised 
 
 when you told me that. 
 He never pays what he owes 
 Give me some more apples, 
 
 if there are any. 
 
 No he tenido mucha opor- 
 
 tunidad de hablar es- 
 
 panol desde que volvi a 
 
 Inglaterra. 
 <j Cuanto tiempo estuvo Vd. 
 
 en Sud America ? 
 Estuve alii casi seis meses. 
 Vd. debe hablar espanol bas- 
 
 tante bien. 
 Dispenseme Vd. que le haya 
 
 hecho aguardar tan to tiempo. 
 Se fueron a casa sin pedir 
 
 licencia. 
 I Ha oido Vd. lo que paso 
 
 anoche ? 
 Como Vd. no estaba ^lli, nos 
 
 f uimos al instante. 
 <? Me aconsejaria Vd. * qne 
 
 acepte el dinero ? 
 Escribales para decirles que 
 
 no vengan. 
 Vino despues que yo habia 
 
 partido. 
 Me alegro de que Vd. 6e halle 
 
 mejor. 
 <; Quien sabe lo que traeran ? 
 
 I Vino alguien a verme mien- 
 
 tras estaba f uera ? 
 Un caballero pregunt6 por 
 
 Vd., pero no quiso decirme 
 
 su nombre. 
 Digame lo que necesita Vd., 
 
 y se lo dare si puedo. 
 Me sorprendi mucho cuando 
 
 Vd. me dijo eso. 
 Nunca paga lo que debe. 
 Deme Vd. mas manzaiias, sj 
 
 las hay. 
 
30 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 I slept nearly all day. 
 
 You must have been very 
 
 tired. 
 Do not go out at the same 
 
 time as the other clerk. 
 Do not sell it for Jess than 
 
 twelve shillings and six- 
 pence. 
 I very much doubt whether 
 
 they will give me so much 
 
 for this ring. 
 
 The fire has not gone out yet. 
 This word is not spelt cor- 
 rectly. 
 
 Whose turn is it ? 
 It was not my turn. 
 They have just reached home. 
 Whom has he married ? 
 She is going to marry her 
 
 cousin. 
 It is not worth more thsftTf 
 
 five pesetas. 
 How much have you paid for 
 
 this? 
 I will pay you as soon as I 
 
 possibly can. 
 "Jake it upstairs at once. 
 Did you go thereon horseback? 
 No ; we all went on foot. 
 They have gone by coach. 
 Everyone said ati the time 
 
 that it was impossible. 
 Now it appears to be easy 
 
 enough. 
 When will the performance 
 
 take place ? 
 You should try to speak 
 
 Spanish oftener. 
 
 Dormi casi todo el dia, 
 
 Vd. debe haber estado muy 
 
 cansado. 
 No saiga Vd a la misma hora 
 
 que el otro depend iente. 
 No lo venda Vd. por menos 
 
 de doce chelines y seis 
 
 peniques. 
 Dudo mucho que me den 
 
 tan to por esta sortija. 
 
 [todavia. 
 
 El fuego no se ha apagado 
 Esta palabra no esta bien 
 
 deletreada. 
 I A quien le toca ? 
 No me tocaba a mi. 
 Acaban de llegar a casa. 
 I Con quien se ha casado ? 
 Ella se va a casar con su 
 
 primo. 
 No vale mas de cinco pesetas. 
 
 I Cuanto ha pagado Vd. por 
 
 esto? 
 Le pagare a Vd. tan pronto 
 
 como me sea posible. 
 Llevelo arriba al instante. 
 i Fue Vd. alii a caballo ? 
 No ; todos f uimos a pie. 
 Han ido en coche. 
 Todo el mundo dijo entonces 
 
 que era imposible. 
 Ahora parece ser bastante 
 
 facil. 
 t Cuando se celebrara la f un- 
 
 cion ? 
 Vd. debia procurar hablar 
 
 espaiiol mas amenudo. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 31 
 
 They could not agree among 
 
 themselves. 
 How long has your brother 
 
 been in Spain ? 
 Where is he going to next ? 
 He is going to Italy, but he 
 
 will not stay there long. 
 Read the letter to me again. 
 We were very sorry not to 
 
 find them at home. 
 It may be so, but I very 
 
 much doubt it. 
 It was raining very hard when 
 
 we went out. 
 It thundered a great deal last 
 
 night. 
 
 Did it lighten yesterday ? 
 Perhaps it will snow to-morrow. 
 Did it hail much this 
 
 morning ? 
 It is freezing hard. 
 I think it will thaw to- 
 morrow. 
 We do not believe what she 
 
 has just told us. 
 I have not enough paper to 
 
 finish my lesson 
 Unfortunately, you did not 
 
 know it in time. 
 It is not very long since it 
 
 happened. 
 How long did you stay in 
 
 Parte ? 
 This bridge is very old ; it is 
 
 hardly safe. 
 There will not be any difficulty 
 
 in finding another one. 
 Tell me if I may keep it. 
 
 No podian convenir entre si. 
 
 i Cuanto tiempo hace que su 
 
 hermano esta en Espana ? 
 ,; Adonde va luego ? 
 Va a Italia, pero no se que- 
 
 dara alii mucho tiempo. 
 Vuelva Vd. a leerme la carta. 
 Sentimos mucho no hallarlos 
 
 en casa. 
 Puede ser que si, pero lo dudo 
 
 mucho. 
 Llovia muy fuerte c'uando 
 
 salimos. 
 Anoche trono mucho. 
 
 I Relampagueo ayer ? 
 
 Quizas nevara ibanana. 
 
 I Ha granizado mucho esta 
 
 manana ? 
 
 Esta helando muchisimo. 
 Creo que deshelara manana. 
 
 No creemos lo que acaba de 
 
 decirnos. 
 No tengo.bastante papel para 
 
 acabar mi leccion, 
 Por desgracia, Vd. no lo supo 
 
 a tiempo. 
 No hace mucho tiempo que 
 
 sucedio. 
 i Cuanto tiempo se quedo Vd. 
 
 en Paris ? 
 Este puente es muy viejo ; 
 
 apenas esta seguro* 
 No habra ninguna dificultad 
 
 en hallar otro. 
 Digame si puedo guardarlo. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Do not trouble yourself about 
 
 that. 
 How soon shall we arrive at 
 
 the house ? 
 I would not pay so much 
 
 for that picture. 
 * I called on you yesterday, 
 
 but you were out. 
 Drink out of this cup ; there 
 
 is no other. 
 Whose umbrella did you 
 
 borrow ? 
 Is this dog yours, or your 
 
 brother's ? 
 
 Did you go to town on foot ? 
 No, we went by rail. 
 My -train is nearly always 
 i late. 
 I thought the weather would 
 
 change. 
 
 How cold it is to-day ! 
 She has got a head-ache. 
 This child had the tooth-ache 
 
 last week. 
 Do not fail to come by half 
 
 past seven. 
 
 I have sent for a porter. 
 Go and fetch me a cab. 
 I shall leave here to-morrow 
 
 morning. 
 It is very dusty. 
 \ There was not much mud. 
 Can you speak any foreign 
 
 language ? 
 This word is not. pronounced 
 
 as it is spelt. 
 How much does the account 
 
 come to ? 
 
 No se moleste Vd. por eso. 
 
 i En cuautotiempollegaremos 
 
 a la casa ? 
 No queria pagar tanto por 
 
 ese cuadro. 
 Fui a verle ayer, pero Vd. 
 
 estaba f uera. 
 Beba de esta taza ; no 'hay 
 
 otra. 
 I A quien hapedido Vd. pres- 
 
 tado el paraguas ? 
 Es este perro suyo, 6 de su 
 
 hermano ? 
 
 I Fue Vd. a pie a la ciudad ? 
 No ; f uimos por el f errocarril. 
 Mi tren esta casi siempre 
 
 retrasado. 
 Crei que cambiaria el tiempo. 
 
 i Que frio hace hoy ! 
 Ella tiene dolor de cabeza. 
 Este nino tenia dolor de 
 
 muelas la semana pasada. 
 No deje Vd. de venir a eso de 
 
 las siete y media. 
 He enviado por un mozo. 
 Vaya a buscarme un coche. 
 Saldre de aqui manana por 
 
 la manana. 
 Hay mucho polvo. 
 No habia mucho barro. 
 i Sabe Vd. hablar algun 
 
 idioma extranjero ? 
 Esta palabra no se pronuncia 
 
 corao se deletrea. 
 i A cuanto llega la coenta ? 
 
COKYBRSATIONAL SENTENCE!. 
 
 I hare not seen him for six 
 
 months. 
 
 He is going tocall on his lawyer. 
 You do not visit us very fre- 
 quently. 
 There isn't room for so many 
 
 people in this room. 
 Why did you let him go away 
 
 before having done all the 
 
 work ? 
 He was carrying) the box on 
 
 his head. 
 Where does this road lead 
 
 to? 
 
 You ought to take more care. 
 Is this all the wine there is 
 
 left? 
 I hope you are not making a 
 
 mistake. 
 
 When were these houses built? 
 Show the man your ticket as 
 
 you go in. 
 We lost our train, although it 
 
 was ten minutes late. 
 The weather was very fine 
 
 when the children went out. 
 Afterwards it rained a great 
 
 deal. 
 I should like to speak to you 
 
 before I go away. 
 I never feel well in cold 
 
 weather. 
 
 Why do you not sit down ? 
 We are in a great hurry. 
 It is impossible for me to 
 
 leave business earlier. 
 My father's business compels 
 
 him to travel a great deal. 
 
 Hace seis meses que no le he 
 
 visto. 
 
 Va a ver a su abogado. 
 Vd. no nos visita muy 
 
 frecuentemente. 
 No cabe tanta gente en este 
 
 cuarto. 
 I For que le ha dejado Vd. 
 
 irse antes de haber hecho 
 
 todo el trabajo ? 
 Llevaba la caja sobre la ca- 
 
 beza. 
 <; Adonde va (or conduce) este 
 
 camiiio ? 
 
 Vd. debieratenermascuidado. 
 t Es este todo el vino que 
 
 queda ? 
 
 Espero que Vd. no se equivoca. 
 [casas ? 
 
 <; Cuando se edificaron estas 
 Muestre Vd. al hombre su 
 
 billete al entrar. 
 Perdimos nuestro tren, aunque 
 
 iba diez minutos retrasado. 
 Hacia muy buen tiempo 
 
 cuando salieron los ninos. 
 Despues llovio mucho. 
 
 Quisiera hablarle a Vd. antes 
 
 de irme. 
 Nunca me siento bien en 
 
 tiempo frio. 
 
 For que no se sientan Vds. ? 
 Estamos muy deprisa. 
 Me es imposible salir de los 
 
 negocios mas temprano. 
 Lasocupacionesdemi padre le 
 
 obligan a viajar muchisimo. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 He was in London at the end 
 
 of last month. 
 "When you came back, it was 
 
 very late. 
 How is this phrase translated 
 
 into Spanish ? 
 I am afraid it will rain during 
 
 the day. 
 ' Have you at last been able to 
 
 find his address ? 
 I thought you knew French 
 
 and German. 
 I can read books written in 
 
 Spanish and Italian. 
 He cannot speak either of the 
 
 languages. 
 We do not know whether they 
 
 will take our advice. 
 I cannot understand why it 
 
 is not here. 
 It is a pity you cannot Stay 
 
 any longer. 
 
 What is the reason of that ? 
 This rule has several excep- 
 tions. 
 In my opinion, this chain is 
 
 $ie cheapest. 
 They will pay me the balance 
 
 next month. 
 The boys would not be quie^ 
 
 although I told them to. 
 ' Tell them again, and we will 
 
 see whether they obey you. 
 What is the price of a return 
 
 ticket ? [to travel ? 
 
 By what class are you going 
 I generally travel third class. 
 
 Estuvo en Londres a fines del 
 
 mes pasado. 
 Cuando Vd. volvio, era muy 
 
 tarde. 
 I Como se traduce esta frase 
 
 en espanol ? 
 Temo que llueva durante el 
 
 dia. 
 I Ha podido Vd. al fin hallar 
 
 su direccion (or sus senas) ? 
 Orel que Vd. sabia frances y 
 
 aleman. 
 Puedo leer libros escritos en 
 
 espanol e italiano. 
 No sabe hablar ninguna de 
 
 ambas lenguas. 
 No sabernos si tomaran nues- 
 
 tro consejo. 
 No puedo comprender por que 
 
 no esta aqui. 
 Es una lastima que Vd. no 
 
 pueda quedar^e mas tiempo. 
 I Cual es el motivo de eso ? 
 Esta regla tiene varias excep- 
 
 ciones. 
 En mi opinion, esta cadena 
 
 es la mas barata. 
 Me pagaran el saldo .el mes 
 
 que vjene. 
 Los ninos no querian callarse, 
 
 aunque se lo mande. 
 Vuelva Vd. a mandarselo, y 
 
 veremos si le obedecen. 
 <; Cual es el precio del billete 
 
 de ida y vuelta ? 
 
 <j En que clase" va Vd. a viajar ? 
 Por lo general, viajo en ter- 
 cera clase. 
 
, USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 35 
 
 It is cheaper, and the carria- 
 ges are very comfortable. 
 
 We should like you to wait 
 for us. 
 
 Be careful, or else you will 
 hurt yourself. 
 
 He seemed very much sur- 
 prised at seeing you here. 
 
 Let me carry it for you. 
 
 If you move a little this way, 
 there will be room for 
 everybody. 
 
 iThe servant stole this money 
 from his master. 
 
 Those bottles are full of wine. 
 
 Put the glass here, near this 
 one. 
 
 Are there any friends of yours 
 
 here this evening ? 
 What do you think of the 
 
 climate of tnis country ? 
 Sit round the fire. 
 Have you ever been in Spain ? 
 
 I should very much like to 
 
 spend a few weeks there. 
 Tell the man to come in. 
 That is the house we 1 used 
 
 to live in. 
 
 What is it they are making ? 
 This is the smallest watch I 
 
 have seen. 
 Show me the clock you bought 
 
 a few days ago. 
 It only cost me thirty shillings. 
 Do- not tell them so on any 
 
 account. 
 He knew nothing about it. 
 
 Es mas barato, y los coches 
 
 son muy comodos. 
 Quisieramos que Vd. nos 
 
 esperase. 
 Tenga Vd. cuidado, 6 se 
 
 lastimara. 
 Parecio sorprenderse mucho 
 
 al verle aqui. 
 
 Dejeme que lo lleve por Vd. 
 Si Vd. se corre un poco hacia 
 
 aqui, habra lugar para 
 
 todos. 
 El criado robo este dinero a 
 
 su amo. [vino. 
 
 Esas botellas estan llenas de 
 Ponga Vd. el vaso aqui, cerca 
 
 de este. 
 4 Hay aqui esta noche algunos 
 
 amigos de Vd. ? 
 I Que piensa Vd. del clima de 
 
 este pais ? [f uego. 
 
 Sientense Vds. al rededor del 
 ,; Ha estado Vd. alguna vez en 
 
 Espana? 
 Me gustaria mucho pasar al- 
 
 gunas semanas alii. 
 Diga Vd. al hombre que entre. 
 Esa es la casa en que yiviamos. 
 
 <j Que es lo que estan hacienda ? 
 
 Este es el reloj mas pequeno 
 que he visto. 
 
 Muestreme el reloj que corn- 
 pro Vd. hace algunos dias. 
 
 Solo me costo treinta chelines. 
 
 No se lo diga Vd. de ningun 
 modto. 
 
 No sabia nada de tllo. 
 
3G 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 She has gone to the shop her- 
 self, on account of the 
 
 mistake in the bill. 
 Come nearer the table ; I should 
 
 like to show you something. 
 I usually work an hour a day 
 
 at home. [price. 
 
 They have gone to enquire the 
 This way. That way. 
 Which way ? 
 You all seem very tired. 
 My companion is tired too. 
 
 [tea? 
 
 Will you take another cup of 
 If you lose this piece of paper, 
 
 we will give you another. 
 My brother has obtained a 
 
 good situation. [to ?, 
 
 Where is the coachman going 
 Where do you come from ? 
 We saw him last Sunday 
 
 morning. .[week. 
 
 She will come next Tuesday 
 I do not suppose they will be 
 
 back until next month. 
 The concert will take place 
 
 to-morrow evening. 
 Did you hear from your father 
 
 yesterday morning ? 
 He will go home again early 
 
 next week. 
 Where were your cousins last 
 
 week ? 
 He never comes before the 
 
 end of the month. 
 Who is there ? It is I. 
 It is not he. Is it they ? 
 It is you. Is it not your uncle? 
 
 Ella misma ha ido a la tienda, 
 
 a causa del error en la 
 
 cuenta. 
 Acerquense Vds. mas a la mesa; 
 
 quisiera mostrarles algo. 
 Acostumbro a trabajar una hora 
 
 en casa cada dia. [cio. 
 
 Han ido a inf ormarse del pre- 
 Por aqui. For alii. 
 i For donde ? [cansados; 
 Vds. parecen estar todos muy 
 Mi companero tambien esta 
 
 cunsado. [de te ? 
 
 <? Quiere Vd. tomar otra taza 
 Si pierde Vd. este pedazo de 
 
 papel, le daremos otro. 
 Mi herniano ha logrado una 
 
 buena colocacion. 
 I Adonde .va -el cochero ? 
 ^ De donde viene Vd. ? 
 Le vimos el' Domingo pasado 
 
 por la manana. 
 Vendra del martes en ocho dias. 
 No supongo que vuelvan hasta 
 
 el mes que viene. 
 El concierto se celebrara 
 
 'manana por la noche.. 
 (jRecibio Vd.noticias de su pa- 
 dre ayer por la manana ? 
 Volvera a casa a primeros de 
 
 la semana que viene. 
 <; Donde estaban susprimos de 
 
 Vd. la semana pasada ? 
 Nunca viene hasta fines del 
 
 mes. 
 
 I Quien esta ahl ? Soy yo. 
 No es el. ^ Son ellos ? 
 Es Vd. i No es su tio de Vd. ? 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Do not put on your gloves. 
 Ask what , the messenger 
 
 wants. 
 Ask whether you may .keep it. 
 
 It is not time to leave off yet. 
 Tell the boy to make haste. 
 
 He would not make haste. 
 It hardly ever snows here, 
 
 even in the severest winters. 
 Are you sleepy ? 
 I am very sleepy. 
 The sun is not shining: 
 The moon was shining last 
 
 night. 
 
 It is not daylight. It is night. 
 The sun is getting Is the 
 
 moon rising ? [drawer. 
 
 Nothing is missing from this 
 
 How much a yard is this silk ? 
 
 [walk ? 
 
 Are you disposed to go for a 
 They haye gone to dress 
 
 themselves, 
 He will change his opinion 
 
 when he hears that. 
 I am very much obliged to you. 
 On returning home, I found 
 
 the letter. [certain. 
 
 He told me he knew it for 
 Do not pay any attention to 
 
 that. 
 It is necessary to pay attention 
 
 to what the teacher says. 
 The children would not dare 
 
 to go into the garden with* 
 
 out permission. 
 
 No se ponga Vd. los guantes. 
 Pregunte Vd. lo que quiere el 
 
 mensajero. 
 Pregunte si *lo puede Vd. 
 
 guardar. 
 
 No es tiempo de cesar aiin. 
 Diga Vd. al chico que se 
 
 apresure. 
 
 No queria apresurarse. 
 Apenas nieva aqui, aiin en los 
 
 inviernos mas crudos. 
 i Tiene Vd. sueiio ? 
 Tengo mucho sueiio. 
 No hace sol. 
 Hacia luna anoche. 
 
 No es de dia. Es de noche. 
 El sol se pone. <; Sale la 
 
 luna ? 
 
 Nada falta de este cajon. 
 <; Cuanto vale una yarda de 
 
 esta seda ? [paseo ? 
 
 ; Tiene Vd. ganas de dar uu 
 Han ido a vestirse. 
 
 Al saber eso, cambiara de 
 
 opinion. 
 
 Le estoy muy agradecido. 
 Al volver a casa, encontre la 
 
 carta. 
 
 Me dijo que lo sabia de cierto. 
 No haga Vd. caso de eso. 
 
 Es necesario prestar atencion 
 a lo que dice el maestro. 
 
 Los niiios no se atreverian a 
 entrar en el jardin Bin 
 permisO. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 I beg you will show it to us 
 
 at once. 
 I cannot pronounce very well 
 
 yet. [takes. 
 
 I am afraid of making mis- 
 He will probably reply by 
 
 re turn, of post. 
 He is in the habit of coming 
 
 once a week. 
 I used to be in the habit of 
 
 meeting him every day. 
 Come upstairs. Come down- 
 stairs. 
 
 Please walk upstairs. 
 Mr. N lives next door. 
 Do not fail to be there at 
 
 noon. 
 I seldom used to go to bed 
 
 before midnight. 
 Ask this man where the en- 
 trance is. 
 We could not find the way 
 
 out for some time. 
 To-morrow is a holiday. 
 Did you enjoy yourself 
 
 during your holidays ? 
 You must not stay where you 
 
 are. [umbrella ? 
 
 Don't you know your own 
 I am not quite sure whether 
 
 it is mine, or not. 
 Have you given anything to 
 
 the waiter ? 
 I suppose that the concert 
 
 will soon be over. 
 I suppose so too. 
 Whose turn is it to pay to-day ? 
 It is yours. Mine, I think. 
 
 Le ruego que nos lo muestre 
 
 al instante. 
 No puedo pronunciar muy 
 
 bien todavia. 
 Temo equivocarme. 
 Probablemente contestara a 
 
 vuelta de correo. 
 Acostumbra a venir una vez 
 
 por semana. 
 Acostumbraba a encontrarle 
 
 cada dia. 
 Suba Vd.Baje V4. 
 
 Sirvase Vd. subir. [del lado. 
 El Senor N vive en la casa 
 No falte Vd. alii al mediodia. 
 
 Rara vez me acostaba antes de 
 
 media noche. 
 Pregunte Vd. a este hombre 
 
 donde esta la entrada. 
 No pudimos hallar la salida 
 
 por algiin tiempo. 
 Manana es fiesta. 
 i Se divirtio Vd. durante.sus 
 
 vacaciones ?. 
 Vd. no debe quedarse donde 
 
 esta. [raguas ? 
 
 i No conoce Vd. supropio pa- 
 No estoy bien seguro si ed 
 
 mio, 6 no. 
 I Ha dado Vdr algo al mozo ? 
 
 Supongo que pronto acabara 
 
 el concierto. 
 Tambien lo stipongo yo. 
 <; A quien le toca pagar hoy ? 
 Le toca a Vd. A mi f me parece. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 39 
 
 It is not your brother's turn. 
 We are greatly obliged to you 
 
 for this visit. 
 Let me know as soon as you 
 
 can. [trouble. 
 
 It caused us a great deal of 
 I assure you it is impossible. 
 
 I shall fall asleep directly I 
 
 lie down. 
 You had better go to bed 
 
 soon. 
 Tell the children not to go 
 
 away yet. [the river. 
 
 We walked along the bank of 
 Your coat is hanging behind 
 
 the door. 
 Go on with your work. 
 
 It is not a question of money, 
 
 but of time. 
 There must be some better 
 
 way of arranging it. 
 There is no doubt about that. 
 Repeat these words after the 
 
 teacher. [vice. 
 
 He would not follow my ad- 
 Everybody was asking after 
 
 you. 
 The child has fallen asleep, in 
 
 spite of the noise. 
 Have you cut your finger ? 
 He only writes to us once a 
 
 month* 
 What did she say about that 
 
 when she last wrote ? 
 Please pass me a clean plate. 
 
 Nole toca a su hermano. 
 Le agradecemos a Yd* mucho 
 
 esta visita. 
 Hagamelo Vd. saber tan pronto 
 
 como pueida. 
 Nos molesto mucho. 
 Le aseguro a Yd. que es im- 
 
 posible. 
 Me dormire en cuanto me 
 
 acueste. 
 Es mejor que se vaya Vd. a 
 
 la cama pronto. 
 Diga Yd. a los ninos que no se 
 
 vayan aiin. 
 
 Andabamos a lo largo del rio. 
 Su levita esta colgada detras 
 
 de la puerta. 
 
 Siga Yd. con su trabajo (or 
 
 Continue Yd. su trabajo). 
 No es cuestion de dinero, sino 
 
 de tiempo. 
 Debe haber algiin otro modo 
 
 mejor de arreglarlo. 
 No hay duda alguna sobre eso. 
 Repita Yd. estas palabrafl des- 
 
 pues del maestro. 
 No queria seguir mi consejo. 
 Todo el mundo preguntaba' 
 
 por Yd. 
 El niiio se ha dormido, a pe- 
 
 sar del ruido. 
 
 I Se ha cortado Yd. el dedo ? 
 Solo nos escribe una vez al 
 
 mes. 
 <;Quedijo ella sobre eso cuando 
 
 escribio la ultima vez ? 
 Sirvase Yd. pasarme u^i placo 
 
 limpio. 
 
40 
 
 USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 It is no use to say that. 
 
 See whether you can borrow 
 
 another copy of the book. 
 We have sent him to borrow 
 
 a dictionary. 
 There is no need to make so 
 
 much haste. 
 I was very much surprised 
 
 that you did not come. 
 They were looking attentively 
 
 at each other. 
 
 After all, it does not matter. 
 I cannot see the necessity for 
 
 doing it again. 
 Will you change this cheque 
 
 for me ? 
 I will take half in gold, and 
 
 the other half in silver. 
 Thank you. Don't mention it. 
 It is some time since he wrote 
 
 to me. 
 
 We saw them not long ago. 
 What is there to eat ? 
 There is nothing ready now. 
 We are in a great hurry. 
 We shall arrive about 2 o'clock. 
 He is the same age as his 
 
 cousin. [house. 
 
 I saw him as he passed by the 
 However difficult it may seem, 
 
 you must try to do it. 
 The more I give him, the 
 
 more he wants. 
 The English, as well as the 
 
 foreign letters* have been 
 
 posted. 
 How much is the postage of a 
 
 letter from here to Spain ? 
 
 No sirve de nada decir eso. 
 Vea Vd. si puede tomar.preb- 
 
 tado otro ejemplar del libro. 
 Le hemos mandado a pedir 
 
 prestado un diccionario. 
 No hay razon para darse tanta 
 
 prisa. 
 Extrane mucho que Vd. no 
 
 viniese. 
 Se miraban atentamente unos 
 
 a otros. 
 
 Al fin y al cabo, no importa. 
 No puedo ver la necesidad 
 
 de hacerlo de nuevo. 
 <: Quiere Vd. cambiarme este 
 
 cheque ? 
 Tomare la mitad en oro, y la 
 
 otra mitad en plata. 
 Gracias. No hay de que. 
 Hace algun tiempo que me 
 
 escribio. [tiempo. 
 
 Los vimos no hace mucho 
 (i Que hay para comer ? 
 No hay nada listo ahora. 
 Estamos muy de prisa. 
 Llegaremos a eso de la dos. 
 Tiene la misma edad que su 
 
 primo. 
 
 Lo vi cuando paso por la casa. 
 Por dificil que parezca, Vd, 
 
 debe probar a hacerlo. 
 Cuanto mas le doy, mas 
 
 quiere. 
 
 Tanto las cartas inglesas como ^ 
 las extranjeras se nan. 
 echado al correo. 
 <i Cuanto vale el f ranqueo de 
 una carta de aqui a Espana ? 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 41 
 
 With regard to the assertion 
 
 he made, we must see 
 
 whether it can be proved. 
 I tied the parcel tightly, so 
 
 that the things should not 
 
 come out. 
 Notwithstanding this, the 
 
 string broke. [gave him. 
 He always spent what we 
 You shall be served in five 
 
 minutes. [ing so fast. 
 
 There is no pleasure in walk- 
 The table is almost in the 
 
 middle of the room. 
 The boy deserves a prize. 
 There are many reasons 
 \ which would take a long 
 
 time to explain. 
 They explained everything to 
 
 me, so that I might know 
 
 what I had to say. 
 Perhaps they will start during 
 
 the week. [accident. 
 
 According to him, it was an 
 Can I do anything else for 
 
 you? 
 
 He did it for [instead of] you. 
 My business will prevent me 
 
 from coming very often. 
 The result is not generally 
 
 known yet. [soon. 
 
 I hope you will come again 
 
 The numbers in this street 
 
 from twenty upwards are 
 
 on the opposite side. 
 We expect her every moment. 
 
 They must be somewhere. 
 
 Respecto a la asercion que 
 
 hizo, hemos de ver si puede 
 
 probarse. 
 Ate el paquete fuertemente, 
 
 para que las cosas no se 
 
 saliesen. 
 A pesar de esto, el bramante 
 
 se rompio. [dabamos. 
 
 Siempre gastaba lo que le 
 Seran Vds. servidos dentro de 
 
 cinco minutos. [deprisa. 
 No hay placer en andar tan 
 La mesa esta casi en el centro 
 
 del cuarto. [mio. 
 
 El muchacho merece un pre- 
 Hay muchas razones que 
 
 serian muy largas de ex- 
 
 plicar. 
 Me lo explicaron todo, a fin 
 
 de que pudiese saber lo que 
 
 tenia que decir. 
 Tal vez partiran durante la 
 
 semana. 
 
 Segiin el, f ue una desgracia. 
 <? Puedo hacer algo mas por 
 
 Vd.? 
 
 Lo hizo por Vd. 
 Mis negocios me impediran 
 
 venir muy amenudo. 
 El resultado no se conoce 
 
 bien todavia. 
 
 Espero que volvera Vd. pronto. 
 Los niimeros de esta calle del 
 
 veinte para arriba estan en 
 
 el otro lado. 
 La esperamos de un momento 
 
 a otro. 
 Deben estar en alguna parte. 
 
USEFUL CONVERSATIONAL SENTENCES. 
 
 There is a great deal of dif- 
 ference between the mean- 
 ings of the words. 
 
 They are very polite to every- 
 body, [he went out. 
 
 Tt is not five minutes since 
 
 These cups and saucers are 
 partly clean, land partly 
 dirty. 
 
 ,It is a very bad habit of mine. 
 
 You ought lo learn this list of 
 words by heart. 
 
 I generally see him on Satur- 
 days. [Sundays. 
 
 He only wears this coat on 
 
 Can you count from one to a 
 hundred without looking 
 at the book ? 
 
 Put it somewhere else. 
 
 The mistake is really very 
 serious. 
 
 H was here hot long ago. 
 
 It often happens that no one 
 comes the whole day. 
 
 Did you stay k>ng in South 
 America? 
 
 I was there for three years. 
 
 It is good practice to read 
 aloud every day. 
 
 I do not understand Spanish 
 well enough to do it. 
 
 Try to express your thoughts 
 in the simplest way. 
 
 [phrases. 
 
 Avoid long and -complicated 
 
 Choose sentences which can 
 be translated into Spanish 
 for word. 
 
 Hay mucha diferencia entre 
 
 los significados de las 
 
 palabras. 
 Son muy corteses con todo 
 
 el mundo. [salio. 
 
 No hace cinco minutos que 
 Estas tazas y platillos estaii 
 
 medio limpios y medio 
 
 sucios. [mala. 
 
 Es una costumbre mia muy 
 Deberia Vd. aprender de me- 
 
 moria esta lista de palabras. 
 Generalmente le veo los 
 
 Sabados. [Domingos. 
 
 olo lleva esta chaqueta' loa 
 I Puede Vd. contar de uno a 
 
 ciento sin mirar el libro ? 
 
 Pongalo Vd. en otra parte. 
 
 El error es en verdad muy 
 serio. -[tiempo. 
 
 Estuvo aqui no hace mucho 
 
 Sucede amenudo que nadie 
 .viene en todo el dia. 
 
 I Estuvo Vd. mucho tiempo en 
 la America del Sur ? 
 
 Estuve alii durante tres anos. 
 
 Es buona practica leer en alta 
 voz todos los dias. 
 
 No comprendo el espanol bas- 
 tante bien para hacerlo. 
 
 Trate Vd. de expresar sus pen- 
 samientos de la manera 
 massencilla. [complicadas. 
 
 Evite Vd. las f rases largas y 
 
 Escoja Vd sentencias que 
 puedan traducirse al es- 
 panol palabra por palabra. 
 
USEFUL COMMERCIAL SENTENCES. 43 
 
 SPANISH COMMERCIAL CORRESPONDENCE. 
 
 The Date at the head of letters is written thus : 
 LondreSj 12 (de) Abril de 1912. Madrid, 1* (de) Agosto de 1911, etc. 
 
 (See * SPANISH SIMPLIFIED," paragraph 90.) 
 
 The date is followed by the name of the person or firm to whom the 
 letter is addressed. 
 
 In the full address on the envelope, the number of the house is put 
 after the name of the street, thus -^Calle de Quevedo, (num.y 15. 
 
 The following are the ordinary methods of commencing letters : 
 
 SIK, DEAR SIR 
 GENTLEMEN, DEAR SIRS 
 MADAM, DEAR MAD AM 
 
 Muy sefior mio 
 Muy seftores mios 
 Muy sefior a mia 
 
 [The three foregoing are the ordinary business forms of address.] 
 
 Sir (writing to a person of title or 
 
 distinction) 
 Sir (to a superior holding a high 
 
 official position) 
 
 Madam, Dear Madam (to a friend) 
 Dear Henry, Peter, etc. 
 My Dear Sister 
 My Dear Friends 
 
 Excelentmmo senor (abbreviated to 
 
 Exmo. Sr.) 
 llustrisimo seworfabbrevd.to lllmo. 
 
 Senor) ; QiMuy ilustre sefior 
 Apreciable 8enor(it )a 
 Querido Enrique, Pedro, etc. 
 Querida hermana mia 
 Queridos amigos mios 
 
 There are various forms for concluding letters, all of them effu- 
 sively polite, and so long and cumbrous that the initial letter only of many 
 of the words is employed. The following ending, which is equivalent to 
 "YOUBS TBULY" or "YOUBS FAITHFULLY," is the best to employ 
 in ordinary business correspondence, 
 
 Soy de Yd. atto S. S. 
 
 Q. B. S. M. 
 
 (This is an abbreviation of Soy de Vd. atento seguro servidor, que 
 2>esa sus manoe : literally, " I am your attentive faithful servant, who kisses 
 your hands." Soy and atto. must be changed to somos and attos., and 
 yd. to Vds., when necessary. 
 
 If aflmo. (abbreviation of afectisimo, most loving) is substituted for 
 atento, or y afectisimo inserted after atento, in the preceding phrase, it 
 becomes somewhat less formal, and corresponds to "YOUBS SINCEBELY." 
 
 The equivalent to " YOTTBS BESPECTFULLY " is : 
 
 Su respetuoso servidor (written in full) Q. B. S. M. 
 
 In writing to a superior, when in English "YOUB OBEDIENT 
 SEBVANT " would commonly be employed, the usual ending (written in 
 full) is Dios guarde a Vd. muchos anos : literally, God preserve your 
 worship many years. In writing to a friend, the usual endifag is S. S. 
 y amigo (your servant su servidor *nd friend). For an ordinary letter, 
 not strictly a formal business one, to a person with whom the writer has 
 a slight acquaintance only, su atento tervidor is sufficient. 
 
44 
 
 USEFUL COMMERCIAL SENTENCES. 
 
 COMMERCIAL PHRASES. 
 
 I am in receipt of your letter 
 
 of the 14th inst. ; of the 
 
 1st ult. 
 Referring to your favor of the 
 
 9th ult, . . . 
 In reply, I have the pleasure 
 
 to inform you ... 
 Some of the things were 
 
 rather damaged. 
 Nearly all the goods suffered 
 
 serious damage in transit, 
 [return of post. 
 Send it to me without fail by 
 I hope to receive it by the 
 
 7th of next month, at the 
 
 latest. 
 I am greatly in want of the 
 
 first three items on the 
 
 list. 
 The delay in sending off the 
 
 goods causes me consider- 
 able inconvenience. 
 In your last letter, you pro- 
 mised to allow us a discount 
 
 of 5 per cent. 
 You have only taken off 2^ 
 
 per cent. 
 Our prices are in all cases 
 
 strictly nett. 
 Your consignment arrived 
 
 safely ^yesterday. 
 I will send you a cheque as 
 "soon as I receive the goods. 
 We shall be obliged by your 
 
 remitting the balance. 
 Kindly send us your price 
 
 list, conditions, etc. 
 
 Obra en mi poder su carta del 
 
 14 del corriente ; del 1 
 
 del proximo pasado (p.p do ). 
 Respecto a su apreciable 
 
 (apble.) del 9 del mes pasado. 
 En contestation tengo el gusto 
 
 de manifestable . . . 
 Algunos de los articulos es- 
 
 taban algo deteriorados. 
 Casi todos los generos su- 
 
 frieron gran averia en su 
 
 transporte. [de correo. 
 Enviemelo Vd. sinf altaa vuelta 
 Espero recibirlo para el *7 
 
 del mes que viene, a mas 
 
 tardar. 
 Me hacen mucha f alta los tres 
 
 primeros articulos de la 
 
 lista. 
 El retraso en el despacho de 
 
 las mercancias meperjudica 
 
 mucho. 
 En su ultima, prometio Vd. 
 
 concedernos un descuento 
 
 de 5 por ciento. 
 Solo nos ha descontado Vd. 
 
 un dos y medio por ciento. 
 Nuestros precios se entienden 
 
 fiiempre estrictamentenetos. 
 Su consignation llego ayer 
 
 sin novedad. 
 Leremitirea Vd. un cheque en 
 
 cuanto reciba los generos. 
 Le agradeceremos nos remita 
 
 el importe del saldo. 
 Sirvase Vd.mandarnossu lista 
 
 de precios. condiciones, etc. 
 
USEFUL COMMERCIAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Please let me know your 
 lowest terms for cash on 
 delivery ; on receipt of the 
 goods. 
 
 How much will the packing, 
 carriage, and customs duty 
 amount to ? 
 
 Do your best to see that the 
 cost of carriage is as low as 
 possible. 
 
 By. book post by parcel post 
 in a registered letter. 
 
 You may draw on us at three 
 months. 
 
 The bill is payable at sight. 
 
 Kindly send us a cheque at 
 your earliest convenience 
 for the amount due. 
 
 [overdue. 
 
 This account is six months 
 
 We cannot wait any longer ; 
 be .good enough therefore 
 to forward the amount 
 without further delay. 
 
 We shall be greatly obliged 
 by your sending us a remit- 
 tance by an early post. 
 
 I have several large accounts 
 to meet next week. 
 
 [dishonored. 
 
 The bill has been returned 
 
 I have already applied to you 
 several times for a settle- 
 ment. 
 
 I shall have to take legal pro- 
 ceedings to recover the 
 amount due. 
 
 YTe think it right to inform you 
 at once. 
 
 Sirvase Vd. indicarme BUB 
 condiciones mas favorables 
 para pago al contado ; al 
 recibo de los generos. 
 
 I A cuanto subiran los gastos 
 de embalaje, transporte, y 
 derechos de aduana ? 
 
 Haga Vd. lo posible para que 
 los gastos de transporte sean 
 lo mas reducido posible. 
 
 Como impresos en paquete 
 postal en carta certificada. 
 
 Puede Vd. girar a nuestro 
 cargo a tres ipeses. 
 
 La letra es pagadera a la *vfsta. 
 
 Tengan Vds. la bondad de re- 
 mitirnos lo antes posible 
 un cheque por la cantidad 
 vencida. [meses. 
 
 Esta cuenta vencio hace seis 
 
 JJo podemos esperar mas ; por 
 lo tanto le suplicamos que 
 nos remita el importe cuanto 
 antes. 
 
 Le* agradeceremos infinito nos 
 remita el importe por uno 
 de los primeros correos. 
 
 Tengo que satisfacer algunas 
 cuentas de consideration la 
 semana proxirna. [acogida. 
 
 La letra ha sido devuelta mal 
 
 Ya me he dirigido a Vd. en 
 dif erentes ocasiones para la 
 liquidation. 
 
 Tendre que recurrir a la ley 
 para la satisfaction , de la * 
 deuda. 
 
 Creemos cpnvenientecomuni- 
 carselo a Vd. al inoment/o. 
 
46 
 
 USEFUL COMMERCIAL SENTENCES. 
 
 Herewith we send you sam- 
 pler of both qualities. 
 
 Your esteemed order is duly 
 to hand. 
 
 Your instructions shall receive 
 our best attention. 
 
 No invoice was enclosed with 
 the goods. 
 
 The boxes were nearly all 
 broken, and their contents 
 much damaged by water. 
 
 The goods -were very care- 
 lessly packed. 
 
 We charge two per cent, to 
 cover the cost of packing. 
 
 "There is always great delay 
 in the execution of these 
 orders. [prompt reply . . . 
 
 Awaiting the favor of? a 
 
 Belying on your promise, I 
 undertook to deliver the 
 goods by Monday next. 
 
 [should pay the duty, 
 
 It was arranged that you 
 
 You promised to send off the 
 first part of the order a 
 week ago. 
 
 Let me know at once when I 
 may depend on receiving 
 the remainder of the order. 
 
 Mr. . . .* of Cadiz, has kindly 
 favored me with your ad- 
 dress. 
 
 For references you can apply 
 to the firm of ... 
 
 If you take a gross at a time 
 we will allow you an extra 
 2^ per cent, discbunt. 
 
 Con la presente le enviamos 
 
 muestras de ambas calidades* 
 
 Su estimado pedido ha llegado 
 
 debidamente a nuestro poder. 
 
 Sus instrucciones seran ob- 
 
 jeto de nuestra mayor 
 
 atencion. 
 No acompanaba a los generos 
 
 f actura alguna. 
 Casi todas las cajas estaban 
 
 rotas, y sus contenidos muy 
 
 averiados por el agua. 
 Las mercancias se embalaron, 
 
 con muy poco cuidado. 
 Cargamos dos por ciento para 
 
 cubrir los gastos de embalaje* 
 Siempre hay gran retraso en 
 
 la ejecucion de estos pedi- 
 
 dos. [pronta contestacion. 
 Esperando verme honrado con, 
 Confiando en su promesa, me 
 
 comprometi a entregar los 
 
 generos para el lunes. 
 
 proximo. [los derechos. 
 Se convino que Vd. pagaria 
 Hace una semana, prometio 
 
 Vd. despachar la primera 
 
 parte del pedido. 
 Indiqueme Ycl al momenta 
 
 cuando puedo coniar con el 
 
 resto del pedido. 
 El Sr. ..., de Cadiz, ha tenido- 
 
 la bondad de favorecerme 
 
 con sus senas de Vd. 
 Para informes pueden Vds* 
 
 dirigirse a la casa de . . . 
 Si toma Vd. una gruesa de una 
 
 vcz, le concederemos un des- 
 
 cuento extra de^^porciwito. 
 
USEFUL CGlffMERCIiL SENTENCES. 
 
 47 
 
 The terms quoted do not in- 
 clude carriage. 
 
 Our agent informs us that the 
 firm has been established 
 many years. 
 
 It is reported that the bank 
 has suspended payment. 
 
 If the tea finds a ready sale, 
 I shall give you larger 
 orders afterwards. 
 
 There is no demand for such 
 articles in this market. 
 
 We have recently opened a 
 branch in Barcelona. 
 
 This is only a trial order. 
 
 I have been appointed sole 
 agent for the sale of this 
 machine in Spain. 
 
 You had better carry it for- 
 ward to the new account. 
 
 We are quite willing to open 
 a monthly or quarterly ac- 
 count, if you prefer it. 
 
 [last invoice. 
 
 There was a mistake in the 
 
 The bill of lading has not yet 
 come to hand. 
 
 The cheque was payable to 
 bearer, not to order. 
 
 I cannot make any reduction 
 in the quoted prices, except 
 the usual discount for cash 
 at a month. 
 
 I unfortunately have none of 
 the common sorts in stock 
 at the present time. 
 
 We only supply the trade, 
 and do no retail busi- 
 ness. 
 
 En las condiciones indicadas 
 no se incluye el transports 
 
 Nuestro agente nos informa 
 que la casa cuenta ya inu- 
 chos anos de existencia. 
 
 Se dice que el banco ha sus- 
 pendido pagos. 
 
 Si el te halla buena salida, en 
 lo futuro les hare pedidoa 
 de mayor consideration. 
 
 No hay salida para tales arti- 
 culos en este mercado. 
 
 Acabamos de abrir una sucursal 
 en Barcelona. [ensayo. 
 
 Este pedido no es mas que un, 
 
 He sido nombrado agente ex- 
 clusivo para la venta de 
 esta maquina en Espana* 
 
 Seria mas conveniente que lo 
 pasara Vd. a cuenta nueva. 
 
 Estamos dispuestos a abrir 
 una cuenta mensual 6 
 trimestral, si asi lo prefiere 
 Vd. [fdctursu 
 
 Hubo un error en la ultima. 
 
 El conocimiento no se ha re* 
 cibido todavia. 
 
 El cheque era pagadero al 
 portador, no a la orden. 
 
 No puedoconcederninguna re- 
 duction en los precios coti- 
 zados, excepto el descuento- 
 corriente por pago mensual. 
 
 For desgracia, hoy no tengo 
 en deposito ninguna de las 
 calidades comunes. 
 
 Solo surtimos al comercio f 
 y no efectuamos ninguna. 
 transaction al por menor. 
 
48 
 
 USEFUL COMMERCIAL SENTENCES. 
 
 We have debited you with 
 the balance. 
 
 Kindly credit me with the 
 value of the returned goods. 
 
 We send you a draft payable 
 one month after date, in 
 settlement of last month's 
 account. 
 
 Please endorse it, and honor 
 it on maturity. 
 
 Ship the bales by the next 1 
 steamer. 
 
 Do not send the boxes by 
 rail, but by steamer ; the 
 latter means of transit 
 comes cheaper. 
 
 In accordance with your re- 
 quest, I ericlose a duplicate 
 invoice. 
 
 I trust you will excuse the 
 delay. 
 
 Do you deliver free on board 
 in London ? 
 
 We are thinking of chartering 
 an entire steamer, and must 
 calculate how much cheaper 
 the expenses of freight 
 would be than if we shipped 
 in small consignments. 
 
 The shares of this company 
 
 are not to be recommended 
 
 just now. 
 It would be wise to wait until 
 
 the publication of the yearly 
 
 balance sheet. 
 
 Our commission is 5 per 
 cent., if you put the neces- 
 sary sums at our disposal. 
 
 Le hemos adeudado en cuenta 
 
 el saldo. 
 
 Sirvase Vd. abonarme en eta. el 
 
 valor de los generos de vueltos. 
 
 Le remitimos una letra paga- 
 
 dera a treinta dias fecha, 
 
 para liquidar la cuenta del 
 
 mes pasado. 
 Sirvase Vd. endosarla, y aco- 
 
 gerla a su vencimiento. 
 Embarque Vd. las balas por 
 
 el proximo vapor. 
 No mande Vd. las cajas por 
 
 f erro-carril, sino por vapor ; 
 
 este medio de transporte 
 
 resulta mas barato. 
 De conf ormidad con su deseo. 
 
 adjunto una factura dupli- 
 
 cada. 
 Espero se servira Vd. dispen- 
 
 sar el retraso. 
 <j Hace Vd. la entrega franco 
 
 a bordo en Londres ? 
 Estamos pensando en fletar 
 
 un vapor completo y hemos 
 
 de calcular cuanto mas 
 
 economico nos tesultaria el 
 
 precio del flete que cuando 
 
 embarcamos por pequenas 
 
 partidas 
 Las acciones de esta compania 
 
 no son muy recomendables 
 
 ahora. 
 'Seria prudenteaguardar hasta 
 
 que publiquen el balance 
 
 anual. 
 Nuestra comision es de 5 % si 
 
 Vds. ponen a nuestra disposi- 
 
 cion las sumas necesurias. 
 
KEY 
 
 TO THE 
 
 SPANISH 
 GRAMMAR 
 
 SIMPLIFIED 
 
 PHILADELPHIA 
 
 DAVID McKAY, Publisher 
 
 604-8 S. Washington Square 
 
SPECIAL NOTICE 
 
 To simplify the Irregular Verbs, we have omitted from 
 the Grammar the Tenses which need not be learnt if our 
 rules (pars. 52 and 117) on the formation of Tenses have 
 been mastered. These rules, which are original and copy- 
 right, enable the Student to form any other Tense correctly. 
 
[Key to Lesson I. 
 
 EXERCISE L 1. they (MASC.) have ; 2. have I ? 3. have 
 I not ? 4. she has not ; 5. have we (MASC.) ? 6. you (SING.) 
 have not ; 7. have they (FEM.) not ? 8. have you (PLUR.) ? 
 9. we (MASC.) have not. 
 
 10. ella tiene ; 11/7 no tienen ellos ? 12. <? tiene Vd. ? 
 
 13. yo no tengo ; 14. Yds. no tienen ; 15. <; no tengo yo ? 
 16. nosotros tenemos ; 17. <; no tienen Yds. ? 18. ella no tiene. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. padres ; 2. libros ; 3. nueces ; 4, 
 senores ; 5. lapices ; 6. plumas ; 7. ciudades ; 8. hombres ; 
 
 9. luces ; 10. tias ; 11. iglesias ; 12. leyes ; 13. sombreros. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. un hermano ; 2. una hermana ; 
 3. unos hermanos ; 4. unas hermanas ; 5. el hermano ; 6. los 
 hermanos ; 7. la hermana ; 8. las hermanas ; 9. las casas 5 
 
 10. el agua ; 11. un ala ; 12. lo hermoso ; 13. un padre ; 
 
 14. los libros ; 15. una pluma ; 16. el lapiz ; 17. la tinta ; 
 18. unos lapices ; 19. una aldea. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 1. I have not a book. 2. Has he. the 
 pens,? 3. We have a house. 4. You (PLUR.) have some 
 pens ; we. have some books. 
 
 5. Vd. tiene un hermano. 6. El pajaro tiene doa alas, 
 7. Vds. no tienen los libros. 8. <? No tiene el la tinta ? 9. La 
 madre tiene dos casas. 10. Yo no tengo una pluma, pero mi 
 amigo tiene unas plumas. 11. <; Tiene el la carta ?, 
 
 Key to Lesson II. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. del hombre ; 2. a un hombre ; 3. de la 
 iglesia ; 4. del agua del pantano ; 5. a un libro ; 6. de las 
 madres ; 7. a las piedras ; 8. de unas cartas ; 9. de las alas de 
 un pajaro ; 10. a unos libros ; 11. de unos pajaros ; 12. a una 
 casa ; 13. al libro ; 14. de la tinta ; 15. de los hermanos ; 
 16. de las alas de los pajaros ; 17. el libro del muchacho ; 
 18. el caballo de un soldado ; 19. los caballos del soldado. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 1. (Nosotros) homos escrito 
 unas cartas. .2.JVd.jio_ha visto las casas. 3 I No tenemos 
 
(nosotros) los sombreros ? 4. & Tiene la iglesia un altar ? 
 5. (Yo) he visto el altar de la iglesia. 6. Los reyes tienen los 
 cal^allos. 7 <j Quien ha tornado la tinta ? 8. El hombre 
 tiene un haeha. 9. El buque tiene un ancla. 10. Ha dado 
 el criado una silla al caballero ? 11. Yo* no tengo un sobre, 
 pero mi hermano tiene unos sobres. 12. Que han hecho 
 Vds. ? 13. Ha visto Vd. los jardines del rey ? 14. Los 
 hombres tienen unos caballos. 15. Por que no ha eserito 
 Vd. las cartas? 16. Un hombre ha hablado con el criado. 
 17. <; No tenemos (nosotros) un libro para la mujer ? 18. Si, 
 tenemos un libro y dos plumas. 19. (Nosotros). no hemos 
 visto la casa del hombre. 20. Las inuchachas no han tornado 
 las plumas. 21. Vd. tiene unas cartas. 22. Vd. no tiene los 
 libros. 23. El hermano de la muchacha no ha escritb 
 carta al caballero. 
 
 * This yo, being emphasized, cannot be omitted 
 
 Key to Lesson III. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1 mi jardin , 2. su tinta ; 3. su tinta ; 
 4. su tinta ; 5. nuestro vaso ; 6. nuestra aldea ; 7. mi tia ; 
 8. mis tias ; 9. su gato , 10. sus gatds ; 11. nuestros guantes ; 
 12: sus zapatos , 13. sus hermanas >, 14. sus hermanas ; 15. su 
 dinero ; 16. mi criado , 17. nuestras manos ; 18. sus ojos ; 
 19. su deseo ; 20. su deseo ; 21. sus nombres ; 22. su pluma 
 (de VoLf) ; 23. su libro (de Vd.) ; 24. su casa (de Vds.) ; 25. 
 sus manos (de Vd.) ; 26. sus manos (de Vds;) ; 27. No ha roto 
 BU pipa. 28. <; Han tornado los ninos los guantes de Vd. ? 
 29. J Ha tornado Vd. su dinero ? 
 
 EXERCISE II. -1. we are ; 2. they are not ; 3. am I ? 
 
 4. she is not ; 5. are we not ? 6. I am not ; 7. are you ? 
 8. you (PLUR.) are not. 
 
 9, i es ella ? 10. el no es ; 11. ? no son ellas ? 12. Vds. 
 son ; 13. i no es Vd. ? 14. <; somos nosotros ? 15. <j no soy yo ? 
 16. (yo) soy ; 17. ella no es ; 18. (yo) no soy. 
 
 f In a complete sentence, the de Vd., de Vds., is seldom required. 
 
5 
 
 ' EXERCISE III. 1. 1 am not ; 2. is he ? 3. are we not ? 
 
 4. you are not ; 5. are they ? 6. are you ? 7. you (PLUR.) are. 
 8. estamos ; 9. <; no esta Vd. ? 10. ellas no estan ; 11. 
 i estoy yo ? 12. Vds. estan ; 13. <; no. esta el ? 14. ella no 
 esta ; 15. ; estamos nosotros ? 16. Vd. no esta ; 17. no estoy ; 
 18. i esta Yd. ? 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 1. No somos obreros. 2. <? Esta Vd. listo ? 
 3. (Ellas) estin aqui. 4. <; Es Vd. soldado ? 5. No estoy 
 escuchancio. 6. <; Quien esta en la calle ? 7. Es muy laborioso,. 
 
 8. Soy inglesa. 9. No soy italiano. 10. Estamos hablando 
 con su primo. ll.<jNo son (ellos) principes ? 12. Somos 
 marineros. 13. (El) no esta escribiendo. 14. Es cartero* 
 15. No estamos fumando. 16. <j Es Vd. espaiiol ? 17. Son 
 mis tios. 18. Mi tia no esta aqui. 19. (Ella) no esta en casa. 
 20. Estamos aguardando. 21. Es profesor. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Niiestros amigos estan en el 
 jardin, buscando sus perros. 2. <? Es Vd. el tio de mi amigo ? 
 3. No, senor, no soy su tio, soy su padre. 4. Mi amigo esta 
 en la calle, fumando un cigarro. 5. <; Quien esta alii ? 6. <; Que 
 estan Vds. buscando ? 7, Estoy escribiendo una carta a su 
 padre (de Vd.). 8. Sus hijos (de Vd.) estan creciendo mucho. 
 
 9. El hermanq de mi amigo no es laborioso. 10. <; Tiene Vd. 
 un criado ? 11. Nuestra hermana es habil. 12. Su madre (de 
 Vd.) esta en el jardin. 13. Mis zapatos estan en el suelo, cerca 
 de la silla- 14. Vds. no son soldados. 15. Mi libro'esta en 
 el cajon. 16. <; Esta fumando su herniano de Vd. ? 17. <; A 
 quien ha escrito Vd. una carta ? 18. No estamos estudiando 
 nuestras lecciones. 
 
 Key to Lesson IV. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. bueno (MASC. SING.), buena (FEM. 
 SING.), buenos (MASC. PLUR.), buenas (FEM. PLUR.) ; 2. 
 caro (M. S.), cara (F. s.), caros (M. P.), caras (F. P.) ; 3. capaz, 
 capaz, capaces, capace? , 4. aplicado*, aplicada, aplicados, 
 aplicadas ; or laborioso, laboriosa, laboriosos, laboriosas \ 
 
$ 
 
 5. f ranees, f rancesa, franceses, f rancesas ; 6. facil, facil, faciles. 
 faciles ; * 7. barato, barata, baratos, batatas ; 8. seco, seca, 
 secos, secas ; 9. valiente, valiente, valientes, valientes ; 10. 
 frio, fria, frios, f rias ; 11. calido, calida, calidos, calidas ; 
 12. aleman, alemana, alemanes, alemaaas ; 13. dificil, dificil, 
 dificiles, dificiles ; 14. ingles, inglesa, ingleses, inglesas ; 
 15. pesado, pesada, pesados, pesadas ; 16. persa, persa, persas, 
 persas ; 17. un buen caballo ; 18. buenos caballos ; 19. tina 
 mala pluma ; 20. malas plumas ; 21. una leccion dificil ; 
 22.* lecciones dificiles. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 1. Sus amigos no son va- 
 lientes. 2. La modista francesa ha vendido un sombrero 
 barato. 3. Nuestras lecciones son muy faciles. 4. <? Tiene 
 Vd. un' buen criado ? 5. No, senor, mis criados no son 
 buenos. 6. He visto a un soldado valiente. 7. Tengo came 
 f ria. 8. Somos marineros ingleses. 9. <; For que no estan 
 Vds. estudiando sus lecciones ? 10. Las muchachas alemanas 
 son f elices. 11. i A quien ha dado Vd. sus libros ? 12. He 
 dado mis libros espanoles al primo de mi amigo. 13. Nues- 
 tra leccion es muy dificil. 14. ^ Como esta Vd. ? 15. Muy 
 bien, gracias; pero he estado enfermo. 16. Su (or la) 
 hermana de Vd. no esta enferma. 17. Sus tias (de Vds.) son 
 muy habiles. 18. Sus hermanos estan enfermos. 19. Su 
 amiga (de Vd.) es italiana. 20. No es italiana, es espafiola. 
 21. <j Qu6 ha hecho Vd. con mi libro ? 22. Est4 sobre la mesa. 
 
 Key to Lesson V. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. compro; 2. Vd. compra; 3. (el) 
 compra ; 4. compramos ; 5. Vds. compran ; 6. (ellos) 
 compran ; 7. (el) toma ; 8. hallamos ^ 9. hallo ; 10. (ellas) 
 toman; 11. Vd. halla;' 12. Vds. toman; 13. fuma; 14. 
 fuman ; 15. Vd. lleva ; 16. llevo ; 17. enviamos ; 18. Vds. 
 envian. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. bebo; 2. Vd. bebe; 3. (el) bebe; 
 4, babenios; 5. Vds. beben; 6. (ellos) beban; 7. cree; 
 
creemos ; 9. comen ; 10. como ; 11. Vd. aprende ; 12. Vds. 
 creen ; 13. aprende ; 14. poseo ; 15. poseen 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. recibo ; 2. Vd. recibe ; 3. (el) recibe ; 
 
 4. recibimos ; 5. Vds. reciben ; 6. (ellos) reciben ; 7. escribe ; 
 8. escribimos ; 9. Vd. surte ; 10. surto ; 11. divide ; 12. 
 dividimos ; 13. Vds. escriben ; 14. surtimos. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. -1. Vd. halla, Vd. no halla; 2. i hall a 
 Vd, ? 4 no halla Vd. ? 3. los hombres beben, los hombres no 
 beben ; 4. % beben los hombres ? <; no beben los hombres ? 
 
 5. descubrimos, no descubrimos ; 6. <j descubrimos (noso- 
 tros)? no descubrimos (nosotros) ? 7. recibo, no recibo ; 
 8. i recibo (yo) ? <; no recibo (yo) ? 9. la muchacha debe, la 
 muchacha no debe ; 10. & debe la muchacha ? <; no debe la 
 muchacha ? 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. <;Debe Vd. digero a mi 
 amigo ? 2. No debo dinero a su amigo. 3. El criado espafiol 
 llama a BU perro. 4. No fumamos cigarros. 5. El discipulo 
 aplicado aprende facilmente sus lecciones. 6. <; Que desea 
 BU madre (de Vd.) ? 7. i No trabajan (ellas) bien ? 8. <jQuiea 
 vive en la casa de su tia ? 9. Mis primes viven alii, pero mi 
 tio esta en Madrid. 10. El oficial bebe un vino delicioso. 
 11. Recibimos cartas de los tios de Vd. (or sus tios) cada dia 
 (better; 4 todos los dias '=' all the days.') 12. No deseo un 
 baston, porque tengo un paraguas. 13. Creemos que sus 
 'muestras estan en la tienda. 14. Cuanto dinero debemos ? 
 15. Creo que debemos cuatro chelines al tendero, y tres 
 (chelines) al criado. 16. Tal vez no fuma. 17. <; Quien 
 presta dinero a mi amigo ? 18. Yo presto amenudo dinero a 
 su amigo. 19. <; A que hora sale el tren para Londres ? 20. 
 Mi tren no sale todavia. 21. No temo el castigo ; no es muy 
 grande. 22. Los muchachos no tiran piedras. 23. Vd. no 
 bebe cerveza. 24. <: No comprende Vd. la leccion ? 25. 
 Comprendo las lecciones muy bien. 26. <( Comprenden 
 (ellos) su explicaci6n ? 27. 4 D6nde viven sus primos (de 
 Vd.) ? aS.Jtfi prima vive en Madrid, y yo (vivo) en Londi-ea, 
 
8 
 
 Key to Lesson VI. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. ese or aquel muchacho ; 2. estas 
 mujeres ; 3. esos or aquellos sobres ; 4. esta mesa ; 5. esa or 
 aquella iglesia ; 6. esas or aquellas calles ; 7. estos caballos ; 
 8. esta tinta ; 9. este gato ; 10* esos or aquellos cuadros ; 11. 
 ese or aquel pan ; 12. esta ciudad j 13. estos niimeros ; 14. esa 
 flenora ; 15. no estamos seguros de eso ; 16. no creo esto. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. fumando, fumado; 2. debiendo, 
 debido ; 3. viviendo, vivido ; 4. preguntando, preguntado ; 
 5. leyendo, leido ; 6. <? no ha tenido Vd. ? 7. no estoy 
 teniendo ; 8. siendo soldados ; 9. estando en el cuarto (or la 
 habitacion) ; 10. no habiendo escrito la carta ; 11. Ha 
 estado Vd. en Espaiia ? 12. Jtf o hemos sido marineros. 13. 
 (Ella) no esta leyendo. 14. <z Que esta (el) bebiendo ? 15. 
 <j Donde ha estado el hombre ? 16. i No son valientes los 
 eoldados ingleses ? 17. <? No esta hablando esta sefiora (or 
 no esta esta senora hablando*) ? 18. Mi tio no ha llegado. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 1. <; No ha leido Vd. esa carta ? 
 
 2. (j Por que no esta ese muchacho estudiando sus lecciones ?* 
 
 3. Esos criados han bebido una botella de buen vino, y cinco 
 (botellas) de cerveza alemana. 4. < Estan f umando cigarros ? 
 5. Habiendo leido el librp, lo enviare a mi hermano. 6. 
 <i Cuanda sale el buque ? 7. <J Cuanto dinero ha enviado 
 el comerciante a su banquero ? 8. <? No han aprendido los 
 discipulos estas lecciones ? 9. Estos sobres blancos son de mi 
 tio. 10. Esas senoras son mis sobrinas. 11. El profesor 
 espanol esta hablando ahora, 12. Estoy leyendo un periodico 
 frances. 13. Hemos estado en el campo. 14. Estas botellae 
 no estan llenas. 15. He sido carpintero. 16. <? Ha tenido Vd. 
 tiempo para leer esta carta ? 17. Ha olvifiado Vd. esto ? 18. 
 
 * As pointed out in par. 32 of the Grammar, the construction in such 
 sentences is usually optional, and is merely a question* of taste and euphony. 
 To avoid needless repetition, only one way is given in this Key ; but such 
 constructions as ^Por qu6 no esta estudiando sus lecciones ese 
 jnuchaclio ? are quite permissible., 
 
<? Estan esae seftorae buscando un coche ? 10. Oreo Yi 
 cso ? 20. No comprendo esto. 21. No cstando satisfecho 
 con el libro, lo v^ndere. 22. No es f eo aquel perro ? 
 
 Key to Lesson VII. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. <; cual caballero ? 2. <; cuales caba- 
 lleros ? 3. <; cual silla ? 4. <; cuales calles ? 5. <; que 
 nombre ? 6. <; cual zapato ? 7. <? que hombres ? 8. | que 
 ruido ! 9. <; cual tren ? 10. j que niebla ! 11. j que lastirna ! 
 12. << cual mujer ? 13. <; cuales dias ? 14. <? cuales lamparas ? 
 15. <;cual taza ? 16. \ que sombreros ! 17 De quien es este 
 cuchillo ? 18. <; De quien es esta tinta ? 19. ^ De quien son 
 amigas estas seiioras ? 20. <; De quien es esto ? 21. ; Que 
 muchachos tan holgazanes ! 22. \ Que error tan grande ! 23. 
 <; Cual es el precio de esto ? 24. <; Cual es el numero ? 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. ha comprado ; 2. <; ban comprado 
 (ellos) ? 3. no he comprado ; 4. <; no ha comprado Yd. ? 5. 
 ^ han hablado (ellas) ? G. la muchacha ha hablado ; 7. <; ha 
 escrito el medico ? 8. el comerciante no ha vendido ; 9. i no 
 han llcgado los buques ? 10. no he comido ; 11. no ha 
 enviado el tendero ? 12. Td. ha escrito ; 13. Yds. han visto ; 
 14. no han hallado (ellos) ? 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. Hemos visto a un general muy 
 celebre. 2. Han hallado Yds. a sus amigos ? 3. <; Tiene el 
 hermanos ? 4. He visto a aquel seiior en Madrid. 5. ,; Espera 
 Yd. a sus sobrinas hoy ? 6. No esperamos cartas. 7. Estamos 
 buscando nuestras llaves. 8. <; Esta .Yd. buscando a su 
 eobrino ? 9. No he visto hoy al rey. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. <: Ha hallado Yd. a mi 
 hermano en el jardin ? 2. Cual libro ha tenido Yd. ? 
 <? De quien es ese caballo ? 4. <: Que hombre no ama a BU" 
 madre ? 5. <; De quien es este paraguas ? 6. ,: Han visto 
 Yds. a los viajeros ingleses ? 7. ; Que reloj tan barato ha 
 comprado Yd. esta manana ? 8. El dependieute ha recibido 
 
10 
 
 ese dinero. 9. t Quien esta f umando en este cuarto ? 10. 
 ha enviado los generos a tiempo. 11. j Que leociones tan 
 faciles tiene Vd. ! 12. Para quien son estas cartas ? 13. 
 ; A quien ha prestado Vd. su cuchillo ? 14. <; Quienes son 
 estos hombres ? 15. Que gente hay en la casa ? 16. <: No ha 
 llamado Vd. a la criada ? 17. <; Cuales tazas ha roto (ella) ? 
 18. i En cual cuarto ha hallado Vd. la tinta roja ? 19. 1 Que 
 pluma tan mala es esta ! 20. <: Cnales desea Vd. ? 21. Cual 
 es el camino a la estacion ? 22. <; Cual es la causa de su 
 silencio ? 23. <j Cuales son sus planes ? 24. ; Que es eso ? 
 
 Key to Lesson VIII. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. Este baston no es mio. 2. <j Es esa casa 
 de* 41* ? 3. Estas cartas son nuestras. 4. Sus discipulos (de 
 Vd.) son aplicadop, y los mios son holgazanes. 5. Estos 
 lapices son de* ella*. 6. Nuestra amiga esta aqui, pero la de* 
 ella* no ha llegado todavia. 7. Esa Have es mia. 8. Nuestras 
 leccibnes son diticiles, pero las de* ellos* son muy faciles. 
 
 EXEECISE II. 1. mis mesas de roble y (las de) caoba ; 2. 
 querida madre mia (simpler y mi querida madre) ; 3. una tia 
 suya (clearer y una tia de el) ; 4. mis deseos, los suyos, y los de 
 ellos ; 5. Este es un trabajo suyo. 6. Es un dependiente mio. 
 7. <; Es de Vds. este jardin ? 8. Esas Haves no son de Vd., sou 
 mias. 9. i Es de Vd. este periodico ? 10. Son anngoa 
 nuestros (or nuestros amigos). 11. Ese no es error mio ; es c 
 ella. 12. Ni su tienda ni la de su vecino estan abiertas. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. we shall be ; 2. will he not have, ? 
 3. will you (PLUR.) speak ? 4. 1 shall not receive ; 5. you 
 will not drink ; 6. will she find ? 7. they will write. 
 
 8. tomare (yo) ? 9. Vd. no tendra ; 10. <? seran (ellos) t 
 11. no estaremos ; 12. dividira ; 13. Vd. no habra vendido j 
 14. fumaran 15. i habremos enviado ? 16. <j tendr6 (yo) ? 
 
 * Better than suya, suyos, suya. suyas. Such constructions as i &} 
 SXlva esa casa ? are correct grammatically ; but the meaning is clearer 
 li de 4l t de Vd., de ellos, etc, are employed* 
 
ir 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. El profesor ha corregido 
 'mis temas, pero no los de Vd. 2. <j D6nde estara Vd. 
 manana ? 3. Mi amigo sera medico. 4. No tendre bastarito 
 dinero. 5. Hablaremos a su padre de Vd. 6. <; Ouanto 
 recibira Vd. ? 7. Mi amigo ha vendido su casa, y la de su 
 hi jo ; vivira ahora en la ima. 8. Comprare una mesa y seis 
 sillas. 9. Ese error sera muy grave. 10. Romperan aquella 
 ventana. 11. No comprare esta casa. 12. Habre enviado sus 
 pedidos y los de sus vecinos. 13. Su hermana ha hallado sus 
 sortijas de oro y (las de) plata. 14. Aqui esta mi baston ; 
 d6nde esta el de Vd. 1^. 15. Hemos visto a nuestra madre, y 
 a la suya, pero no a la de ella. 1-6. Sera f alta de el, no de Vd. 
 
 17. i For que ha traido Vd. su paraguas, y no el mio ? 
 
 18. Guardaremos este reloj, y venderemos el otro. 
 
 Key to Lesson IX, 
 
 EXERCISE L 1. El cafe esta mas frio que el te. 2. Ese 
 hombre es mas f uerte que Vd. 3. Las manzanas no estan 
 mas maduras que las peras. 4. Esta agua no esta (or es, 
 according to meaning) mas fria que la ptra. 5. Londres es mas 
 grande que Paris. 6. <; No es la ciudad de Madrid mas 
 pequeiia que Paris ? 7. Esta cerveza es muy buena, pero el 
 Yino es mejor. 8. No recibire menos de cinco chelines.. 
 9. Esta casa es mas barata de lo que Vd. cree. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. 1 Es el mas holgazan de sus criados de 
 Vd. 2. Es muy dificil. 3. Ese cuadro es el mas hermoso 
 de la coleccion. 4. Esta agua es la mas clara. 5. Estas 
 ventanas son las mas pequeiias. 6. El error mas pequeno 
 tiene a veces consecuencias muy graves. 7. Nuestra casa es 
 la mas convenient^ 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. <> Ha recibido Vd. tanto dinero hoy 
 como ayer ? 2. Su hi jo de Vd. es tan habil como laborioso. 3. 
 Estas sillas son tan baratas como esas. 4. i Tiene Vd. tantas 
 pluma's como yo ? 5, Esta senora no es tan alta como Vd. 
 
12 
 
 6. Ha traido tantos regalos como ella. 7. No hemos couuprado 
 tantos muebles como Vd. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 1. vendi; 2. ^compraron (ellos) ? 3. 
 Yds. recibieron ; 4. <; no llego (ella) ? 5. no tuvieron ; 
 6. i estuvo (el) ? 7 <; temimos. (nosotros) ? 8. fume ; 9. no 
 hallamos ; 10. Vd. no fue" , 11. envio Vd. ? 12. <; no hube 
 (yo) ? 13. escribimos , 14. Vds. no hubieron aprendido ; 
 15, No estuvieron (elios) en el cuarto ? 
 
 Key to Lesson X. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. La casa que Vds. ban comprado es mas 
 conveniente que la mia. 2. <j Es este el capitan cuyo buque 
 Vd. ha visto ? 3. El seiior que hablo con los niiios es su tio. 
 4. No estamos seguros cuales guardara. 5. El muchacho a 
 quien liemos visto esta enfermo. 6. Ha olvidado Vd, el 
 nombre del caballero (or senor) con quien vivo? 7. Ha 
 leido la carta que recibi, lo que es una lastima. 8. El caballo 
 que he comprado no es muy f uerte. 9. He traido seis libros, 
 los cuales prestare esta tarde al hermano de Vd. 10. No, no 
 es este senor quien esta fumando. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. Let us drink [some] water. 2. Sell 
 your horse. 3, Do not let us wait. 4. Do not buy these 
 cigars. 5. Do not let us keep these samples. 6. Do not 
 smoke (PLUR.) yet t 7. Be in time. 8. Have pity I 9. Take 
 this chair. 
 
 10. Presto (Vd.)* suparaguasa miprimo. IL.Deje (Vd.)* 
 hablar al muchacho. 12. Comamos ahora. 13. Que esperen 
 (ellos). 14. Que compre el vestido. 15. Este (Vd.)* alii 
 esta tarde. 16. Envie (or mande) Vd. los paquetes a mi casa. 
 17. Tenga Vd. la bondad de aguardar un poco, 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Tome Vd. el paraguas que 
 
 jesta en el rincon. 2. No rompa Vd. los platos que compre 
 
 ayer. 3. No olviden Vds. de comprar te, cafe, y azucar, 4. 
 
 No preste Vd. dinero a ese hombre. 5. Comamos esta fruta. 
 
 * Optional always in Imperative, but better inserted. 
 
6. Mire Vd. esas tiendas. 7. No rompa Vd. ese vaso. 8. No* 
 hablemos a ese hombre. 9. La persona para qnien trabaja 
 esta aqui. 10. Los oficiales a quienes ha hallado Vd. abajo 
 estaran aqui manana. 11. El pan que Vd. comio es tan bueno 
 como este. 12. No ban recibido los peri6dicos que envie, lo 
 que es muy estrano. 13. Adivine Vd. cual de las mucbacbas 
 es la^nejor. 14. He ballado varies documentos importantes* 
 los cuales enviare a nuestro abogado. 15. No conteste Vd. a 
 esa pregunta. 16. <; Son ellos quienes estan trabajando ? 
 17. No sea Vd. tan descortes. 
 
 Key to Lesson XL 
 
 ' EXERCISE I. 1. Vd. tenia ; 2. <? noestaban fumando ?or 
 I no f umaban ? 3. no dividia ; 4. <J estaba comiendo ? or 
 comia ? &. era ; 6. no estabamos ; 7. <j no habian Vds. 
 tornado ? 8, <? no f umaba Vd. ? 9. no eramos ; 10. i habia 
 comido ? 1L estaba escucbando, or escuchaba ; 12. <j leia 
 Vd. ? 13. estabamos tobajando, or trabajabamos , 14. ^ no 
 estabatf llamando ? 15. Eran amigos mios. 16. No tenia 
 tiempo. 17. Habiamos olvidado su nombre. 
 
 EXERCISE II, J.^ recibirian ; 2. no hallaria ; 3- 
 <; creeria Vd. ? 4. tendriamos ; 5. no babria vendido ; 6. 
 i seria ? 7. Vd. no estaria ; 8. i no babrian bablado Vds. ? 9. 
 romperiamos ; 10. no escribiria ; 11. enviariamos ; 1^. 
 ',; aprenderia Vd. ? 
 
 EXERCISE III. -1. para ellaT 2. bacia nosotros ; 3. por 
 el ; 4. de Vd. ; 5. sin ellas ; 6. con Vds. ; 7. en el ; 8. a mi ; 
 9. a ella ; 10. de. ellos , 11. conmigo , 12. por nosotras 5 13. 
 sin el ; 14. contra Vd. ; 15. entre si , 16. para ellos ; 17. con 
 ella ; 18. para si. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Estabamos trabajando con 
 el. 2. Estudiariamos espanol. 3. La leche estaba en el jarro. 
 4, i Hablaria Vd. al comercfante ? 5. El papel no era bueno, 
 pro lag plumas eran muy Duenas. 6, Han estado siempre 
 
11 
 
 conmigo. 7. i Quxen era el capitan de este buque ? 8. <j No 
 teniamos siete sillas en este cuarto ? 9. <j No fu6 Vd. quien 
 ha traido este regalo para mi ? 10. Las cucharas no eran 
 nuestras. 11. Fueron estos soldados* quieues ganaron la 
 batalla. 12. No era temprano cuando llego ? 13. <j Compraria 
 Vd. estos cuchillos y tenedorss ? 14. No guardaria ese 
 vestido. 15. Hablaba siempre de si. 16. No viajabamos sin 
 el. 17. t A qu6 bora comia Vd. ? 18. Lleve Vd. a sus 
 ninos consigo. 
 
 Key to Lesson Xlf. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. La tenemos 2. Los ha tornado. 3. 
 <j Me comprende Vd. ? 4. Lo coniprare manana. 5, El 
 tendero no nos cree. 6. f e ha pagado Vd. la cuenta ? 
 7. Los hemos visto en la calle. 8. No los aguardaria. 9. Lo 
 habria Vd. vendido ? 10. Mi amigo las guardara. 11. Su tio 
 (de Vd.) nos habia olvidado. 12. Le hablare esta tarde. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. Me lo enviaban cada dia. 2. t Nos los 
 ha enviado ? 3. Le ha escrito a ella y a su madre. 4. Su 
 tia me ha hablado a mf, pero no a Vd. 5. <j Se lo leyo ayer ? 
 6. El banqnero se lo prestara a ellos r pero no a su abogado. 
 7 ^ Se lo ha explicado Vd. (a ellos) ? 8. No se lo he 
 explicado todavia, pero se lo explicare esta noche. 9. Les 
 vendemos a Vds., no a ellos. 10. Nos la vendera manana. 
 11. El dependiente no me las ha explicado. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. Leamelo Vd. 2. Leame Vd. la carta. 
 3. Leanos Vd. esa carta. 4. No nos las lea Vd. 5. Vendales 
 Vd. su reloj. 6. No le envie Vd. la carta. 7. C6mprenlo 
 Vds. 8. i Estaba hablandole (or Le estaba hablando) a Vd,* 
 6 a su padre ? 9. Presteselo Vd. 10. No le preste Vd. 
 dinero. 11. No es facil comprenderle. 12. Ensenenselo Vcb. 
 13. No se lo eneenen Vds. 14. Que me escuche. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Mirele Vd. a el, no a mi. 
 2* D6jerne Vd. tenerlo. 3. i For qu6 le ha vendido Vd. su 
 
15 
 
 sortija ? 4. No los olvidara. 5. <j Nos lo deben ? 6. Nole 
 escuche Vd. 7. No nos las ha traido. 8. Le prestaba 
 dinero a Vd., pero no a mi. 9. & Cuando lo compraran Vd& ? 
 10. <j Quien lo ha hecho ? 11. <j Cuanto dinero le debemos ? 
 
 12. Se los he prestado a ella, 13. Los tendra maiiana. 14. 
 Vendanselos Vds. 15. No me lo envie Vd. 16. Nos lo 
 debe ? 17. <; Guardemoslo. 18. Le espera Vd. hoy ? 
 
 Key to Lesson XIII. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. seguramente ; 2. baratamente ; 3 
 pesadamente ; 4. frianiente ; 5. habilmente ; 6. valiente- 
 mente ; 7. alegremente ; 8. doblemente ; 9. purainente. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. Copie Vd. cuidadosamente los nom- 
 bres. 2. Estan escuchando aiin ? 3. Ayer compre un reloj, 
 y maiiana lo vendere. 4. Este hombre no trabaja siempre, 
 bien. 5. Apenas habia acabado mi trabajo, cuando mis 
 amigos llegaron. 6. Bebemos siempre te y cafe. 7. Maiiana 
 recibh*emos ocho libras. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. No tendre ninguna dificultad. 2. Ni 
 mi esposo ni mi hi jo estan arriba. 3. El criado no ha traido 
 ni cafe ni -te. 4. Nadie esta abajo. 5. No encontre a nadie 
 en el jardin. 6. Ninguna casa seria bastante grande. 7. 
 Nada es mas seguro. 8. Este muchacho no comprende nada. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Tengo aqui un vestido azul. 
 2. Apenas aguardo un minuto. 3. Tal vez recibire manana 
 unos regalos. 4. Ese parroquiano ya ha comprado la lampara. 
 5. Les hablare de seguro esta noche. 6. <; No hallo Vd. aqui mi 
 paraguas ? 7. Nadie esta escuchando. 8. Rehuso firmemente 
 continuar. 9. A veces bebo cerveza, pero nunca bebo vino. 
 10. Deseo principalmente hablarle a el, no a su socio. 11. 
 Hablo clara y energicamente. 12. <; Espera Vd. hoy una carta ? 
 
 13. No es de ninguna conftecuencia. 14. No cfee nada. 15*. No 
 hallaron a nadie en casa. 16. Nunca he leidtf libro mejor 
 
 H.K.S.S.. 
 
m 
 
 Key to Lesson 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. treinticinco (or tremta y cinco) nifios ; 
 2. diecinueve dias; 3. seis semanas ; 4. doce meses*; 5. 
 gchentiocho aiios ; 6. un minuto ; 7. una semana ; 8. 
 noventisiete libras ; 9. veintitres chelines ; 10. dieciocho 
 peniques ; 11. cuarentidos duros ; 12. ciento siete libros ; 
 13. quinientos setentitres chelines ; 14. mil trescientas 
 cincuentiuna casas ; 15. cinco mil doce horas , 16 dieciseis 
 mil setecientas sesenticuatro millas ; 17. cien millones de 
 libras,; 18. cien escuelas ; 19. cinco millones doscientos 
 ochentiseis mil cuatrocientos quince habitantes. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. las once ; 2. las ocho menos vein- 
 ticinco ; 3. las diez y media ; 4. las once menos cuarto ; 5. la 
 una y cinco ; 6. las ocho menos diez ; 7. Son las nueve y 
 cuarto. 8. ^ Es la una ? 9. No son las doce todavia. 10. Son 
 las tres menos diecinueve. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. <? Que hora es? 2. No se 
 ,que hora es. 3. Son las doce y media. 4. El tren sale a las 
 ocho y veintitres. 5. Ha viajado doscientas ochentiuna 
 millas. 6. Tenemos en el banco mil novecientas cinouenti- 
 cuatro libras diecisiete chelines y seis peniques. 7. Este pais 
 tiene cien millones de habitantes. 8. Les he prestado mil 
 ! ochocientas cincuenta libras. 9. No hay cien buenos soldados 
 en el regimiento. 10. Estara aqui a la una menos diez. 11. 
 Son las doce menos cuarto. 12. Ese comerciante tiene 
 quinientas mil libras. 13. Catorce mil ochocientos cincuenta 
 goldados pelearon en esa batalla. 14. No son las tres y cuarto 
 todavia. 15. Han enviado noventidos paquetes ; no es 
 verdad ? 16. Cuantos dias hay en una semana ? 17. Hay 
 siete dias, ciento sesentiocho horas, 6 diez mil ochenta 
 minutos en una semana. 18. <j Cuales son los nombres de log 
 dias ? 19. Domingo, Lunes, Martes, Miercoles, Jueves, 
 Viernes, Sabado. 20. Hay doce meses, 6 trescientos 
 eesenticinco dias en un aiio. 21. Los meses son : Enero 
 Febrero, Marzo, Abril, Mayo, Junio, Julio, Agosto, Sep 
 tiembre, Octubre, Noviembre, Diciembre, 
 
n 
 
 Key to Lesson XV. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. los primeros habitantes ; 2. la octava 
 parte ; 3. el decimo error ; 4. la quinta tienda ; 5. las 
 segundas clases ; 6. la septima calle a la derecha ; 7. la 
 tercera ventana a la izquierda ; 8. el quince (15) de Octubre ; 
 9. el primero (1) de Mayo ; 10. el veinticinco (25) de Agosto; 
 11. Pio nono ; 12. Isabel segunda ; 13. Carlos doce; 14. 
 Paris, 18 de Junio 1907, or Junio 18 de 1907. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. No he hallado nada. 2. Un hombre 
 rico tiene siempre inuchos amigos. 3. Lo miraban cada diez 
 minutos. 4. <; Cuantas libras le debo a Vd. ? 5. No beba VcL 
 toda el agua. 6. <? Ha comprado Vd. hoy algunos libros ? 
 7. <j Hay alguien arriba ? 8. Se lo vendimos (a ellos) el 
 otro dia. 9. Vd. tiene demasiados perros. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. un mal viaje ; 2. un gran ruido ; 
 3. una chimenea grande ; 4. un gran favor ; 5. San Pablo ; 
 6. el tercer muchacho en la primera clase ; 7. Hay un poco 
 de cafe, pero no tengo ni azucar ni leche. 8. Nunca gasta 
 dinero aqui. 9. Tengo una mala pluma, pero buen papel. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Alejandro primero murio el 
 primero de Diciembre de 1825. 2. Cuanta tinta hay en los 
 tinteros ? 3. Este es' un buen muchacho, pero los otros no 
 han hecho ningun trabajo. 4. Es el primero de su clase, la 
 cual es muy grande. 5. Mis primas son casi siempre las 
 primeras en la lista, y mi hermana es la ultima. 6. <; Quien 
 fue el primer rey de Espaiia? 7. Copie Vd. cada cuarto 
 renglon. 8. <j Cuantas palabras han escrito Vds. ? 9. 
 Catalina segunda nacio el dos de Mayo de 1729, y murio el 
 diecisiete de Noviembre de 1796. 10. Esta es la primera vez 
 que he hallado a alguien en casa. 11. La segunda leccion es la 
 mas dificil. 12. Al contrario, cred que las primeras lecciones 
 son muy faciles, y que la octava es la mas dificil. 13. i No 
 cree Vd. que los ultimos capitulos de este libro son muy 
 divertidos ? 14. Fue una gran reina. 15. Este es el primer 
 
18 
 
 error que he hecho hoy. 16. He llenado este tintero, y ml 
 hermano ha llenado todos los otros. 17. <? Cuantos hermanos 
 tiene Vd. ? Tengo solamente uno. 
 
 Key to Lesson XVI, 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. Prestele Vd. algunas herramientas. 2. 
 Tenemos (un poco de) sal, pero no tenemos ni mostaza ni 
 pimienta. 3. <? No ha encontrado Vd. a nadie ? 4. Ha traido 
 el mozo pan y queso ? 5. Mi esposa (or seiiora) ha com- 
 prado algunos muebles. 6. <; No ha visto Vd. hoy unas 
 nmestras ? 7. Este discipulo no tiene tinta. 8. Esa criada 
 ha roto algunos platos, pero no ha roto ningun vaso. 9. Me 
 ha dado algunos regalos para mi hija. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. me Iavar6 ; 2. no nos estamos lavando ; 
 3. 1 no se han lavado ? 4. Vd. se cansara ; 5. se f elicitarfa ; 
 6. no Be cansen Vds. ; 7. se ha lastimado ? 8. <; no se han 
 lastimado Vds. ? 9. se f elicitan ; 10. lavense Vds. ; 11. los 
 obreros se cansaban ; 12. nos f elicitaremos. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. no se queje Vd. ; 2. mi amigo se ha 
 equivocado ; 3. <j por que se mete Vd. ? 4. me metere ; 5. no 
 se metian ; 6. <? se ha escapado el hombre ? 7. ] levantese Vd. 
 inmediatamente ! 8. me estoy cansando ; 9. <: no se ha 
 apeado todavia ? 10. nos levantariamos ; 11. alegremonos ; 
 12. apeese (or bajese) Vd. aqui ; 13. se han casado. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Ese dependiente es muy 
 descuidado, pero cree que nunca se equivoca. 2. Se apearon 
 a la puerta de la iglesia. 3. No me que jo de esto, sino 
 de eso. 4. Por que no se lava ese muchacho ? 5. 
 No me he equivocado esta vez. 6. Nos levantamos cada dia 
 (BETTER, todos los dias) a las seis y media. 7. No nos 
 meteremos en eso. 8. Los ninos se han comportado muy 
 bien. 9. Su amigo de Vd. se felicito demasiado pronto. 
 10. No se cansen Vds. 11. No deseamos cansarnos. 12. 
 Ape&nonos en esta estacion. 13. Me veudieron (a mi) un poco 
 
'tto buen tabaoo, y a el algunos cigarroi muy buenos. 14. 
 Eete es un buen discipulo ; raramente se equivoca. 15. ^ A 
 que bora se levantan ? 16. Nos apearemos a la puerta del 
 hotel. 17. Se levanta siempre demasiado tarde. 18. No se 
 meta Vd. en estos asuntos. 19. <? Cuando se casaran ? 20. Ya 
 &e ban casado. 21. i For que no se levanta Vd. ? 
 
 Key to Lesson XVII. 
 EXERCISE I,- 1. no son creidos ; 2. <; no es Vd. temida ? 
 
 3. fuimos llamados ; 4. <; es araada ? 5. los vasos seran rotos ; 
 6. la ventana f ue rota por el criado ; 7. la reina es amada ; 
 8. i no oy creido ? 9. no son amados. 
 
 EXERCISE II. -1. Se Gambia dinero extranjero en esa 
 tienda. 2. <; Se prestan estos libros para leer ? 3. Se cree 
 que la reina esta muy enferma. 4. Se venden estas naranjas 
 a seis peniques la docena. 5. Esos amos son respetados de 
 sus criados. 6. Aqui se vende leche. 7. Aqui se venden 
 cigarros. 8. La caja fue hecha por este carpintero. 9. Se 
 teme que el accidente sera grave. 10. Se presta dinero. 
 
 11. Las cartas seran, escritas por el dependiente. 12. Se 
 espera que llegara manana. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. creyeron; 2. paguemos; 3. no lo 
 recojamos ; 4. alcance ; 5. toquemos ; 6. que lo recoja ; 7. 
 I venzo ? 8. leyo ; 9. no lei ; 10. goce ; 11. toquelos Vd. ; 
 
 12. no los toquen Vds. ; 13. no llegue Vd. demasiado tarde ; 
 14. p&gueme Vd. ; 15. que pague ; 16. toque ; 17. Venzamos 
 esta dificultad. 18. Recoja Vd. esa manzana, 19. Busquemos 
 un coche. 20. Dirija Vd. las cartas. 21. No toque Vd. esos 
 libros. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 1. Aqui se vendon periodicos. 
 2. Pague Vd. al carpintero. 3. Esta ventana no f u6 rota ayer.* 
 
 4. Llegue el diez de Diciembre. 5. Luego que le alcanc6, le 
 
 * =nobody broke it yesterday. Esta ventana no estaba rota, 
 etc.*s the window was not broken (when I saw it), 
 
20 
 
 r fiable. '6. Recoja Vd. esa piedra ; deseo examinarla. 7. Ore-' 
 yeron que me habia equivocado. 8. Sin duda los paquetes 
 seran hallados por el muchacho. 9. El parte fue enviado a los 
 capitanes. 10. Cojamos esta barandilla ; la escalera no esta 
 muy segura. 11. No toquemos los papeles, porque los 
 desarreglaremos. 12. Se dirijio a su amigo, pero no recibio 
 ninguna contestacion. 13. Se cree que ha naufragado un 
 buque. 14. Una buena madre es amada de sus hijos. 
 15. Fueron heridos por los soldados. 16. Se duda si tendra 
 bastante paciencia. 17. Avance cuidadosamente hacia la 
 cabeza del caballo. 18. Se creia que el parte habia llegado. 
 19. No se reciben equipajes aqui. 
 
 Key to Lesson XVIII. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. cerremos ; 2. no cierre Vd. ; 3. cuesta ; 
 4. costaran ; 5. no muevo ; 6. << movemos ? 7. pierden ; 8. no 
 perdemos ; 9. llueve ; 10. <j no esta lloviendo ? 11. volvere ; 
 12. <j no contaba Vd. ? 13. <j muestra el nino ? 14. no nos 
 muestre Vd. ; 15. pensariamos ; 16. piensa Vd. ? 17. no 
 lo niego ; 18. muestreme Vd. ; 19. sentemonos ; 20. <j Por 
 que no se sienta Vd. ? 21. <? Cree Vd. que helara manana ? 
 22. Volvamos a casa ; pronto llovera. 23. Si le encuentro, le 
 ^ablare. 24. Volverian a las nueve y media. 25. Ahora no 
 truena. 26. <j Por que no vuelve su criado ? 27. Si lo niegan, 
 no les creere. 28. <j No ha encendido el fuego todavia ?' 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. en trabajar; 2. despues de haber 
 aguardado ; 3. plata u oro ; 4. hijos e hijas ; 5. hijos 6 hijas ; 
 6. antes de salir ; 7. sin beber ; 8. antes de prestarlo ; 
 9. herinanos y hermanas ; 10. despues de haberme mostrado 
 su musica e instrumentos ; 11. en mostrarselos ; 12. diez u 
 once chelines ; 13. Cambie Vd. esta taza por la otra. 14. No 
 es culpa mia, sino de el. 15. El buque no ha llegado hoy, 
 pero tal vez llegara manana. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Su amo no aprueba su 
 conducta. 2. Antes de recomendar e\ libro, lo examinare. 
 
21 
 
 3. Lo compraron sin examinario. 4. Grei que lloverfa. 5. 
 Despues de haberme sentado, conte los hechos e incidentes 
 de mi viaje. 6. <; Es su cuarto de Vd. claro u obscure ? 7. No 
 me mostro a mi su billete, sino a Vd. 8. < Niega Vd. que los 
 descubrimientos e invenciones de este siglo han sido muy 
 \itiles ? 9. Empecemos ahora. 10. No empiece Vd. todavia ; 
 no estoy listo. 11. No encienda Vd. el fuego en mi cuarto, 
 pero cierre las ventanas. 12. Si vuelvo a tiempo, explicare 
 todas mis opiniones e ideas. 13. Muestreme Vd. lo que tiene 
 en la mano. 14. Tengo siete u ocho chelines en mi bolsillo. 
 15. Me vendio su sortija por sesenta duros. 16. Volvio la 
 semana pasada. 17. No vuelva Vd. sin hablarle. 18. Calientese 
 Vd. antes de salir. 19. <? Cuanto recibio Vd. por su reloj ? 
 20. Despues de haber hecho su trabajo, volveran. 21. Nos 
 recomendo una gramatica, pero hemos oMdado el titulo. 22. 
 Mi almuerzo me cuesta aproximadamente dos chelines cada 
 dia. 23. El mio me cuesta mas. 
 
 Key to Lesson XIX, 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. di ; 2. no dare ; 3. i sabe Vd. ? 4. no 
 fue ; 5. sabran ? 6. no doy ; 7. supieron ; 8. vamos ; 9. no 
 ee ; 10. yendo ; 11. voy ; 12. Vd. no daba ; 13. <; sabian ? 14. 
 i vayase Vd. ! 15. <j se va Vd. ? 16. no damos ; 17. no den 
 Vds. ; 18. ] sepa Vd. ! 19. \ vayanse Vds. ! 20. Demosle esta 
 gramatica. 21. El profesor esta dando una leccion. 22. 
 Vayan Vds. a su casa pasado manana. 23. Denoslo Vd. 
 pronto. 24. Se lo dimos a Vd. la semana pasada. 25. ,; No 
 ira su primo de Vd. esta noche ? 26. <j Lo sabe Vd. ? 
 27. No se quien ha ido a comprarlos. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. veamos ; 2. dijeron ; 3. no veo ; 4. no 
 diremos ? 5. dicen ; 6. veia ; 7. no vemos ; 8. <; que esta 
 diciendo ? 9. Vd. vio ; 10. hemos dicho ; 11. no diga Vd- 
 12. viendo ; 13. i dijimos ? 14. no vea Vd. ; ^ 15. no digo ; 
 16. Vaya a ver quien esta en el jardin. 17. Digame si esta 
 Vd. cansada. 18. No me ha dicho nada. 
 
22 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 1. El capitan no dio nada 
 a los marineros. 2. Me dijeron que su dependiente no tenia 
 ninguna experieixeia. 3. Digamosles lo que pensamos. 4. 
 No se si van todos los dias (better than cada dia) por ferro- 
 carril. 5. Cuando voy al campo, los veo. 6. Veamos quien 
 ha ido a casa. 7. No comprende lo que estan diciendo. 8. 
 Voy a explicarselo. 9. Vamos a ver a nuestro tio. 10. Vaya 
 Vd. a ver quien esta a la puerta. 11. Sabia varios idiomas, 
 pero los ha olvidado. 12. Digame Vd. cuando volvera. 
 13. i Por que no nos dicen la verdad ? 14. Vaya Vd. a casa ; 
 eu padre desea verle. 15. Si veo al hombre, le dire lo que Vd. 
 desea. 16. Fuiuios a Londres el aiio pasado. 17. Iban 
 amenudo al teatro. 18. Nunca vemos a nuestros amigos 
 hasta la noche. 19. i Por que no le da Vd. una silla ? 20. 
 I Quien le ha dicho eso ? 21. Le digo que es verdad. 
 22. Cuando le vi, iba a casa. . 23. Lo sabre pronto. 24.. Nunca 
 se lo doy. 25. Ire manana a la estacion, 26. No se lo d6 Vd. 
 a el, sino a mi. 
 
 Key to Lesson XX. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. pondria ; 2. no hago ; 3. hagamos ; 4. no 
 pongan Vds. ; 5. <j valgo ? 6. no valen ; 7. Vd. ha puesto ; 
 8. haremos ; 9. <j valdra ? 10. poniendo ; 11. no hicieron ; 
 12. hacemos ; 13. puso Vd. ? 14. no pongo ; 15. valgamos : 
 16. i no valdria ? 17. <; Donde los pondremos ? 18. No lo 
 haga Vd. todavia. 19. Pongalos Vd. en el rincon. 20. <; Pone 
 aqui sus cartas ? 21. No los hacia. 22. < Que ha hecho Vd. 
 esta manana ? 23. No estoy haciendo nada. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. hace veinte anos ; 2. valdria mas; 
 3. no hay mnguna dificultad ; 4. alii esta su sombrero ; 
 5. <; hacia calor ? 6. No habia ninguna silla ; 7. <j habia un 
 tren ? 8. < no valdra ? 9. hace una hora ; 10. alii estan 
 nuestros primos ; 11. ^ no es seguro ? 12. <* hari, viento ? 13. 
 no habrd bastante pan ; 14. no hace calor hoy ; 15. no habia 
 ningun error ; 16. <: hace f rio ? 17. <j no valia mas ? 18. <i hay 
 
28 
 
 agua ? 19. alii esta la estacioiy, 20. hace ecis mtses ; 21. 
 Necesitaba dinero, pero no lo tenia. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. son muy estimados ; 2. <? esta Vd. 
 fatigada ? no mucho ; 3. un mal muchacho ; 4. un mu- 
 chacho muy malo ; 5. hace tanto viento como ayer ? 6. no 
 estoy tan satisfecho como Vd. ; 7. un pintor muy celebre ; 
 8. Kara mucho frio. 9. Nc^hacia mucho calor ? 10. No fue 
 muy aplaudido. 11. i Es muy amada la reina ? 12. No tengo 
 tanto dinero. 13. Fue tan odiado como su padre. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE. 1. Haga(me) Vd. el favor de 
 esperar un poco. 2. <? Vale este cuadro tanto como el otro ? 
 3. Habia varios niiios que estaban haciendo ruido. 4. Ponga 
 Vd. vino sobre la mesa. 5. Espero que no hara taiito viento. 
 6. Lo hare manana, si tengo tiempo. 7. Estos hermosos 
 muebles se hicieron cien anos ha. 8. Pondra .flores en la 
 ventana. 9. El rey no es tan estimado como la reina. 10. 
 Creo que manana hara mucho calor. 11. Los puse en la caja 
 hace una semana. 12. No hay sitio para poner nuestros 
 sombreros. 13. <; Lo ha puesto Vd. aqui ? 14. Alii esta el 
 foaston ; deselo Vd. 15. No habra bastante tiempo para 
 hacerlo. 16. Nunca lo hago. 17, Habia un cuadro que fue 
 muy admirado. 18. Esos son los cuadros que fueron tan 
 admirados. 19* Los viajeros estaban cansados 2 pero no 
 mucho. 20. No he puesto nada en las cajas. 21. <j Que esta 
 poniendo dentro del cajon ? 22. <? for que no hace su 
 trabajo ? 23. Lapongo 
 
 Key to Lesson XXI. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. queriendo ; 2. no quiero ; 3. ,; pudo-? 
 4. no querremos ; 5. <; puede ? 6. <; no querran ? 7. <? quiso 
 Vd. ? 8. pudimos ; 9. podriamos ; 10. pudiendo ; 11. <; no 
 quieren Vds. ? 12. podia ; 13. no queremos ; 14. no podra ; 
 15. i querria ? 16. ^ podemos ? 17. Vd. no puede ; 18. 
 querian ; 19. i quiere Vd. ? 20^- no podria ? 21. no podemog ; 
 
24 
 
 22. Vd. no puede dudarlo. 23. No pude llegar a (or en) 
 tiempo. 24. No sabia hablar espanol. 25. No sabe leer el 
 nino ? 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. Los hemos convidado a comer con 
 nosotros. 2. Empezo a Hover. 3. No puedo contegtar. 4. 
 I Quiere Vd. darme su tar j eta ? 5. Le escribi ayer, para 
 decirle .que Vd. habia llegado. 6. Fuimos a ver a su tio (de 
 Vd.) ayer. 7. Parece ser imposible. 8. No intento mirarlos. 
 9. Ha traido la carta a casa para leerla. 10. Ensenaba a nadar 
 a mis niiios. 11. Hagame Vd. el favor de darme un vaso de 
 agua. 12. Cesen Vds. de hablar. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. Debemos ir a casa. 2. Vd. no .debiera 
 hacer eso. 3. Vd. tendra que aguardar hasta la tarde. 4. 
 I Cuanto trabajo tiene Vd. que hacer (or ha de hacer Vd.) ? 
 
 5. Tenian (or Tuvieron) que salir sin comprar sus > billetes. 
 
 6. <; Debe Vd. copiarlo ? 7. Tiene varias cosas que hacer. 
 8. No tendriamos que pagar tanto dinero como Vd. 9. No 
 debieran f umar tanto. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.!. Los soldados debieran obe- 
 decer al oficial, pero no lo hacen siempre. '2. <j Por que no 
 quiere Vd. mostrarmeel cuadro ? 3. No quiero ponerloaqui. 
 4. Quiere Vd. decirle su nombre ? 5. No puedo prestarle 
 este libro ; no es mio. 6. No tenia nada que hacer. 7. Debo 
 enseiiarle a hablar mas correctamente. 8. Pudimos 
 acabarlo ayer. 9. Podriamos acabarlo manana. 10. No han 
 podido hallarlos todavia. 11. Lo hemos dicho para per- 
 suadirle. 12. Quisieron aprender a hablar espanol. 13. 
 Corra Vd. a ver quien esta a la puerta. 14. No podiarnos (or 
 pudimos) aguardar para verle ; teniamos que irnos. 15. 
 Queria guardar todo el dinero para. si. 16. No querra volver 
 sin recibir una respuesta. 17. Vd. debiera darme mas tiempo. 
 18. & Pudo el abogado comprender ? 19. Esperamos recibir 
 una respuesta manana. 20. Me escribio para decir(me) que se 
 habia. equivocado. 21. Podria Vd. enviarnos los generos 
 hoy ? 22. Debemos preguntar ahora 'a nuestro amo. 23. 
 
25 
 
 Toy a darselos, para demostrarle que no estoy ofendido. 24. 
 Vd. no debe cantar tan alto^ 25. <: No sabe hablar aleman 
 su amigo (de Vd.) ? 26. ,; No deberia Vd. convidarlos a 
 comer ? 27. Cuando sabre dibujar tan bien como Vd. ? 
 28. No se tocar el piano. 
 
 Key to Lesson XXII. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. oigo ; 2. no venga Vd. ; 3. i anduvieron ? 
 4. Vd. no saldra ; 5. vendran ; 6. vine ; 7. andabamos ; 
 8. salido ; 9. viniendo ; 10. i oimos ? 11. no salgamos ; 
 
 12. andando ; 13: no vengo ; 14. <; vienen Vds. ? 15. no 
 oyeron ; 16. Vd. oira ; 17. oyendo ; 18. veniamos ; 19. 
 oigamos ; 20. % no sale ? 21. venimos ? 22. vendria ; 23. no 
 salgan Vds. ahora. 24. He venido a verle (a Vd.). 25. Me ha 
 oido hablar. 26. Anduvo muy deprisa. 27. Salgo a ver la 
 ciudad. 28. Vendremos la semana que viene. 29. Me oyo 
 perf ectamente, porque hable despacio. 30. Vengo a explicar- 
 selo a Vd. 31. Trate Vd. de oir lo que se dice. 32. ^No se 
 oye amenudo el ruido desde aqui. 
 
 EXERCISE IT. 1. jugamos ; 2. <; no juega Vd. ? 3. es- 
 cribia; 4. ^ han abierto ? 5. no traemos ; 6. no traigan Vds. ; 
 7. cabe ; 8. no cabian (or cupieron) ; 9. no hemos impreso ; 
 10. no caiga Vd. 11. Vd. no ha traido ; 12. esta cubierto ; 
 
 13. no ha vuelto todavia ? 14. imprimamoslo ; 15. no los 
 abro ; 16. no cabra ; 17. he traido ; 18. no traigo ; 19. Vd. 
 caera ; 20. no juegue Vd. ; 21. cubralos Vd. ; 22. caigo ; 23. 
 Todo el dinero cabe en esta caja. 24. Traigamelo Vd. ahora. 
 25. Espero que caeran. 26. <; Quiere Vd. abrir la ventana ? 
 Ya esta abierta. 27. No quepo en este -coche. 28. Aqui se 
 imprimen toda clase de libros extranjeros. 29. Traiganos 
 Vd. la contestaci6n lo antes posfble. 30. <; For que no se 
 cubre Vd. ? 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. segurisimamente ; 2. felicisimo ; 
 3. felicisimamente ; 4. rarisimos ; 5. bonisimas ; 6. muy 
 honorables ; 7. con muchisimo gusto ; 8. Mis perros son 
 
26 
 
 fidelisimos. 9. Estos nines son bonisimos. 10. Su contestaci6n 
 es utilisima. 11. Es un trabajo facilisimo. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE.--!. Traigamelos Vd. lo antes 
 posible. 2. Nunca viene muy temprano. 3. Debieramos 
 darselo. 4. Vd. debiera esperar un poco. 5. No volvera 
 antes de las seis. 6. Volvieron el mes pasado. 7. Volveremos 
 manana por la mafiana. 8. Tendremos que abrir todas las 
 ventanas enseguida 9. Abra Vd. los cajones. 10. Las cosas 
 cabran en esta caja. 11. Espero que volveran pronto. 12. 
 Debera (or Tendra que) traermelo manana por la manana. 
 J.3. A que hora volverd el coche ? 14. Tengo que salir a 
 comprar varias cosas. 15. Por que anda Vd. tan despacio ? 
 16. Espero que vendran a vernos la semana que viene. 17. Es 
 casi imposible oic el ruido. 18. Los ninos estan jugando 
 ati&jo. 19. El tren sale siempre a las ocho y media. 20. 
 Nunca los trae bastante temprano. 
 
 Key to Lesson XXIII. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. Vd. pidio ; 2. no repetimos ; 3. <j reira ? 
 4. no elijan Vds. ; 5. sonriendo ; 6. Vd. reia ; 7. no rige 
 Vd. ? 8. seguimos ; 9. No se sabe si puede impedirlo. 10. 
 I Por que esta Vd. riendo ? 11. No ria Vd. 12. Siganos Vd. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. <; consintio ? 2. no sugeri ; 3. i que 
 sugirio Vd. ? 4. no herimos ; 5. consentiran ta'mbien ; 6. No lo 
 difiera Vd. ; 7. Cual de los dos prefiere Vd. ? 8. No mentia ? 
 
 9. Ahora se arrepiente (or se esta arrepintiendo). 10. No 
 sintio Vd. el golpe ? 11. Arrepintamonos. 12. Lo sentimos 
 mucho. 13. Siento much$ molestarle. 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. contradecira ; 2. no se duerma Vd. ; 
 3. dormimos ; 4. murieron ; 5. no convinieron ; 6. mu- 
 riendo ; 1, dormi ; 8. Vd. moriria ; 9. i no dormian Vds. ? 
 
 10. i habia supuesto ? 11. no contrahagamos ; 12. Muri6 algo 
 joven, 13. ,; Duerme Vd. alguna vez por la tarde ? 14. <J No 
 estan durmiendo los ninos ? 15. Supongo que si. 
 
27 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 1. compra ; 2.temed; 3. hallas ; 4. 
 
 I debeis ? 5. no temes ; 6. enviabais ; 7. romperas ; 8. no 
 harias ; 9. habeis venido ; 10. 1 estas lista ? 11. ,; no has puesto ? 
 12. i que tienes ? 13.- fuisteis ; 14. escribid ; 15. <; estais 
 escuchando ? 16. <; quereis venir ? 17. no tendreis ; 18. no 
 tuviste ; 19 <; habiais esperado ? 20. muestramelo ; 21. 
 hacedlo ; 22. <; no eres ingles ?^ 23. no sois obreros.i 
 
 EXERCISE V. 1. tomad; 2.-notomeis; 3. escribe-; 4. no 
 escribas ; 5. vete ; 6. idos ; v 7. hablame ; 8. no nos babies ; 
 9. no te canses ; 10. no os canseis ; 11. aprended; 12.no 
 aprenduis. 13. Compra este reloj. 14. No veridas este reloj. 
 15. Prestadme vuestro paraguas. 16. No leas la carta. 17. Leela. 
 
 COLLECTIVE EXERCISE,!. Me pidio cinco chelines. 2. 
 Se los dare esta tarde. 3. Muestreme lo que Vd. h$i elegido. 
 4. Sirvase Vd. tomar asiento. 5. Cuando llegue, los ninos 
 estaban durmiendo (or dormidos). 6. Le pedire algo. 7. 
 Repitalo Vd. 8. <j Qliiere Vd. seguirme ? 9. Nunca nos 
 corrige, cuando nos equivocamos. 10. Sirvanse Vds. esperar un 
 poco. 11. Uno de los dos ha mentido, pero no se cual. 12. 
 Lo encuentro dificilisimo. 13. Siente mucho que no podra 
 venir esta noche. 14. <; Cuando murio ? 15. Sirvase (Vd.) 
 decirme la hora exacta. 16. No puedo decirselo (or decir- 
 sela) ; mi reloj no anda. 17. Siento mucho ese accidente. 
 18. No haga (Vd.) ningiin ruido ; ainbos estan dormidos 
 (or durmiendo). 19. Supongo quellegaran pronto. 20. Repita 
 io que Vd. ha dicho. 21. Consintio enseguida. 22, Se rieron 
 cuando les dijimos eso. 23. Nos impidio de verlo. 
 
 Key to Lesson XXIV. 
 
 EXERCISE I.-l. 4 crezco; 2. no crece? 3. no lucio ; 
 4. i cnecen ? 5. no conozco ; 6. no reconozca Vd. ; 7. 
 nacieron ; 8. produjimos ; 9. traduzcamos ; 10. < no cuezo ? 
 11. i luzca Vd. ! 12. dedujeron ; 13. <; cocia Vd. ? 14. ; Cuando 
 cio Vd. ? 15." /; Parezco estar cansado ? 16: Tra^uciran ertft 
 
28 
 
 en media hora. 17. No conozco el precio, 18. <* Conoce 
 Vd. a este seiior ? 19. No le reconozco. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. ; distribuye Vd. ? 2. huyeron ; 3. 
 siguiendo ; 4. no atribuyo ; 5. sigo ; 6. no seguimos ; % 7. Vd. 
 destruira ; 8. no distinguirian Vds. ? 9. arguyo ; 10. Vd. no 
 distribuia ; 11. Sirvase Vd. seguirlos (or seguirlas). 12. No 
 destruya Vd. estos documentor 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. PRES. SUBJ. tenga, tengas, tenga ; 
 tengamos, tengais, tengan. IMPF. SUBJ. tuviese, tuvieses, 
 tuviese; tuviesemos, tuvieseis, tuviesen. FUT. SUBJ. 
 tuviere, tuvieres, tuviere ; tuvieremos, tuviereis, tuvieren. 
 CoND. SUBJ. tuviera, tuvieras, tuviera ; tuvieramos, 
 tuvierais, tuvieran. 
 
 2. PRES. haya, hayas, haya ; hayamos, hayais, hayan. 
 IMPF. hubiese, hubieses, hubiese ; hubiesemos, hubieseis, 
 hubiesen. FUT. hubiere, hubieres, hubiere ; hubieremos, 
 hubiereis, hubieren. COND. hubiera, hubieras, hubiera ; 
 hubieramos, hubierais, hubieran. 
 
 3. PRES. sea, seas, sea ; seamos, seals, sean. IMPF. f uese, 
 f ueses, f uese ; fuesemos, f ueseis, fuesen. FUT. f uere, f ueres, 
 f uere ; f ueremos, f uereis, f ueren. COND. f uera, f ueras, 
 fuera ; f ueramos, f uerais, f ueran. 
 
 4. PRES. este, estes, este ; estemos, esteis, esten. IMPF.: 
 estuviese, estuvieses, estuviese ; estuviesemos, estuvieseis, es- 
 tuviesen. FUT. estuviere, estuvieres, estuviere ; estuvieremos, 
 estuviereis, estuvieren. COND. estuviera, estuvieras, es- 
 tuviera ; estuvieramos, estuvierais, estuvieran. 
 
 5. PRES. tome, tomes, tome ; tomemos, tomeis, tomen. 
 IMPF. tomase, tomases, tomase ; tomasemos, tomaseis, 
 tomasen. FUT, tomare, tomares, tomare; tomaremos, 
 tomareis, tomaren. COND. tomara, tomaras, tomara ; toma- 
 ramos, tomarais, tomarao. 
 
29 
 
 6. PRES. beba, bebas, beba bebamos, bebais, beban- 
 IMPF. bebiese, bebieses, bebiese ; bebiesemos, bebieseie, 
 bebiesen. FUT. bebiere, bebieres, bebiere ; bebieremoe, 
 bebiereis, bebieren. COND. bebiera, bebieras, bebiera ; 
 bebieramos, bebierais, bebieran. 
 
 7. PRES. -de, des, de ; demos, dels, den. iMPP. diese, 
 dieses, diese ; diesemos, dieseis, diesen. FUT. diere, dieres, 
 diere ; dieremos, diereis, dieren. COND. diera, dieras, diera ; 
 dieramos, dierais, dieran. 
 
 PRESENT. IMPERFECT. FUTURE. CONDIT. 
 
 8. escriba, etc. escribiese, etc. escribiere, etc. escribiera, etc. 
 
 9* vea, etc. viese, etc. viere, etc. viera, etc. 
 
 10,. venga, etc. viniese, etc. viniere, etc. viniera, etc. 
 
 11. pueda, etc, pudiese, etc. pudiere, etc. pudiera, etc. 
 
 12. vaya, etc. f uese, etc. fuere, etc. fuera, etc. 
 
 13. diga, etc. dijese, etc. dijere, etc. dijera, etc. 
 
 14. muera, etc. muriese, etc. muriere, etc. muriera, etc. 
 
 Key to Lesson XXV. 
 
 EXERCISE L 1. <j Desea que (ella) lo lea? 2. Desean 
 que Vd. acepte esto. 3. No desearan que lo ^guardemos. 4. 
 Desea que nos quedemos alii. 5. No deseamos que nos oigan. 
 6. Desea Vd. que cierre la puerta ? 7. <; Que desea (el) que 
 haga ? 8. Desean que paguemos la cuenta enseguida. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. No es necesario que nos pague mucho. 
 2. Es necesario que saiga al instante. 3. Es posible que el 
 dinero sea suyo. 4. entimos que no nos haya hallado. 5. 
 Teme que venga. 6. <; Es necesario que les escribamos ? 7. 
 ^ Quiere" 'Vd. que abra las ventanas ? 8. i Quiere (el) que 
 lo pongamos aqui ? 
 
 EXERCISE III. 1. despuesque venga a vernos ; 2. para 
 que no cueste demasiado; 3. antes que hagan el trabajo. 
 4. Cuando reciba su contestacion, se la en^enare (or mostrare). 
 
80 
 
 5. Le esperare (a Vd.),amen6cJ que llueva. 6. Cuando llegue, 
 le hablare. 7. Les enviaremos los generos cuando tengamos 
 tiempo. 8. Aviseme cuando este Vd. desocupado. 9. Espere 
 Vd. hasta que esten listos. 10. Les pagaremos antes que lo 
 hayan terminado (or antes que lo terminen). 11. Pagaran su 
 cuenta cuando tengan mas dinero. 12. Cuando viene a verme, 
 nunca permanece (or se queda) mucho tiempo. 13. Cuando 
 vuelvan, se lo explicare. 14. Siempre me habla cuando me ve. 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 1. No creo que desee salir. 2. No dijo' 
 si podi'ia hacerlo. 3. No creenaos que reciba ningiin premio. 
 4. i No es probable que puedan verlo ? 5. No espera Vd. que 
 su primo venga pasado manana ? 6. No esperamos que lo 
 traigan. 7. No es necesario que copiemos las direcciones que 
 nos did. 
 
 Key to Lesson XXVL 
 
 EXERCISE I. 1. No crei que hubiese venido. 2. De- 
 seariamos que no hubiesen empezado (or comenzado). 3. 
 Desearia que no estuviese aqui. 4. <j Deseaba (el) que lo hi- 
 ciese ? 5. No fue necesario que hablasen. 6. Hubiera negado 
 que su hermano estuviese alii. 7. Quisiera tener mas dinero. 
 
 EXERCISE II. 1. Le ayudaria, si estuviese menos 
 ocupado. 2. Lo copiaria, si tuviese mas tiempo. 3. Les 
 pagariamos enseguida, si tuviesemos bastante dinero. 4. Si 
 estuviese aqui, se los daria. 5. Trabajaria mejor, si tuviese 
 mejores herramientas. 6. Pregiinteles Vd. si estaran en la 
 estacion esta noche. 7. <* Sabe Vd. si vive en Madrid ahora ? 
 
HOME USE 
 
 CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
 MAIN LIBRARY 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below. 
 1 -month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405. 
 6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books 
 
 to Circulation Desk. 
 Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior 
 
 to due date. 
 
 ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS 
 AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT. 
 
 REG. Cut, 
 
 '75 
 
 AIITfl DISC SFP 1 1 '0(1 
 
 LD2 1 A-40m-8,' 75 
 (S7737L) 
 
 General Library 
 
 University of California 
 
 Berkeley 
 
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES 
 
 ' '! Mill IK 
 
 COD3323037